University Center Renovation Student Success...

Project Manual

Volume 2 of 2

NS-51-12.

University Center RenovationStudent Success CenterNorthern Kentucky University University CenterNunn DriveHighland Heights, KY 41099

Issued May 24, 2012

Northern Kentucky UniversityJeff StrunkDirector, ProcurementLucas Administrative Center, Suite 6171 Nunn DriveHighland Heights, KY 41099

ARCHITECTMSA Architects316 West Fourth StCincinnati, OH 45202

Northern Kentucky Student Success Center – Selective Renovation Bid Package #2

MSA# 11172.00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 1

SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of all Division-21 sections.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The base bid shall include furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment and installation of all work required to install complete fire protection systems as outlined in Division-21.

B. Unless specifically described otherwise, the contractor responsible for installing the work inside the building shall extend all fire suppression utilities from a point 5’-0” outside the building.

C. Examine the drawings, specifications, and visit the site prior to submitting a bid.

D. This Section includes the following:

1. Manufacturers 2. Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling 3. Substitutions and Equipment Selection 4. Valve Tags 5. Firestopping and Smokestopping 6. Joining materials. 7. Dielectric fittings. 8. Mechanical sleeve seals. 9. Sleeves. 10. Escutcheons. 11. Fastener systems. 12. Mechanical demolition. 13. Piping Systems – Common requirements. 14. Cleaning Premises 15. Painting, Marking, and Nameplate Data

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Refer to Division 1 for general requirements concerning submittals.

B. Unless otherwise specified and in addition to provisions of the General Conditions, submit drawings having each sheet, and each page of a brochure, marked with identification and containing information described below. Submittals are to be complete, partial submittals will not be accepted.

C. Identification:

1. Include project name and Architect’s job number. If pages are securely bound in brochure, this is needed on cover only.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Identification by specification section and article under which equipment or material is described, and by name, number and intended use as designated by contract drawings and specifications.

3. When more than one (1) item of equipment is covered by a single drawing or catalog cut, each project equipment item must be separately identified thereon with clear delineation as to which model or catalog number or performance data applied to each project item.

D. Information:

1. Include manufacturer’s model number or catalog number, size and other data as requested. 2. Maintenance Manuals: Organize each maintenance manual with index and thumb-tab marker for

each section of information; bind in 2” 3-ring, vinyl-covered binder, with pockets for folded sheets, properly labeled on spine and face of binder.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Record Drawings

1. Provide one set of As-Built Drawings and one copy of complete Electronic Drawing Files to the Owner at the date of final acceptance. Provide one set of As-Built Drawings to engineer at the date of final acceptance.

1.4 ELECTRONIC FILES

A. Drawings for this project were prepared using Revit software. Electronic files are available upon request for use by the successful contractor(s) for planning, coordination and installation.

B. There will be a charge of $100 per division group for projects prepared using Revit that must be converted to AutoCAD or Navisworks format. Divisions 21 and 22 are one group, Division 23 is a second group and Divisions 26, 27 and 28 are a third group. Revit model files will not be available.

C. The Request Drawings form can be accessed, filled out and submitted at the following internet address (scroll down to bottom of home page): http://www.klhengrs.com.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Refer to Division 1 Sections for general administrative/procedural requirements related to compliance with codes and standards.

B. Application: It is a general requirement that mechanical work comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of standards published by listed agencies and trade associations, except to extent more detailed and stringent requirements are indicated or required by governing regulations.

C. Listing of Associations, Standards and Abbreviations Specific to Mechanical Work (in addition to standards specified in individual work sections), conform to following applicable standards:

1. AWS - American Welding Society, Inc. 2. AWWA - American Water Works Association, Inc. 3. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency 4. FM - Factory Mutual System 5. NIST - National Institute for Standards and Technology 6. NEC - National Electrical Code by NFPA

http://www.klhengrs.com/


MSA# 11172.00


7. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association 8. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) 9. UL - Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.

D. SUPERVISION AND WORKMANSHIP

1. Workmanship throughout shall conform to the standards of best practice and all labor employed must be competent to do all the work required.

2. Furnish the services of an experienced superintendent to be in constant charge of the work at all times.

3. Quality Assurances: If requested, provide documentation that confirms the ability to perform all work to be included under the contract. Assurance if requested, shall be in the form of a list of past projects of similar size and complexity and a list of six (6) references pertaining to those projects. Failure to demonstrate these quality assurances shall be taken as a statement of inability to perform.

4. A minimum of five (5) years experience in the installation of fire protection systems similar to the systems specified is required.

5. Core Drilling: Use core drills rather than percussion type equipment for making holes in concrete. All percussion type drilling including hammer drills must be scheduled through owner’s representative.

6. Inspection: Provisions shall be made for owner’s representative to make rough-in and open ceiling inspections prior to covering up work.

E. SPECIFICATIONS

1. Specifications shall be interpreted in connection with the drawings hereinbefore described, and if anything is shown on drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, it is to be included in the work the same as though clearly set forth by both.

2. Furthermore, all materials and labor previously required to fully complete the work shall be included in the work even though each item necessarily involved be not specifically mentioned or shown. Such work and/or materials shall be of the same grade and quality as the parts actually specified and shown. Should there be a conflict between the plans and specifications, the greater quantity or better quality shall be furnished.

F. PHASING

1. General: Where the scope of work dictates that the project shall be constructed in phases, all costs shall be included for any temporary work required so that previous phases can be operational while construction is being done to adjacent spaces.

G. PLANS

1. Plans are diagrammatic indicating required size, points of termination of piping and suggested routes. However, it is not intended that drawings indicate all necessary offsets. Install piping in such manner as to conform to the structure, avoid obstructions and preserve headroom.

2. Coordination Drawings: Provide coordination drawings and attend meetings as required to make sure all disciplines are coordinated and fit into specified spaces (i.e. ceilings, chases, and all others). The elevations of all disciplines shall be clearly marked throughout the drawings so that no interferences occur. Drawings shall depict actual clearances of installed equipment, penetration locations and service clearances. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement and positioning of large equipment during construction. Indicate where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the work. Conflicts in equipment and materials shall be corrected prior to installation.

3. All piping shall be run as straight as possible and symmetrical with architectural items.


MSA# 11172.00


4. Piping shall be concealed in pipe shafts, pipe spaces, and furring wherever possible. 5. Piping fabricated before coordination with the other trades will be done at one’s own risk.

H. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with work similar to this project and meet applicable regulatory agencies requirements.

I. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other products of the mechanical work, and with other work requiring interface with the mechanical work. Provide products with the proper and correct power characteristics, fuel-burning characteristics and similar adaptations for this project. Coordinate the selections from among options (if any) for compatibility of products.

J. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

K. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

L. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and

that certification is current.

M. Electrical Characteristics for Fire Protection Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Examine all Mechanical, Electrical, Architectural, Site and Structural Drawings, and available soil reports. Visit site and become acquainted with all conditions which may affect execution of work.

B. Provide all work in accordance with State and Local Codes, Regulations and/or Ordinances, and meet approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only new material and as specified.

C. Furnish to Owner, with a copy to the Owner a Certificate of Final Approval from governing authority prior to Owner’s final acceptance, where applicable.

D. General Outline: The facilities and systems of the mechanical work include all Division 21 Sections.

E. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

F. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

G. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.


MSA# 11172.00


1.7 COORDINATION OF FIRE PROTECTION WORK

A. Refer to Division 1 Sections for general coordination requirements applicable to entire work. The contract documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within mechanical work, and in its interface with other work, including utilities, control and electrical work.

B. Arrange fire protection work in a neat, well organized manner, with piping and similar services running parallel with primary lines of the building.

C. Give right-of-way to piping which may slope for drainage.

D. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire fire protection work with adequate access for operation and maintenance.

E. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move-in of large units of fire protection work (equipment).

1.8 PERMITS AND FEES

A. Permits and fees of every nature required in connection with this work shall be obtained and paid for by contractor, including installation fees and similar charges.

B. Laws and regulations which bear upon or affect the various branches of this work shall be complied with.

C. All work which laws require to be inspected shall be submitted to the proper public officials for inspections and certificates of final approval must be furnished to the Owner before final acceptance will be given by the Engineer.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide a guarantee in written form stating that all work under this section shall be free of defective work, materials, and parts for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion owner's final acceptance and shall repair, revise or replace at no cost to the owner any such defects occurring within the guarantee period. State in written form that any items or occurrences arising during the guarantee period will be attended to in a timely manner and will in no case exceed four (4) working days from date of notification by owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of products of quality, types and sizes required; and which have been in satisfactory use of not less than four (4) years in similar service, except as otherwise noted in specific sections of this division.

2.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


MSA# 11172.00


A. Protect products against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged products.

B. Deliver products to site in factory fabricated containers, with the manufacturer’s label clearly visible. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure and finish, and in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Store products in clean dry place in original containers, protected from weather and construction traffic.

2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS AND EQUIPMENT SELECTION

A. Equipment provided different than the basis of design must be compatible with the facility and meet all requirements of the contract documents.

B. If any changes are required to the work scope, due to the selected equipment being different from the design basis equipment, include all costs borne by all disciplines and consultants as a result of that substitution.

2.4 VALVE TAGS:

A. Provide a list of all valves utilized for this project which will include the following:

1. Valve # as described below. 2. Valve location. 3. Architectural Room # to which service is provided by the valve. 4. Function served

B. Provide in a spreadsheet format on CD, and provide printed copies in the project manual.

C. Valve tags shall be 1-1/2” diameter, 19 gage polished brass, with stamp engraved identification in ½” high letters, fastened to the valve with a solid brass chain.

D. All valve tags shall include an alpha prefix to identify the system, (example: first water valve for fire suppression is FP1). In existing buildings where a numbering system has already been established, coordinate with the owner.

E. Abbreviation for Fire Protection System Valves:

1. FP Fire Protection

F. Note: The abbreviations noted above shall be used for piping markers in addition to those specified herein.

2.5 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING

A. Provide firestopping at pipe penetrations of fire-rated walls, floors and ceilings. Maintain integrity (rating) of such walls, floors and ceilings.

B. Provide smokestopping at pipe penetrations of non-fire-rated walls, floors, and ceilings.

C. Refer to fire safing requirements specified in Division 7.


MSA# 11172.00


D. All through penetrations shall be labeled on both sides of the wall to indicate the appropriate UL system number, product used, installation date, hour rating installer, location number and telephone contact for the corresponding manufacturer. Material installed shall be as required for installation conditions and to achieve the required fire resistance.

E. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E-814, or UL2079 tested for specific fire rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire rating involved for each separate instance.

F. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.

2.6 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.

E. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

2.8 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.


MSA# 11172.00


B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.

D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.9 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

2.10 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

2.11 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. d. MKT Fastening, LLC. e. Powers Fasteners.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Coordinate subparagraph and list below with Part 2 "Manufacturers" Article. Retain "Available" for nonproprietary and delete for semiproprietary specifications.

2. Manufacturers:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS


MSA# 11172.00


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FRAMING FOR OPENINGS

A. Where a pipe slot is indicated for a group of pipes passing through a wall, set a rectangular frame of structural angles, welded in the slot, at each side of wall. Close each side of opening with two (2) No. 16 USG galvanized steel plates cut to fit the pipes and/or pipe insulation closely, and fasten to angle frame. For slots in exterior walls, slip flanged ferrules of sheet metal on pipes when they are installed, with flanges inside the closure plates at exterior wall face, caulk ferrules and plates to make weathertight joint, and pack space between closure plates with rock wool or glass fiber. At slots in fire walls, pack as specified above, but omit ferrules and caulking. Escutcheons are by Division 21.

B. Pipe Sleeves:

1. For pipes passing through brick or concrete walls, or concrete floor slabs, provide steel pipe sleeves, two (2) sizes larger than the pipe for which they are intended. Coordinate setting of sleeves as construction progresses. Set sleeves flush with finished line of walls and floors. Where smooth bores are provided for piping penetrations after the wall/slab has been poured, steel pipe sleeves are not required unless needed to maintain the integrity of the structure (Example: brick walls shall require sleeves).

2. Caulk sleeves through foundation walls to make them watertight.

C. Firestopping:

1. Provide firestopping at pipe and duct penetrations of fire-rated walls, floors and ceilings. Maintain integrity (rating) of such walls, floors and ceilings.

2. Provide asbestos-free material complying with ASTM E 814. Use one of the following:

a. Dow Corning, “Fire Stop System” b. ProSet Systems, Inc., “ System A, B and C” (as applicable) c. USG Interiors, Inc., Thermafiles Fire/Smoke Stop System

3.2 INSPECTION

A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which products are to be installed. Notify architectural and construction team members, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Starting of installation constitutes acceptance.

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING


MSA# 11172.00


A. Comply with General Conditions for cutting and patching of other work, to accommodate the installation of mechanical work. Except as individually authorized by the Architect, cutting and patching of mechanical work to accommodate the installation of other work is not permitted, other than necessary penetrations of mechanical sheet metal work for electrical conduit and similar purposes.

3.4 SYSTEM TESTS

A. Perform all system tests in the presence of an authorized representative of the Owner. Notify the Owner of all system’s tests at least 48 hours in advance.

3.5 SYSTEM INSPECTION

A. All systems are to be inspected by authorized representative of the Owner before covering, enclosing or concealing of work. Notify Owner of all systems which are to be covered, enclosed or concealed at least 48 hours in advance.

3.6 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and

store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment

and deliver to Owner.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

3.7 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.


MSA# 11172.00


D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

H. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

I. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.

J. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

K. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.8 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

G. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.

3.9 PIPING CONNECTIONS


MSA# 11172.00


A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.10 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.11 CLEANING PREMISES

A. During the progress of the work, clean up and leave the premises and all portions of the building in which work was performed in a clean and safe condition. Refer to Division 1.

3.12 WORK IN EXISTING SPACES

A. General: Care shall be taken when working in existing spaces so as not to damage existing walls and ceilings where work is being performed.

B. Existing Ceilings: Where work is being performed above ceilings, and the architectural drawings do not indicate ceiling modifications are the responsibility of others, remove and replace existing ceilings where work is being performed. In those instances, costs for all repair and installation of new grid, ceiling panels, etc shall be included. Match existing finishes.

C. New Ceilings: Where existing sprinklers are to remain, and the architectural drawings indicate replacement of the ceilings, temporarily remove and reinstall sprinkler escutcheons, etc. as required to accommodate the ceiling removal.

D. Walls & Floors: Patch existing walls and floors and match existing finishes where work is being removed or installed and patching is being performed, unless noted otherwise on the architectural drawings.

3.13 FIRE ALARM RELATED WORK FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

A. The following applies whether or not shown on drawings. Prior to submitting a bid, review documents of all other disciplines which may have an impact on such work.

B. If a sprinkler system exists in the building, furnish and install all required flow and tamper switches. Wiring and installation of the fire alarm devices shall not be included.

3.14 ARCHITECTURAL COORDINATION ITEMS


MSA# 11172.00


A. Cut and drill all openings in walls and floors required for the installation. Secure approval of Engineer before cutting and drilling. Neatly patch all openings cut.

B. Cutting and patching to be held to a minimum. Coordinate locations of sleeves and openings before construction is started.

C. Patching through fire rated walls and enclosures shall not diminish the rating of that wall or enclosure. Patch shall be equal to rockwool, firestop, caulk or approved "rated" patch.

D. Caulk or fire safe between sleeves and pipes, see Division 7 for caulking and fire safing requirements and the floor plan and partition schedule for partition ratings.

E. Furnish all access panels required for proper servicing of equipment. Provide access panels for all concealed valves, controls, and sprinkler devices required by NFPA. Provide frame as required for finish. Exact locations to be approved by the Architect. Minimum size to be 12" x 12", units to be 16 gauge steel, locking device shall be screwdriver cam locks. Refer to Division 9 for access panel manufacturers and material requirements. Provide phenolic plate with ID of item behind access panel on the face of the door.

F. Install standard Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves two sizes larger than pipes passing through floors, walls or masonry construction.

G. Sleeves through walls to be cut flush with both faces.

H. Sleeves through floor to extend one inch above floor top elevation.

I. Caulk or fire safe between sleeves and pipes, see Division 7 for caulking and fire safing requirements and the floor plan partition schedule for partition ratings.

J. Install manufactured chromium plated escutcheon plates wherever uninsulated exposed pipes pass through walls, floors, or ceilings. Escutcheon inside diameter to closely fit around pipe and outside diameter to completely cover opening.

K. Furnish and set all forms required in masonry walls or foundation to accommodate pipes.

L. Provide flexible connectors where all pipes cross building expansion joints equal to Flexonics. Coordinate exact quantity & location with Architectural plans prior to installation of piping.

END OF SECTION 210500


MSA# 11172.00

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210529 - 1

SECTION 210529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Fastener systems. 4. Equipment supports.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Sec-tion IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

1. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

B. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

1. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

a. Anvil International, Clevis type, Figure 260. Provide copper coated hanger materials for those hangers in direct contact with copper pipe.

2. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

C. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

D. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

E. Steel Piping:

1. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Install hangers for non threaded lightwall steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

a. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 12 feet with 3/8-inch rod. b. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 15 feet with 3/8-inch rod. c. NPS 5 to NPS 8: 15 feet with 1/2-inch rod. d. NPS 10 and larger: 15 feet with 5/8-inch rod.

3. Install hangers for threaded lightwall steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

a. NPS 3 and Smaller: 12 feet with 3/8-inch rod. b. NPS 3-1/2 to NPS 4: 15 feet with 3/8-inch rod. c. NPS 5 to NPS 8: 15 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

4. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

F. Copper Tubing:

1. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. 2. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

a. NPS 1 and Smaller: 8 feet with 3/8-inch rod. b. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. c. NPS 2 to NPS 3: 12 inches with 3/8-inch rod. d. NPS 4: 15 feet with 3/8-inch rod. e. NPS 5 to NPS 8: 15 feet with 1/2-inch rod.


G. CPVC Piping:

1. Install supports for vertical CPVC piping every 4 feet. 2. Install hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

a. NPS 3/4: 5 feet 6 inches with 3/8-inch rod. b. NPS 1: 6 feet with 3/8-inch rod. c. NPS 1-1/4: 6 feet 6 inches with 3/8-inch rod. d. NPS 1-1/2: 7 feet with 3/8-inch rod. e. NPS 2: 8 feet with 3/8-inch rod. f. NPS 2-1/2: 9 feet with 3/8-inch rod g. NPS 3: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.


H. Manufacturers:

1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports. 3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.


MSA# 11172.00


5. Empire Industries, Inc. 6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 8. Anvil International 9. GS Metals Corp. 10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 12. PHS Industries, Inc. 13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 14. Tolco Inc.

2.2 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. 3. GS Metals Corp. 4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 6. Tolco Inc. 7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

C. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.



1. Manufacturers:


B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materi-als where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC.


MSA# 11172.00


f. Powers Fasteners.

2.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Suspended Equipment and Piping:

1. Provide structural steel and steel rod hangers, rigid and workmanlike in appearance. Weld (with approval of Structural Engineer where attaching to building steel) structural steel hangers or bolt with hex head machine bolts and with spring lock washers under nuts.

2. For suspension from concrete, provide steel or malleable iron inserts in poured concrete construc-tion, as specified for pipe hangers and supports, and expansion shields, toggle bolts or lag screws, in other construction. Use electric drill with carbide bit for drilling concrete blocks.

3. For suspension from structural steel, use beam or channel clamps with locking clips. 4. Do not support mechanical components from ceiling grids or from suspension framing installed by

other contractors. 5. Do not suspend hangers from roof decks. 6. Suspend from roof trusses and joists/joist girders only at panel points, at top cord only, unless oth-

erwise indicated. 7. Provide additional supports wherever needed, and structural steel members attached to building

frame to provide additional points of support where required. Do no drilling or building structural and miscellaneous steel, except as directed or indicated.

B. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expan-sion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

C. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

D. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from move-ment will not be transmitted to connected equipment.


MSA# 11172.00


E. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflec-tions allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

F. Hanger Rods and Hanger Spacing: All sections 6’-0” in length and longer are required to have at least 1 hanger minimum. Provide auxiliary angles spanning between *joints, as required. Comply with current A.S.M.E. code for pressure piping. Piping 5” size and larger to be supported by a minimum of two (2) joists, with pipe center between joists.

G. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

H. Insulated Pipe: Fit pipe hangers over outside diameter of insulation; provide sheet metal saddles 16 gage, 6” long by 1/3 of the circumference.

I. Supports are to be selected to support a weight of 5 times the water filled pipe plus 250 lbs.



MSA# 11172.00

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 1

SECTION 211313 - WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide a fire protection system throughout renovated areas, complete in all respects and in complete operating condition. Provide arm-overs from existing sprinklers and branch piping to sprinkler locations coordinated with the new ceiling plan and wall locations.

B. Include all design, hydraulic calculations, piping layout, drawings, details and other drawings necessary for fabrication and installation of the fire protection system, and all required changes and revisions thereof necessary to obtain approval from the agency of authority having jurisdiction.

C. No extra charges will be allowed for changes to drawings, piping, etc., required to conform to NFPA Standards, the Owner requirements, of the authority having jurisdiction, the Owner's underwriter and with conflict with other trades.

D. All sprinkler work shall be coordinated on the job site before any piping shall be installed.

E. Where existing piping is currently installed below the elevation of new ceilings, all piping shall be raised above the new ceiling. Coordinate with all new utilities and rework all piping as required. Verify existing field conditions and include all rework in bid. No additional monies shall be paid for reworking existing piping to accommodate new ceilings.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water fed from a dedicated sprinkler water supply. Water discharges immediately from each sprinkler when the sprinkler is exposed to higher temperatures than the sprinkler is rated for. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Refer to Division 1 for number of detailed shop drawings and hydraulic calculation submittals required. Provide submittals for all products listed in Part 2 and other related sprinkler sections, which includes hangers, ID tags, fire safing, support framing, compressors, spare parts boxes/tools, etc. Provide all data required by NFPA and the authorities having jurisdiction. Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval, prior to submission to appropriate authority and prior to installation of any portion of both underground and overhead systems.

1. Furnish all drawings accurately to scale on sheets of uniform size and include all necessary data, as required by NFPA.

B. Shop drawings for the following fire protection equipment and accessories shall be submitted:

1. Piping 2. Equipment 3. Valves


MSA# 11172.00


4. Sprinklers 5. Flow Switches 6. Valve Switches

C. Approval is required prior to beginning fabrication and installation. Final acceptance shall be based upon final inspection and tests and approval by the authority having jurisdiction.

D. Upon completion of the installation, correct all engineering tracings, if changes were made in the field, and submit to the Owner one (1) complete set of reproducible tracings.

E. Operation and maintenance data.


A. License/registrations within the state and local jurisdiction where the work is being performed are required.

B. Materials, devices and equipment shall be new and listed by U.L. and approved by Factory Mutual (FM) for use in fire protection systems.

C. Codes and Standards:

1. NFPA Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with NFPA 13 "Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems".

2. FM Compliance: Provide fire protection products and installations in accordance with FM Standards; provide FM label on each product.

3. UL Compliance: Provide fire protection products in accordance with UL Standards; provide UL label on each project.

4. Owner's Insurance Agency Compliance: Provide fire protection products in accordance with the Owner's underwriter.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS

A. Coordinate All Piping and Head Locations with all Trades: No monies will be paid to correct conflicts arising from lack of coordination.

B. Piping shall be U.L. listed and Factory Mutual approved.

C. All fittings used on these systems to be capable of withstanding test pressures. If approved for use, light wall pipe shall not be threaded.

D. Interior Piping:

1. Black Steel Pipe:

a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40 for piping up to and including 2"

1) Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded.


MSA# 11172.00


b. Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 2-1/2” and larger

1) Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll groove type.

E. Auxiliary drains shall be installed where needed to remove water from low points in piping.

F. Where concealing sprinkler piping in finished areas is not possible, paint all exposed sprinkler piping in finished spaces. Obtain approval and coordinate color with architect.

2.2 SPRINKLERS

A. All sprinklers shall be U.L. listed and Factory Mutual approved.

B. In rooms where some existing sprinklers are to remain and new sprinklers are being added, new sprinklers shall match existing.

C. In rooms where all sprinklers will be new, provide concealed white plate sprinklers.

D. Sprinkler escutcheon plates and recessed fittings shall be part of a listed and approved sprinkler assembly.

E. Provide brass sprinkler heads in unfinished areas, above ceilings when required. These heads shall not be subjected to obstructions of water flow discharge due to roof supporting structure.

2.3 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sprinklers:

1. Tyco Fire Products 2. Badger Fire Protection, Inc. 3. Central Sprinkler Corp. 4. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. 5. Grinnell Corp. 6. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. 7. Star Sprinkler Corp. 8. Viking Corp. 9. Victaulic Co. of America.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Furnish all labor, equipment, and conduct all required tests in the presence of and to the satisfaction of local authorities having jurisdiction, the Owner and the representative of the underwriters.

B. Sprinklers shall be aligned and installed in straight lines in both directions in coordination with lighting and air conditioning ceiling fixtures, and with the grid ceiling where they occur, subject to approval by Architect or Engineer before installation.


MSA# 11172.00


C. All horizontal runs for mains and branches shall be installed as close as practical to the bottom cord of roof joists taking into account allowance for system piping drainage.

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING:

A. Except as specified otherwise in this section, perform all cutting and patching and provide all openings together with lintel and supports which may be required for installation of work under this section including floors and walls. Patching shall be of the same materials, workmanship and finish as, and shall accurately match, all surrounding construction. All cutting and patching shall be done when so required by mechanics that did original work.

3.3 TESTS:

A. Upon completion of work, entire system shall be tested as specified in NFPA Standard No. 13.

B. Perform all tests in such a manner as to prevent water damage and staining of building and property.

C. Test all piping and devices comprising the fire protection system under hydrostatic pressure of not less than 200 psi for not less than two (2) hours. Furnish all water for tests. Repair any leaks and cracks developing as a result of these tests to the satisfaction of the Owner.

D. Conduct all tests in the presence of, and to the satisfaction of, local authorities having jurisdiction and the Owner, each of who is to be notified three (3) days in advance of any such test.

E. Upon completion of tests and when satisfactory results have been obtained, submit a signed and dated Material and Test Certificate for each system to Owner.

3.4 COMPLETION:

A. Remove all debris, materials and equipment from the premises upon completion of this work. Piping to be cleaned, ready for painting. Repair any areas damaged and stained as a result of the testing.

B. Provide the owner with one complete set of final as-built layout drawings.

C. Provide all operations and maintenance literature and instructions provided by the manufacturer for installed equipment.

D. Provide all literature and instructions provided by the manufacturer describing proper operation and maintenance of all installed equipment and devices.



MSA# 11172.00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 1

SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of all Division-22 sections.


A. The base bid shall include furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment and installation of all work re-quired to install complete plumbing systems as outlined in Division-22.

B. Unless specifically described otherwise, the contractor responsible for installing the work inside the building shall extend all plumbing utilities from a point 5’-0” outside the building.

C. Examine the drawings, specifications, and visit the site prior to submitting bid.

1.3 SUMMARY


1. Manufacturers. 2. Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling. 3. Substitutions and Equipment Selection. 4. Valve Tags. 5. Firestopping and Smokestopping. 6. Joining materials. 7. Dielectric fittings. 8. Sleeves. 9. Escutcheons. 10. Fastener systems. 11. Temporary Services 12. Pipe Labeling 13. Mechanical demolition. 14. Piping Systems – Common requirements. 15. Cleaning Premises

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Refer to Division 1 for general requirements concerning submittals.

B. Unless otherwise specified and in addition to provisions of the General Conditions, submit drawings hav-ing each sheet, and each page of a brochure, marked with identification and containing information de-scribed below. Submittals are to be complete, partial submittals will not be accepted.

C. Identification:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Include project name and Architect’s job number. If pages are securely bound in brochure, this is needed on cover only.

2. Identification by specification section and article under which equipment or material is described, and by name, number and intended use as designated by contract drawings and specifications.

3. When more than one (1) item of equipment is covered by a single drawing or catalog cut, each project equipment item must be separately identified thereon with clear delineation as to which model or catalog number or performance data applied to each project item.

D. Information:

1. Include manufacturer’s model number or catalog number, size and other data as requested. 2. Maintenance Manuals: Organize each maintenance manual with index and thumb-tab marker for

each section of information; bind in 2” 3-ring, vinyl-covered binder, with pockets for folded sheets, properly labeled on spine and face of binder.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Record Drawings

1. Provide one set of As-Built Drawings and one copy of complete Electronic Drawing Files to the Owner at the date of final acceptance. Provide one set of As-Built Drawings to engineer at the date of final acceptance.



B. There will be a charge of $100 per division group for projects prepared using Revit that must be convert-ed to AutoCAD or Navisworks format. Divisions 21 and 22 are one group, Division 23 is a second group and Divisions 26, 27 and 28 are a third group. Revit model files will not be available.



A. General: Refer to Division 1 Sections for general administrative/procedural requirements related to com-pliance with codes and standards.

B. Application: It is a general requirement that mechanical work comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of standards published by listed agencies and trade associations, except to extent more detailed and stringent requirements are indicated or required by governing regulations.

C. Listing of Associations, Standards and Abbreviations Specific to Mechanical Work (in addition to stand-ards specified in individual work sections), conform to following applicable standards:

1. AGA - American Gas Association 2. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers 3. ASPE - American Society of Plumbing Engineers 4. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering



MSA# 11172.00


5. AWS - American Welding Society, Inc. 6. AWWA - American Water Works Association, Inc. 7. AAGI - Compressed Air and Gas Institute 8. CISPS - Cast Iron soil Pipe Institute 9. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency 10. FM - Factory Mutual System 11. NIST - National Institute for Standards and Technology 12. NEC - National Electrical Code by NFPA 13. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association 14. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation 15. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) 16. PDI - Plumbing and Drainage Institute 17. UL - Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.

D. Supervision And Workmanship


2. Furnish the services of an experienced superintendent to be in constant charge of the work at all times.

3. Quality Assurances: If requested demonstrate the ability to perform all work to be included under the contract. Assurance if requested, shall be in the form of a list of past projects of similar size and complexity and a list of six (6) references pertaining to those projects. Failure to demonstrate these quality assurances shall be taken as a statement of inability to perform.

4. A minimum five (5) years experience in the installation of plumbing systems similar to the sys-tems specified is required.

5. Core Drilling: Use core drills rather than percussion type equipment for making holes in concrete. All percussion type drilling including hammer drills must be scheduled through owner’s repre-sentative.


E. Specifications


2. Furthermore, all materials or labor previously required to fully complete the work shall be includ-ed even though each item necessarily involved be not specifically mentioned or shown. Such work and/or materials shall be of the same grade or quality as the parts actually specified and shown. Should there be a conflict between the plans and specifications, the greater quantity or better quality shall be furnished.

F. Phasing

1. General: Where the scope of work dictates that the project shall be constructed in phases, all costs shall be incurred for any temporary work required so that previous phases can be operational while construction is being done to adjacent spaces.

G. Plans

1. Plans are diagrammatic indicating required size, points of termination of piping and suggested routes. However, it is not intended that drawings indicate all necessary offsets. Install piping in such manner as to conform to the structure, avoid obstructions and preserve headroom.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Coordination Drawings: Provide coordination drawings and attend meetings as required to make sure all disciplines are coordinated and fit into specified spaces (i.e. ceilings, chases, and all oth-ers). The elevations of all disciplines shall be clearly marked throughout the drawings so that no interferences occur. Drawings shall depict actual clearances of installed equipment, penetration lo-cations and service clearances. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement and positioning of large equipment during construction. Indicate where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the work. Conflicts in equipment and materials shall be corrected prior to installation.

3. All piping shall be run as straight as possible and symmetrical with architectural items. 4. Piping shall be concealed in pipe shafts, pipe spaces, and furring wherever possible. 5. Piping fabricated before coordination with the other trades will be done at one’s own risk.

H. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm with at least five (5) years of successful installation experience on pro-jects with work similar to this project and meet applicable regulatory agencies requirements.

I. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other products of the mechanical work, and with other work requiring interface with the mechanical work. Provide products with the proper or cor-rect power characteristics, fuel-burning characteristics and similar adaptations for this project. Coordi-nate the selections from among options (if any) for compatibility of products.

J. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Sec-tion IX.

K. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

L. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."



M. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.


A. Examine all Mechanical, Electrical, Architectural, Site and Structural Drawings, and available soil re-ports. Visit site and become acquainted with all conditions which may affect execution of work.

B. Provide all work in accordance with State and Local Codes, Regulations and/or Ordinances, and meet ap-proval of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only new material and as specified.

C. Furnish to Owner, with a copy to the Owner a Certificate of Final Approval from governing authority prior to Owner’s final acceptance, where applicable.

D. General Outline: The facilities and systems of the mechanical work include all Division 22 Sections.


MSA# 11172.00


E. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

F. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

1.8 COORDINATION OF PLUMBING WORK

A. Refer to Division 1 Sections for general coordination requirements applicable to entire work. The con-tract documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within mechanical work, and in its interface with other work, including utilities, control and electrical work.

B. Arrange plumbing work in a neat, well organized manner, with piping and similar services running paral-lel with primary lines of the building.

C. Give right-of-way to piping which may slope for drainage.

D. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire plumbing work with adequate access for operation and maintenance.

E. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move-in of large units of plumbing work (equipment).

F. Strictly adhere to invert elevations for all underground piping. Pitch piping evenly between pipe junc-tions and where indicated on the drawings. Piping, not installed at invert elevations indicated on the drawings, shall be removed and re-laid.

1.9 PERMITS AND FEES

A. Permits and fees of every nature required in connection with this work shall be obtained and paid for by the contractor, including all the installation fees and similar charges.

B. Laws and regulations which bear upon or affect the various branches of this work shall be complied with, and are hereby made a part of this contract.

C. All work which laws require to be inspected shall be submitted to the proper public officials for inspec-tions and certificates of final approval must be furnished to the Owner before final acceptance will be given by the Engineer.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Provide a guarantee in written form stating that all work under this section shall be free of defective work, materials, or parts for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion owner's final ac-ceptance and shall repair, revise or replace at no cost to the owner any such defects occurring within the guarantee period. State in written form that any items or occurrences arising during the guarantee period will be attended to in a timely manner and will in no case exceed four (4) working days from date of noti-fication by owner.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of products of quality, types and sizes re-quired; and which have been in satisfactory use of not less than four (4) years in similar service, except as otherwise noted in specific sections of this division.


A. Protect products against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged products.

B. Deliver products to site in factory fabricated containers, with the manufacturer’s label clearly visible. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure and finish, and in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Store products in clean dry place in original containers, protected from weather and construction traffic. If the new structure is not weathered in, the contractor will provide portable storage trailers to protect ma-terial that can be damaged by the weather.

D. The contractor shall be responsible for all security related to theft and vandalism for stored materials. Failure to adequately protect equipment that is damaged will not be cause for delay claims.

2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS AND EQUIPMENT SELECTION

A. Equipment provided different than the basis of design must be compatible with the facility and meet all requirements of the contract documents.

B. If any changes are required to the work scope, due to the selected equipment being different from the de-sign basis equipment, include all costs borne by all disciplines and consultants as a result of that substitu-tion.

2.4 VALVE TAGS:

A. Numbering on all new valves shall be an extension of the existing valve tagging system where applicable.

B. Provide a list of all valves utilized for this project which will include the following:

1. Valve # as described below. 2. Valve location. 3. Architectural Room # to which service is provided by the valve. 4. Function served (ex. Ice machine, toilet room, etc.)

C. Provide the information in a spreadsheet format on CD, and provide printed copies in the project manual. Contractor shall also provide a valve chart and schematic and post in the maintenance office.

D. Valve tags shall be 1-1/2” diameter, 19 gage polished brass, with stamp engraved identification in ½” high letters, fastened to the valve with a solid brass chain.


MSA# 11172.00


E. Where a pre-determined numbering system does not exist, all valve tags shall include an alpha prefix to identify the system, (example: first water valve for domestic cold water is CW1). In existing buildings where a numbering system has already been established, coordinate with the owner.

F. Abbreviations for Plumbing System Valves:

1. DCW Domestic Cold Water. 2. DHW Domestic Hot Water. 3. DHWR Domestic Hot Water Return.

G. Note: The abbreviations noted above shall be used for piping markers in addition to those specified here-in.

2.5 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING

A. Provide firestopping at pipe penetrations of fire-rated walls, floors and ceilings. Maintain integrity (rat-ing) of such walls, floors and ceilings.

B. Provide smokestopping at pipe penetrations of non-fire-rated walls, floors, and ceilings.

C. Refer to fire safing requirements specified in Division 7.

D. All through penetrations shall be labeled on both sides of the wall to indicate the appropriate UL system number, product used, installation date, hour rating installer, location number and telephone contact for the corresponding manufacturer. Material installed shall be as required for installation conditions and to achieve the required fire resistance.

E. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E-814, or UL2079 tested for specific fire rat-ed construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire rating involved for each separate instance.

F. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.

2.6 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maxi-mum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manu-facturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.


MSA# 11172.00


G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

2.8 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

2.9 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.


MSA# 11172.00




1. Manufacturers:



1. Manufacturers:


2.11 TEMPORARY SERVICE

A. Refer to Division 1 for contractor’s requirements in regard to temporary services (temporary water for construction, construction sanitary facilities, temporary utilities, etc.)

2.12 PIPE LABELING

A. Provide 4 mil vinyl film pipe markers with permanent self-adhesive with directional arrow banding tape on all piping. Products shall meet ANSI A 13.1.

B. Locate labels on all piping and at a minimum of 20 foot intervals, within one foot of all changes of direc-tion, within one foot of all valves, and within one foot from both sides of walls and floor penetrations.

2.13 PIPING EXPANSION JOINTS AND FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Products manufactured, tested, and approved by the manufacturer’s of the piping material provided shall be approved.

B. Provide flexible connectors where all pipes cross building expansion joints. Refer to architectural draw-ings for locations of all expansion joints.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Flexonics


MSA# 11172.00


2. Stenflex 3. Flexicraft 4. Econfex 5. Unaflex 6. Hyspan

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FRAMING FOR OPENINGS

A. Where a pipe slot is indicated for a group of pipes passing through a wall, set a rectangular frame of structural angles, welded in the slot, at each side of wall. Close each side of opening with two (2) No. 16 USG galvanized steel plates cut to fit the pipes and/or pipe insulation closely, and fasten to angle frame. For slots in exterior walls, slip flanged ferrules of sheet metal on pipes when they are installed, with flanges inside the closure plates at exterior wall face, caulk ferrules and plates to make weathertight joint, and pack space between closure plates with rock wool or glass fiber. At slots in fire walls, pack as speci-fied above, but omit ferrules and caulking. Escutcheons are by Division 22.

B. Pipe Sleeves:

1. For pipes passing through brick or concrete walls, or concrete floor slabs, provide steel pipe sleeves, two (2) sizes larger than the pipe for which they are intended. Coordinate setting of sleeves as construction progresses. Set sleeves flush with finished line of walls and floors. Where smooth bores are provided for piping penetrations after the wall/slab has been poured, steel pipe sleeves are not required unless needed to maintain the integrity of the structure (Example: brick walls shall require sleeves).

2. Caulk sleeves through foundation walls to make them watertight.

C. Firestopping/Smokestopping

1. Provide firestopping/smokestopping at pipe penetrations of walls, floors and ceilings. Maintain integrity (rating) of such walls, floors and ceilings.

2. Refer to Division 7 for installation requirements.

3.2 INSPECTION

A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which products are to be installed. Notify the architect and construction team, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Starting of in-stallation constitutes acceptance.

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Comply with General Conditions for cutting and patching of other work, to accommodate the installation of mechanical work. Except as individually authorized by the Architect, cutting and patching of mechan-ical work to accommodate the installation of other work is not permitted, other than necessary penetra-tions of mechanical sheet metal work for electrical conduit and similar purposes.


MSA# 11172.00


3.4 SYSTEM TESTS

A. Perform all system tests in the presence of an authorized representative of the Owner. Notify the Owner of all system’s tests at least 48 hours in advance.

B. Provide written documentation for each test completed that lists the item or system tested with all test cri-teria

3.5 SYSTEM INSPECTION

A. All systems are to be inspected by authorized representative of the Owner before covering, enclosing or concealing of work. Notify Owner of all systems which are to be covered, enclosed or concealed at least 48 hours in advance.

3.6 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated to be re-moved.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug re-maining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and

store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment

and deliver to Owner.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove dam-aged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

3.7 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping sys-tems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are ap-proved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and ser-vice areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.


MSA# 11172.00


E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

I. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

J. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and con-crete floor and roof slabs.

K. Fire and Smoke-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop/smokestop materials.

L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.8 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, us-ing copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fit-tings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding opera-tors according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. In-stall gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.


MSA# 11172.00


I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings

according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings ac-cording to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

3.9 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.10 CLEANING PREMISES

A. During the progress of the work, clean up portions of the building in which work was performed in a clean and safe condition. Refer to Division 1.



B. Existing Ceilings: Where work is being performed above ceilings, and the architectural drawings do not indicate ceiling modifications, remove and replace existing ceilings where work is being performed. In those instances, repair and install new grid, ceiling panels, etc. Match existing finishes.

C. Walls & Floors: Patch existing walls and floors and match existing finishes where work is being re-moved or installed and patching is being performed, unless noted otherwise on the architectural drawings.


MSA# 11172.00



A. Cut and drill all openings in walls and floors required for the installation. Secure approval of Engineer before cutting and drilling. Neatly patch all openings cut.

B. Cutting and patching to be held to a minimum. Arrange for all sleeves and openings before construction is started.

C. Patching through fire rated walls and enclosures shall not diminish the rating of that wall or enclosure. Patch shall be equal to rockwool, firestop, caulk or approved "rated" patch.

D. Caulk or fire safe between sleeves and pipes, see Division 7 for caulking and fire safing requirements and the floor plan and partition schedule for partition ratings.

E. Furnish all access panels required for proper servicing of equipment. Provide access panels for all con-cealed valves. Provide frame as required for finish. Exact locations to be approved by the Architect. Minimum size to be 12" x 12", units to be 16 gauge steel, locking device shall be screwdriver cam locks. Refer to Division 9 for access panel manufacturers and material requirements. Provide phenolic plate with ID of item behind access panel on the face of the door.

F. Install standard Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves two sizes larger than pipes passing through floors, walls or masonry construction.

G. Sleeves through walls to be cut flush with both faces.

H. Sleeves through floor to extend one inch above floor top elevation.

I. Caulk or fire safe between sleeves and pipes, see Division 7 for caulking and fire safing requirements and the floor plan partition schedule for partition ratings.

J. Install manufactured chromium plated escutcheon plates wherever uninsulated exposed pipes pass through walls, floors, or ceilings. Escutcheon inside diameter to closely fit around pipe and outside di-ameter to completely cover opening.

K. Furnish and set all forms required in masonry walls or foundation to accommodate pipes.



MSA# 11172.00

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Fastener systems. 4. Equipment supports.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Sec-tion IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

1. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

B. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

1. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

a. Clevis type: Provide copper coated hanger materials for those hangers in direct contact with copper pipe.

2. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

C. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

D. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

E. Cast-iron Piping:

1. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and min-imum rod diameters:

a. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. b. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. c. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. d. NPS 6 : 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod. e. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to

60 inches.


F. Steel Piping:

1. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet. 2. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod

diameters:

a. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. b. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. c. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. d. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. e. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod. f. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod. g. NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4-inch rod.


G. Copper Tubing:

1. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. 2. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

a. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. b. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. c. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. d. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. e. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. f. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.


H. PVC Piping:

1. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 4 feet. 2. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod

diameters:

a. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. b. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. c. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. d. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.


MSA# 11172.00



I. Manufacturers:

1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports. 3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 5. Empire Industries, Inc. 6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 8. Anvil International 9. GS Metals Corp. 10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 12. PHS Industries, Inc. 13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 14. Tolco Inc.

2.2 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. 3. GS Metals Corp. 4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 6. Tolco Inc. 7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

C. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.



1. Manufacturers:




MSA# 11172.00


1. Manufacturers:








PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Suspended Equipment and Piping:

1. Provide structural steel and steel rod hangers, rigid and workmanlike in appearance. Weld (with approval of Structural Engineer where attaching to building steel) structural steel hangers or bolt with hex head machine bolts and with spring lock washers under nuts.

2. For suspension from concrete, provide steel or malleable iron inserts in poured concrete construc-tion, as specified for pipe hangers and supports, and expansion shields, toggle bolts or lag screws, in other construction. Use electric drill with carbide bit for drilling concrete blocks.

3. For suspension from structural steel, use beam or channel clamps with locking clips. 4. Do not support mechanical components from ceiling grids. 5. Do not suspend hangers from roof decks. 6. Suspend from roof trusses and joists/joist girders only at panel points, at top cord only, unless oth-

erwise indicated. 7. Provide additional supports wherever needed, and structural steel members attached to building

frame to provide additional points of support where required. Do no drilling or building structural and miscellaneous steel, except as directed or indicated.

B. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expan-sion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

C. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.


MSA# 11172.00


D. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from move-ment will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

E. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflec-tions allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

F. Hanger Rods and Hanger Spacing: 6’-0” spacing maximum, provide auxiliary angles spanning between *joints, as required. Comply with current A.S.M.E. code for pressure piping. Piping 5” size and larger to be supported by a minimum of two (2) joists, with pipe center between joists.

G. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

H. Insulated Pipe: Fit pipe hangers over outside diameter of insulation; provide sheet metal saddles 16 gage, 6” long by 1/3 of the circumference.



MSA# 11172.00

PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 1

SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Insulate domestic cold water piping, associated fittings and valves with 1/2” wall thickness insula-tion.

2. Insulate domestic hot water piping, associated fittings and valves with 1” wall thickness insula-tion.

3. Insulate above floor horizontal storm drain piping, roof drain pans, and vertical piping from roof drain pan to the first horizontal bend with 1/2" wall thickness insulation.

4. Insulate waste piping above ceilings that receive condensate with 1/2" wall thickness insulation. 5. Insulate waste piping, supply piping, stops, and valves under handicap accessible plumbing fix-

tures. 6. Insulation thicknesses shall be doubled for piping installed in non-conditioned spaces such as boil-

er rooms, attics, crawl spaces, tunnels, etc. 7. Adhesives.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of in-

sulation. 4. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 5. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 6. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 7. Detail field application for each equipment type.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response charac-teristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspect-ing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to site, in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed, showing fire hazard indexes of products.

B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular mate-rials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:

a. Armacell LLC. b. Aeroflex USA Inc. c. RBX Corporation.

B. Insulation shall be listed and labeled per ASTM E 84 for plenum installations.

C. Joints shall be sealed with a manufacturer compliant adhesive. Pipe insulation exposed outside shall be covered with a vinyl wrap.

2.2 FIBERGLASS INSULATION

A. Fiberglass piping insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1

B. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers.

C. Vapor Barrier Material: Paper-backed aluminum foil, except as otherwise indicated, strength and perme-ability rating equivalent to adjoining pipe insulation jacketing.

D. Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indi-cated.

E. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applica-tions indicated.

F. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Knauf Insulation


MSA# 11172.00


4. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. 5. Keene Corp.

2.3 INSULATION FOR HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE FIXTURES

A. All handicap lavatory P-trap and angle stop assemblies shall be insulated with Trap Wrap Protective Kit manufactured by ProFlo model PF202WH or equal. Abrasion resistant , anti-microbial vinyl exterior cover shall be smooth. For traps, the insulation shall have a cleanout nut cap to allow service to the trap without disassembly. For stops, the insulation shall have a lock lid that prevents tampering but allows ac-cess without removal of the insulation. Fasteners shall remain substantially out of sight.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:

a. ProFlo b. Truebro c. Plumberex

2.4 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION AND INSPECTION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.2 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION:

A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping, unions, balance cocks, flow regu-lators, fire protection piping within main building only and pre-insulated equipment.

1. Exception: Handicap lavatory piping to be completely insulated.

B. Piping:

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following piping systems:


MSA# 11172.00


a. Potable Cold Water Piping b. Potable Hot Water Piping c. Horizontal Storm Piping, Roof Drain Pans, and Vertical Piping from Roof Drain Pans to

first horizontal bend. d. Waste Piping above ceilings that receive condensate.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION:

A. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose.

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abut-ting each other.

C. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulation. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

D. Maintain pipe insulation integrity; protect to prevent puncture or other damage.

E. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation, as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option), except where specific form or type is indicated.

F. Extend piping insulation, without interruption, through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, ex-cept where otherwise indicated.

3.4 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT:

A. Replace damaged insulation, which cannot be repaired satisfactorily.

B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall provide required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.

3.5 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insu-lation continuously through walls and partitions.

B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

C. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.


MSA# 11172.00


3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thick-

ness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent

straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to elimi-

nate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to elimi-

nate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to

valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended ad-

hesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.



MSA# 11172.00

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS 221113 - 1

SECTION 221113 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide all potable water materials for, or incidental to, installation of complete potable water system, as required by drawings and these specifications. Section Includes, but is not necessarily limited to:

1. Water piping. 2. Valves. 3. Hose bibs. 4. Roof hydrants. 5. Water hammer arresters. 6. Access panels. 7. Flushing, Cleaning and Disinfecting 8. Testing

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and maintenance data.


A. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER PIPING

A. Interior Water Piping:

1. Copper tube.

a. Wall Thickness: Type L, hard-drawn temper. b. Fittings: Wrought-copper, solder-joints.


MSA# 11172.00


2.2 VALVES

A. Isolation/Control Valves

1. Ball

a. All valves installed in domestic water piping 3” and smaller shall be ball valves. b. Ball Valves - 1 Inch and Smaller: 2-piece body, 600 psi CWP, 150 psi SWP, Cast Bronze

body, full port, teflon seats, blowout-proof stem, adjustable packing gland, chrome plated bronze ball, with screwed ends, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends. Pro-vide extended valve stems for valves used on insulated lines. Provide equal to Nibco Se-ries 585-70-NS.

c. Ball Valves - 1-1/4 Inch to 3 Inch: 3-piece body, 600 psi CWP, 150 psi SWP, Cast Bronze body, conventional port, teflon seats, blowout-proof stem, adjustable packing gland, chrome plated bronze ball, screwed ends, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends. Provide extended valve stems for valves used on insulated lines. Provide equal to Nibco Series 590-Y.

B. Manufacturers

1. Red-White Valve Corporation 2. Nibco 3. Milwaukee 4. Watts 5. Apollo 6. Kitz Corporation

2.3 HOSE BIBS

A. Interior Hose Bibbs (HB): Woodford Model 24P wall faucet.

B. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, one valve key for each key operated hose bib installed.

C. Where applicable and possible, install all hose bibs 24”-30” above finish floor to allow filling of mop bucket without hose.

D. Manufacturers

1. Woodford 2. J.R.Smith 3. Zurn 4. Wade 5. Murdoch 6. Freeze Flow

2.4 ROOF HYDRANTS

A. Freezeless roof hydrant shall be equal to Woodford Model SRH-MS, complete system with ¾” threaded hose bib, ASSE 1052 double check backflow preventer, and mounting hardware.


MSA# 11172.00


B. Provide detailed operational information to owner on how to operate during winter to prevent from freez-ing.

C. Manufacturers

1. Woodford 2. J.R.Smith 3. Zurn 4. Wade 5. Murdoch 6. Freeze Flow

2.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Install water hammer arrestors as required by the Plumbing and Drainage Institute’s Standard PDI-WH 201.

B. Wade Shokstop, stainless steel water hammer arrester.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Wade 2. J.R. Smith 3. Zurn 4. Watts 5. Josam 6. MIFAB 7. PPP Inc. 8. Amtrol

2.6 ACCESS PANELS

A. Provide flush metal access panels, where valves occur in inaccessible locations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Appropriate compression shutoff valve and ground joint unions shall be used at each fixture and piece of equipment to facilitate removal of equipment.

B. Adapters used for screwed valves and any connection to steel shall be insulated to prevent electrolysis.

C. Use dielectric unions where dissimilar metals are joined together.


MSA# 11172.00


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201. Water hammer arrestors shall be provided on all water supply piping to flush valve fixtures, commercial washers, and all other fix-tures/equipment that have quick-closing valves.

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATIONS

A. General Application: Use ball and butterfly valves for shut-off duty. Use butterfly for throttling duty.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment in a manner to allow equipment removal without system shut-down. Unions are not required on flanged devices. Isolation valves shall be installed on branch lines serving two or more pieces of equipment and every 100 feet.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.

E. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

3.4 VALVES - SOLDER CONNECTIONS

A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.

B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket, using steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket in same manner.

C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.

D. Open gate and globe valves to fully open position.

E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves with composition discs.

F. Insert tube into valve socket making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to insure even distribution of the flux.

G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will melt upon contact. Feed solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating the valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.

3.5 TESTING

A. The entire water distribution system shall be tested and proven tight under air or water pressure of fifty percent more than the maximum pressure of each system but in no case less than 100 pounds.

B. Test temperature at all sink locations to comply with 110° delivered temperature.

C. Perform all systems tests in the presence of the Plumbing Inspector and authorized representative of Owner. Notify Owner of all systems tests at least 48 hours in advance.


MSA# 11172.00


D. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.

3.7 FLUSHING AND CLEANING

A. Upon completion of testing, flush all domestic water piping until water shows no discoloration. Clean all valves, strainers, etc.

B. After flushing and cleaning, disinfect pipe by the use of chlorine or chlorine compounds in amounts to produce a concentration of 50 parts per million. At the end of six (6) hours, flush all piping until chlorine residual is less the two (2) parts per million.

1. Provide any additional system cleaning and disinfecting as required by state or local codes.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

3.8 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation water-tight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Section 22 05 00 "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.

E. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

3.9 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.


MSA# 11172.00


3.10 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by au-thorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Test domestic water piping as follows:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, ex-tended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, com-plete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without ex-ceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.



MSA# 11172.00

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221313 - 1

SECTION 221313 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide all labor, materials, fixtures and equipment required for, or incidental to, installation of a complete sanitary waste and vent system as required by the Drawings and these Specifications. Provide permits, taps, inspections and testing as required for work shown on the Drawings and pay all costs for same.

B. Work under this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to:

1. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping (including Indirect Drainage) 2. Floor Drains 3. Cleanouts 4. Inspections 5. Testing

C. Specified In Other Sections

1. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.

B. Manufacturer's data for sanitary waste and vent piping systems materials and products.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of piping products of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer: A firm with at least three years of successful installation experience on projects with soil and waste piping systems work similar to that required for project.

C. Codes and Standards: Comply with all applicable codes, rules, regulations and/or standards (edition in force; complete with all interim agreements and local amendments in effect) pertaining to products, materials and/or installation of sanitary waste and vent piping systems as follows:

1. AHJ - Authority Having Jurisdiction 2. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 3. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers 4. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineers 5. ASTM - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 6. NSF - NSF International 7. PDI - Plumbing and Drainage Institute 8. Plumbing Code


MSA# 11172.00


D. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp or other markings of a qualified third-party testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING:

A. General: Provide piping and fittings in accordance with the following listing:

1. Above Grade Piping:

a. Service weight cast iron pipe conforming to ASTM A74, ASTM A888 or CISPI 301. Fittings shall be cast iron conforming to ASME B16.4, ASME B16.12, ASTM A74, ASTM A888 or CISPI 301.

b. Copper or copper-alloy tubing, DWV or Type ‘M’ conforming to ASTM B75, ASTM B88, ASTM B251 or ASTM B306 may be used on sanitary waste and vent piping 2-1/2 inches or less in size. Fittings shall be copper or copper-alloy conforming to ASME B16.15, ASME B16.18, ASME B16.22, ASME B16.23, ASME B16.26 or ASME B16.29.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. General: Provide floor drains of size as indicated on drawings, and type, including features, as specified herein.

1. Note: All floor drains located in rooms which have tile floors (toilet rooms, kitchen, etc.) shall have square tops.

2. Provide and install trap primers for all floor drains.

B. Provide Precision Plumbing Products (PPP) Oregon 1 Trap Primer Valve (complete with polypropylene body, check valve retainer plate, float and cover; integral #316 stainless steel ball check valve, Monel check ball retainer) and distribution unit (as required). Coordinate trap primer connections with floor drain manufacturer. Exception: Trap primer valves are not required for shower drains.

C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering floor drains which may be incorporated in the work include the following:

1. Zurn Industries Inc., Hydromechanics Division 2. Josam Manufacturing Company 3. Mifab 4. Oatey 5. Sioux Chief 6. Jay R Smith Manufacturing Company 7. Wade Division, Tyler Pipe 8. Watts Drainage

2.3 CLEANOUTS

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements and governing regulations.


MSA# 11172.00


B. Provide cleanouts where shown, at bends and angles and as required by the Plumbing Code in force. Extend to make flush installation with floor, wall or finish grade

C. Provide cleanouts for specific applications as follows:

1. Above-grade, horizontal piping: Zurn Z1440 cleanout with Dura-Coated cast iron body with gas and watertight ABS tapered thread plug.

2. Floor: Zurn ZN-1400 adjustable floor cleanout, Dura-Coated cast iron body with gas and watertight ABS tapered thread plug and round scoriated secured top adjustable to finish floor.

3. Carpeted floor: Zurn ZN-1400-CM adjustable floor cleanout, Dura-Coated cast iron body with gas and watertight ABS tapered thread plug and round scoriated secured top adjustable to finish floor and carpet marker.

4. Tile floor: Zurn ZN-1400-T adjustable floor cleanout, Dura-Coated cat iron body with gas and watertight ABS tapered thread plug and square scoriated secured top adjustable to finish floor.

5. Wall: Provide cleanout plug complete with Zurn Z1460-9 square wall access panel and frame. Smooth, nickel bronze panel secured to frame, set flush to finish wall plane, complete with securing lugs.

D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cleanouts which may be incorporated in the work include the following:

1. Zurn Industries Inc., Hydromechanics Division 2. Josam Manufacturing Company 3. Mifab 4. Oatey 5. Sioux Chief 6. Jay R Smith Manufacturing Company 7. Wade Division, Tyler Pipe 8. Watts Drainage

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cleanout shall be installed in sanitary above ground piping and sanitary building drain piping as indicated; as required by the Plumbing Code in force; at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees; at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 100' for 6” and larger piping; and at base of each vertical soil or waste stack. Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, select type to match adjacent building finish. Coordinate locations of all wall cleanouts with plumbing fixtures, grab bars, mirrors, toilet room accessories and all other wall mounted items.

B. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

C. Make changes in direction for sanitary waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.


MSA# 11172.00


D. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS

A. General: Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated.

B. Coordinate with sanitary waste piping as necessary to interface floor drains with drainage piping systems.

C. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained or as indicated. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor.

D. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.

E. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.



B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Joints: Solvent cement type conforming to ASTM D2665.

C. Cast Iron Joints: Cast iron coupling for joining hubless cast iron pipe shall consist of neoprene gasket produced and labeled as ASTM C564, cast iron clamps produced and labeled as ASTM A48 and stainless steel bolts and nuts produced and labeled as ANSI B18.2.1 and ANSI B18.2.2. Neoprene gaskets shall be produced and labeled as ASTM C564-70.

D. Copper Joints: Solder joints shall be made in accordance with the methods of ASTM B 828. All cut tube ends shall be reamed to the full inside diameter of the tube end. All joint surfaces shall be cleaned. A flux conforming to ASTM B 813 shall be applied. The joint shall be soldered with a solder conforming to ASTM B 32.



3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sanitary waste piping to exterior house/building drain piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

B. Connect sanitary waste and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by the Plumbing Code in force.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by the Authority Having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by the Plumbing Code in force.

4. Equipment: Connect sanitary waste piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


A. During installation, notify the Authority Having Jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform inspections specified below in presence of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. The entire sanitary waste system is to be flushed and is to be witnessed by the Owner.

C. Test sanitary waste and vent piping according to procedures of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

D. Re-inspection/re-testing: If the Authority Having Jurisdiction finds that the sanitary waste and vent system, either whole or in part, will not pass test or inspection, the Contractor shall take all required corrective action and arrange for re-testing or re-inspection at the Contractor’s expense.

E. Perform all systems tests in the presence of the Owner. Notify the Owner of all systems tests at least 48 hours in advance.

F. Reports: Prepare inspection and test reports and have them signed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Provide one copy of the inspection and test reports to the Owner.

3.7 TESTING

A. The sanitary waste and vent system shall be tested shall be tested with water or air in accordance with the Kentucky Plumbing Code and to the satisfaction of the Authority Having Jurisdiction and the Owner before it is concealed or covered within the floors or walls.

1. After the building fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water and before the building is occupied, the entire system, other than the house sewer, shall be subjected to a final air pressure test.

2. It shall be the responsibility of the person who secured the plumbing construction permit to notify the Authority Having Jurisdiction and request a final inspection and air test upon completion of the installation.

3. If only a portion of the plumbing fixtures have been set, an air test shall be requested and given prior to the time the building is occupied. After the plumbing system is finally completed, another inspection and test shall be requested and given.


MSA# 11172.00


B. A water test shall be applied to the sanitary waste and vent system either in its entirety or in sections.

1. If it is applied to the entire system, all openings shall be closed, except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow.

2. If the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly plugged, except the highest opening and it shall be tested with not less than a ten (10) foot head of water. In testing successive sections, at least the upper ten (10) feet of the preceding section shall be retested.

3. In lieu of a water test, an air pressure test may be used by attaching an air compressor or test apparatus to any suitable opening. All other inlets and outlets to the system shall be closed, forcing air into the system until there is a uniform pressure of five (5) pounds per square inch (PSI). The pressure shall be maintained for fifteen (15) minutes.

4. The final air test shall test the entire soil, waste, and vent system including the fixture and appurtenances by connecting an air machine to any suitable opening or outlet and applying air pressure equivalent to a one (1) inch water column. It shall be maintained for at least a fifteen (15) minute period. If there are no leaks or forcing of trap seals as may be indicated by the functioning of a drum, float, or water column, the system shall be deemed airtight.

3.8 CLEANUP:

A. Clean interior of piping, drain bodies and interceptors as required. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains as required during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Upon completion of this work, all excavating debris, materials and equipment are to be promptly removed from the premises.



MSA# 11172.00

STORM PIPING SYSTEMS 221413 - 1

SECTION 221413 - STORM PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide all materials, fixtures and equipment required for, or incidental to, installation of storm water system including, as indicated on the drawings and as stated herein, but not limited to the following:

1. Refer to drawings for extent of storm piping rework necessary to accommodate renovated areas.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of piping products of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.

B. Installer: A firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with storm water piping systems work similar to that required for project.

C. Codes and Standards

1. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of local plumbing code pertaining to plumbing materials, construction and installation of products.

2. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable American National Standards pertaining to products and installation of storm water piping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STORM PIPING

A. Above Ground Piping Within Buildings:

1. Piping shall be service weight cast iron, ASTM A-74 with ASTM C-564 gasketed joints.


MSA# 11172.00


2. No-hub cast iron pipe and fittings may be used above floor. No-hub cast iron pipe and fittings shall comply with ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301 with ASTM C 564 gaskets and ASTM 1277 stainless steel couplings.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements and governing regulations.

B. Cleanouts to be Zurn, Wade, Josam, Smith, Watts, MIFAB, Oatey, Sioux Chief or approved equal.

C. Cleanout Plugs: Cast-bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk head.

D. Provide cleanouts where shown and at bends and angles. Extend to make flush installation with floor, wall or finish grade.

1. Grade: Heavy duty cleanout in concrete pad at grade. 2. Floors: Zurn Z1400, Josam, Wade, Smith or approved equal, nickel bronze scorated top. 3. Walls: Zurn Z1460-9, Josam, Smith or approved equal, nickel bronze with Z-1460 hex head

plug.

E. Provide square cleanout tops where tile floors occur.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Results for Plumbing."

B. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

C. Make changes in direction for storm piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

D. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


MSA# 11172.00




B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

C. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.

D. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.



3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

B. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.



MSA# 11172.00

DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400 - 1

SECTION 22 34 00 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following equipment:

1. Electric domestic water heaters.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating char-acteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.



A. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical components required as part of plumbing equipment, which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Arti-cle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

D. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water.

E. ASME Relief Valve Stamps: Provide water heaters with safety relief valves bearing ASME valve mark-ings.

F. AWWA Compliance: Comply with applicable American Water Works Association standards pertaining to steel water tanks.

G. Water heater units must meet ASHRAE 90.1, ADDM 90 pound.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace com-ponents of fuel-fired water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:


MSA# 11172.00


a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:

a. Commercial Water Heaters: Three years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering electric wa-ter heaters which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Aquastar 2. EEmax 3. Takagi 4. Stiebel Eltron 5. Paloma 6. Noritz

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. General: Install water heater as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, and in compliance with applicable codes.

B. Piping: Connect hot and cold water piping to unit with shutoff valves and unions. If applicable, connect recirculating water line to unit with shutoff valve, check valve, and union.

C. Start-up: Start-up, test and adjust water heater in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for easy re-moval of water heaters.


A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect installation, including connections.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.


MSA# 11172.00


3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equip-ment.

C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, op-erate, and maintain commercial water heaters.



MSA# 11172.00

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1

SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plumbing fixtures. 2. Plumbing carriers. 3. Toilet seats.

B. Provide installation and final connections.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS





A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Regulatory Requirements: "Americans with Disabilities Act" for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

E. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESSIBLE FIXTURES

A. Accessible fixtures to conform to local code requirements, where indicated or as required.

2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Refer to drawings for fixture schedule.

2.3 PLUMBING FITTINGS, TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Water Outlets: At locations where water is supplied (by manual, automatic or remote control), provide commercial quality faucets, valves, or dispensing devices, of type and size indicated, and as required to operate as indicated. Include manual shutoff valves and connecting stem pipes to permit outlet servicing without shut-down of water supply piping systems.

B. Vacuum Breakers: Provide with flush valves where required by governing regulations, including locations where water outlets are equipped for hose attachment.

C. P-Traps: Include removable P-traps where drains are indicated for direct connection to drainage system.

D. Carriers: Provide cast-iron supports for fixtures of either graphitic gray iron, ductile iron, or malleable iron as indicated.

E. Fixture Bolt Caps: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fixture bolt caps finished to match fixture finish.

F. Escutcheons: Where fixture supplies and drains penetrate walls in exposed locations, provide chrome plated cast-brass escutcheons with set screw.

G. Aerators: Provide aerators of types approved by Health Departments having jurisdiction.

H. Comply with additional fixture requirements contained in fixture schedule attached to this section.

2.4 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering plumbing fixtures and trim which may be incorporated in the work include:

1. Plumbing Fixtures:

a. American Standard, U.S. Plumbing Products. b. Eljer Plumbingware Div., Engineered Brass Corp. c. Kohler Co. d. Zurn Industries, Inc. e. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures

2. Plumbing Trim:


MSA# 11172.00


a. American Standard, U.S. Plumbing Products. b. Chicago Faucet Co. c. Kohler Co. d. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. e. Symmons f. Delta Commercial Faucets

3. Flush Valves:

a. Sloan Valve Co. (Royal and Regal only, not GEM2) b. Zurn Industries, Inc.

4. Fixture Seats:

a. Bemis Mfg. Co. b. Beneke Products c. Church d. Kohler e. Toto f. Olsonite Corp., Olsonite Seats.

5. Sinks:

a. American Standard, U.S. Plumbing Products b. Eljer c. Elkay Manufacturing Co.

6. Fixture Carriers:

a. Josam Mfg. Co. b. Smith. c. Wade d. Zurn Industries, Inc., Hydromechanics Div. e. Watts Drainage f. Mifab

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Responsibilities:

1. Receive, unload, store and protect product on site. 2. Inspect products upon receipt for shortages, damages, or defects and notify supplier within 48

hours. 3. Notify supplier within 20 days of receipt of any hidden damages for products received.

B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

C. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.


MSA# 11172.00


D. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures. 2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. 3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

E. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

F. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.

G. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

H. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

I. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

J. Install controls for accessible fixtures on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

K. Install toilet seats on water closets.

L. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

M. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

N. Install escutcheons at piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Results for Plumbing."

O. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for fixture caulking requirements.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.


MSA# 11172.00


D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



MSA# 11172.00

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT 230170 - 1

SECTION 230170 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. This Section includes:

1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 2. Instructions for Owner’s Personnel.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 1 Requirements for further details.

B. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance data required to be submitted with equipment.

C. Operating Data: Include operating instructions for each piece of equipment and system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. The contents of operating and maintenance manuals shall include the following:

1. Description of mechanical equipment and systems. 2. Operating instructions. 3. Routine maintenance schedules and procedures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OWNER’S PERSONNEL

A. Arrange for suppliers and/or installers to meet with the Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel to provide instruction in the proper operation and maintenance of equipment that requires routine servicing. Include the following:

1. Review of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Required tools. 3. Lubricants.


MSA# 11172.00

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT 230170 - 2

4. Spare parts. 5. Cleaning. 6. Hazards. 7. Warranties and maintenance agreements.

B. Demonstrate equipment and systems operation including the following:

1. Start-up. 2. Shut-down. 3. Emergency conditions. 4. Safety procedures. 5. Setpoint and schedule adjustments. 6. Economy and efficiency adjustments.



MSA# 11172.00

23 05 01 - 1 of 10

SECTION 230501 - COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Scope

1. The base bid shall include furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment and installation of all work required to install complete mechanical systems as outlined in Division-23.

2. Provide HVAC units and ductwork for temporary air conditioning during air handling unit replacements and remove same after new air handling units are operating.

3. Submittal of a bid indicates that the contractor has examined the drawings, specifications, and visited the site and has included all required allowances.

4. Contractor: shall be designated as the sub-contractor for that section of work unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Permits, Fees, Inspection, Laws And Regulations

1. Permits and fees of every nature required in connection with this work shall be obtained and paid for by this contractor who shall also pay for all the installation fees and similar charges.

2. Laws and regulations which bear upon or affect the various branches of this work shall be complied with by this contractor, and are hereby made a part of this contract.

3. All work which laws require to be inspected shall be submitted to the proper public officials for inspections and certificates of final approval must be furnished to the Owner before final acceptance will be given by the Engineer.







MSA# 11172.00

23 05 01 - 2 of 10


A. General Standards

1. The installation of all work shall conform to the applicable State and Local codes and statutes. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall govern:

a. Kentucky Building Code b. American Society for Test Materials (ASTM); c. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); d. Underwriters Laboratories (UL); e. Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). f. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) g. Building Code Seismic Relative Displacement Requirements.

B. Supervision And Workmanship


2. Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent to be in constant charge of the work at all times.

3. Quality Assurances: Contractor if requested shall demonstrate his ability to perform all work to be included under the contract. Assurance if requested, shall be in the form of a list of past projects of similar size and complexity and a list of six (6) references pertaining to those projects. Failure to demonstrate these quality assurances shall be taken as a statement of the contractor’s inability to perform.

4. Contractor shall have a minimum five (5) years experience in the installation of HVAC systems similar to the systems specified.

5. Welders shall show proof satisfactory to the Engineer that they have passed qualifications prescribed by are certified by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or by other reputable and recognized agency, acceptable to the Engineer, using welding procedures set forth in the ASME Boiler Construction Code, Section IX, Welding Qualifications. No welder shall be employed who does not meet the above requirements.

6. Core Drilling: Contractors shall use core drills rather than percussion type equipment for making holes in concrete. All percussion type drilling including hammer drills must be scheduled through owner’s representative.


C. Specifications


2. Furthermore, all materials or labor previously required to fully complete the work shall be included in the contractor's work even though each item necessarily involved be not specifically mentioned or shown. Such work and/or materials shall be of the same grade or quality as the parts actually specified and shown. Should there be a conflict between the plans and specifications, the greater quantity or better quality shall be furnished.

D. Phasing


MSA# 11172.00

23 05 01 - 3 of 10

1. General: Where the scope of work dictates that the project shall be constructed in phases, all costs shall be incurred by this contractor for any temporary work required so that previous phases can be operational while construction is being done to adjacent spaces.

E. Plans

1. Plans are diagrammatic indicating required size, points of termination of ducts and pipes and suggested routes. However, it is not intended that drawings indicate all necessary offsets. It shall be the work of the contractor to install piping and ductwork in such manner as to conform to the structure, avoid obstructions and preserve headroom.

2. Coordination Drawings: The contractor shall provide a 1/4" scale double line set of coordination drawings to the Engineer prior to installation of the systems. This contractor shall provide all necessary coordination drawings required to make sure all disciplines are coordinated and fit into specified mechanical spaces (i.e. ceilings, chases, and all others). The top elevation of all disciplines shall be clearly marked throughout the drawings so that no interferences occur. Drawings shall depict actual clearances of installed equipment, penetration locations and service clearances. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement and positioning of large equipment during construction. Indicate where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the work. Conflicts in equipment and materials shall be corrected prior to installation. Contractor shall provide drawings showing all disciplines for coordination.

3. Exact location of electric outlets, heating equipment, piping, lighting fixtures, ducts, etc., shall be coordinated so there will be no interferences at installation between the various trades. It is the work of the contractor to prepare complete coordination drawings indicating exact location of all items. The engineer shall have the option to move any piece of mechanical equipment up to fifteen feet from location shown on contract documents without any additional cost.

4. All ducts and piping shall be run as straight as possible and symmetrical with architectural items. 5. Piping and ducts shall be concealed in pipe shafts, pipe spaces, and furring wherever possible. 6. Piping and ductwork fabricated before coordination with the other trades will be done at the

contractor's risk.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to submitting shop drawings, conduct a coordination meeting between all trades to review the mechanical and electrical coordination schedule on the mechanical and electrical drawings. Verify that the mechanical electrical coordination schedules on the separate discipline drawings agree. Coordinate which contractor provides, installs and wires, the disconnects, motor starters, controls, etc. between trades. Coordinate the differences in electrical requirements, (ex. Voltage, phase, FLA, MCA and OCP, etc.) between the proposed submitted equipment and mechanical and electrical coordination schedules and address any required changes due to conflicts at no additional costs. Provide copy of mechanical electrical coordination schedule and highlight differences in the submittals compared to these schedules and explain why and the changes that have occurred between trades to address these changes at no additional cost.

B. Refer to individual Sections for submittal requirements for that Section.

C. Refer to Division 1 Requirements for further details.

D. Clearly state equipment markings (i.e. ACU-1), capacities, voltages and model numbers on all submittals. This information shall be clearly stated on the cover sheet in tabular form.


MSA# 11172.00

23 05 01 - 4 of 10

E. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for equipment showing dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, performance with operating points clearly indicated, motor electrical characteristics, gages and finishes of materials, and installation instructions.

F. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction details, and field connection details in accordance with general conditions and supplementary general conditions.

G. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including all factory published maintenance information and include this information in maintenance manuals.

H. Record Drawings: Submit and receive approval prior to Substantial Completion.

1. Provide one (1) electronic set of scanned tiff files for each drawing sheet from the related original “As-Built Field Marks” sheet contained on a compact disc. Multiple discs may be used if necessary. Files may be zipped as long as the compressing process does not damage the file when unzipped. Each drawing/sheet will be scanned to a 400 dpi TIFF / CCITT Group 4 format (black and white). Each scanned tiff file shall be named the same as the drawing sheet number and marked as ”As-Built Field Marks.”

2. Provide four (4) sets of hard copy As-Built Drawings from CAD as-builts. 3. Provide one (1) copy of complete Electronic Drawing Files in PDF format. 4. Provide one (1) electronic set of all CAD drawings each sheet within contained on a compact disc.

Multiple discs may be used if necessary. Files may be zipped as long as the compressing process does not damage the file or its intelligence when unzipped. All drawings shall comply with the current NKU standards.

5. Prepare record drawings in accordance with the requirements in Division 1. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the following installed conditions:

a. Ductwork mains and branches, size and location, locations of dampers and other control devices; filters, boxes, and terminal units.

b. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions, traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc. located). Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping.

c. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.


A. Deliver equipment and materials according to factory shipping requirements. Pack components in factory-fabricated protective containers. Units shall be delivered in sections of such size as will pass through available openings.

B. Store equipment and materials in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.

C. Handling and rigging of equipment and products shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Components and equipment damaged during shipment or handling shall not be installed. Replace and return damaged components to the manufacturer.

D. All equipment and materials shall have the ability to be returned to the manufacturer after purchase and charged a reasonable restocking fee by the manufacturer equal to a small portion of the cost.


MSA# 11172.00

23 05 01 - 5 of 10

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials installed shall be new, full weight, of the best quality. All similar materials shall be of the same type and manufacturer.

B. Contractor is responsible for the safety and good condition of the materials and equipment installed until final acceptance by the Owner. Materials shall be stored to prevent damage or weathering prior to installation.

C. When several materials, products or items of equipment are specified by name for one use, the contractor may select any one of those specified and shall include with his bid an Equipment List listing the equipment selected.

D. Any manufacturer(s) other than scheduled shall have unit dimensions, weights and clearances equal to or less than any specified base-bid equipment, unless approved by the Engineer.

E. The responsibility for costs incurred from deviation from the base scheduled and specified equipment shall be this contractor. Use of any equipment will be considered as a statement that capacities, requirements, clearances and arrangements have been checked and found satisfactory and meet the intent of the scheduled and specified equipment.

F. All manufacturer or Mechanical Contractor provided electrical disconnect switches shall comply with current National Electric Code requirements and rated to meet or exceed the overcurrent device serving the equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect abandoned mechanical materials and equipment indicated to be removed and not indicated to be salvaged or saved.

B. Materials and Equipment To Be Salvaged: Remove, demount, and disconnect existing mechanical materials and equipment, inactive and obsolete piping, fittings and specialties, equipment, ductwork, controls, fixtures, and insulation indicated to be removed and salvaged. Consult with owner as to whether the salvaged material is to be discarded or stored, and deliver materials and equipment to the location designated for storage or dispose in proper manner.

C. Disposal and Cleanup: Remove from the site and legally dispose of demolished materials and equipment not indicated to be salvaged.

D. Mechanical Materials and Equipment: Demolish, remove, dismount, and disconnect the following items:

1. Inactive and obsolete piping, fittings and specialties, equipment, ductwork, controls, fixtures, and insulation.

2. Piping and ducts embedded in floors, walls, and ceilings may remain if such materials do not interfere with new installations.


MSA# 11172.00

23 05 01 - 6 of 10

3. Remove all abandoned and unused piping, ductwork and materials above ceilings and concealed behind walls.

E. Perform refrigerant evacuations and reclaim required for demolished or relocated equipment.



B. Existing Ceilings: Where work is being performed above ceilings, and the architectural drawings do not indicate ceiling modifications by the general contractor, it shall be the responsibility of this contractor to remove and replace existing ceilings where work is being performed. In those instances, all repair and installation of new grid, ceiling panels, etc shall be the responsibility of this contractor. Match existing finishes.

C. New Ceilings: Where existing air outlets are to remain, and the architectural drawings indicate replacement of the ceilings, this contractor shall temporarily remove air outlets, clean and store temporarily. This contractor shall support existing run outs to structure to facilitate replacement of ceiling. This contractor shall re-install existing air outlet at previous location and extend run outs to air outlet after new ceiling is installed. Refer to architectural drawings for all required ceiling replacements. Coordinate with all trades prior to re-installation.

D. Walls & Floors: It shall be the responsibility of this contractor to patch existing walls and floors and match existing finishes where work is being removed or installed and patching is being performed, unless noted otherwise on the architectural drawings.

E. HVAC Units: Replace all air filters in HVAC equipment serving renovated space prior to turning space over to owner. Clean coils, replace belts, adjust or replace pulleys, adjust static pressure setpoints and drives, as required to obtain design air flows. Flush strainers, replace baskets, flush coils, change pump impellers, adjust balancing valves as required to obtain design water flows.

3.3 TEMPORARY SERVICE: REFER TO SECTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Temporary Heating or Cooling: During air handling unit replacement, provide, maintain and pay for all charges for temporary heating or cooling and adequate ventilation in all indicated areas of the project, as may be deemed necessary to protect the building from damage due to heat, cold, dampness, or humidity and shall maintain heating or cooling until new units can be utilized. Use of permanent and existing building heating/cooling systems will not be permitted without prior written permission from the owner, architect, and engineer.

B. All costs for equipment rentals or purchases and temporary duct installation and subsequent removal shall be included in bid.

C. During air handling unit replacement, Contractor shall provide manpower for work to be done continuously (24 hours per day) to perform replacements in the stipulated time frame or quicker.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATION

A. All hangers and supports shall comply with Building Code Seismic Relative Displacement Requirements.


MSA# 11172.00

23 05 01 - 7 of 10

B. Support all piping, ductwork and equipment by hangers or brackets. Furnish structural steel members, (prime painted with zinc chromate) where required to support piping and equipment. No portion of piping or valves shall be supported by equipment. Double nut all threaded rods.

C. Ductwork - Support by means of hangers as follows:

Duct

Width Hanger Size and Type Max. Spacing 30 or less (#16 gage) 8

31 to 60 (#14 gage) 8 61 to 90 3/8" dia. rod 8

Over 90 3/8" dia. rod 4

D. A pair of hangers shall be located at every transverse joint and elsewhere according to the table. Where ductwork is hung via rods, rods shall be double nutted.

E. Suspend hangers from joist or I beam by means of C clamps with lock nut and retaining clip, Anvil International Fig. 86, Elcen, or approved equal. Suspend hanger rods from structural concrete slab by means of universal insert.

3.5 FIRE ALARM RELATED WORK FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

A. The following applies whether or not shown on drawings. Prior to submitting a bid, each contractor shall review documents of all other branches which may have an impact on such work.

1. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor who installs the alarm panel and/or wiring to provide all necessary working drawings and submittals (wiring diagrams, zone schedule, plan view layouts, routing, wiring, device & panel submittals, etc.). These submittals shall be approved by the State Fire Marshall's office (or a similar agency as locally required) prior to submittal to engineer. All components shall be UL listed and NFPA approved for their specific application. Where control panels are required, provide remote annunciator (at location as directed in field) and provide full battery back-up as required by NFPA.

2. All smoke detectors shall be specifically UL listed for use with the existing or new building fire alarm panel(s) and shall be provided with all required power supply/alarm wiring, sampling tubes, test station, auxiliary contacts, etc.

3. All work shall be in strict compliance with all applicable sections of the latest edition of NFPA. Each air handling unit, sprinkler flow switch and/or sprinkler tamper switch shall be separately zoned. All fire alarm system wiring shall be supervised and installed in conduit (3/4" minimum).

B. Unless local prevailing codes require otherwise, fire alarm related work for mechanical systems shall be as follows:

1. For air handling units and common air systems with capacity of 2000 cfm or above, Electrical Contractor shall furnish, HVAC Contractor shall mount, and Electrical Contractor shall wire a UL listed photoelectric smoke detector (with all required sampling tubes, test stations, auxiliary contacts, etc.). Detector shall be located in the main return duct (prior to outside air connection), and installed as required by manufacturer. Consult with local authorities in jurisdiction for exact location. Electrical Contractor will make alarm system connections. Temperature Controls Contractor shall make fan shut down control wiring connections thru auxiliary NC contacts in detector sub base. Consult local authorities in jurisdiction for exact location.


MSA# 11172.00

23 05 01 - 8 of 10

2. For air handling units and air systems with capacity of 15,000 cfm or above and serve two or more stories, smoke detectors shall be installed at each story. Such smoke detectors shall be located upstream of the connection between the return air riser and any branch air ducts or plenums. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish to the HVAC Contractor the required quantity of UL listed photoelectric smoke detectors. The HVAC Contractor shall install the housing and sampling tube in each duct system. The Electrical Contractor will install smoke detectors and make alarm system connections. Temperature Controls Contractor shall make fan shut down control wiring connections thru auxiliary NC contacts in detector sub base. Consult local authorities in jurisdiction for exact location.

3. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with mechanical contractors and shall install the detectors in easily accessible locations. Electrical Contractor shall provide all necessary fire alarm system wiring (in conduit) and supplementary work, components, equipment, etc. as required to interface the sprinkler and/or smoke detector work with the building fire alarm system(s).

4. HVAC Contractor shall make wiring connection from the auxiliary contacts of the relay module or detectors into fan control circuits to stop fans in event of presence of smoke. If alarm status for the smoke detector is indicated in specification section 230993, then the HVAC/ Temperature Controls Contractor is responsible for providing a control relay and all wiring from the smoke detector to allow notification at the BAS. If a supply & return/exhaust fan arrangement is installed, the HVAC/ Temperature Controls Contractor shall provide a 3-Pole Double Throw relay to shut down both the supply and return/exhaust fans in event of presence of smoke.


A. Cutting and Patching:

1. Cut and drill all openings in walls and floors required for the installation. Secure approval of Engineer before cutting and drilling. Neatly patch all openings cut.

2. Cutting and patching to be held to a minimum by arranging with other contractors for all sleeves and openings before construction is started.

B. Fire Caulking:

1. Patching through fire rated walls and enclosures shall not diminish the rating of that wall or enclosure. Patch shall be equal to rockwool, firestop, caulk or approved "rated" patch.

2. Provide products equivalent to the following:

a. For Floor Openings: Instant Firestop; 305-SL b. For Wall Openings: Instant Firestop; 344-GG c. Mineral Felt: Instant Firestop; Type MW d. For Insulated Pipes: Instant Firestop; Type PI e. For Fill Areas: Instant Firestop; C-1000

3. For larger openings where pipes penetrate fire rated enclosures that can not be sealed with products described above, utilize approved UL products equal to 3M FireDam Spray 200. Install per manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Access Panels:

1. Furnish all access panels required for proper servicing of equipment. Provide access panels for all concealed valves, vents, controls, cleanout doors, and sprinkler devices required by NFPA. Provide access panels for all fire and/or fire & smoke dampers. Provide frame as required for finish. Furnish panels to General Contractor. Exact locations to be approved by the Architect.


MSA# 11172.00

23 05 01 - 9 of 10

Minimum size to be 12" x 12", units to be 16 gauge steel, locking device shall be screwdriver cam locks.

D. Sleeves:

1. Install standard Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves two sizes larger than pipes passing through floors, walls or masonry construction.

2. Sleeves through walls to be cut flush with both faces. 3. Sleeves through floor to extend one inch above floor top elevation. 4. Pipes penetrating roof shall use a pipe curb assembly equal to Pate Co. Curb type and flashing per

roofing manufacturer’s requirements. 5. Caulk between sleeves and pipes with rockwool and caulk around sleeves with sealing compound.

Material must meet all applicable fire ratings required.

E. Escutcheon plates:

1. Install manufactured chromium plated escutcheon plates wherever uninsulated exposed pipes pass through walls, floors, or ceilings. Escutcheon inside diameter to closely fit around pipe and outside diameter to completely cover opening.

F. Piping Penetrations:

1. Furnish and set all forms required in masonry walls or foundation to accommodate pipes. 2. Provide flexible connectors where all pipes or ducts cross building expansion joints equal to

Flexonics. Coordinate exact quantity & location with Architectural plans prior to installation of piping or ductwork.

3.7 PAINTING, MARKING AND NAMEPLATE DATA

A. Nameplate: For each piece of power operated mechanical equipment provide a permanent operational data nameplate indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location.

B. All exposed piping, ductwork and equipment shall be identified by stenciling or as listed in the identification section by this contractor.

1. Equipment shall be labeled with tag numbers same as used on drawings or indicated in specifications.

2. Letters shall be 1" tall for piping and 4" tall for ductwork and equipment. The air conditioning system numbers and zone numbers shall be added after each designation of the air conditioning supply ductwork.

3. Provide numbered brass tags not less than 1-1/2" diameter on all shutoff valves. Furnish the Owner with typewritten sheets in duplicate showing the valve numbers, valve location, and what it controls. Typewritten sheets shall be furnished framed under glass.

3.8 CLEANING EQUIPMENT AND PREMISES

A. Clean all parts of the apparatus and equipment. Exposed parts which are to be painted shall be cleaned of cement, plaster and other materials and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all corners and cracks scraped out.


MSA# 11172.00

23 05 01 - 10 of 10

B. Exposed metal work shall be brushed down with steel brushes to remove rust and other spots and left smooth and clean. Remove trapped elements during cleaning and flushing period, after which they shall be replaced and adjusted.

C. During the progress of the work, the contractor shall clean up after his men and leave the premises and all portions of the building in which he is working in a clean and safe condition.



MSA# 11172.00

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1

SECTION 230513 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.


A. Scope

1. This section includes requirements for motors furnished with HVAC equipment. 2. This section includes requirements for Variable Frequency Drives furnished with HVAC

equipment.


A. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code".

B. VFD’s and options shall be UL and cUL listed as a complete assembly. VFD’s and options shall be CE labeled as a component.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 1 Requirements for further details.

B. Clearly state equipment markings (i.e. ACU-1), capacities, voltages and model numbers on all submittals. This information shall be clearly stated on the cover sheet in tabular form.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for equipment showing dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, performance with operating points clearly indicated, motor electrical characteristics, gages and finishes of materials, and installation instructions.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction details, and field connection details in accordance with general conditions and supplementary general conditions.

E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including all factory published maintenance information and include this information in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. All mechanical equipment shall be UL listed for use with "HACR" circuit breakers.


MSA# 11172.00


B. The motor control apparatus shall be furnished complete as a part of the motor and apparatus which it operates when called for in certain instances in the Mechanical Division. Motor control apparatus except as above shall be complete, factory wired and tested, ready for connections to be made under Division 26.

2.2 MOTORS

A. All motors shall be in accordance with the latest standards of NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code".

B. Refer to Schedule of Equipment and the Electrical specifications and drawings for the exact voltage of motors.

C. Wherever in these specifications, a motor voltage is listed, the motor shall be wound for the listed voltage and none other will be accepted.

D. Service Factors indicated for motors are minimum values and apply at frequency and utilization voltage at which motor is connected. Provide motors, which will operate in the service factor range when supply voltage is within 10 percent of motor voltage rating.

E. Temperature Rise: Based on 40 degree C ambient except as otherwise indicated.

F. Polyphase Motors

1. Squirrel cage induction type. 2. NEMA design letter Designation "B". 3. Internal thermal overload protection. 4. Bearings: double shielded, prelubricated, regreasable. 5. Energy Efficient Motors: equal or greater than NEMA MG-1. 6. 1.25 Service factor. 7. Multi Speed Motors: separate windings for each speed.

G. Single-Phase Motors

1. Internal thermal overload protection. 2. Motor starters incorporated as an integral part of equipment shall be NEMA standard. 3. Sealed, prelubricated bearings.

2.3 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A. Furnished by Owner

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. All electrical work associated with motors and motor control shall be in accordance with the latest standards of NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code".

B. Electrical wiring shall be provided under Division 26 unless specifically called for in another section of the specifications.


MSA# 11172.00


C. An enclosed safety type, NEMA Type HD motor disconnect switch shall be furnished and installed for each motor installation unless specifically mentioned as furnished under another section of these specifications.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Install frequency drives in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

3.3 START-UP

A. Each VFD is furnished with certified factory start-up by a factory-authorized service center.

3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING

A. Starting procedures for frequency drives.

B. Energize motor, verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.

C. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.



MSA# 11172.00

METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 1

SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL





1. Temperature gages and fittings. 2. Pressure gages and fittings. 3. Test plugs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include scale ranges.

B. Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers and gages indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, and location for each.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc. 2. Trerice (H.O.) Co. 3. Marsh Instrument Co., Unit of General Signal. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 5. Miljoco


MSA# 11172.00


2.2 THERMOMETERS

A. Plastic case, red mercury or organic-liquid filled with magnifying lens, glass or plastic window, adjustable 180 degrees in vertical plane and 360 degrees in horizontal plane with locking device, and metal stem for thermowell installation.

B. Thermowell: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type, diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.

C. Accuracy:

1. Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.

D. Temperature ranges for services listed as follows:

1. Hot Water: 50 to 240 degree F with 2 degree F degree minor divisions. 2. Chilled Water: 30 to 100 degree F with 1 degree F minor divisions.

2.3 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct mounting, dial type with cast aluminum case, 4-1/2” dial, glass window, bourdon tube, and brass and bronze wetted parts.

B. Accuracy:

1. Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.

C. Pressure ranges for services listed as follows:

1. Hot Water: 0 to 60 psi with 10 psi figure intervals and 1 psi minor divisions. 2. Chilled Water: 0 to 60 psi with 10 psi figure intervals and 1 psi minor divisions. 3. Low Pressure Steam: 0 to 30 psi with 5 psi figure intervals and 0.5 psi minor divisions.

D. Gage Attachments:

1. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

2. Syphons: Loop-shaped section of brass pipe with NPS 1/4 pipe threads. 3. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.4 TEST PLUGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. MG Piping Products Co. 3. National Meter, Inc. 4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 5. Sisco Manufacturing Co.


MSA# 11172.00


6. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

B. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.

C. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

D. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.

1. Insert material for air, water, oil, or gas service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR. 2. Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be EPDM.

E. Test Kit: Furnish one test kit containing one pressure gage and adaptor, two thermometers, and carrying case. Pressure gage, adapter probes, and thermometer sensing elements shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

1. Pressure Gage: Small bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch-diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be 0 to 200 psig .

2. Low-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch-diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 25 to 125 deg F.

3. High-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch-diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 0 to 220 deg F.

4. Carrying case shall have formed instrument padding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

B. Install thermometers in vertical and tilted positions to allow reading by observer standing on floor.

C. Install thermometers in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:

1. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central systems.

D. Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage valve, located on pipe at most readable position.

1. In water piping, include snubber between valve and gage. 2. In steam piping, include syphon between valve and gage.

E. Install pressure gages in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:

1. Inlet and outlet of coils in air handlers. 2. At locations of pressure sensor devices for variable volume air handlers. 3. Inlet and outlet of steam pressure reducing valves

F. Install test plugs in piping tee at VAV box water coils, terminal unit water coils, and where indicated. Locate on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.


MSA# 11172.00


3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

B. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gages and factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.



MSA# 11172.00

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 1

SECTION 230523 – GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.


A. Types of valves specified in this section include the following:

1. Gate Valves 2. Ball Valves 3. Globe Valves 4. Check Valves

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 23 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 2. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and charts.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves:

1. CWP: Cold working pressure. 2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 3. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 4. SWP: Steam working pressure. 5. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


MSA# 11172.00


1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set gate and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor

storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide valves of one of the following:

1. Nibco 2. Crane 3. Milwaukee 4. Hammond 5. Stockham 6. Keystone 7. Watts 8. Rockwell 9. Apollo 10. Kitz

2.2 VALVE FEATURES

A. Valve Design: Valves shall have rising stem, or rising outside screw and yoke stems; except, non-rising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full extension of rising stems.

B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.

C. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.

D. Operators: Provide the following special operator features:

1. Handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter turn. 2. Lever Handle on quarter-turn valves 6 inch and smaller, except for plug valves. Provide one

wrench for every 10 plug valves.


MSA# 11172.00


3. Chain-wheel operators for valves 4 inch and larger installed 96 inches or higher above finished floor elevation. Extend chains to an elevation of 6'-0" above finished floor elevation. Install in mechanical room locations only.

E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to receive insulation.

2.3 GATE VALVES

A. Size 2 Inch and Smaller: Class 125, body and bonnet of cast bronze, threaded ends, solid disc, copper- silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Class 150 valves meeting the above shall be used where pressure requires.

B. Size 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze mounted, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B, flanged ends, and "Teflon" impregnated packing and two-piece backing gland assembly.

2.4 BALL VALVES

A. Size 1 Inch and Smaller: 2-piece body, 600 psi CWP, 150 psi SWP, Cast Bronze body, full port, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, adjustable packing gland, chrome plated bronze ball, with threaded ends, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide extended valve stems for valves used on insulated lines.

B. Size 1-1/4 Inch to 3 Inch: 3-piece body, 600 psi CWP, 150 psi SWP, Cast Bronze body, conventional port, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, adjustable packing gland, chrome plated bronze ball, threaded ends, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide extended valve stems for valves used on insulated lines.

2.5 GLOBE VALVES

A. Size 2 Inch and Smaller: Class 125, body and screwed bonnet of cast bronze, threaded ends, brass or replaceable composition disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, and malleable iron handwheel. Class 150 valves meeting the above shall be used where pressure requires.

B. Size 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Class 125 iron body and bolted bonnet, Class B; outside screw and yoke, bronze mounted, flanged ends, and two-piece backing gland assembly.

2.6 CHECK VALVES

A. Swing Check Valves:

1. Size 2 Inch and Smaller: Class 125 cast bronze body and cap, horizontal swing, Y-pattern, with a bronze disc, and threaded ends. Valve shall be capable of being reground while the valve remains in the line. Class 150 valves meeting the above specifications may be used where pressure requires or Class 125 valves are not available.

2. Size 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Class 125 cast iron body and bolted cap, Class B; horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line. Class 150 valves meeting the above specifications may be used where pressure requires or Class 125 valves are not available.


MSA# 11172.00


B. Wafer Check Valves: Class 250, cast iron body; with replaceable bronze seat, and non-slam design lapped and balanced twin bronze flappers and stainless steel trim and torsion spring. Provide valves designed to open and close at approximately one foot differential pressure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior through the end ports, for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used which prevents disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Actuate valve through an open-close and close-open cycle. Examine functionally significant features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such actuation. Following examination, return the valve closure member to the position in which it was shipped.

C. Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (out-of-round or local indentation) and cleanliness.

D. Replace defective valves with new valves.

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions which might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size and material, and for freedom from defects and damage.

3.2 VALVE SELECTION

A. Use gate or ball valves for shut-off duty.

B. Use globe, and ball valves for throttling duty.

C. Use gate and globe valves for steam and steam condensate applications.

D. Control valves shall be globe or ball type modulating valves.

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATIONS

A. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

B. Install valves and unions for each item of equipment in a manner to allow equipment removal without system shut-down. Unions are not required on flanged devices. Isolation valves shall be installed on branch lines serving two or more pieces of equipment and at every 100 feet of pipe run.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.

D. Install 3-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling type valve in the bypass and shut-off type valves on each side of the pressure reducing valve.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow as follows:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Swing Check Valves: horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or Vertical position, between flanges.

3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS

A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

B. Align threads at point of assembly.

C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is specified).

D. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.

3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS

A. Align flanges surfaces parallel.

B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using a torque wrench.

C. For dead end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper shutoff and retention.


A. Testing: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valve if leak persists.


A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare to receive finish painting or insulation.



MSA# 11172.00

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC DUCTWORK, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1

SECTION 230529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC DUCTWORK, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Equipment supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."


A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Anvil International, Inc. 2. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 3. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 4. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped for hangers in contact with galvanized piping.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner for hangers in contact with copper piping.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.

B. Manufacturers:

1. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 2. Pipe Shields, Inc. 3. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, with vapor barrier.

D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533,

E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.


MSA# 11172.00


G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.



1. Manufacturers:


B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:




2.6 ROOF EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced metal equipment supports capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.

B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

C. Material: Zinc-coated galvanized steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick.

D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Curbs Plus, Inc. 2. Pate Company (The).


MSA# 11172.00


3. Roof Products, Inc. 4. Thybar Corporation.




1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

B. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms.

C. Do not suspend hangers from roof decks. Suspend from roof trusses and joists/joist girders only at panel points, at top cord only, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

E. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion bends and similar units.

F. Provide adjustable, steel clevis hangers (MSS Type 1) for suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes. Hangers approved equal to Anvil Fig. 260.

G. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

H. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by manufacturer.

I. Shields:

1. Install protective galvanized steel shields, MSS Type 40, on insulated piping smaller than 2-inch IPS. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall be a minimum of 12-inches in length.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Install thermal-hanger shield inserts on all insulated piping size 2-inch IPS and larger.

3.2 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS

A. All hangers and supports shall comply with Building Code Seismic Relative Displacement Requirements.

B. Support all piping, ductwork and equipment by hangers or brackets. Furnish structural steel members, (prime painted with zinc chromate) where required to support piping and equipment. No portion of piping or valves shall be supported by equipment. Double nut all threaded rods.

C. Pipe hangers to be Anvil International Clevis Hanger Fig. 260, Elcen, or approved equal. Rod sizes to conform to the following: 3/8" rods for 3/4"-2" pipe; 1/2" rods for 2-1/2"-3" pipe; 5/8" for 4"-5" and 3/4" for 6". All piping within 100 feet of pumps or vibrating equipment to be supported on spring vibration isolators. Hangers shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through unobstructed, provide saddle support for insulation at all hanger. Note: 1/4" rods are not acceptable.

D. Riser clamps to be Anvil International Fig. 261 or equal.

E. Ductwork - Support by means of hangers as follows:

Duct

Width Hanger Size and Type Max. Spacing 30 or less (#16 gage) 8

31 to 60 (#14 gage) 8 61 to 90 3/8" dia. rod 8

Over 90 3/8" dia. rod 4

F. A pair of hangers shall be located at every transverse joint and elsewhere according to the table. Where ductwork is hung via rods, rods shall be double nutted.

G. Suspend hangers from joist or I beam by means of C clamps with lock nut and retaining clip, Anvil International Fig. 86, Elcen, or approved equal. Suspend hanger rods from structural concrete slab by means of universal insert.

H. Brace piping by structural steel members securely attached to building construction.

I. Anchor pipes by means of structural steel members securely attached to building construction.

J. Where piping is close to floor, support on adjustable pipe support.

K. Hanger spacing for piping unless otherwise noted is to be as follows: 1-1/4 or smaller to be 8' O.C.; 1-1/2"-2" to be 10' O.C.; 2-1/2" and larger to be 12' O.C. and at each change of direction. Hanger spacing for copper pipe to be as follows: 1" or smaller 6' O.C.; 1-1/4" or larger 8' O.C. Hanger spacing for cast iron soil pipe - 5' O.C. and at each hub. Piping shall be also supported at each change in direction at valves and equipment.

L. Where galvanized piping is being used, all supports, anchors, and hangers shall also be galvanized.

M. Galvanized hangers shall be used to support all piping that is exposed to the elements of nature and excessive humidity, including, but not limited to piping in parking garages, pool areas, etc.


MSA# 11172.00


N. Piping connections to all equipment with moving parts shall be isolated with braided copper or stainless steel flexible links, which shall be selected to absorb the deflection on the isolating members.

O. The use of pumps or other equipment as piping supports shall be prohibited. All such connectors and their supports shall be independently supported from the building structure and inspected and approved by the Engineer before bolting.


A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment.

3.4 METAL FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment supports. Install and align fabricated anchors in indicated locations.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:

D. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

E. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

F. Remove welding flux immediately.

G. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so that contours welded surfaces to match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 section "Painting" of these specifications.

C. For galvanized surfaces clean welds bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



MSA# 11172.00

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1

SECTION 230553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Type of identification devices specified in this section include the following:

1. Ductwork Markers. 2. Plastic Pipe Markers. 3. Valve Tags. 4. Schedule Frames. 5. Equipment Tags.

B. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. ASME A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.


MSA# 11172.00


B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Ductwork Markers

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch or 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: [Black] [Blue] [Red]. 3. Background Color: White. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by

3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets, rivets or self-tapping screws, self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. 9. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

a. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

b. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

B. Plastic Pipe Markers

1. General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, flexible or semi-rigid, permanent, color- coded, plastic-sheet pipe markers.

2. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods:

3. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 4. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. 5. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). 6. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" wide; full

circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2". 7. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either

full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods:

8. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). 9. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2" wide; full

circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3". 10. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's standard

stainless steel bands. 11. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with

piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Valve Tags

1. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 1-1/2" diameter x 19-gage polished brass valve tags with stamp- engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/2" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener.

2. Valve Tag Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose.

3. Provide a list of all valves utilized for this project which will include the following:

a. Valve # as described below. b. Valve location. c. Architectural Room # to which service is provided by the valve. d. Function served (ex. VAV box, AHU, Unit Heater, etc.)

4. This information shall be provided in a spreadsheet format on CD or flash drive with printed copies in the project manual.

5. All valve tags shall include an alpha prefix from the list below to identify the system, followed by a letter for the floor level, followed by a sequential number beginning with “01” for each system. (ex. First water valve for heating hot water supply on floor level 1 is: HWS-101).

6. Abbreviations for HVAC System Valves:

1) CWS Chilled Water Supply 2) CWR Chilled Water Return 3) HWS Hot Water Supply 4) HWR Hot Water Return 5) LPS Low Pressure Steam (under 30 psi) 6) C Steam Condensate Line

b. Note: The abbreviations noted above shall be used for piping markers in addition to those specified herein.

D. Equipment Tags

1. Metal Labels for Equipment:

a. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

b. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

c. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

d. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. e. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

2. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

a. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, minimum 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

b. Letter Color: Black. c. Background Color: White. d. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.


MSA# 11172.00


e. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

f. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

g. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. h. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

3. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

4. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

E. Manufacturer

1. General: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials of one of the following:

a. Brady (W.H.) Co., Signmark Div. b. Brimar c. Seton Name Plate Corp.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Ductwork Identification

1. General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork with stenciled signs and arrows, showing ductwork service and direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides most contrast with ductwork color).

2. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only by removable ceiling system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues into concealed enclosures (shaft, underground or similar concealment), and at 50' spacings along exposed runs. Identification shall be applied only to new work.

B. Piping System Identification

1. General: Install pipe markers on each system of flow, provide type and temperature identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow:


MSA# 11172.00


a. For example: Heating (200 degrees F) Supply

2. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations. Identification shall be provided only new work.

3. Near each valve and control device. 4. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at

branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. 5. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible

enclosures. 6. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. 7. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 8. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to

25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. 9. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers.

C. Valve Identification

1. General: Provide valve tag on every new valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system.

2. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in machine rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Architect/Engineer.

D. Mechanical Equipment Identification:

1. HVAC equipment identification: The contractor shall provide labeling for each piece of equipment above the ceiling. Labeling shall be on ceiling grid (not ceiling tile) below the equipment. The label shall match the equipment identification shown on the drawings sheet.

2. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices:

a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets.

b. Meters, gages, thermometers and similar units. c. Condensing units and similar motor-driven units. d. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, air blenders and mixing boxes. e. Tanks and pressure vessels. f. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water treatment systems and similar equipment.



MSA# 11172.00

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. This Section specifies the requirements and procedures total mechanical systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results.

C. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems:

1. Supply air systems, all pressure ranges including variable volume systems: 2. Return air systems. 3. Exhaust air systems. 4. Hydronic systems. 5. Verify temperature control system operation.


A. Codes and Standards:

1. AABC: "National Standards for Total System Balance". 2. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, Systems Volume, Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting, and

Balancing.

B. Agency Qualifications

1. The HVAC Contractor shall procure the services of an independent Balance and Testing Agency, approved by the Engineer, and a member of Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or NEBB, which specializes in the balancing and testing of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems, to balance, adjust and test all air and water systems and equipment as herein specified.

2. All work by this agency shall be done under direct supervision of a qualified heating and ventilating Engineer employed by this agency.

3. All instruments used by this agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order.

C. The Balance and Testing Agency must provide the technicians with the following instruments for field use:

1. One set of pressure gages and fittings. 2. Dry bulb thermometer. 3. Wet bulb thermometer. 4. Thermocouple unit and thermocouples. 5. Set of balancing cork adjustment wrenches. 6. Portable field flowmeter.


MSA# 11172.00


D. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.

E. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

a. Submittal distribution requirements. b. The Contract Documents examination report. c. TAB plan. d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements. e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

2. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following:

a. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. b. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and

referenced in this Specification.

F. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems." NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." TAB firm's forms approved by Architect.

G. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems NEBB's " Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems, " Section II, " Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."

H. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer.

1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities.

C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, and other pollutants.


MSA# 11172.00


D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

E. NC: Noise criteria.

F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results.

G. RC: Room criteria.

H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

I. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

J. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.

K. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

L. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

M. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

N. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system.

O. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.

P. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and reporting TAB procedures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Agency Data

1. Submit proof that the proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meets the qualifications specified below.

B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data that include how to test, adjust, and balance the building systems. Include this information in maintenance data specified in Division 1.

C. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of the Test and Balance Engineer. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how the systems have been installed; are a true representation of how the systems are operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are an accurate record of all final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems. Follow the procedures and format specified below:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Final Report: Upon verification and approval prepare final reports, type written, and organized and formatted as specified below. Submit 2 complete sets of final reports.

2. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the referenced standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Bind report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data in reinforced, vinyl, three-ring binders. Provide binding edge labels with the project identification and a title descriptive of the contents. Divide the contents of the binder into the below listed divisions, separated by divider tabs:

a. General Information and Summary b. Air Systems c. Hydronic Systems d. Temperature Control Systems e. Special Systems f. Sound and Vibration Systems

D. Qualification Data: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 6 copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 6 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

F. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 6 copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.

G. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm.

H. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms.

I. Warranty submittals should be forwarded to Owner for review and approval by Owner's legal counsel.

J. Warranties specified in this Section.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning procedures.

B. Test, adjust, and balance the air systems before hydronic, steam, and refrigerant systems.

C. Test, adjust and balance air conditioning systems during summer season and heating systems during winter season, including at least a period of operation at outside conditions within 5 deg F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10 deg F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. Take final temperature readings during seasonal operation.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.


MSA# 11172.00


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities.

B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

1.8 WARRANTY (PROVIDE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING)

A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:

1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.

B. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:

1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEM BALANCING

A. Check filters for cleanliness.

B. Check dampers (both volume and fire) for correct and locked position, and temperature control for completeness of installation before starting fans.

C. Place outlet dampers in the full open position.

D. Lubricate all motors and bearings

E. Check fan belt tension

F. Check fan rotation

G. Air balance and testing shall not begin until the system has been completed and is in full working order. The Contractor shall put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment into full


MSA# 11172.00


operation and shall continue the operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. The contractor shall submit within 30 days after receipt of contract, 8 copies of submittal data for the testing and balancing of the air conditioning, heating, and ventilating systems. The Air Balance and Testing Agency shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least five projects of similar size and scope.

H. Where a VFD is used to control fan speed, the fan shall be balanced so that 60 Hz on the VFD is at least 100% of design air flow and pulleys and/or belts shall be modified to achieve design air flow.

3.2 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEM BALANCING

A. Open valves to full open position.

B. Remove and clean all strainers.

C. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.

D. Lubricate all motors and bearings.

E. Main balance valve (or triple duty valve) shall not be set below 75% open. Impeller shall be changed out to obtain flow beyond these parameters.

3.3 MEASUREMENTS

A. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the tolerances specified in the referenced standards. Instruments shall be properly maintained and protected against damage.

3.4 PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance with the detailed procedures outlined in the referenced standards.

B. Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures.

1. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed. 2. Seal ducts and piping after testing. Then test for leaks and repair if found. 3. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier.

C. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions; valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark with paint or other suitable, permanent identification materials.

D. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit test results.



MSA# 11172.00

DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1

SECTION 230713 – DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Section 23 33 53 – Duct liners.


A. Types of duct insulation specified in this section include the following:

1. HVAC Ductwork.


A. Codes and Standards

1. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less, as tested by ANSI/ASTM and NFPA 255.

2. Insulation tape shall comply with UL 181.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Schedule: Submit schedule showing insulation products which will be used for each application, indicating thickness, density, and accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. 3. Knauf 4. CertainTeed. 5. Johns Manville.


MSA# 11172.00


B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. R-Values for insulation on duct within building shall be per minimum energy code requirements.

D. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with vapor barrier all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

E. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with vapor barrier all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

F. Vapor Barrier Material for Ductwork: Paper-backed aluminum-foil, except as otherwise indicated; strength and permeability rating equivalent to factory-applied vapor barriers on adjoining ductwork insulation, where available; with following additional construction characteristics:

1. High Puncture Resistance: Low vapor transmission (for ducts in exposed areas: Mech. Rooms, etc.)

2. Moderate Puncture Resistance: Medium vapor transmission (for ducts in concealed areas).

G. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

H. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCTWORK INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Cold Ductwork (Below Ambient Temperature):

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold ductwork:

a. Outdoor Air and/or Exhaust

1) HVAC Ductwork (OA) between outside air entrance and fan inlet or HVAC unit inlet.

2) HVAC Louvers, Plenums and Ductwork three feet downstream of wall penetrations. 3) HVAC Ductwork (OA & Exhaust) three feet downstream of roof penetrations.

b. Supply and/or Return

1) HVAC Ductwork (Supply) between fan discharge, or HVAC unit discharge, and room terminal outlet(s).

2) HVAC ductwork (Supply) exposed in ceiling plenums, mechanical rooms, boiler rooms, storage rooms, utility spaces, etc. does require insulation.

3) HVAC Ductwork (Return) three feet downstream of roof penetrations. 4) HVAC Ductwork (Supply) exposed in conditioned spaces does not require

insulation.


MSA# 11172.00


5) HVAC Ductwork (Return) from Air Handling Unit to open plenum return system shall be lined in lieu of wrapped.

6) HVAC Ductwork (Supply & Return) serving Theater space shall be lined in lieu of wrapped.

c. Grilles, Registers & Diffusers

1) Provide insulation on collar and backside of supply diffusers in all ceiling spaces.Provide insulation on plenum box of all supply grilles & registers in all ceiling spaces. All Transfer Air ducts shall be provided with acoustic lining unless otherwise noted on drawings.

2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation:

a. Insulation: R5 Minimum Externally wrapped rigid fiberglass; 1-1/2" thick, 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. density on rectangular surfaces and 1.5 lb/cu. Ft. density on round surfaces.

b. Insulation: R5 Minimum Externally wrapped flexible fiberglass; 1-1/2" thick, application limited to concealed locations, 0.75 lb/cu. Ft. density.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.

B. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

C. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage.

D. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

E. Lined Ductwork: Except as otherwise indicated, omit insulation on ductwork where internal insulation or sound absorbing linings have been installed.

F. Corner Angles: Install corner angles on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacketing.

G. Provide insulation on collar and backside of supply diffusers in all ceiling spaces.Provide insulation on plenum box of all supply grilles & registers in all ceiling spaces.PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Repair damaged vapor barrier using vapor barrier tape to fully cover torn area.

B. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.



MSA# 11172.00

HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 1

SECTION 230719 – HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Types of pipe insulation specified in this section include the following:

1. Hot Water Piping System. 2. Chilled Water Piping System. 3. Steam Piping System. 4. Steam Condensate Piping System. 5. Refrigerant Piping Systems. 6. Air Conditioner Condensate Drain Piping.



1. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less, as tested by ANSI/ASTM and NFPA 255.

2. Insulation tape shall comply with UL 181.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Schedule: Submit schedule showing insulation products which will be used for each application, indicating thickness, density, and accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING INSULATION MATERIAL

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Armacell 3. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.


MSA# 11172.00


4. Knauf 5. CertainTeed. 6. Johns Manville. 7. Pittsburg Corning Corp.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. R-Values for insulation on piping building shall be per minimum energy code requirements.

D. Fiberglass piping insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1

E. Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric Piping Insulation: C 534, Type I without slits.

F. Vapor Barrier Material: Paper-backed aluminum foil, except as otherwise indicated, strength and permeability rating equivalent to adjoining pipe insulation jacketing.

G. Piping Insulation Accessories: Staples, bands, wires, tape, and similar items as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

H. Fitting Covers: One piece, high-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; 20 mil thickness; factory fabricated to conform to fitting type and pipe size.

I. Piping Insulation Compounds: Cement, adhesives, sealers, and protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

J. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 on all insulated piping. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation.

K. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; 20 mil thickness; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

L. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14., smooth finish, 0.016 inch thickness.

M. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION

A. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to testing and acceptance of tests.

B. Repair or replace damaged existing insulation as indicated or required.

C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.


MSA# 11172.00


E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage.

F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated.

G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

H. Provide continuous insulation through hangers, straps and all other supporting members.

I. Provide PVC jacketing around all piping and fittings that are exposed within building, including mechanical rooms and equipment closets.

J. Provide aluminum jacketing around all piping and fittings that are exposed exterior to the building.

K. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece pre-molded PVC fitting covers.

L. Install protective metal shields and thermal hanger shield inserts at all supporting members to prevent compression of insulation. Refer to Section “Hangers And Supports For HVAC Piping And Equipment.”

M. Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric Installation: Slide full sections of insulation onto pipe. Do not slit pipe to fit around piping. All edges shall be clean cut. Insulation shall be pushed onto pipe, never pulled. All seams and butt joints shall be adhered and sealed using adhesive equal to Armaflex 520 Adhesive.

3.2 COLD PIPING (40 DEG F TO AMBIENT)

A. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold HVAC piping systems:

1. Chilled water supply and return piping. 2. Overhead HVAC unit condensate drain piping.

B. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation:

1. Fiberglass:

a. 1" thickness for pipe sizes up to and including 4", b. 1-1/2" thickness for pipe sizes from 5" to 8” c. 2” thickness for pipe sizes over 8”

2. Make-up water piping and overhead condensate drain piping may be insulated with 1/2" thickness closed celled insulation.

3.3 HOT PIPING (FROM 90 DEG F TO 250 DEG F )

A. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot HVAC piping systems:

1. Hot Water Supply and Return Piping. 2. Steam Piping up to 15 psig. 3. Steam Condensate Piping.


MSA# 11172.00


B. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following types and thicknesses of insulation:

1. Fiberglass:

a. 1" thickness for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/4", b. 1-1/2" thickness for pipe sizes 1-1/2" through 4", c. 2" thickness for pipe sizes 5" and over.

3.4 SUB-FREEZING PIPING (BELOW 39 DEG F)

A. Application Requirements: Insulate the following sub-freezing HVAC piping systems:

1. Refrigerant suction lines between evaporators and compressors. 2. For Ductless Split Systems insulate refrigerant suction and liquid lines between evaporators and

condensing units. Insulate each line separately.

B. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation:

1. Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric: On refrigerant piping only:

a. 1/2" thickness for pipe sizes up to and including 1", b. 1" thickness for pipe sizes over 1".

C. Insulation of Piping Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor protective finish or aluminum jacketing as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.5 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.

B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.



MSA# 11172.00

WEB BASED BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS 230923 - 1

SECTION 230923 – WEB BASED BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS) Contractor shall be bound by the same Specification that the mechanical and electrical trades must follow.

B. Correlate work of this Section with Sequences of Operation specified in Section 23 09 93.


A. General Provisions

1. This Contract is for all labor, materials and equipment required for the complete construction and installation of an Open Interoperable Web Based BAS system.

2. General Provisions and mechanical systems are specified in other Sections of Division 23. 3. The systems shall be complete in all respects, tested and ready for operation. 4. The university’s current, campus-wide controls provider is TAC Controls, and all new systems

shall be compatible with TAC’s existing controls, systems, and graphical interfaces currently used on campus. Each new building’s central monitoring system must be compatible with TAC-Vista; that is, a windowing or separate PC system with another language and/or system architecture is not acceptable. The entire monitoring and control system shall provide full and seamless integration from all the HVAC data points within the building to the existing monitoring system in the central Power Plant.

5. The existing Operator Work Stations (OWS) located in the central Power Plant shall communicate to the direct digital control system specified for each project utilizing the facility management system Ethernet TCP/IP local area network. All new and existing network nodes (OWS and Network Controller) shall provide real-time on-line interface for complete access to the system. All new and existing hardware and software points including system object and control system objects shall be monitored and controllable from the existing Operator Workstations. All software configurations and databases for the new and existing direct digital hardware shall be up-loadable and down-loadable from the existing Operator Workstations. Providing separate computer workstations, gateways, internet IP Protocol Access, software drivers, JAVA management script programming, Protocol Converter Panels, or Windowing between different computers/systems, or loading separate building energy management system software on the existing Operator Workstations for interface to the existing TAC-VISTA Building Energy Management system will NOT be permitted or accepted.

B. General Instructions

1. The BAS systems, as specified herein, shall be provided in their entirety by the BAS Contractor. The BAS Contractor shall base his Bid on the systems as specified.

2. The BAS Contractor shall submit a (Base) Bid which will include all central processing hardware and software, electronic and control equipment, sensors, valves, dampers and thermostats, as shown on plans and specified.

3. In general, the proposal shall be based on a complete BUILDING AUTOMATION and Control system, including controllers, valves damper actuators, relays, wiring and tubing and a full DDC system. The control contractor shall provide full commissioning of his equipment.


MSA# 11172.00


4. The BAS Contractor shall be prepared to make a personal presentation of his systems to the Owner or his designated representatives prior to award of Contract should the Owner request it.

C. Scope

1. The Open Interoperable Web Based BAS system shall be supplied and installed completely under the BAS Contract. Components shall be mounted and wired by the BAS Sub-Contractor.

2. The BAS system shall graphically display real time control points. 3. The engineering, installation, calibration, software programming, and checkout necessary for

complete and fully operational BAS systems, as specified hereafter, shall be provided by the BAS Contractor.

4. BAS Sub-Contractor shall provide power wiring as required for wiring each individual control panel. Power wiring shall be located within the same room as the BAS equipment or within 20 feet of the connection. BAS sub-contractor shall install wiring according to Division 26.

D. System Description

1. Ethernet (IEEE 802.3), Peer-To-Peer CSMA/CD 2. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating

temperature control system, utilizing a high speed peer to peer network of interoperable Direct Digital Controls (DDC), Graphical User Interface (GUI) with color graphic displays available on at least 24 client computers, simultaneous access from at least 4 computers, and electronic interfaces and actuation devices, as shown on the drawings and as described herein. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be either a 10 or 100 Mpbs Ethernet network supporting BACnet, Java, XML, HTTP, and CORBA IIOP for maximum flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems and providing support for multiple Universal Network Controllers (UNC’s), user workstations and a local host computer system. The Enterprise Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) LAN shall utilize Carrier Sense Multiple/Access/Collision Detect (CSMA/CD), Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP) operating at 10 or 100 Mbps.

3. The system will consist of an open architecture that utilizes EIA standard 709.1, the LonTalk™ protocol, as the common communication protocol between all controllers and integral ANSI/ASHRAE™ Standard 135-1995, BACnet functionality to assure interoperability between all system components. Both the LonTalk™ protocol and the ANSI/ASHRAE™ Standard 135-1995, BACnet protocol are required to assure that the project is fully supported by the two leading HVAC open protocols to reduce future building maintenance, upgrade, and expansion costs. Where necessary or desired, LonTalk™ packets may be encapsulated into TCP/IP messages to take advantage of existing infrastructure or to increase network bandwidth. Any such encapsulation of the LonTalk™ protocol into IP datagrams shall conform to existing LonMark™ guidelines for such encapsulation and shall be based on industry standard protocols. The products used in constructing the BAS shall be LonMark™ compliant. In those instances in which LonMark™ devices are not available, the BAS contractor shall provide LonWorks™ devices with application source code, device resource files, and external interface definitions. The software tools required to network manage both the LonTalk™ protocol and the ANSI/ASHRAE™ Standard 135-1995 BACnet protocol must be provided with the system. Drawings are diagrammatic only. Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, that are required to meet the functional intent, shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner. Minimum BACnet compliance is Level 3; with the ability to support data read and write functionality. Physical connection of BACnet devices shall be via Ethernet/Ethernet IP for BACnet and FTT-10A for LonTalk.

4. Temperature control system to be completely DDC with electronic sensors and electronic actuation of valves and dampers. The Open Interoperable Web Based BAS is intended to seamlessly connect devices throughout the building regardless of subsystem type, i.e. variable frequency drives, low voltage lighting systems, electrical circuit breakers, power metering and card access should easily coexist on the same network channel. The supplied system must


MSA# 11172.00


incorporate the ability to access all data using Java enabled browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. An Open DataBase Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server database is required for all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on a supplier-installed server for all database access. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs shall not be acceptable. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s internal Intranet network. Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable.

5. The systems shall include the Tridium/Niagara /Jace products as required for access and communication with the remote Central Operator Work Station (COWS) via computer LAN, WAN or Internet.

E. Work By Others

1. The HVAC Sub-Contractor shall:

a. Install all line size and non-line size automatic valves and separable wells furnished by the BAS Contractor.

b. Furnish and install all necessary piping connections, taps and wells required for flow, pressure or temperature devices.

c. Provide dampers, if so indicated, under Equipment Specifications.

2. The Sheet Metal Sub-Contractor shall:

a. Install all automatic dampers furnished by the BAS Contractor. b. Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages, shafts and

brackets and extend the required number of shafts through the ducts for externally-mounted damper motors. Jack shafts will be assembled with sealed roller or ball bearings of stainless steel construction.

3. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall install conduit and connect power wiring. Power wiring and conduit shall be defined as follows:

a. Wiring of power feeds through all disconnect starters and variable speed controllers to electric motors.

b. Wiring of 120 VAC emergency power feeds to junction boxes in locations of temperature control panels.

c. Power wiring to 120 Volt, single-phase motors shown on Electrical Plans and specified in the Electrical Sections.

d. Wiring of any remote start/stop switches and manual or automatic motor speed control devices not furnished by the BAS Contractor.

e. Conduit for routing temperature control wiring where shown on electrical plans. f. Raceways where shown on electrical plans which shall be utilized for temperature control

wiring.

F. Related Work

1. BAS contractor shall coordinate and remain on site with the balancing contractor to operate the BUILDING AUTOMATION system during balancing. The BAS contractor shall manipulate the system as instructed by the balancing contractor. This shall include but not limited to changing damper positions, valve positions, fan speeds, pump speeds and set points as required to complete the balancing procedures.

2. The installation of motor starters that are not factory installed, thermal overload switches, and power wiring to motors, starters, thermal overload switches, contactors, and electric heating coils


MSA# 11172.00


is specified in another Division. This Section includes installation of controls plus wiring for automatic controls, electric damper and valve operators, terminal control units, interlocks, starting circuits, and wiring to power consuming control devices.

3. Area smoke detectors are provided, installed and wired under another Division. Duct smoke detectors shall be installed under this Division, but furnished and wired into the fire alarm system under another Division. This Section includes wiring alarm signal relays, provided and installed under another Division, to the BAS.

1.3 SYSTEM LAYOUT AND PERFORMANCE

A. The DDC system shall be engineered and equipment selected by the manufacturer as required to meet the performance specified herein.

B. The location and quantity of DDC panels shall be as determined by the DDC system manufacturer except that in no circumstance shall more than 25% of the total number of sensor and control points be connected through a signal panel.

C. Each DDC system component, including the central computer, data transmission system, and each panel shall provide for the future addition of at least 20% of the number of sensor and control points connected to that component.

D. An alarm condition shall be reported to the appropriate operator device no more 10 seconds following the occurrence of that condition.

E. Sensor and control values displayed to the operator in graphics displays shall be dynamically updated within 5 to 15 seconds of significant change of value. Values shall be prioritized.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Specification Compliance Review (Submit with Submittals)

1. Each BAS Contractor shall supply, at the time of submittals, a paragraph by paragraph specification compliance report to the Owner. The report shall indicate for each paragraph, how the Contractor meets the criteria of the paragraph.

2. The following format must be utilized in completing the compliance report:

a. Comply - without exception. b. Qualify - Meet the functional intent. For each paragraph, the Contractor shall identify all

differences in specific functions stated in the given paragraph and provide a description of what is excluded or how the qualifying system will meet the function specified.

B. Diagrams:

1. Provide separate diagrams for each system, including piping, motor starting and interlock wiring, push buttons, control wiring, interior electrical circuits of control instruments with terminal designations, control motors, colors of wires, locations of instruments and remote elements, and normal position of valves, dampers and relays.

2. A detailed description of the operation of the control system including device designations shall accompany the drawings. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics and a schedule of valves including close-off and flow characteristics shall also be furnished for the entire project.


MSA# 11172.00


C. DDC system data:

1. Provide manufacturer's data sheets on the DDC panels, sensors, control interface devices, terminal control units, protection devices, and software.

2. Provide the actual physical proposed room thermostat/temperature sensor and guards, at the time of submittal review, to both the Engineer and Owner for approval.

3. Complete field wiring diagram with terminals labeled as they will be marked on the equipment, including sensors, control and power wiring for each sensor, control and DDC panel.

4. Programmer's manual, flow charts of DDC control programs provided to perform control sequences specified herein.

5. Floor plans locating DDC panels and terminal control units coordinated with work of other trades. The BAS contractor shall provide the actual physical proposed room thermostat and guards, at the time of submittal review, to both the Engineer and Owner for approval.

6. Provide External Interface Files:

a. XIF files or object diagrams for each DDC system component (Building Controller, Custom Application Controller, and Application Specific Controller) proposed.

7. Provide ANSI/ASHRAE™ Standard 135-1995, BACnet PIC Statement. Proof of Compliance Level 3 or higher is required to protect building owner by reducing future maintenance and expansion costs.

D. DDC central station data:

1. Manufacturer's data sheets on DDC central station equipment including computers, CRT's, printers, disk systems, protection and communications equipment, and software.

2. Complete field wiring diagrams for data communications with DDC panels and interconnection of central station equipment; proposed graphics displays if specified herein, and floor plans showing layout of central station equipment.

E. All submittal information (drawings and cut sheets) shall be furnished in both paper and electronic format.


A. Protocol to comply with ASHRAE 135.

B. Refer to Section 230993 for all work to be included in the controls work.

C. Bids by wholesalers and non-franchised contractors shall not be acceptable.

D. The system manufacturer shall, as a minimum, manufacture and supply the Custom Application Controller, Application Specific Controller, Graphical User Interface, damper actuators, and valve actuator assemblies.

E. All materials, equipment and apparatus shall be new and of first-class quality.

F. All work described in this section shall be installed, wired, circuit tested and calibrated by factory certified technicians qualified for this work and in the regular employment of the BUILDING AUTOMATION System manufacturer’s field office. The local installing office shall have a minimum of ten years of installation experience with the manufacturer and shall provide documentation prior to the bid and with the submittal package verifying longevity of the installing company's relationship with the


MSA# 11172.00


manufacturer. Supervision, calibration and checkout of the system shall be by the employees of the factory authorized field office.

G. The BUILDING AUTOMATION System Contractor shall have a full service facility within 50 miles of the project that is staffed with engineers trained in Integrating Interoperable Systems and technicians fully capable of providing LonWorks instructions and routine emergency maintenance service on all system components. The service facility shall stock spare parts inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment.

H. The contractor must be able to respond to any warranty or service call within 8 hours.

I. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

J. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems."

K. Comply with National Electric Code, UL-916 Energy Management Systems, LonMark™, ULC, and FCC Part 15, subpart J, Class B Computing Devices.

L. Comply with EIA Standard 709.1 LonTalk™ protocol for DDC system control components.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to manufacturer of that equipment.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation.

B. Coordinate equipment from other divisions including "Intrusion Detection," "Lighting Controls,” "Motor-Control Centers," "Panelboards," and "Fire Alarm" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with those systems.

C. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical circuits for control units and operator workstation.

D. Coordinate with Owner’s IT department for IP addresses and access to Owner’s existing high speed Intranet.

1.8 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL

A. The Owner shall sign a copy of the manufacturer’s standard software and firmware licensing agreement as a condition of this contract. Such license shall grant use of all programs and application software to Owner as defined by the manufacturer’s license agreement, but shall protect manufacturer’s rights to disclosure of trade secrets contained within such software.


MSA# 11172.00


B. All project developed software and documentation shall become the property of the Owner. These include, but are not limited to project graphic images, record drawings, project database, project specific application programming code, and all other associated documentation.

1.9 INSTRUCTION OF OPERATING PERSONNEL

A. General:

1. Conduct formal instruction sessions for operating personnel. 2. Prepare and submit a syllabus describing an overview of the program, describing how the program

will be conducted, when and where meetings are to be held, names and company affiliations of lecturers, description of contents and outline for each lecture, and recommended reference material and outside reading.

3. Obtain direction from the Owner on which operating personnel shall be instructed in each system.

B. BAS System Training

1. Provide 1 formal training session. 2. The session shall be conducted by factory-trained personnel and be a minimum of two (2) eight (8)

hour days, for a total of 16 training hours. Provide materials and training for up to 3 operators per session to be designated by the Owner.

3. Provide CD-ROM format recording of training sessions. CD shall include an easy to use index of training segments with extensive description for quick, easy references. CD segments shall be created on the owners actual installed system. CD segments shall be established for each independent task that is covered in the training to reduce the owner’s review time.

4. Obtain a receipt acknowledging completion of each item of instruction.

1.10 SEASONAL ADJUSTMENTS

A. Visit each Building during the first heating or cooling season approximately 6 months after the date of substantial completion to make repairs and adjustments to provide uniform conditions throughout. Each visit shall consist of a minimum of one (1) day. Schedule the visit for the heating cycle during the months of December through February, and for the cooling cycle during June through August.

B. During each visit:

1. Check and calibrate temperature control devices and thermostats. 2. Test and verify control sequences for proper operation for the season.

C. Prepare and submit a report for each visit documenting conditions found and corrective action taken.

D. Have the Owner sign the report acknowledging the visit.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide an OPEN INTEROPERABLE WEB BASED BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSYTEM (BAS) and Automatic Temperature Control system manufactured and installed by one of the following:

1. Johnson Controls (LON) 2. Honeywell (LON) 3. T.A.C. (LON)

2.2 GENERAL

A. Provide a complete system of direct digital controls (DDC) and monitoring points as specified herein. The DDC system shall interface with the electric and electronic systems to provide control outputs and monitoring inputs to the DDC systems as specified in other Division 23 sections, and as listed in the I/O summaries.

B. The Building Automation System shall improve HVAC reliability and enhance building efficiency while providing an easy to use interface for monitoring and managing the building. The Building Automation System shall provide the necessary Hardware, Software, and Network Communication abilities to provide Scheduling, Monitoring, Trending, Historical Storage, and alarm functions for the HVAC equipment and systems as describe in this specification. Control capabilities shall include but are not limited to: Time of Day scheduling, Direct Digital Control, Custom Control, Boolean Logic, Optimum Start/Stop, Duty Cycling, Electrical Demand Control, Temperature Control, After Hours Override, Reports and Logs, Trend Prints, Remote Communications, Alarm Logging, Run Time and Maintenance, and Expanded Informational Messages.

C. The Building Automation System shall allow full user operation with a minimum of training. It shall have an English language display, with both user prompts and "help" user tutorial. It shall contain management reports for the monitoring of both current and historical energy usage, heating and cooling degree day, building status and after hours occupancy information.

D. All applications programs shall be pre-engineered and pre-tested.

2.3 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE

2.4 SERVER FUNCTIONS AND HARDWARE

A. This system shall communicate with the BAS central server in the Power Plant.

B. Local connections shall be via an Ethernet LAN. Remote connections can be via ISDN, ADSL, T1, cable modem, or dial-up connection.

C. It shall be possible to provide access to all Universal Network Controllers via a single connection to the server. In this configuration, each Universal Network Controller can be accessed from a remote Graphical User Interface (GUI) or from a standard Web browser (WBI) by connecting to the server.


MSA# 11172.00


2.5 GRAPHICAL PROGRAMMER (GP)

A. The Graphical Programmer’s utility tool is existing on the central server computer.

B. The GP is a graphical object-oriented Visio-based drawing tool that provides an intuitive interface for network design integrating capabilities into Windows NT based applications. The functions shall include Network Management services such as device installation, device configuration, diagnostics, maintenance, and defining network data connections between system controllers, known as “binding”.

2.6 OPERATOR INTERFACE (GUI SERVER APPLICATION SOFTWARE)

A. Input/output capability from operator station for monitoring and controlling all of the points listed in the input/output point list. The operator shall be able to monitor and access all points by means of clear concise English names without having to understand or reference hardware point locations or controller programs.

B. Operating System: The GUI shall run on Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0, Service Pack 4, Windows 2000, or later.

C. The GUI shall employ browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include a tree view (similar to Windows Explorer) for quick viewing of, and access to, the hierarchical structure of the database. In addition, menu-pull downs, and toolbars shall employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the operator to perform tasks with a minimum knowledge of the HVAC Control System and basic computing skills. These shall include, but are not limited to, forward/backward buttons, home button, and a context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line), that displays the location and the selected object identification.

D. Real-Time Displays. The GUI, shall at a minimum, support the following graphical features and functions:

1. Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of generating a GIF, BMP, or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file formats shall not be acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of a graphic background, the GUI shall support the use of scanned pictures.

2. Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain objects for text, real-time values, animation, color spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document links, schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URL’s, and links to other graphic screens.

3. Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object shall be configurable for assignment to one a layer. A minimum of six layers shall be supported.

4. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points shall be accomplished in a graphical manner.

a. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.

b. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.

5. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.

6. Adjustments to analog objects, such as set points, shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and entering the desired value.


MSA# 11172.00


E. System Configuration. At a minimum, the GUI shall permit the operator to perform the following tasks, with proper password access:

1. Create, delete or modify control strategies. 2. Add/delete objects to the system. 3. Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters. 4. Enable or disable control strategies. 5. Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer. 6. Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state. 7. Select points to be trended over a period of time and initiate the recording of values automatically.

F. On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall be available through the use of hypertext. All system documentation and help files shall be in HTML format.

G. Security.

1. Each operator shall be required to log on to that system with a user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator.

2. The system administrator shall have the ability to set passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operators’ access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object.

3. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto log-off time shall be set per operator password.

4. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format. 5. User access shall be secured using individual security passwords for a minimum of fifty users. It

will be partitioned into multiple levels of user access (minimum of seven levels) with data entry restrictions being assignable by password. User log on/log off attempts will be recorded.

H. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.

2.7 ALARM CONSOLE

A. The system will be provided with a dedicated alarm window or console. This window will notify the operator of an alarm condition, and allow the operator to view details of the alarm and acknowledge the alarm. The use of the Alarm Console can be enabled or disabled by the system administrator.

B. When the Alarm Console is enabled, a separate alarm notification window will supercede all other windows on the desktop and shall not be capable of being minimized or closed by the operator. This window will notify the operator of new alarms and un-acknowledged alarms. Alarm notification windows or banners that can be minimized or closed by the operator shall not be acceptable.

2.8 GUI SYSTEM SECURITY

A. System Security shall be on an application by application basis. System Administrator shall setup and define access privileges per user, per application and per setpoint levels.


MSA# 11172.00


B. The Users shall be assigned discrete password names and codes, both of which must be entered in order to have access to any particular application or function within the system.

C. Access privileges shall also be assignable for entry into the standard MS Windows NT or array of applications such as File Manager, Task Manager or others.

D. A minimum of 10,000 levels of assignable access must be provided. Systems not supporting this level of customization and flexibility for system security must define delivered capabilities, and may not be accessible.

2.9 GUI DISPLAY FRAMES

A. The Dynamic Graphic portion of this GUI shall allow the operator to access any system information via a “system penetration” method. “System penetration” shall allow the operator to penetrate into the facility until the detailed color graphic display of a specific area of the facility is represented. All system travel shall be 100% accessible via the mouse, no keyboard commands shall be necessary to edit dynamic data.

B. The ability to import background images for the display frames shall include as a minimum, photos, digital images, bitmaps and standard image formats. Systems that utilize a proprietary background image format are not acceptable.

C. As a minimum, graphic displays shall be provided for overall site, for each subsystem within the site and for all individual locations associated with each subsystem. All graphics shall be logically linked to allow the operator to traverse through the overall system and at any time return immediately to the associated subsystem, or overall site plan, via a graphic element.

D. The system must be set up to have at least 3 access levels: guest, user and administrator. Guest privileges shall be limited to view only. Users shall be able to make setpoint and schedule changes. Administrators shall have all privileges as users in addition to being able to assign passwords.

E. The graphic displays shall have an HTML tree on the left side of the screen and the currently viewed graphic on the right side. Tree views shall be different based on access level and the tree must only show screens that are available based on access privileges.

F. Each AHU shall have a minimum of 5 graphic screens available from the tree view. One screen shall display the airflow pattern with all dampers, coils and fans shown in their correct schematic location and dynamic data for all input values shown. This main graphic screen shall show the control devices in mechanical flow diagram format with directional arrows to indicate normal flow arrangement. These screens shall be available to anyone with access to the system, and therefore shall be view only. Another screen shall display text information with the following primary categories: unit status, temperatures, heating, cooling, economizer, static pressure, supply fan, and exhaust fan including setpoints of each category. A loop tuning screen shall also be furnished for each control loop, so that people with the appropriate access can change loop tuning parameters from PCs without needing individual programming tools. Override screens shall be furnished for each controller to permit overriding control points without the need for vendor specific software. An alarm screen shall also be furnished each AHU. Each VAV shall have a graphics screen and a text screen. Systems that won’t permit creating these customized screens as described herein will not be acceptable. Systems that use controllers that won’t permit overrides of inputs and outputs and adjusting loop tuning parameters for all control loops from a browser based graphic screen will not be acceptable.

G. All shapes shall be 3-D with a common perspective. All dampers shall have a minimum of 4 animation levels to show partially open, half open, mostly open, fully open, and closed position of dampers. All analog inputs shall show the actual value and engineering units on the graphic screen. Binary inputs shall


MSA# 11172.00


be linked to flashing animated displays. Safety alarms will flash when in alarm. Filter status shall be indicated when value indicates that they are dirty. To prevent clutter on the graphic displays, symbols will only be shown for equipment that is controlled or monitored by the DDC system. Also, normal status for safeties will not be indicated, and normal status for filters will be indicated by an image of a clean filter. Pumps and fans shall rotate when flow is proven by a monitoring device. Coils shall change color when valves are open to permit water flow through the coils.

H. Graphics shall use common color schemes to make the overall system easy to understand. All overall backgrounds shall be white. All text shall be black. Any value that is in alarm shall have a red background. Any value that is overridden shall have a blue background. All like sensors shall be the same color. For example, all temperature devices shall be yellow, all pressure devices shall be purple, all humidity devices shall be teal, all fire alarm devices shall be red, and all CO2 devices shall be green.

I. Current setpoints and occupancy status shall be shown at the bottom of each graphic screen.

J. Floor plan drawings shall be provided, and permit access to each zone's individual floor plan sections. On the individual floor plan sections, room numbers and room temperatures shall be displayed. Values that are out of the acceptable range shall appear in a different background color and / or flash. Each VAV shall have its own graphic that contains the points from within its controller including the box flow setpoint, room temperature setpoint, maximum cooling flow setpoint, minimum cooling flow setpoint, and minimum heating flow setpoint, plus the discharge air temperature from the AHU supplying the unit. The VAV text screen shall have the same information as the graphic screen plus high and low flow calibration values, damper rotation adjustment (CW or CCW), and air balance set-up features. GUI shall permit operator the ability to enable, set or disable high and low occupied and unoccupied limits for each room temperature reading.

K. Text Screens shall be available for all levels of access. Setpoint and output values are changeable from the text screen for users with appropriate access privileges and administrators, but not guests. When a value can be overridden or edited, a red box shall appear around it when the cursor is position on it. A single click of the mouse shall bring up pop up menu that provide options to make a permanent override, change setpoint, or release a previous override of an output point. Analog inputs shall have pop up menus that allow setting high and low alarm limits and the ability to enable and disable alarm limits as appropriate for the sensing device. Pop up menus must be customized to include a description of the point that is being modified. Generic override menus are not permitted because they would not describe to an operator what is about to be modified. The Control Contractor shall set up all initial alarms as indicated in the point matrix.

L. Text screens shall include schedule information including current state and date and time of next scheduled event. Positioning the mouse over the current state shall permit single click access to the schedule. The schedule screen shall allow the operator to edit a yearly, weekly, daily, holiday or special event schedule for the system being viewed. Temperature values and setpoints shall be displayed below the schedule information, and shall have a minimum of 1 decimal place. Heating, cooling and damper outputs shall be displayed next. The OA temperature for economizer switchover shall be displayed and adjustable from the text screen. Air flow readings shall be shown with setpoint and actual readings. Fan information shall be shown next, followed by static pressure readings and setpoints, which shall have a minimum of 2 decimal places. Miscellaneous setpoints including night setback cooling and heating, average zone temperature, return air warm-up and cool-down, dehumidification, and unoccupied mixed air temperature setpoints shall all be shown and adjustable. All safeties shall be shown, followed by coil pump control information.

M. Each system shall have its own specific alarm screen available to all operators but only editable by operators with user and administration access privileges. From the alarm screen, users and administrators shall be able to enable and disable alarms. Points that are in alarm shall have an alarm symbol


MSA# 11172.00


highlighted in red. Points that are not in alarm shall be shown in gray. Alarms that are disabled shall have a way to indicate this on the alarm screen graphic.

N. Loop tuning screens shall be available through the web browser interface to save the owner the cost and time associated with using vendor specific software for tuning loops. Access to these screens shall not be provided to guests. Air handling units shall have dedicated screens for discharge air temperature, static pressure, and outside air control loops. Loop tuning screen for discharge air temperature shall include the discharge air temperature, discharge air temperature setpoint, cooling loop throttling range, I-gain and ramp time, heating loop throttling range, I-gain and ramp time, economizer loop throttling range, I-gain and ramp time, unoccupied heating loop throttling range, I-gain and ramp time, cooling valve output, heating valve output, and damper control output. Screens shall also have graphs that show 5 minutes of live data for the discharge air temperature, setpoint, cooling valve, heating valve and mixed air dampers. Each loop tuning screen shall include the appropriate throttling range, I-gain and ramp time.

O. Each non-unitary controller shall have an override screen. These screens shall be available on-site for use during point-to-point check-out and commissioning. The override screen shall show the inputs and outputs for each controller with the points in their wired location. Unused points shall be shown as spares. Points that are in alarm shall have a red background, and points that are overridden shall have a blue background just as on other screens. These screens shall show the actual values that come back from the controller, not the values that may have been typed in for override at the GUI if the controller software is not accepting the override value. The override screen shall also permit timed overrides.

P. Each VAV AHU shall also have a overview screen listing every VAV terminal’s data in a text format that includes occupancy mode, room temperature, room setpoint, box flow, flow setpoint, temperature leaving VAV terminal, % cooling and % heating. Also, each VAV AHU shall have an air balance screen that will permit balancing the system through a computer connected to the Ethernet or directly to the appropriate NAC without vendor specific software. The air balancing screens shall permit at least 8 manual override commands: normal, position (%), flow value, flow percent, open, close, min flow, and max flow.

Q. Heating systems and cooling systems with multiple pieces of equipment such as pumps with lead-lag control shall display which device is lead and when the other device will become lead on the text screen.

R. Although only one outside air temperature sensor is needed per building, the GUI shall use independent outside air temperature points, so that during check-out and commissioning, the outside air temperature for a system can be changed without changing the outside air temperature for the whole building. The GUI shall also have a global outside air temperature point that can be overridden from the screen for the controller where the point is physically connected. Overriding this outside air temperature value will change it for all systems, except when outside air temperature has been overridden for an individual system.

S. The system shall allow for the easy development and editing of dynamic graphics. Wizards shall be utilized to assist the operator with their manipulation of the graphic system. The operator shall be able to, through a single mouse function, select between the dynamic display mode and the graphic edit mode for the currently viewed graphic frame, assuming appropriate access level is provided to the operator. Systems requiring multiple mouse or operator keyboard commands to enter the graphic edit mode are not desirable and require thorough definition of steps involved to accomplish function.

T. Animation of system data shall be provided via graphic elements on the display frames. Standard graphic element library shall be provided to assist the operator with their implementation. The ability to define and add new animated graphic elements shall be provided. As a minimum, the ability to move, size, draw, arrange, align, layer, space, rotate, invert, duplicate, cut, copy, paste, erase any animated element shall be provided. System parameters and setpoints shall be assignable and modifiable by the animated graphic elements, relieving the need for keyboard commands for system manipulation.


MSA# 11172.00


U. The ability to simultaneously display a dynamic X/Y chart of selected points, shall be provided. The chart shall be an element of the graphic display and shall automatically update with the display data. The chart shall allow for dynamic manipulation to modify the range, rate, and timeframe of view, in both a real-time as well as historical configuration. A minimum of 4 values shall be included on any chart display element. There shall not be a limit to the quantity of chart elements displayed on a graphic frame. Trace colors and X values shall be User configurable. Systems not providing this capability are required to provide an equivalent charting package with the GUI offering.

V. Full on-line system documentation shall be provided. It shall not be necessary to maintain printed copies of user or programming manuals. Context sensitive help files shall be provided for all applications within the FMCS area of the GUI. The ability to update on-line documentation must be provided via electronic updates, definition of update procedure shall be provided.

1. Electronic O&M manual information shall be installed in the web server(s), so that information can be retrieved by logging on to the building’s BAS from any web browser. PDF files of control drawings, sequences of operations, and product cut sheets shall be loaded on the web server(s), so they can also be remotely accessed.

W. By pointing and clicking on any individual graphic element, the following shall be available for display or modification, but not be limited to the current value or state may be edited. A self- prompting pop-up window shall be displayed providing the ability to modify the selected point value. Instructions assisting the operator in their use of the pop-up window shall be provided.

X. The ability to provide graphically displayed global scheduling and editing functions shall be provided. The ability to link these functions to the associated equipment or zone frames shall be a standard feature. A calendar shall be provided for display and modification of the SDC time clock functions. The User shall be able to view a daily, weekly, monthly, annual, special or holiday schedule from a defined display frame. A list of served areas shall be displayed on the same screen, this list shall be displayed at all times, pull down menus or other means of accessing these areas shall not be acceptable. The system shall have a master override screen that will allow an operator to change the schedule for every piece of equipment in every building by changing the master schedule. This is often referred to as a “Snow Day” command and does not require the operator to log onto each building’s UNC.

Y. All analog values shall be trended every 15 minutes. The trend samples shall be saved in the UNC for at least 36 hours. Access to trended data shall be available by the single click of a mouse on the analog value. Systems that open other windows and require a selection of the desired data are not acceptable.

2.10 GUI ALARMING

A. The GUI shall provide, as standard, alarm annunciation of system data. On every display frame, the ability to view, acknowledge, delete and manipulate real-time and historical alarms shall be provided. The ability to provide a unique and custom alarm display for every display frame shall be provided. The ability to continuously or upon request, view the alarm display, shall be provided.

B. Alarm conditions shall be capable of invoking, as a minimum; a display frame, an email message, a text message sent to a pager or cellular phone.

C. Alarm logging shall be provided in a user definable configuration. All alarms shall be displayed and/or routed as follows, as a minimum; GUI display frame, local printer, server printer, client printer, logged to file, and archived in standard format for information management. Alarm groupings shall be hierarchical in nature allowing up to 8 alarm groups and 16 sub-groups. The GUI shall not possess any limits on the quantity of alarms that can be logged, including historical data archiving. Systems possessing limits must define the restrictions and may not be acceptable.


MSA# 11172.00


D. Alarm provide shall provide up to 999 alarm priorities with up to 5 alarm color changes, per priority, according to alarm status.

2.11 GUI TRENDING

A. The GUI shall automatically perform time based, user defined, periodic collection of real time point data. The data shall be presented as an X/Y chart in the display frame. The data shall be stored and archived in a file format that allows for the manipulation and utilization of the data by third party applications.

B. A dynamic trend shall be defined as a group of at least 4 data points, with a circular buffer of 2000 data points. A historical trend shall be defined as a group of at least 8 data points, with the sampled points limited only by archival disk space. Sampling rates shall be user selectable from instantaneous (one per second) to once a week. Collection of data shall be user selectable to start and stop on a specific time and date. There shall be no limit to the number of X/Y charts within a display frame.

C. X/Y charting and column and row reporting shall be an integral part of the HMI. All points shall be chartable or reportable. Analytical data shall be displayed for any of the selected points in a clearly displayed X/Y chart. This analytical data shall consist of at least the following: Average Mean, Standard Deviation, Simple Average, Current Value, Cycle Length, Cycle High and Cycle Low.

D. X/Y charting shall provide for the following chart manipulation: display, zoom, scroll, centering, pen legend and export to Excel, Text via Dynamic Data Exchange.

2.12 WEB BROWSER CLIENTS

A. The system shall provide at this time the ability of supporting at least 64 clients using a standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer™ or Netscape Navigator™. Systems requiring additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on the client machine, are only acceptable if 64 licensed copies of the client machine software are provided, installed, and tested.

B. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration that is supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine requirements in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web browser to function with the FMCS, shall only be acceptable if 64 workstation or workstation hardware upgrades are provided.

C. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted.

D. The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:

1. User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented.

2. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the Web browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be supported by the Web browser interface.

3. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a Web page. HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or format.


MSA# 11172.00


4. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Building Control Units (BC), or at the GUI without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that require graphics storage on each client are not acceptable.

5. Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without requiring a manual “refresh” of the Web page.

6. User’s shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following:

E. Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points in a graphical manner.

1. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.

2. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.

3. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.

4. View logs and charts 5. View and acknowledge alarms

F. The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s (as determined by the log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator.

G. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link.

2.13 CONTROL UNITS GENERAL

A. Provide an adequate number of control units to achieve monitoring and control of all data points specified and necessary to satisfy the sequence of operation for all mechanical systems shown on the plans. Provide a minimum of one separate LonMark™ or LonWorks™ controller for each AHU or other HVAC system. Multiple DDC controllers may control one system provided that all points associated with individual control loops are assigned to the same DDC controller. If multiple controllers are furnished, the contractor must make sure that corresponding outputs and inputs are on the same controller. Extra controllers will be required to ensure that all control outputs are controlled by a controller that has the control inputs directly connected to it. Points used for control loop reset such as outside air or space temperature are exempt from this requirement. When multiple controllers are used for controlling one system, the controllers shall be identical. To minimize the number of spare parts that the owner will need to stock in the future, the same part number controller shall be used for all major system applications (i.e. AHUs, heating water system, chilled water system, pump systems, etc.). All analog ouputs shall be true AO (0-20mA or 0-10Vdc). Floating, pulse-width or phase-cut modulating outputs will not be acceptable for this project. Each of the following panel types shall meet the following requirements.

B. Controllers shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted within waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40°F to 140°F and 5 to 95% RH, non condensing.

2. Controllers used in conditioned ambient space shall be mounted in dust-proof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 32°F to 122°F and 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Serviceability: Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

D. Memory: The Control Units shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.

E. Diagnostics: The Building Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode and generate an alarm notification.

F. Immunity to power and noise: Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 3 feet.

G. Automatic staggered restart of field equipment after restoration of power and short cycle protection is required.

2.14 UNIVERSAL NETWORK CONTROLLERS (UNC)

A. The Universal Network Controllers (UNC) shall provide the interface between the LAN or WAN and the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the control devices connected to the UNC. It shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide:

1. Calendar functions 2. Scheduling 3. Trending 4. Alarm monitoring and routing 5. Time synchronization by means of an Atomic Clock Internet site including automatic

synchronization 6. Integration of LonWorks™ controller data and BACnet controller data 7. Network Management functions for all LonWorks™ based devices

B. The Universal Network Controllers must provide the following hardware features as a minimum:

1. One Ethernet Port – 10/100 Mbps 2. One RS-232 port 3. One LonWorks™ Interface Port – 78KB FTT-10A 4. Battery Backup 5. Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is not supplied, the

controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage capacity) 6. The UNC must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 0 to 55°C 7. The UNC must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 0 and 70°C 8. The UNC must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing

C. The UNC shall provide multiple user access to the system and support for ODBC or SQL. A database resident on the UNC shall be an ODBC compliant database or must provide an ODBC data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it.

D. The UNC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 64 simultaneous users.


MSA# 11172.00


E. Event Alarm Notification and actions

1. The UNC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers.

2. The UNC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up telephone connection, or wide-area network.

3. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but limited to:

a. To alarm b. Return to normal c. To fault

4. Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the purpose of routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc.

5. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node. 6. Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for equipment

maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count values with appropriate password control.

7. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated. 8. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user:

a. Screen message text b. Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to route

and email alarms based on:

1) -Day of week 2) -Time of day 3) -Recipient

c. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message d. Graphic with flashing alarm object(s) e. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer

9. The following shall be recorded by the UNC for each alarm (at a minimum):

a. Time and date b. Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.) c. Equipment (air handler #, accessway, etc.) d. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement. e. Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.

10. Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that purpose. 11. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types or classes

of alarms defined by the user. 12. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the UNC and/or a server (if configured in the system)

and shall be available for review by the user. 13. Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters. 14. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be provided and

available for review by the user. 15. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and available for

review by the user.

F. Data Collection and Storage


MSA# 11172.00


1. The UNC shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object and store this data for future use.

2. The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the UNC that shall have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties:

a. Designating the log as interval or deviation. b. For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and the

sample collection interval. c. For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to a fixed

value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the object. d. For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the log and to

set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data on a first-in, first-out basis.

e. Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based event or by a user-defined event or action.

3. All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the UNC and the data shall be accessed from a server (if the system is so configured) or a standard Web Browser.

4. All log data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable of being manipulated using standard SQL statements.

5. All log data shall be available to the user in the following data formats:

a. HTML b. XML c. Plain Text d. Comma or tab separated values

6. Systems that do not provide log data in HTML and XML formats at a minimum shall provide as an alternative Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle 8i or Express, Hyperion Solutions™ SQL Server.

7. The UNC shall have the ability to archive it’s log data either locally (to itself), or remotely to a server or other UNC on the network. Provide the ability to configure the following archiving properties, at a minimum:

a. Archive on time of day b. Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the log (buffer size) c. Archive when log has reached it’s user-defined capacity of data stores d. Provide ability to clear logs once archived

G. Audit Log

1. Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the UNC. 2. Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based on time

or when the log has reached it’s user-defined buffer size. 3. Provide the ability to archive the log locally (to the UNC), to another UNC on the network, or to a

server. For each log entry, provide the following data:

a. Time and date b. User ID c. Change or activity: i.e., Change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands, etc.

H. Database Backup and Storage


MSA# 11172.00


1. The UNC shall have the ability to automatically backup its database. The database shall be backed up based on a user-defined time interval.

2. Copies of the current database and, at the most recently saved database shall be stored in the UNC. The age of the most recently saved database is dependent on the user-defined database save interval.

3. The UNC database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML format to allow for user viewing and editing, if desired. Other formats are acceptable as well, as long as XML format is supported.

2.15 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROL UNITS (CAC)

A. Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, RAM/EEPROM memory for custom control applications. CAC’s shall be provided for Air Handling Units, Roof Top Units, Boiler Plant, Chiller Plant and other applications as shown on drawings and shall have published LonWorks™ application source code, device resource files and external interface definitions

B. Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and at least 50 expressions for customized HVAC control including mathematical equations, boolean logic, PID control loops with anti-windup, sequencers, timers, interlocks, thermostats, enthalpy calculation, counters, interlocks, ramps, drivers, schedules, calendars, OSS, compare, limit, curve fit, and alarms.

C. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status.

D. Functions include the following:

1. Peer to peer primary network level communications supporting at least 200 LonMark™ Standard Network Variables (SNVTs) per CAC utilizing at least 100 different SNVT types as documented by the LonMark™ Interoperability Association to assure present and future compatibility with third party LonMark™ devices. The 200 LonMark™ SNVTs, minimum, must be configurable in any combination – all inputs or all outputs or any combination of input/outputs in any combination of the 100 different, minimum, SNVT types. The XIF SNVT order shall be definable, rather than random, to provide logical and effective LonMark™ network management. With the submittal package, contractor shall provide CAC performance data that specifies the exact maximum number of SNVTs available in any combination and a list of all available SNVT types including the LonMark™ Interoperability Association SNVT number.

2. Automatic communications loss detection to maintain normal control functionality regardless of available network communications.

3. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/outputs. 4. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. 5. Local energy management control strategies 6. Incorporate internal customizable safeties and limits to prevent third party LonMark™ tools from

providing improper and unrealistic inputs to CAC ‘s. 7. Local operator interface port provides for download from and connection to portable workstation.

E. Communication: The Custom Application Controller shall communicate via the Primary Controller Network between BMS Controllers and other LonWorks™ devices. CAC’s shall communicate with the Building Controller and ASC’s at a baud rate of not less than 78.8K baud using LonTalk™ communications protocol (EIA 709.1).

2.16 ALL APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROL UNITS (ASC)

A. Single board construction comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, RAM/EEPROM memory for custom control and unitary applications. ASC’s shall be provided for Unit Ventilators, Fan


MSA# 11172.00


Coils, Heat Pumps, VAV Terminal Boxes, Rooftop Units and other applications as shown on the drawings or indicated in the sequences of operation. To assure complete interoperability, all ASC’s firmware shall support all mandatory and all optional LonMark™ Standard Network Variables (SNVTs) for their LonMark™ profile as documented by the LonMark™ Interoperability Association. Bidder shall provide proof of ASC compliance for all the mandatory and all optional LonMark™ SNVTs. ASC’s shall be based on the Echelon Neuron 3150 microprocessor working with the ASCs stand alone control program.

B. Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and download from the operator station.

C. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status.

D. Functions include the following:

1. Peer to peer primary network level communications with automatic communications loss detection to maintain normal control functionality regardless of available network communications.

2. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output. 3. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. 4. Appropriate LonMark™ profiles for specific unitary applications. 5. Support for all mandatory and optional LonMark™ Standard Network Variable Types (SNVTs)

for their LonMark™ profile as documented by the LonMark™ Interoperability Association 6. Internal customizable safeties and limits to prevent third party LonMark™ tools from providing

improper and unrealistic inputs to ASC’s.

E. Local operator interface port located on ASC and ASC sensor provides for download from or upload to portable workstation. All devices on the Lon bus shall be accessible from either port.

F. Communication: ASC’s shall communicate with the Building Controller and CAC’s at a baud rate of not less than 78.8K baud using LonTalk™ communications protocol (EIA 709.1).

G. ASC units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and at least 50 expressions for customized HVAC control including mathematical equations, boolean logic, PID control loops with anti-windup, sequencers, timers, interlocks, thermostats, counters, interlocks, compare, limit, and alarms.

H. All ASC Controller setpoints shall be digital display setpoints with dual setpoint limits (integral hard limits which the user cannot exceed above and below and independent soft limits which are hidden from the user). All digital setpoints shall be network retentive after power outages and after replacement of sensor.

2.17 ASC – VAV CONTROLLER FUNCTIONALITY

A. Controls shall be microprocessor based Pressure Independent Variable Air Volume Digital Controllers. The VAV ASC shall be a single integrated package consisting of a microprocessor, power supply, damper actuator, differential pressure transducer, field terminations, and application software. VAV actuator must be rated for a minimum of 53 in-lb torgue. When actuator is remote from controller, it must be controlled by true analog ouptut and provide feedback to the VAV controller as to its actual position. An alternate model shall be utilized that allows for direct connectivity to an external actuator for those applications that employ a non-butterfly style damper configuration or if the interval actuator is rated for less than 53 in-lb torque. All input/output signals shall be directly hardwired to the VAV ASC controller. The internal actuator shall employ a manual override that allows for powered or non-powered adjustment of the damper position. In all cases, the controller shall automatically resume proper operation following the return of power to, or control by the ASC. Programming, configuring and/or


MSA# 11172.00


troubleshooting of input/output signals shall be easily executed through the ASC sensor or GP tool connected at the wall sensor location.

B. LonMark™ VAV profiles for including support for all mandatory and optional LonMark™ Standard Network Variable Types (SNVTs) as documented by the LonMark™ Interoperability Association

C. The VAV ASC control algorithms shall be designed to limit the frequency of damper repositioning, to assure a minimum 10-year life from all components. The VAV ASC shall provide internal differential pressure transducer for pressure independent applications with an accuracy of ± 5 %. Flow through transducers requiring filter maintenance are not acceptable. The VAV ASC shall provide zone control accuracy equal to or better than +/- 1 degree Fahrenheit. Systems providing control accuracies greater than +/- 1 degrees Fahrenheit are not acceptable. With the submittal package, contractor shall provide performance data that verifies control accuracy of the VAV ASC.

D. All input/output signals shall be directly hardwired to the VAV ASC. A minimum of one input point of the VAV ASC shall employ a universal configuration that allows for flexibility in application ranging from dry contact, resistive, to voltage/current sourced inputs. If a universal point is not available, a minimum of one input point (each) of the dry contact, resistive and analog voltage/current types must be provided on every controller. The outputs of the ASC shall be of the relay and universal analog form. All digital outputs shall be relay type. ASC devices utilizing non-relay outputs shall provide an interface relay for all points. All analog outputs shall be programmable for their start points and span to accommodate the control devices. Both analog and digital outputs must be available from all controllers. Only one type of controller shall be furnished for all types of VAV boxes (i.e. fan powered with hot water reheat and hot water radiant heat or cooling only) to minimize spare parts for owner. Configuration of all I/O points shall be accomplished without physical hardware jumpers, switches or settings. Troubleshooting of input/output signals shall be easily executed with the Graphical Programming tool or a volt-ohm meter (VOM). All I/O points shall be utilized by the local ASC or shall be available as I/O points for other controllers throughout the network.

E. The FMCS contractor shall provide VAV ASC to the VAV box manufacturer, for factory mounting. The VAV terminal unit supplier shall include in its price all costs for mounting of VAV ASC controller, connection of actuator to damper shaft, wiring of device power, wiring of VAV ASC to fan (fan powered terminal) and wiring to electric reheat coils or reheat valve actuator as specified on drawing. VAV supplier shall wire external damper actuator to controller.

F. The VAV terminal manufacturer shall provide a multi-point, averaging, differential pressure sensor mounted on the inlet to each VAV box. For fan powered or electric heat models, the VAV terminal unit manufacturer shall supply a line to low voltage transformer, of sufficient capacity, to power the VAV ASC plus all reheat valves and/or contactors and fan circuits associated with the VAV terminal and actuator assemblies. The FMCS contractor shall provide all reheat control valves to the mechanical contractor for mounting and piping. The FMCS contractor shall provide and install all wiring between the valve and VAV ASC controller and between the room sensor and the VAV ASC controller. The FMCS contractor shall provide transformers and power wiring for all non-fan powered VAV terminal units unless shown otherwise on electrical drawings.

2.18 ASC VAV - AIR BALANCING

A. Balancing Software:

1. Provide software for laptop that allows access to individual application specific controllers through a room temperature sensor.

2. The tool shall also permit balancing to be performed for VAV terminals. 3. Provide all necessary software and cables for laptop to run the balancing software.


MSA# 11172.00


4. The Owner may permit the balancing contractor to use this laptop or they may request the balancer to furnish their own laptop. Either way, the balancer will be permitted use of the software and cables to balance this system only. The control contractor shall work with the balancer to ensure that the software is functioning and the balancer is using the software correctly.

B. Through the portable Graphical Programming Tool, the VAV ASC shall support a fully prompted Air Balance sequence.

C. The Graphical Programming Tool shall, when connected through the wall sensor, access the connected VAV ASC unit. The air balance sequence shall step the balancing contractor through the checkout and calibration of the VAV ASC.

D. Upon completion of the balancing sequence, the flow values presented by the VAV ASC shall match those observed by the balancing contractor's measurement equipment.

E. Additionally, upon completion of the air balance, the balance settings shall be archived for future use if the controller were to require replacement.

F. Systems not able to provide a formatted air balance Graphical Programming Tool shall provide an individual full time during the Air-balancing process to assure full balance compliance.

2.19 LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (LAN)

A. Capacity for a minimum of 64 client workstations connected to multiuser, multitasking environment with concurrent capability to access DDC network or control units.

B. Enterprise Network LAN

1. Media: Ethernet (IEEE 802.3), peer-to-peer CSMA/CD, operating at 10 or 100 Mbps, cable 10 Base-T, UTP-8 wire, category 5

C. Primary Controller Network LAN

1. Media: LonTalk™ (EIA 709.1), peer to peer, FTT-10 operating at 78.8K.

D. Secondary Network LAN ( If Required)

1. Media: LonTalk™ (EIA 709.1), peer to peer, FTT-10 operating at 78.8K

E. Remote Connection

1. ISDN, ADSL, T1 or dial-up connection, monthly charges paid by building owner

2.20 SOFTWARE

A. Controller and System HVAC Applications

1. Update to latest version of software at Project completion. Include and implement the following capabilities from the control units if documented by the specified sequence of operations:


MSA# 11172.00


a. Load Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time scheduling, start/stop time optimization, occupied/unoccupied setback/setup, DDC with PID, and trend logging.

b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy/economizer switchover.

c. Chiller Control Programs: Chilled water plant optimization with condenser water reset, chilled-water reset, chiller and pump equipment selection and sequencing.

d. Boiler Control Programs: Boiler plant optimization with hot water supply reset, boiler and pump equipment selection and sequencing.

2. Programming Application Features: Include trend point, alarm reporting, alarm lockout, weekly scheduling, staggered start, sequencing, anti-short cycling and calculated point.

B. Controller and Network Setup Software

1. Network management tools for LonTalk™ protocol and the ANSI/ASHRAE™ Standard 135-1995, BACnet protocol shall be provided including a network learn function, LonMark bindings, service pins, winks, and diagnostics.

2.21 INPUT / OUTPUT POINTS

A. Binary outputs shall provide a continuous low voltage signal for on/off control of remote devices. Where specified or indicated on the point list outputs shall have three position manual override switch (On/Off/Auto), a status light, and shall be selectable for either normally open or closed operation.

B. Analog Outputs shall provide a modulating signal for control of remote devices. Outputs shall provide either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 milliamp output signal as required to provide proper control for the output device. Floating control is not acceptable for modulating devices when noted as an analog output (AO) in the points list or as proportional control in the sequence of operation. Floating control is acceptable only for VAV box actuator and reheat coil control valve control unless otherwise noted, but the graphics must display the valve and damper positions as a percentage.

C. Binary Inputs shall allow the monitoring of on/off signals from remote devices. The Binary Inputs shall be compatible with commonly available signaling devices. All status points shown on points list or mentioned in unit sequence of operation shall be positive proof binary switches, sensing the medium being controlled.

D. Analog Inputs shall allow the monitoring of variable, low voltage, current, or resistance signals and shall have a minimum of a 12-bit resolution. The analog Inputs shall be compatible with, and field configurable to, commonly available sensing devices.

E. All DO’s and AO’s shall be capable of being overridden through the BAS, either locally or remotely, by a user with the appropriate password protected privileges.

F. Refer to 23 09 93 Sequence of Operation for addition points of control and monitoring

2.22 CUSTOM GRAPHICS SCREENS

A. Custom graphics shall be created specifically for this project. Custom graphics shall be created by the manufacturer’s local application engineer who is familiar with the hardware and software for this project. The manufacturer’s local application engineer shall be certified for creating graphics. The manufacturer’s


MSA# 11172.00


application engineer shall meet with the owner to review sample and proposed graphics. After the meeting, custom graphics shall be created and submitted for review and comments.

B. Graphics shall include a floor plan of each floor listing every zone temperature setpoint and actual temperature reading in the building. Those zones out of temperature range shall be highlighted in a different color. The floor plan graphics shall be split into multiple zones for each floor as designated by the owner. Each floor may be broken down into multiple screens per wing to avoid overcrowding information on the screens.

C. Graphics shall include one master schedule listing every zone temperature setpoint and actual temperature reading in the building. Those zones out of temperature range shall be highlighted in a different color.

D. Graphics shall have a screen for each HVAC system including a graphic depicting the air handler with supply temperature and each VAV box with supply temperature served by that air handler. All shall be shown on one screen for troubleshooting.

E. Graphics shall be supplied for the overall building, each wing of the building, and each mechanical room as a minimum.

2.23 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Materials

1. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, of regular manufacture for this application.

2. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use.

B. Control Valves

1. General:

a. Control valves shall be two-way or three-way pattern as required by Sequence of Operation, refer to Specification Section 23 09 93, and shall be constructed for tight shutoff and shall operate satisfactorily against system pressures and differentials.

b. Control Isolation Valves and Control Two Position Valves shall be line size full port valves.

c. Valves with size up to and including 3" shall be screwed connections with 250 psi ANSI pressure body rating. Valves 4" and larger shall be flanged configuration.

d. Two-way control valves shall exhibit equal percentage characteristics. Non-equal percentage valve characteristics shall not be acceptable. Two-position control valves shall be line size and shall be provided with a 250 psi static pressure body rating.

e. Proportional control valves shall be sized for a maximum pressure drop of 4.0 psig at rated flow (except as noted).

f. Control valves on heating coils for air handling units that introduce outside air shall be spring return type, normally open on power failures and freeze conditions.

g. Globe valves are required for HRU and AHU heating and / or cooling applications.

2. Terminal Unit Control Valves:

a. Constructed of 360 psi forged yellow brass body, nickel plated brass ball, with optimizer insert for modulating applications, blow-out resistant stem, two- or three-port as indicated, and threaded ends for chilled or hot water, up to 50% glycol solutions.


MSA# 11172.00


b. Spring return is required for all Unit Ventilator heating valves and other terminal equipment that have an outside air source.

c. All non-spring return valves must have manual override ability built in to the actuator. d. Rating: ANSI class IV, maximum static pressure of 360 psig, minimum fluid temperature

of 20ºF and maximum of 250ºF operating conditions. e. Sizing: 4 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, rated to close against pump

shutoff head. f. Flow Characteristics: Two-way and three-way valves shall have equal percentage

characteristics.

3. Manufacturer:

a. Control valves shall be Belimo, Delta or Invensys electronic ball valves and Belimo or Invensys Globe valves for modulating applications. Belimo or Invensys Butterfly valves are acceptable for large flow applications, (ie. cooling tower, chiller).

4. Actuators:

a. Actuators for AHU, VAV, HRU and FCU valves shall be the same as specified below for dampers and shall have the same warranty.

b. Hydraulic actuators are not acceptable for any application for this project.

C. Motorized Control Dampers

1. General:

a. Blades shall be 16 gauge minimum and 6 " wide maximum and frame shall be of welded channel iron. Dampers with both dimensions under 18" may have strap iron frames. Dampers over 48" wide shall be equipped with a jack shaft to provide sufficient force throughout the intended operating range.

b. Dampers shall be black enamel finish or galvanized, with nylon bearings. c. Blade edge, tip and jamb seals shall be included for all dampers. Leakage through the

damper shall not exceed 10 CFM per square foot at 4" w.g. (based on a 48" x 48" test sample).

d. Motorized dampers shall be parallel blade for two-position control and opposed blade for proportional control applications.

e. All motorized dampers throughout the project shall be provided and wired by the BAS contractor. Refer to the fan and mechanical schedules, drawings, and control specifications for quantity of motor operated dampers.

2. Manufacturer:

a. Dampers shall be manufactured by Ruskin, Greenheck or Tamco.

3. Damper Actuators

a. Electronic damper actuators shall be properly sized to provide sufficient torque to position the damper throughout its operating range. All actuators operating in series or parallel to another actuator or in an open loop, such as minimum percentage outside air, shall be equipped with a positive positioning device. Provide spring return type actuators on outside air (close), return air (open), and relief air (close) dampers.

b. Actuators for all dampers and AHU and VAV valves shall be manufactured by Invensys (Duradrive), Siemens (OpenAir) or Belimo. The manufacturer must include a five year warranty from the manufactured date for the actuator. In addition to the 1 year material


MSA# 11172.00


and labor warranty, the manufacturer shall include a $50 satisfaction guarantee for each actuator to cover the labor cost for the replacement of an actuator if it fails or if the owner is not satisfied with the performance at any time during the 5 year warranty period.

D. Temperature Sensors/Transmitters

1. The temperature sensor shall be located as shown on the drawings. Provide a room sensor with digital readout of temperature with integral room setpoint adjustment. The room sensor shall contain a push-button for override of unoccupied conditions, up and down arrows to scroll through attributes, and enter key to make changes and a plug-in communications jack for connection of the portable editing device to the Lon bus.

2. The sensor display shall be capable of full programmability of the unit controller without the use of a portable editing device. The sensor shall be capable of showing the unit controller time and day of week. The display shall be capable of displaying setpoints & temperatures in either 1-degree increments or 0.1-degree increments and space temperature an accuracy of +/– ½ degreres. The sensor shall provide unoccupied override with cancel. The override time shall be user settable from 1 minute up to 7 days. For 1 minute to 16 hours the user shall be able to select any one minute interval.

3. The sensor shall provide password protection with user access codes and automatic time-out. The access levels of the sensor shall provide 3 levels of access within the system.

4. Sensors shall be RTD or Thermistor type, providing a linear OHM per degree F characteristic change, and shall be housed as required for the application.

5. Averaging sensors shall be used for supply air and mixed air applications and shall be a minimum of 22 feet long for locations greater than 16 square feet and a minimum of 5 feet long for locations less than 16 square feet.

6. Sensor ranges shall be selected as required for the application and all sensors shall be +/-1 deg. F.

E. Sensor/Thermostat Guards

1. Thermostats and room temperature sensors shall have exposed setpoint adjustment +/- 3 degees on either side of setpoint established at the BAS system.

F. Humidity Sensors

1. Humidity sensors shall be digitally profiled thin-film capacitive (32 bit mathematics) type with accuracy of + / - 2% over an operating range of 0 – 100% for outside air, room and duct applications. The stability shall be + / - 1 % annually, for two years. The output signal shall be 4-20 mA or 0-5V / 0-10V.

2. Where required, an RTD or thermistor temperature sensor shall be incorporated into the humidity sensor housing.

3. The sensing element shall be calibration free and replaceable.

G. Temperature and Humidity Sensor

1. The temperature and humidity combination sensor shall be housed in a single housing and located as shown on the drawings where humidity is required. Two separate sensors will not be allowed. Provide a room sensor with integral room setpoint adjustment. The room sensor shall contain a push-button for override of unoccupied conditions, up and down arrows to scroll through attributes, and enter key to make changes and a plug-in communications jack for connection of the portable editing device to the Lon bus.

2. The sensor display shall be capable of full programmability of the unit controller without the use of a portable editing device. The sensor shall be capable of showing the unit controller time and day of week. The display shall be capable of displaying setpoints & temperatures in either 1-degree increments or 0.1-degree increments and space humidity at an accuracy of +/– 2%. The


MSA# 11172.00


sensor shall provide unoccupied override with cancel. The override time shall be user settable from 1 minute up to 7 days. For 1 minute to 16 hours the user shall be able to select any one minute interval.

3. The sensor shall provide password protection with user access codes and automatic time-out. The access levels of the sensor shall provide 3 levels of access within the system. The wall sensor shall provide a user access which provides a minimum of 4 attributes which shall include space temperature, setpoint, discharge air temperature leaving the terminal unit, and the space humidity. In addition, with a service level access, the operator shall be able to view and modify a minimum of 8 additional attributes to perform air balance, system verification and checkout and perform diagnostics on the system.

4. Selected box groups as defined by the engineer or owner (media, computer rooms, and cafeteria) shall all be enabled when the override button is pushed for night setback.

H. Low Limit Thermostats

1. Low limit thermostats shall be automatic reset type and a minimum of 20 feet in length responding to the lowest temperature on any one foot of the element. Provide necessary quantity of thermostats to protect the coil adequately from a potential freeze condition (minimum of one low limit thermostat per 20 square feet of coil).

2. When a low limit condition is sensed the fan will stop, the AHU heating valves will go full open, outside air dampers and relief air dampers will go full closed, the return air damper will go full open, the DDC system shall be alarmed, and the heating pumps will speed up as required to handle the additional flow load.

3. Provide software to lock out the unit if the low limit trips and resets itself three times without being reset by an authorized operator through the BAS.

I. Static Pressure Sensors

1. Pressure sensors shall be commercial grade quality with +/- 1 % accuracy and shall produce a 4 20 ma or 0-5 vdc output over the range of the sensor. The range shall be field adjustable and selected to utilize the smallest possible range that will sufficiently cover the range required for normal operating conditions.

J. High Static Limits

1. Limits shall be manual reset type static limits, and shall be mounted on the discharge side of the supply fan on variable volume systems. The sensor will stop the fan if its limits are exceeded.

K. Current Sensing Status Switches

1. When status is indicated in the points list, it shall be detected through a current sensing status device that is capable of detecting flow of current to motors to determine accurate and reliable status. The current sensing amperage range shall be selected based upon the motor to be monitored.

L. Airflow Monitoring Stations

1. General: Provide electronic airflow monitoring stations to measure and control airflow with separate air flow measuring device and separate damper for control.

2. Signal: Device shall provide a 4-20 mA signal for converting to exact airflow. Unit shall be calibrated to measure exact airflow through the entire range of values from 0 to 100% flow.

3. Probes: Provide multiple probes as required to measure airflow. Verify with air balance in field and adjust and add probes as required to maintain exact airflow measurement.


MSA# 11172.00


4. Sensors: Provide multiple sensors per probe as recommended by manufacturer according to dimensions. Provide on glass encapsulated self heated thermistor and one glass encapsulated thermistor temperature sensor for each sensing point.

5. Support Struts and Support Bracket: Tubular aluminum extrusion. 6. Enclosure: Provide aluminum enclosure for indoor use and Nema 4 enclosure for outdoor use. 7. Airflow station shall be thermal dispersion technology or equivalent performance and equal to

Ebtron GTx116-P for duct and plenum applications 8. Airflow station shall communicate with LON, Bacnet or Modbus and be open protocol. 9. Fan inlet measurement devices are not acceptable. 10. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide airflow measuring stations of

one of the following:

a. Ebtron b. Paragon Controls c. Ruskin Mfg. Co. d. Tek-Air Systems Inc. e. Ultratech Industries

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTROL WIRING

A. Low Voltage Thermostats

1. Low voltage thermostats shall be furnished, installed and wired by the HVAC contractor. 2. The electrical contractor shall provide 4” square X 1-1/2” deep wall outlet boxes at 48” above

finished floor (with single-gang rings) for all thermostats/sensors. The electrical contractor shall provide one ¾” empty conduit from each thermostat/sensor location, turned out above accessible ceilings (in joist space or against overhead slab/deck).

3. The HVAC/Temperature Control Contractor shall provide all other necessary conduit, raceway and wiring related work. Conduit shall be identified in ceiling cavity and shall be provided with sweep bends, bushings and drag line.

B. Line Voltage Thermostats

1. The electrical contractor shall provide 4” square X 1-1/2” deep wall outlet boxes at 48” above finished floor (with single-gang rings) for all thermostats.

2. The electrical contractor shall provide line voltage power wiring, from thermostat outlet box to equipment that is to be controlled by the thermostat, in ¾” conduit.

3. Provide with a contactor to shut fans and close valve through the DDC system.

C. 120VAC BAS/Temperature Control Circuits

1. Temperature Control Contractor (TCC) shall provide all 120 Volt power wiring as required for temperature control panels and transformers to low voltage. TCC shall connect to existing spare at electrical panel board and provide proper circuit breaker per NEC and label panel board accordingly.

2. All other required 120VAC raceway and wiring related work shall be provided by the BAS Contractor.

D. General Control Wiring Requirements and Installation Methods


MSA# 11172.00


1. Except where specifically indicated otherwise herein or within Division 23 specifications, the HVAC/Temperature Control Contractor shall provide all electrical work as required for all temperature control related wiring (i.e. conduit, raceway, outlet boxes, junction boxes, wiring, etc.) in accordance with Division 26 requirements. All conduit shall be 3/4” minimum.

2. Coordinate all thermostat/sensor locations in field (case by case) with Architect, Owner and Electrical Contractor to ensure that they are placed in locations that will not interfere with furniture, equipment, artwork, wall-hung specialties, room finishes, etc. All thermostat/sensor wall locations indicated on HVAC drawings are schematic only and must be verified case-by-case prior to rough-in.

3. All electrical work as described in this specification shall be per the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and per applicable state and local codes. Refer to Division 26 specifications (including Sections 260519 and 260533) for required installation methods and follow Division 26 requirements as related to low voltage and communication technology system cables.

4. Where “free-air” installation methods (either exposed above the ceilings, in bridle rings or in cable trays) are permitted under Division 26 above ceilings, provide plenum-rated cables wherever plenum ceilings (if any) exist and install as defined under Division 26. Install low voltage circuits, located in concrete slabs and masonry walls, or exposed in occupied areas, in electrical conduit regardless of what wiring methods are permitted under Division 26.

5. Where cable trays or bridle rings are provided by the electrical contractor for low voltage cables, these raceways may be utilized for control wiring by this contractor (provide special color coded jackets, label cable jackets per Division 26 and group control wiring cables together). Provide conduit drops from cable tray/bridle ring paths to wall outlet boxes and equipment unless directed otherwise under Division 26.

6. Regardless of permitted methods in Division 26, all cables/wiring installed concealed by gypsum board, masonry or other inaccessible materials in walls or above ceilings shall be installed in conduit, ¾” minimum.

7. All conduit, bridle rings, raceway, outlet boxes, etc. necessary for complete operational installation of control wiring shall be provided (furnished and installed) by the temperature control contractor in strict compliance with Division 26 documents. Coordinate all work with all other applicable trades including the electrical contractor.

8. Provide all required conduit work to and between equipment in a manner compliant with that described above (i.e. between VAV boxes, to boilers, starters, condensing units, etc. as applicable).

9. Install control wiring without splices between terminal points, color-coded. Install in neat workmanlike manner, securely fastened. Install in accordance with National Electrical Code and per Division 26.

10. Install circuits over 25 volt with color-coded No. 12 wire in electrical metallic tubing, per Division 26. Install circuits under 25 volt with color-coded No. 18 wire with 0.031" high temperature (105 degrees F) plastic insulation on each conductor and plastic sheath over all. Install electronic circuits with color-coded No. 22 wire with 0.023" polyethylene insulation on each conductor with plastic-jacketed copper shield over all.

11. All control cabling shall be labeled at both ends with descriptive information of control device.

3.2 OPERATING AMBIENTS

A. Electronic controls mounted in unconditioned space shall be rated for ambient operating conditions of –40 degree F to +140 degree F.

B. Controls not meeting these limits shall be mounted in an accessible location within conditioned space.


MSA# 11172.00


3.3 COMMISSIONING

A. Automatic Temperature Controls

1. Wiring and tubing shall be identified with the same numbers and symbols as used on the corrected, approved record diagrams.

2. Label control apparatus with nameplates or valve tags bearing the functional designations shown on approved control diagrams.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1. Submit manuals each, in hardback 3-ring loose-leaf binder, covering details of operation and maintenance for the BUILDING AUTOMATION and Fire Alarm System.

2. Submit on disk in electronic format using Adobe PDF version 7 or higher

a. Include marking or tagging of specific models and options used on the project. b. All schedules shall be submitted in Microsoft Excel or comma delimited format. c. All drawings be submitted in AutoCAD DWG or DXF format.

3. Submit manuals 1 month before systems start-up and commissioning. 4. General Contents

a. Title page with project name, contractor's and subcontractors' names, addresses and telephone numbers.

5. Index Sheet

a. Manufacturers' operating and maintenance manuals, including parts lists for each piece of equipment and accessories requiring service or maintenance, the warranty period, and the name, address, and telephone number of the nearest sales and service organization for each item.

b. Complete description of functions and operation of each piece of equipment including descriptions of how equipment operates in conjunction with automatic control systems, and instruction for cleaning, lubrication, and maintenance.

c. Descriptive information:

1) Function or service. 2) Classification. 3) Design capability. 4) Performance characteristics. 5) Principal components. 6) Distribution arrangement. 7) Schematic diagram. 8) Control diagram.

d. Equipment data:

1) Materials of construction. 2) Parts designation. 3) Manufacturer and model number. 4) Size and rating. 5) Pressure, speed, and temperature limitations.


MSA# 11172.00


e. Inspection and maintenance information:

1) Inspection schedule and checklist. 2) Schedules and procedures for lubrication, replacement, adjustment, cleaning,

painting, protection and testing. 3) Standard forms for compiling inspection and maintenance records. 4) Inspection during operation. 5) Adjustment and regulation. 6) Operational test procedures. 7) Detection of malfunction. 8) Precautions. 9) Troubleshooting.

f. Step-by-step procedure for starting, stopping, an operating each system:

1) Starting and stopping procedures. 2) Adjustment and regulation. 3) Seasonal changeover. 4) Seasonal shut down. 5) Seasonal start-up. 6) Logs and records.

g. Copies of inspection certificates provided by the city, county, state and insurance companies.

h. Approved start and completion dates of the guarantee period. i. Valve schedules and diagrams.

C. HVAC

1. Building Automation System

a. Control diagrams including electric and interlock wiring. b. Final installed control software listings and flow charts. Listings shall include English

comment lines documenting purpose of each group of executable statements and relationship to control sequence for ease of future troubleshooting and modification.

c. Record data base information. d. Point identification and sensor characteristics. e. As-built wiring diagrams. f. Central station operator's manuals and software documentation. g. Contents shall be type written.

D. Diagrams

1. Frame and mount the following information: Information Location Automatic temperature control diagrams and Adjacent to each control sequences panel. Appropriate control and interface drawings, Posted on the inside cover including a simplified guide to local programming Management panel. of each Facility through the digital display unit, a directory of I/O points connected to that panel, and variables which may be displayed.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Diagrams shall be typed written or computer generated. 3. Diagrams shall be as-built, and shall include interfaces and interlocks with other equipment.

E. Documentation

1. Submit the following certificates, statements, receipts, and reports as specified herein:

a. Record drawings. b. Submittals. c. Operation and maintenance manuals. d. Certification of BAS system calibration and testing. e. Receipts for BAS system training. f. Receipt acknowledging no BAS system failures during test period.

F. Record Drawings

1. Record drawings shall include the manufacture and model number of equipment indicated in schedules on the Drawings.

2. Reproductions of design drawings shall not be used in the preparation of record drawings. 3. All record drawing information (drawings and cut sheets) shall be furnished in an electronic

format.

3.4 MAINTENANCE

A. Equipment operated prior to the date of substantial completion shall be maintained in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.5 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND CHECK-OUT

A. General

1. Verify readiness for start-up of each item of equipment on the basis of inspection.

B. Automatic Temperature Controls

1. The system manufacturer shall provide the services of control technicians at start-up to check-out the system, input data supplied by the Owner, and place the system in operation. Manufacture shall verify proper operation of each item in the sequences of operation, including hardware and software.

2. Check-out each system for control function through the entire sequence. Check actuator travel on dampers and valves for action and extent. Check calibration of instruments.

3. Verify that control dampers open and close completely. 4. Calculate and verify instrument setpoints.

C. BAS System Acceptance Conditions

1. Calibration and testing: Calibrate equipment and verify operation before the system is placed on-line. Check each control point, within the system by making a comparison between the control command at the operator console and field-controlled device. BAS control loops, interlocks, sequences, energy management programs, and alarms shall be tested and stable operation verified. Control loop parameters and tuning constants shall be adjusted to produce accurate, stable control


MSA# 11172.00


system operation. Before obtaining permission to schedule the acceptance test, provide written certification that the installed complete system has been calibrated, tested and is ready to begin acceptance testing.

2. Acceptance test: Conduct final acceptance test, with the Owner on site, on the complete and total installed and operational automation system to demonstrate that it is functioning in accordance with requirements specified herein. Demonstrate the correct operation of monitored and controlled points as well as the operation and capabilities of sequences, reports, specialized control algorithms, diagnostics, and software.

3. Final system acceptance will be based on the following items:

a. Completion of the installation of hardware and software items. Demonstrate complete operation of the system, including hardware and software, with no failures during a 14 consecutive day period. Obtain receipt from the Owner acknowledging no failures within the test period. Submit a daily log documenting failures.

b. Satisfactory completion of the record drawings, and operating and maintenance manuals. c. Satisfactory completion of training programs.

3.6 BACKUPS

A. At project closeout, this contractor shall turn over to the owner 2 sets of computerized backups of the complete temperature control system.

B. Additionally, this contractor shall store at its main office a backup of the system for a period of not less than 5 years.

C. Within the first year, any changes or modifications which are made to the software shall be backed up and two copies are to be distributed to the owner after each change.

3.7 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE

A. Upon completion of the calibration, contractor shall start-up the system and perform all necessary testing and run diagnostic tests to ensure proper operation.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for generating all software and entering all database necessary to perform the sequence of control and specified software routines.

C. An acceptance test in the presence of the Owner's representative or engineer shall be performed.

3.8 WARRANTY

A. All BAS devices and installation shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year from the date of job acceptance by the owner. This is when the work in the contract is completed and signed off by the Owner and engineer.

B. At this time this contractor shall send a letter to the Owner and copy the architect and engineer stating that the work is complete per the drawings and specifications and the warranty is to start at one date and end at another.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Any equipment, software, or labor found to be defective during this period shall be repaired or replaced without expense to the owner.



MSA# 11172.00

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 1

SECTION 230993 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS) Contractor shall be bound by the same Specification that the mechanical and electrical trades must follow.


A. Refer to 230923 for all work to be included.

B. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment. Control sequences are hereby defined as the manner and method by which automatic temperature controls function.

C. Controls equipment and control panels to provide control sequences as outlined herein.

D. Coordinate control work with controls provided by Equipment Manufacturers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings for each system automatically controlled, containing the following information:

1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, pumps, coils, boilers, chillers, dampers, valves, terminal units, and other control devices.

2. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control. 3. Indicate electric wiring; factory and field wiring. 4. Indicate each control panel required, with internal and external wiring clearly indicated. Provide

detail of panel face, including controls, instruments, and labeling.

B. Control Sequences:

1. Provide written sequences of operation for each controlled system and piece of equipment. Sequences shall be written in Contractor’s own words and shall not be a repetition of the sequences contained herein.

1.4 GENERAL CONTROL REQUIREMENTS AND SEQUENCES

A. BAS Contractor shall provide all 120 Volt power wiring as required for temperature control panels, damper actuators and valve actuators, and transformers as required to low voltage. BAS Contractor shall connect to existing spare at electrical panel board and provide proper circuit breaker per NEC and label panel board accordingly.


MSA# 11172.00


B. This contractor shall be familiar with and responsible for wiring of all auxiliary equipment (control and power wiring), and controllers required under the mechanical division 23. Equipment and controllers shall include but not be limited by the following items:

1. Remotely located transducers and sensors 2. Remote monitoring and control panels

C. BAS Contractor shall provide airflow measuring stations at all outside air connections to variable air volume equipment and where specified and shown. BAS Contractor shall integrate each airflow measuring station into the BAS. Airflow measuring stations shall be capable of reading airflow from 0% through 100%.

D. These additional general requirements shall also apply.

1. All water coils exposed to outside air, shall have serpentined freeze stats. Freeze stats for hot water coils shall be located across the face of the coil, downstream of the heating coil (minimum of 1 for every 20 square feet of coil). Upon alarm, when unit is shutdown or when power outage occurs, outdoor air damper shall shut, heating valve shall open to normal position, fan shall stop. Provide time delay function for freeze stat. Provide hardwire interlocks.

2. All fresh air intakes and relief/exhaust ducts or louvers, gravity roof ventilators, etc. shall have motor operated dampers. Dampers shall be low leak with blade and edge seals.

3. All motor operated dampers shall be furnished and installed by the mechanical contractor, unless otherwise noted. All damper actuators shall be furnished and installed by the BAS Contractor, (unless damper and actuator are provided by equipment manufacturer). All damper actuators shall be wired by BAS Contractor. BAS Contractor shall provide all necessary transformers, contactors, controls and wiring for interlocking equipment to motor operated dampers. Provide end switches as necessary for proper sequencing of damper operation and energizing of fan motor. All water balancing valves shall be automatic pressure independent balancing valves except where specified as manual balance valves. Where manual balance valves are specified for 3 way coil configurations, a manual balance valve shall be provided in the bypass of the 3 way valve piping configuration.

4. Control Isolation Valves and Control Two Position Valves shall be line size full port valves. 5. Three-point floating control valves/actuators are not acceptable for modulating control valve

applications. 6. All control setpoints shall be graphics on the BAS computer and adjustable thru the BAS. Initial

setpoints may be given in this section, but shall be adjusted in the field per actual field conditions or per the owner’s recommendations. Abbreviations for the control point type are listed in the key below.

a. Key

1) AI: Analog Input 2) AO: Analog Output 3) DI: Digital Input 4) DO: Digital Output 5) LL: Low Limit Alarm 6) HL: High Limit Alarm 7) GA: General Alarm

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)


MSA# 11172.00


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTANT VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. CV Air Handling Unit (HW/CW, Supply Fan only)

1. General:

a. Provide two-way, normally closed, modulating control valve for chilled water coils. Provide three-way, normally open, modulating control valve for hot water coils. All setpoints listed in this section are adjustable through the BAS.

2. Startup

a. During the "start-up" cycle the fan shall run with the dampers in the full recirculation position. Provide morning warm-up sequence with optimum start function. When the return air temperature reaches setpoint (68 deg F adjustable), the minimum outside air damper shall open to the controlled minimum outdoor air position.

3. Supply Fan Control

a. The supply fan shall run continuously at constant speed. Provide a high limit static pressure sensor in the supply fan discharge that will alarm the system and fail safe the air handler with manual reset on a high limit of 4.0” (adjustable). Provide a current transducer to prove fan operation. Provide a high and low limit current cutout for the transducer that will alarm the system.

b. Control and monitoring points shall include but not be limited to the following:

1) Supply Fan on-off status (DO/ DI) 2) Supply Fan current (HL/ LL)

4. Minimum Outside Air Control

a. Provide and install an integral or remote mounted air flow measuring station located downstream of the minimum outside air damper which will modulate the outside air damper to maintain a constant minimum outside airflow as scheduled. If the minimum damper is full open and requires more fresh air, the return damper shall be modulated closed until the minimum outside air is achieved. If an integral airflow station/damper is utilized, the controller shall reside on the BAS network (hardwiring between independent controllers is not acceptable).


1) Outside air damper position (% open) (AO) 2) Outside air CFM (AI)

5. Economizer Control

a. Provide dual enthalpy economizer control. Economizer control shall be enabled whenever the outside air enthalpy is lower than the return air enthalpy. Enthalpy shall be calculated from sensors which are tied to the same controller for accuracy. During economizer mode, the minimum outside air damper control shall be disabled and the minimum outside air damper shall be set at 100% opened. The economizer damper shall modulate open on a


MSA# 11172.00


call for cooling and modulate closed on a call for heating. The return damper shall modulate inversely with the economizer damper.


1) Outside air temperature (AI) 2) Outdoor Air Humidity (AI) 3) Return air temperature (AI) 4) Return Air Humidity (AI/ HL/ LL) 5) Return air damper position (% open) (AO)

6. Supply Air Temperature Setpoint

a. The supply air temperature setpoint shall be reset based on outside air temperature. Whenever the outside air temperature is 60 degrees or above, the supply air temperature setpoint shall be 55 degrees. Whenever the outside air temperature is 30 degrees or below, the supply air temperature setpoint shall be 60 degrees. The supply air temperature setpoint shall increase linearly from 55 to 60 degrees as the outside air temperature drops from 60 to 30 degrees. Provide a supply air temperature high limit of 90 degrees and low limit of 40 degrees that will alarm the system and place the air handler in fail safe mode with manual reset.


1) Supply air temperature (AI/ AO/ HL/ LL) 2) Outside air temperature (AI)

7. Cooling Control

a. Cooling shall be controlled to maintain supply air temperature setpoint. On a call for cooling the heating valve shall be closed. On a further call for cooling the economizer damper (if enabled) shall be modulated to full open position prior to the cooling valve being opened. On a further call for cooling the chilled water valve shall be modulated open.


1) Chilled water valve position (% open) (AO)

8. Heating Control

a. Heating shall be controlled to maintain supply air temperature setpoint. On a call for heating, the cooling valve shall be closed. On a further call for heating, the economizer damper (if enabled) shall be modulated to minimum position prior to the heating valve being opened. On a further call for heating the hot water valve shall be modulated open.


1) Heating water valve position (% open) (AO) 2) Re-heat water valve position (% open) (AO)

9. Filter Pressure Drop

a. Provide static pressure differential switch across each filter which will alarm the system on high static pressure limits.


1) Filter High Static (GA)


MSA# 11172.00


10. Mixed Air Low Limit Control

a. Provide a mixed air low limit whenever the mixed air temperature drops below 40 deg. F dry bulb that will alarm the system, close economizer damper and modulate the outside air damper below minimum to maintain mixed air setpoint equal to supply air setpoint.


1) Mixed air temperature (AI/ HL/ LL)

11. Freeze Stat Control

a. A low temperature cutout thermostat located in the discharge of the heating coil, will alarm the system and put the air handler in fail safe position when the temperature falls below 37 degrees. Provide an adjustable time delay of 5 minutes for start-up. The low temperature cutout thermostat shall require manual reset.


1) Freeze-stat status (GA)

12. Smoke Detector

a. When the smoke detector is alarmed, the BAS shall be alarmed and the air handler shall fail safe with manual reset. Electrical contractor shall furnish, HVAC Contractor shall mount & Electrical contractor shall wire a UL listed photoelectric smoke detector per local code authority having jurisdiction.


1) Smoke detector (GA) 2) Fan Shutdown – Hard Wired

13. Unoccupied Mode

a. During the unoccupied mode of operation, the outdoor and return air dampers shall be positioned to provide 100% recirculated air only. The Supply Fan shall be cycled to maintain the space temperature setback at a setpoint range of 55-60 deg. F (adjustable) during the heating season and 80 deg. F (adjustable) during the cooling season. Occupancy shall be predetermined by the Owner and programmed into the BAS.

14. Shut Down

a. At shutdown the air handler shall go to fail safe position. Fail safe position is defined by the following: The supply fan is off, the return air damper is fully open, the minimum outside air and economizer dampers are closed, the heating valve is open and the cooling valve is closed.

15. De-humidification

a. Provide a hot water heating coil in the reheat position for dehumidification. When the space humidity, as measured by the humidity sensor in the main return duct, rises above 60% (adjustable), modulate the chilled water valve to full open. Modulate the reheat coil to maintain space temperature setpoint. When the space humidity reaches setpoint, continue with normal heating & cooling operation.


MSA# 11172.00


B. CV Air Handling Unit (DX, Supply Fan only)

1. General:

a. All setpoints listed in this section are adjustable through the BAS. Control and monitoring points shall include but not be limited to the following:

2. Startup

a. During the "start-up" cycle the fan shall run with the dampers in the full recirculation position. Provide morning warm-up sequence with optimum start function. When the return air temperature reaches setpoint (68 deg F, adjustable), the minimum outside air damper shall open to the controlled minimum outdoor air position.


a. The supply fan shall run continuously at constant speed. Provide a high limit static pressure sensor in the supply fan discharge that will alarm the system and fail safe the air handler with manual reset on a high limit of 2.0” (adjustable). Provide a current transducer to prove fan operation. Provide a high and low limit current cutout for the transducer that will alarm the system.


1) Supply Fan on-off status (DO/ DI) 2) Supply Fan current (HL/ LL)





5. Cooling Control

a. Cooling shall be controlled to maintain supply air temperature setpoint. On a call for cooling the heating valve shall be closed. On a further call for cooling the economizer damper (if enabled) shall be modulated to full open position prior to mechanical cooling. On a further call for cooling the mechanical cooling shall be staged on as necessary to maintain supply air temperature. Provide Low Ambient Controls on condensing unit for operation down to -20 degrees F.


1) Mechanical Cooling on-off status (DO/ DI)


MSA# 11172.00



a. Provide static pressure differential switch across each filter which will alarm the system on high static pressure limits.


1) Filter High Static (GA)

7. Shut Down

a. At shutdown the air handler shall go to fail safe position. Fail safe position is defined by the following: The supply fan is off, the return air damper is fully open, the minimum outside air and economizer dampers are closed, the heating valve is open and mechanical cooling is off.

3.2 VAV AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. AHU-1 – VAV Air Handling Unit (HW/CW, Supply & Return Fan, Humidifier)

1. General:

a. Provide two-way, normally closed, modulating control valve for chilled water coils. Provide two-way, normally open, modulating control valve for hot water coils. All setpoints listed in this section are adjustable through the BAS. Control and monitoring points shall include but not be limited to the following:

2. Startup

a. At shutdown the air handler shall be at fail safe position. Fail safe position is defined by the following: The supply and return fans are off, the return air damper is fully open, the minimum outside air, economizer and relief dampers are closed, the heating valve is open, humidifier valve is closed, and the cooling valve is closed. At startup, the supply and return fans shall be ramped up to operational speed. After a 5 minute time delay the minimum outside air control shall be enabled.

b. When a unit is associated with an exhaust hood for make-up air, disable morning warm-up on hood start.


a. The supply fan VFD speed shall be controlled from a duct static pressure sensor located 2/3 downstream in ductwork. Where this results in sensor being located downstream of major ductwork splits, multiple sensors shall be installed in each major branch to maintain minimum setpoint in each branch.

b. The supply fan shall be modulated to operational speed to maintain static pressure setpoint. When the sensor measures low pressure, the supply fan shall be ramped up to maintain setpoint. When the sensor measures high pressure, the supply fan shall be ramped down to maintain setpoint.

c. For systems with DDC control of individual zone boxes reporting to a central control system, static pressure setpoint shall be reset based on the zone requiring the most pressure. In this way the setpoint is reset lower until one zone damper is nearly wide open to save fan energy.


MSA# 11172.00


d. Initial static pressure setpoint shall be 1.0”. Provide a high limit static pressure sensor in the supply fan discharge that will alarm the system and fail safe the air handler with manual reset on a high limit of 4.0”. Provide and install an airflow measuring station located in the supply air ductwork to measure supply airflow. Provide a current transducer to prove fan operation. Provide a high and low limit current cutout for the transducer that will alarm the system.

e. Control and monitoring points shall include but not be limited to the following:

1) Supply Fan on-off status (DO/ DI) 2) Supply Fan current (HL/ LL) 3) Supply Fan VFD Speed controller (% max. speed) (AO) 4) Supply air Duct static pressure – 2/3rds (AI/ AO) (HL/ LL – Hard Wired) 5) Supply air CFM (AI)

4. Return Fan Control

a. The return fan VFD speed shall be modulated to maintain the desired return air flow as dictated by the airflow measuring station located in the return duct. Provide and install airflow measuring station. The desired return airflow shall be calculated from the supply airflow (measured from the supply air measuring station) minus the outside airflow as scheduled at all times. Interlock return fan operation with supply fan operation, so that return fan is off if supply fan is off. Provide a current transducer to prove fan operation. Provide a high and low limit current cutout for the transducer that will alarm the system.

b. Provide alternate price to deduct the air flow measuring station located in the return duct and control the return fan VFD based on a calculation of the supply fan CFM minus the outside air flow.

c. Control and monitoring points shall include but not be limited to the following:

1) Return Fan on-off status (DO/ DI) 2) Return Fan current (HL/ LL) 3) Return Fan VFD Speed controller (% max. speed) (AO) 4) Return air CFM (AI)

5. Minimum Outside Air Control

a. Provide and install an air flow measuring station located downstream of the minimum outside air damper which will modulate the outside air damper to maintain a constant minimum outside airflow as scheduled. If the minimum damper is full open and requires more fresh air, the return damper shall be modulated closed until the minimum outside air is achieved. Provide a static pressure sensor in the outside air chamber of the AHU that will alarm the system and fail safe the air handler on high limit of -2.0”.


1) Outside air damper position (% open) (AO) 2) Outside air CFM (AI) 3) Outside air Plenum pressure (AI/ HL)

6. Economizer Control

a. Provide dual enthalpy economizer control. Economizer control shall be enabled whenever the outside air enthalpy is lower than the return air enthalpy. Enthalpy shall be calculated from sensors which are tied to the same controller for accuracy. During economizer mode, the minimum outside air damper control shall be disabled and the minimum outside air damper shall be set at 100% opened. The economizer damper shall modulate open on a


MSA# 11172.00


call for cooling and modulate closed on a call for heating. The return damper shall modulate inversely with the economizer damper.


1) Outside air temperature (AI) 2) Outdoor Air Humidity (AI) 3) Return air temperature (AI) 4) Return Air Humidity (AI/ HL/ LL) 5) Return air damper position (% open) (AO)

7. Relief Control

a. A static pressure sensor shall be located in the return air chamber which shall modulate the relief damper in order to maintain a positive static pressure setpoint of 0.1”. Provide a second static pressure sensor in the return air chamber that will alarm the system and fail safe the air handler on high limit of 1.0”.


1) Return air Plenum pressure (AI/ AO/ HL/ LL)





9. Cooling Control

a. Cooling shall be controlled to maintain supply air temperature setpoint. On a call for cooling the heating valve shall be closed. On a further call for cooling the economizer damper (if enabled) shall be modulated to full open position prior to the cooling valve being opened. On a further call for cooling the 2-way chilled water valve shall be modulated open.


1) Chilled water valve position (% open) (AO) 2) Supply air temperature (AI)

10. Emergency Backup Cooling Control (Not Present In Alternate Deduct)

a. If supply air temperature can not be maintained for a period of 10 minutes (adjustable) or the BAS detects an alarm fault with the main chilled water cooling plant which indicates chilled water is not available, emergency backup cooling shall be initiated.


MSA# 11172.00


b. At initiation of emergency backup cooling, the chilled water cooling valve shall be closed. The backup DX condensing unit shall be enabled. Reset back to normal cooling operation shall be by means of manual user input via the building automation system interface.

c. During emergency backup enabled cooling the modified cooling sequence shall be as follows:

1) Cooling shall be controlled to maintain supply air temperature set point. On a call for cooling, the heating valve shall be closed. On a further call for cooling the economizer damper (if enabled) shall be modulated to full open position prior to mechanical cooling. On a further call for cooling the mechanical DX cooling shall be staged on through the available compressor stages. Hot gas bypass solenoid valves (2 total – 1 per circuit) shall be wired in parallel with 1st compressor stage on each circuit.

2) Control and monitoring points shall include but not be limited to the following:

i) Mechanical Cooling enable/disable status (DO/ DI) ii) Mechanical Cooling Stage 1 (compressor 1) on-off (DO) iii) Mechanical Cooling Stage 2 (compressor 2) on-off (DO) iv) Mechanical Cooling Stage 3 (compressor 3) on-off (DO) v) Mechanical Cooling Stage 4 (compressor 4) on-off (DO) vi) Condensing unit general alarm / fault monitoring (DI)

11. Heating Control

a. Heating shall be controlled to maintain supply air temperature setpoint. On a call for heating, the cooling valve shall be closed. On a further call for heating, the economizer damper (if enabled) shall be modulated to minimum position prior the heating valve being opened. On a further call for heating the 2-way hot water valve shall be modulated open.


1) Heating water valve position (% open) (AO)

12. Humidifier Control

a. A humidity sensor located in the return air ductwork shall modulate the low pressure steam control valve to provide humidification. The humidity setpoint shall be reset based on outside air temperature. Whenever the outside air temperature is 45 degrees or above, the humidity setpoint shall be 35% relative. Whenever the outside air temperature is 20 degrees or below, the humidity setpoint shall be 20% relative. The humidity setpoint shall decrease linearly from 35% to 20% as the outside air temperature drops from 45 to 20 degrees. Alarm the system on a low limit of 15% humidity and a high limit of 60% humidity. The humidity high limit shall fail safe and de-energize the humidity control valve.


1) Steam Humidifier output capacity (%) (AO), from generator, H-1, DDC controller) 2) Steam Humidifier Generator, H-1, enable/disable (software point from BAS). 3) Humidity (HL/LL) (to generator DDC controller) 4) Steam Generator Status and software alarms (software point to BAS from H-1 DDC

controller)


a. Provide static pressure differential switch across each filter which will alarm the system on high and low static pressure limits.


MSA# 11172.00



1) Filter High Static (HL/ LL)

14. Mixed Air Low Limit Control

a. Provide a mixed air low limit whenever the mixed air temperature drops below 40 deg. F dry bulb, that will alarm the system, close economizer damper and modulate the outside air damper below minimum to maintain mixed air setpoint equal to supply air setpoint.


1) Mixed air temperature (AI/ HL/ LL)

15. Freeze Stat Control

a. A low temperature cutout thermostat located in the discharge of the heating coil, will alarm the system and put the air handler in fail safe position when the temperature falls below 37 degrees. Provide an adjustable time delay of 5 minutes for start-up. The low temperature cutout thermostat shall require manual reset.


1) Freeze-stat status (GA)

16. Smoke Detector

a. When the smoke detector is alarmed, the system shall be alarmed and the air handler shall fail safe with manual reset. Electrical contractor shall furnish, HVAC Contractor shall mount & Electrical contractor shall wire a UL listed photoelectric smoke detector per local code authority having jurisdiction.


1) Smoke detector (GA) 2) Fan Shutdown – Hard Wired

17. Shut Down

a. At shutdown the air handler shall go to fail safe position.

18. De-humidification

a. When the space humidity, as measured by the humidity sensor in the return duct, rises above 60%, reset the supply air temperature down to 53 degrees until space humidity setpoint is achieved.


1) Space relative humidity (AI) 2) Supply air temperature (AI)

3.3 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM ACU

A. The unit shall operate on a 7-day/night schedule with three hour occupied and/or unoccupied override. The fan shall cycle in sequence with the heating/cooling coils to maintain space temperature setpoint.


MSA# 11172.00


B. Provide Low Ambient Controls on condensing unit for operation down to -20 degrees F.

3.4 CONDENSING UNITS

A. All safeties interlocks associated with the condensing unit shall be hard wired. Software interlocks are acceptable as secondary additional safeties.

B. Unit shall have self contained controls by unit manufacturer. Provide Low Ambient Controls on condensing unit for operation down to -20 degrees F.

C. On a call for cooling, with all safety devices satisfied, the first stage compressor contactor and condenser fan contactor energize causing the compressor and condenser fan motor to operate (the indoor fan contactor shall be wired to start at the same time as the compressor). A liquid line solenoid valve will open when the first stage compressor starts.

D. On a further call for cooling, the second stage compressor contactor and condenser fan contactor energize causing the second stage compressor and condenser fan motor to operate. A liquid line solenoid valve will open when the second stage compressor starts.

E. As cooling demand decreases, the second stage compressor contactor and condenser fan contactor de- energize causing the second stage compressor and condenser fan motor to shut down. A corresponding liquid line solenoid valve will close when the second stage compressor is off preventing refrigerant migration back to the compressor during the off cycle.

F. Control and monitoring points shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Compressors on/off status (DO/ DI) 2. Condenser fans on/off status (DO/ DI) 3. Outside air temperature (AI)

3.5 CENTRAL AIR TERMINAL UNITS

A. VAV Boxes

1. Provide three-way, normally open, modulating control valve for hot water coils. 2. Provide low voltage DDC controller, transformer, differential pressure transmitter, actuator and

wiring for VAV box. BAS Contractor shall field or factory mount controller at their expense. BAS Contractor shall provide all 120 power wiring as required for transformers and temperature control panels. BAS Contractor shall connect to existing spare at electrical panel board and provide proper circuit breaker per NEC and label panel board accordingly. BAS Contractor shall route all low voltage wiring to VAV boxes, controllers and thermostats for complete operation. VAV box manufacturer shall furnish flow ring, 1/2” round damper shaft for direct mounting of actuator, and control enclosure.

3. Provide wall mounted temperature sensor(s) with digital display of room temperature and setpoint (+/- 3 deg. F. adjustable from setpoint determined by BAS), override feature (2 hours, adjustable thru BAS), and communications jack for connection of palmtop computer.

4. On a call for heat, VAV damper shall modulate down to minimum setpoint position. On a further call for heating, control valve shall open and modulate to maintain space temperature. On a call for cooling, control valve shall shut and damper shall modulate open to satisfy room temperature. Provide supply air temperature sensor tied to BAS.


MSA# 11172.00


5. During un-occupied mode VAV boxes shall be capable of stroking fully closed for temperature control.

6. Control and monitoring points shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Reheat valve position (% open) (AO) b. Damper position (AO) c. Zone temperature (AI/ AO) d. Zone occupancy override pushbutton (DI) e. Actual CFM (AI) f. Minimum CFM setpoint (AO) g. Maximum CFM setpoint (AO) h. Discharge air temperature (AI)

3.6 EXHAUST FANS

A. Toilet Exhaust Fans (BAS)

1. Exhaust fan operation shall be controlled by the BAS. During occupied mode the exhaust fan motor damper shall open and fan shall start. During unoccupied mode the exhaust fan motor damper shall be closed and fan shall be off. A current transducer shall indicate status thru the BAS.

2. Control and monitoring points shall include but not be limited to the following:

1) Fan on-off status (DO/DI) 2) Runtime

3.7 CONTROL WIRING

A. Low Voltage Thermostats

1. Low voltage thermostats shall be furnished, installed and wired by the HVAC contractor. 2. The electrical contractor shall provide wall outlet boxes for all thermostats/sensors. The electrical

contractor shall provide one ¾” empty conduit from each thermostat/sensor location, turned out above accessible ceilings (in joist space or against overhead slab/deck).

3. The HVAC/Temperature Control Contractor shall provide all other necessary conduit, raceway and wiring related work. Conduit shall be identified in ceiling cavity and shall be provided with sweep bends, bushings and drag line.

B. Line Voltage Thermostats

1. The electrical contractor shall provide wall outlet boxes (with single-gang rings) for all thermostats.

2. The electrical contractor shall provide line voltage power wiring, from thermostat outlet box to equipment that is to be controlled by the thermostat, in 3/4” conduit.

3. The HVAC/BAS Contactor shall provide means to shutoff fans and close valve(s) through the DDC system.

C. 120VAC BAS/Temperature Control Circuits


MSA# 11172.00


1. BAS Contractor shall provide all 120 Volt power wiring as required for temperature control panels and transformers to low voltage. BAS Contractor shall connect to existing spare at electrical panel board and provide proper circuit breaker per NEC and label panel board accordingly. .

2. All other required 120VAC raceway and wiring related work shall be provided by the BAS Contractor.

D. General Control Wiring Requirements and Installation Methods

1. Except where specifically indicated otherwise herein or within Division 26 specifications, the HVAC/Temperature Control Contractor shall provide all electrical work as required for all temperature control related wiring (i.e. conduit, raceway, outlet boxes, junction boxes, wiring, etc.) in accordance with Division 26 requirements. All conduit shall be 3/4” minimum.

2. For new construction and renovations, conceal all control wiring within walls, above ceilings and below floors. If agreed by engineer in writing that it is not possible to install concealed in renovations, provide all required surface mounted raceway and conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner

3. Coordinate all thermostat/sensor locations in field (case by case) with Architect, Owner and Electrical Contractor to ensure that they are placed in locations that will not interfere with furniture, equipment, artwork, wall-hung specialties, room finishes, etc. All thermostat/sensor wall locations indicated on HVAC drawings are schematic only and must be verified case-by-case prior to rough-in.

4. All electrical work as described in this specification shall be per the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and per applicable state and local codes. Refer to Division 26 specifications for required installation methods and follow Division 26 requirements as related to low voltage and communication technology system cables.

5. Where “free-air” installation methods (either exposed above the ceilings, in bridle rings or in cable trays) are permitted under Division 26 above ceilings, provide plenum-rated cables wherever plenum ceilings (if any) exist and install as defined under Division 26. Install low voltage circuits, located in concrete slabs and masonry walls, or exposed in occupied areas, in electrical conduit regardless of what wiring methods are permitted under Division 26.

6. Where cable trays or bridle rings are provided by the electrical contractor for low voltage cables, these raceways may be utilized for control wiring by this contractor (provide special color coded jackets, label cable jackets per Division 26 and group control wiring cables together). Provide conduit drops from cable tray/bridle ring paths to wall outlet boxes and equipment unless directed otherwise under Division 26.

7. Regardless of permitted methods in Division 26, all cables/wiring installed concealed by gypsum board, masonry or other inaccessible materials in walls or above ceilings shall be installed in conduit, 3/4” minimum.

8. All conduit, bridle rings, raceway, outlet boxes, etc. necessary for complete operational installation of control wiring shall be provided (furnished and installed) by the temperature control contractor in strict compliance with Division 26 documents. Coordinate all work with all other applicable trades including the electrical contractor.

9. Provide all required conduit work to and between equipment in a manner compliant with that described above (i.e. between VAV boxes, to boilers, starters, condensing units, etc. as applicable).

10. Install control wiring without splices between terminal points, color-coded. Install in neat workmanlike manner, securely fastened. Install in accordance with National Electrical Code and per Division 26.


MSA# 11172.00


11. Install circuits over 25 volt with color-coded No. 12 wire in electrical metallic tubing, per Division 26. Install circuits under 25 volt with color-coded No. 18 wire with 0.031" high temperature (105 degrees F) plastic insulation on each conductor and plastic sheath over all. Install electronic circuits with color-coded No. 22 wire with 0.023" polyethylene insulation on each conductor with plastic-jacketed copper shield over all.

12. All control cabling shall be labeled at both ends with descriptive information of control device. END OF SECTION 230993


MSA# 11172.00

ABOVEGROUND HYDRONIC PIPING 232113.23 - 1

SECTION 232113.23 – ABOVEGROUND HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section.


A. This Section includes pipe, pipe fittings, special duty valves, and specialties for the following systems:

1. Hot Water Heating 2. Chilled Water Cooling 3. Condensate Drain


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 100 psig at 200 deg F 2. Chilled-Water Piping: 100 psig at 200 deg F 3. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.



C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.

2. Air control devices. 3. Hydronic specialties.

B. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Welders' certificates. 2. Certification of compliance with ASTM and ANSI manufacturing requirements for pipe, fittings,

and specialties. All piping shall be United States made or meet approval of the engineer.

C. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L and Type M.

B. Steel Pipe, 2 Inch and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless) or Type F (furnace-butt welded), Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.

C. Steel Pipe, 2-1/2 inch through 8 inch: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded), Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.

2.2 FITTINGS

A. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI.

B. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, streamlined pattern.

D. Malleable Iron Threaded Flanges: Class 125; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.

E. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24, Class 150.

1. Gasket Material: Asbestos free, ASME B16.20, metallic, or ASME B16.21 nonmetallic, gaskets compatible with fuel oil.

2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, cadmium-plated steel.


MSA# 11172.00


F. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face. 4. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, cadmium-plated steel.

G. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. c. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated

H. Solder Filler Metals: 95-5 Tin-Antimony.

I. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver).

J. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

K. Flexible Connectors: stainless steel bellows with woven flexible bronze wire reinforcing protective jacket; minimum 150 psig working pressure, maximum 250 deg F operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded end connections to match equipment connected; and shall be capable of 3/4 inch misalignment.

2.3 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.

B. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, solid or split hinged.

C. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged.

D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of one of the following:

1. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. 2. Producers Specialty & Mfg. Corp. 3. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.


MSA# 11172.00


2.4 CALIBRATED AUTOMATIC BALANCING VALVES

A. Bronze, Calibrated Automatic Balancing Valves:

1. Class 125, bronze body, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi, lever handle with memory stop, straight or angle pattern, threaded ends.

2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide balance valves of one of the following:

a. Tour and Andersson b. Armstrong c. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. d. Flow Design Inc. e. Spirax Sarco. f. Taco, Inc. g. Watts h. Nexus Inc. i. HCi j. Griswold Controls

B. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated Automatic Balancing Valves:

1. Class 125, cast iron or steel body, ball, globe, or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi, lever handle with memory stop, straight or angle pattern, flanged ends, equal to Armstrong: Model CBV

2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide balance valves of one of the following:

a. Tour and Andersson b. Armstrong c. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. d. Flow Design Inc. e. Spirax Sarco. f. Taco, Inc. g. Watts h. Nexus Inc. i. HCi j. Griswold Controls

2.5 VENT VALVES

A. Manual Vent Valves: Provide manual vent valves designed to be operated manually with screwdriver or thumbscrew, 1/8" NPS connection.

B. Automatic Vent Valves: Provide automatic vent valves designed to vent automatically with float principle, stainless steel float and mechanisms, cast-iron body, pressure rated for 125 psi, 1/2" NPS inlet and outlet connections. Pipe outlet to floor drain.

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide vent valves of one of the following:

1. Armstrong Machine Works. 2. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 3. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div.


MSA# 11172.00


4. Spirax Sarco. 5. Taco

2.6 LOW PRESSURE Y-TYPE PIPELINE STRAINERS

A. General: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping system materials. Select strainers for 125 psi working pressure, with Type 304 stainless steel screens, with 3/64" perforations @ 233 per sq. in.

B. Threaded Ends, 2" and Smaller: Cast-iron body, screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted with pipe plug.

C. Flanged Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off-center blowdown fitted with pipe plug.

D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide low pressure Y-type strainers of one of the following:

1. Armstrong Machine Works. 2. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Mueller 5. Spirax Sarco. 6. Watts Regulator Co.

2.7 DIELECTRIC NIPPLES

A. General: Provide Brass Ball Valves with Di-electric nipples for use in service indicated, which effectively isolates ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance), prevents galvanic action, and stops corrosion.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dielectric nipples of one of the following:

1. B & K Industries, Inc. 2. Capital Mfg. Co.; Div. of Harsco Corp. 3. Eclipse, Inc. 4. Epco Sales, Inc. 5. Perfection Corp. 6. Rockford-Eclipse Div.

2.8 FIRE BARRIER PENETRATION SEALS

A. Provide seals for any opening through fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings used as passage for mechanical components such as piping or ductwork.

B. Cracks, Voids, or Holes Up to 4" Diameter: Use putty or caulking, one-piece intumescent elastomer, non-corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cable jackets, and capable of expanding 10 times when exposed to flame or heat, UL-listed.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Openings 4" or Greater: Use sealing system capable of passing 3-hour fire test, consisting of wall wrap or liner, partitions, and end caps capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 to 350 deg. F (121 to 177 deg. C), UL-listed.

D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire barrier penetration seals of one of the following:

1. Electro Products Div./3M. 2. Nelson; Unit of General Signal. 3. 3M

2.9 FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Drip Pans: Provide drip pans fabricated from corrosion-resistant sheet metal with watertight joints, and with edges turned up 2-1/2". Reinforce top, either by structural angles or by rolling top over 1/4" steel rod. Provide hole, gasket, and flange at low point for watertight joint and 1" drain line connection.

B. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:

1. Sheet-Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3" and smaller, 20 gage; 4" to 6" 16 gage; over 6", 14 gage.

2. Steel-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. 3. Plastic-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Leave joints including welds uninsulated and exposed for examination during the test.

B. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain the reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

C. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.

D. For renovations, isolate the new piping from the existing system. Provide temporary cross over piping as required to complete the loop. Provide pump and/or tank as required to flush system as indicated.

E. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the piping. If a valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against the test pressure without damage to the valve. Flanged joints at which blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested.

F. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than 1/3 higher than the test pressure, to protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of overpressure during the test.

G. Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium, except where there is a risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workmen and compatible with the piping system components.

2. Use vents installed at high points in the system to release trapped air while filling the system. Use drains installed at low points for complete removal of the that liquid.

3. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and that low pressure filling lines are disconnected.

4. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test.

5. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and arrangements of piping take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit full insulation and servicing of valves.

B. Install all hydronic piping, except for condensate piping, at a uniform grade of 1 inch per 40 feet down towards the pump or accessible drain location.

C. Install all condensate piping at a uniform grade of 1/8 inch per 1 foot downward in the direction of flow to the nearest drain location.

D. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with the level side up.

E. Install branch connections to mains using Tee fittings in main with take-off out of the bottom of the main, except for up-feed risers which shall have take-off out of the top of the main line.

F. Install isolation valves in all branches serving two or more pieces of equipment.

G. Install valves at the inlet and outlet of each terminal with unions and shutoff/balancing valves.

H. Install unions in pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

I. Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and larger connections.

J. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps (except in-line pumps) and other vibration producing equipment.

K. Install manual air vents at all high points in the piping circuit.

L. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction.


MSA# 11172.00


3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration thru floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface.

B. Y-Type Strainers:

1. Install Y-type strainers full size of pipeline, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install pipe nipple and shutoff valve in strainer blow down connection, full size of connection, except for strainers 2" and smaller installed ahead of control valves feeding individual terminals. Where indicated, provide drain line from shutoff valve to plumbing drain, full size of blow down connection.

2. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure reducing valve, pressure regulating valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated.

3. Locate Y-type strainers in supply line ahead of the following equipment, and elsewhere as indicated, if integral strainer is not included in equipment:

a. Steam traps serving steam main drips. b. Temperature control valves. c. Pressure reducing valves. d. Temperature or pressure regulating valves.

C. Dielectric Nipples: Install at each piping joint between ferrous and non-ferrous piping. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: Fill entire opening with sealing compound. Adhere to manufacturer's installation instructions.

1. Provide at all fire wall separations where piping or ducts penetrate the wall.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Drip Pans: Locate drip pans under piping passing over or within 7' horizontally of electrical equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Hang from structure with rods and building attachments, weld rods to sides of drip pan. Brace to prevent sagging or swaying. Connect 1" drain line to drain connection, and run to nearest plumbing drain or elsewhere as indicated.

B. Pipe Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect/Engineer. Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Where insulation includes vapor-barrier jacket, provide sleeve with sufficient clearance for installation. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves.


MSA# 11172.00


3.5 PIPE APPLICATIONS

A. HVAC Water Piping shall include the following systems:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping 2. Chilled-Water Piping 3. Condensate-Drain Piping

B. Use the following method for piping installation:

1. Pipe size 2" and smaller: Black steel Schedule 40 or type L copper

a. Fittings:

1) Malleable iron threaded for steel pipe. 2) Soldered joint fittings for copper pipe.

2. Pipe size 2-1/2" and Larger: Black steel Schedule 40.

a. Fittings:

1) Wrought steel butt-welding with welded joints.

C. HVAC Condensate Drain and Vent Piping

1. Copper, Type M with wrought fittings and soldered joints.

3.6 RENOVATIONS

A. Drain System: For all existing piping systems, isolate system wherever possible and drain piping to accommodate new piping connections to existing piping system. Where no isolation valves are installed, drain system down to chiller or boiler. Install new isolation valves at riser with drain valve for future isolation.

B. Fill System: Fill system at new piping connections and bleed air. Install new vents as required. Flush and clean new piping and replace strainers.


A. Clean and flush hydronic piping systems. This contractor shall isolate all piping systems 4" and larger, provide bypass at the end of the line, from supply to return with valves. At the boiler room, provide temporary connection to fire hydrant with fire hose. Flush entire system (4" and larger), with full pressure and flow from fire hydrant. Smaller pipe sizes shall be flushed per industry standards.

B. Clean and flush hydronic piping systems. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping system, but before balancing, remove disposable fine mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.

END OF SECTION 232113.23


MSA# 11172.00

ABOVEGROUND STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 232213.23 - 1

SECTION 232213.23 – ABOVEGROUND STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section.

B. Section 23 05 23 – General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping.



1. Steam Condensate 2. Low Pressure Steam

B. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Welders' certificates see general requirement. 2. Certification of compliance with ASTM and ANSI manufacturing requirements for pipe, fittings,

and specialties. All piping shall be United States made or meet approval of the engineer.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. HP Systems: High-pressure piping operating at more than 15 psig as required by ASME B31.1.

B. LP Systems: Low-pressure piping operating at 15 psig or less as required by ASME B31.9.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressures and temperatures:

1. LP Steam Piping: 150 psi at 300 deg F 2. Condensate Piping: at 80 psi at 250 deg F. 3. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Equal to pressure of the piping system to which it is attached. 4. Air-Vent and Vacuum-Breaker Piping: Equal to pressure of the piping system to which it is

attached. 5. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to pressure of the piping system to which it is

attached.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Pressure-reducing and safety valve. 2. Flash tank.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail, 1/4 scale, flash tank assemblies and fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, pipe, multiple pipes, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops and their attachment to the building structure. Detail locations of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For valves, safety valves, pressure-reducing valves, steam traps, air vents, vacuum breakers, and meters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1. Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators: ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualification."

2. Regulatory Requirements: 3. ASME Compliance:

B. Installer Qualifications:

C. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the following:



E. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.1, "Power Piping" and ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp flash tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE

A. Steel Pipe, 2 Inch and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless) or Type F (furnace-butt welded), Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.

B. Steel Pipe, 2-1/2 inch through 8 inch: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded), Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.


MSA# 11172.00


2.2 FITTINGS

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: Class 150, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI.

2. Steel Fittings: seamless or welded, for welded joints. 3. Malleable Iron Threaded Flanges: Class 125; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced. 4. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material

group, end connection and facing: 5. Gasket Material: thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled, and design

temperatures and pressures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Leave joints including welds uninsulated and exposed for examination during the test.

B. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain the reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

C. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.

D. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the piping. If a valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against the test pressure without damage to the valve. Flanged joints at which blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested.

E. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than 1/3 higher than the test pressure, to protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of overpressure during the test.

F. All steam vents, traps, condensate overflows, drain lines, relief valves, or anything that produces steam or steam condensate to be disposed, shall be routed to after coolers prior to being introduced into the sanitary system.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and arrangements of piping take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit full insulation and servicing of valves.

B. Install all steam piping at a uniform grade of 1 inch per 20 feet downward in the direction of flow to drain location.

C. Install all condensate piping at a uniform grade of 1 inch per 10 feet downward in the direction of flow to drain location.

D. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with the level side up.

E. Install branch connections to mains using Tee fittings in main with take-off out of the top of the main.


MSA# 11172.00


F. Install isolation valves in all branches serving two or more pieces of equipment.

G. Install unions in pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

H. Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and larger connections.

I. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure reducing valve, pressure regulating valve, solenoid valve, and elsewhere as indicated. Install a nipple and plugged gate valve in blow down connection of strainers.

J. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction.

3.3 PIPE APPLICATIONS:

A. Steam Condensate Piping

1. Pipe size 2" and smaller: Black steel pipe and nipples

a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 80 b. Fittings: Malleable iron threaded

2. Pipe size 2-1/2" and Larger: Black steel pipe & nipples.

a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 80 b. Fittings: Wrought steel buttwelding with welded joints.

3. Note: Use of Short Nipples is not acceptable.

B. Steam Piping: Low Pressure

1. Pipe size 2" and smaller: Black steel pipe.

a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40 b. Fittings: Malleable iron threaded

2. Pipe size 2-1/2" and Larger: Black steel pipe. 3. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40 4. Fittings: Wrought steel buttwelding with welded joints.

a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40 b. Fittings: Wrought steel buttwelding with welded joints.


A. Clean and flush steam piping systems. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.

END OF SECTION 232213.23


MSA# 11172.00

STEAM AND CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES 232216 - 1

SECTION 232216 – STEAM AND CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



A. Types of steam and condensate specialties specified in this section include the following:

1. Float and Thermostatic Traps 2. Inverted Bucket Traps 3. Strainers 4. Steam Vents 5. Pressure Reducing Valves 6. Steam Safety Valves

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of steam and condensate specialty. Submit schedule indicating manufacturer's figure number, size, location, rated capacities, and features for each required steam and condensate specialty.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturers' assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and method of assembly of components.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of steam and condensate specialty. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.




A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of steam and condensate specialties of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Steam and Condensate Specialty Types: Provide steam and condensate specialties of same type by same manufacturer.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

D. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.

E. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steam And Condensate Specialties:

1. General: Provide factory-fabricated steam and condensate specialties recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide steam and condensate specialties of types, capacities, and pressure ratings indicated for each service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option, but more than one type cannot be used on project.

B. Float And Thermostatic Traps:

1. General: Provide float and thermostatic traps as indicated, with body and cover constructed or cast iron or semi-steel, designed so all internal parts are accessible without disturbing piping. Provide thermostatic element of diaphragm or bellows type with stainless steel valve cone and valve seat. Provide stainless steel or seamless copper float, with positive snap-action valve mechanism, stainless steel valve and renewable seat. Design trap for discharging condensate, air, and other non-condensable gases without loss of steam within the following pressure ranges:

a. Low Pressure Traps: -25" Hg to 15 psi.

2. Size traps based on capacities at 2 psi differential in accordance with FCI 65-3. 3. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide float and thermostatic traps of

one of the following:

a. Armstrong Machine Works. b. Barnes and Jones, Inc. c. Hoffman Specialty d. Nicholson e. Spirax Sarco. f. Sterling

C. Inverted Bucket Traps:

1. General: Provide inverted bucket traps as indicated, with body and cover constructed of cast iron or semi-steel, pressure rated for 250 psi, designed so internal parts are accessible without disturbing piping. Construct bucket of brass or stainless steel, and lever mechanism of heat treated stainless steel, operating on knife edges for friction-free performance. Construct removable seats and plungers of heat treated stainless steel.


MSA# 11172.00


a. Strainer: Provide integral inlet strainer built into trap body. b. Check Valve: Provide integral check valve installed in trap inlet. c. Air Vent: Provide integral bi-metal auxiliary air vent in top of inverted bucket. d. Size traps based on inlet pressure in accordance with FCI 65-3.

2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide inverted bucket traps of one of the following:

a. Armstrong Machine Works. b. Barnes and Jones, Inc. c. Hoffman Specialty d. Spirax Sarco. e. Sterling

D. Low Pressure Y-Type Pipeline Strainers:

1. General: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping system materials. Select strainers for 125 psi working pressure, with Type 304 stainless steel screens, with 3/64" perforations @ 233 per sq. in.

2. Threaded Ends, 2" and Smaller: Cast-iron body, screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted with pipe plug.

3. Flanged Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off-center blowdown fitted with pipe plug.

4. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide low pressure Y-type strainers of one of the following:

a. Armstrong Machine Works. b. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div. c. Metraflex Co. d. Mueller e. Spirax Sarco. f. Watts Regulator Co.

E. Steam Vents:

1. General: Provide steam vents where indicated, for venting of air and non-condensable gases from steam piping system.

2. Quick Vents: Cast-brass body and bottom, with thermostatic bellows, and removable vent port with vacuum check.

3. Float Vents: Cast-iron body, cast-brass bottom, seamless-brass float, thermostatic bellows, removable stainless steel seat, monel metal plunger, and vacuum check discs.

4. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steam vents of one of the following:

a. Armstrong Machine Works. b. Eaton Corp.; Controls Div. c. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div. d. Spirax Sarco. e. Nicholson

F. Pressure Reducing Valves:

1. General: Provide pressure reducing valves where indicated, of size, capacity, and pressure rating as scheduled. Provide pilot-actuated, diaphragm type. Construct valve body of cast semi-steel


MSA# 11172.00


with hardened stainless steel trim. Provide replaceable valve head and seat. Provide main head stem guide fitted with flushing and pressure arresting device. Provide cover over pilot diaphragm for protection against dirt accumulation.

2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pressure reducing valves of one of the following:

a. Fisher Controls International, Inc. b. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div. c. Leslie Co. d. Spirax Sarco. e. Spence Engineering Co., Inc. f. Armstrong International g. Nicholson

G. Steam Safety Valves:

1. General: Provide steam safety valves as indicated, of size and capacity as selected by Installer for proper relieving capacity, in accordance with ASEM Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

2. Bronze Safety Valves: Construct housing of cast bronze, disc and nozzle of forged copper alloy, lap seats to optical flatness. Set valve to relieve at 10 psi above operating pressure.

3. Cast-Iron Safety Valves: Construct of cast iron, with all bronze/brass trim, fully enclosed spring. Set valve to relieve at 10 psi above operating pressure.

4. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steam safety valves of one of the following:

a. Kunkle Valve Co., Inc. b. Lunkenheimer Co. c. Spirax Sarco. d. Watts Regulator Co. e. Nicholson

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION:

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which steam and condensate specialties are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEAM AND CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES:

A. General: Install steam and condensate specialties as indicated, and in accessible locations to permit service. When located behind heating enclosures, center steam and condensate specialties on access door. Install in neat and workmanlike manner. Use only wrenches having square flat jaws, or non-metallic strap wrenches on brass specialties; wrench marks will not be permitted.

B. All steam vents, traps, condensate overflows, drain lines, relief valves, or anything that produces steam or steam condensate to be disposed, shall be routed to after coolers prior to being introduced into the sanitary system.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Float and Thermostatic Traps: Install on outlet of each steam drip, and elsewhere as indicated. Install strainer ahead of trap if not integral with trap, union and gate valve on inlet and outlet.

D. Inverted Bucket Traps: Install on high pressure steam piping as indicated. Install strainer head of trap if not integral with trap, union and gate valve on inlet and outlet.

E. Steam Vents: Install where indicated. Install shutoff valve between float vents and steam piping, pipe outlet to suitable plumbing drain, or as indicated.

F. Pressure Reducing Valves: Install as indicated, in accessible location to permit service. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Install 3-valve bypass with globe valve in bypass line, full size of inlet. Provide steam pressure gage at inlet and outlet, and steam safety valve at outlet.

G. Steam Safety Valves: Install downstream of each steam pressure reducing valve, and elsewhere as indicated. Pipe discharge to floor for low pressure service, and to outdoors, with drip pan elbow for high pressure service, both in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Code.



MSA# 11172.00

REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 232313 - 1

SECTION 232313 - REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.


A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig 2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig 3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated.

1. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:

a. Thermostatic expansion valves. b. Solenoid valves. c. Hot-gas bypass valves. d. Filter dryers. e. Strainers. f. Pressure-regulating valves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.

1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4" = 1’-0”. 2. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design actual piping

layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.

C. Welding certificates.


MSA# 11172.00



E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING

A. Tube Size 4-1/8" and Smaller: Copper tube; ASTM B 280 Type ACR, hard-drawn temper; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; brazed joints.

B. Tube Size 3/4" and Smaller: Copper tube; ASTM B 280 Type ACR, soft annealed temper, soft annealed temper fittings; cast copper-alloy fittings for flared copper tubes; flared joints.

C. Tube Size 7/8" through 4-1/8": Copper tube, Type ACR, soft annealed temper; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; soldered joints.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

E. Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch-long

assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.


MSA# 11172.00


2.2 REFRIGERANT VALVES

A. Shut-off and Check Valves:

1. Globe and Angle Shutoff Valves: Forged brass body, packed, back seating, winged seal cap, 275 deg F temperature rating, 500 psig working pressure.

2. Diaphragm Packless Valves: Forged brass or cast bronze body, globe design with straight-through or angle pattern, phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragm with stainless-steel spring, rising stem and hand wheel operator, nylon seat, socket or union end connections, 275 deg F temperature rating, 500 psig working pressure.

3. Check Valves: Forged brass, accessible internal parts, soft synthetic seat, fully guided brass piston and stainless steel spring, 275 deg F temperature rating, 500 psig working pressure.

B. Service Valves:

1. Forged brass body with brass cap including key end to remove core, removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring core, polytetrafluoroethylene seat, copper spring end connections, and 500 psig working pressure rating.

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide globe and check valves of one of the following:

a. Henry Valve Co. b. Parker Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration & Air-Cond. Div. c. Sporlan Valve Co.

D. Solenoid Valves: Provide for units greater than 5 tons:

1. Forged brass, complying with ARI 760 and UL 429, normally closed, Teflon valve seat, 250 deg F temperature rating, 400 psig working pressure, NEMA 1 solenoid enclosure, 24-volt, 60 Hz coil, 1/2" conduit adapter,.

2. Manual Operator: Provide manual operator to open valve. 3. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide solenoid valves of one of the

following:

a. Alco Controls Div.; Emerson Electric Co. b. Automatic Switch Co. c. Sporlan Valve Co.

2.3 REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES

A. Angle-Type Strainers:

1. Forged brass or cast bronze body, brass hex plug drain plug, 100-mesh monel screen, socket or flare end connections, 500 psig working pressure, 275 deg F temperature rating.

B. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:

1. Forged brass body, replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by filter screen, color coded indicator to show moisture content in ppm, indicate moisture above 60 ppm, socket or flare end connections, 500 psig working pressure rating, 240 deg F temperature rating.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers:

1. Comply with ARI 730. 2. Painted-steel shell body with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and neoprene gaskets with

socket end connections, 10 micron filter media, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support, activated alumina desiccant media, 1/4-inch connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement, 2 psig maximum pressure loss, 500 psig working pressure rating, 240 deg F temperature rating.

3. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).

D. Permanent Filter Dryers:

1. Comply with ARI 730. 2. Painted-steel shell body with socket end connections, 10 micron filter media, pleated with integral

end rings; stainless-steel support, activated alumina desiccant media, 1/4-inch connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement, 2 psig maximum pressure loss, 500 psig working pressure rating, 240 deg F temperature rating.

3. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which refrigerant piping systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. Refrigerant piping shall be sized per equipment manufacturer’s recommendations including all necessary traps, double suction risers, etc, and pipe size increases based on actual layout, distance and unit sizing.

B. Refrigerant piping shall be routed from indoor unit to exterior unit in ceiling cavity, through chases, and within walls.

C. Install refrigerant piping with 1/4" per foot (1%) downward slope in direction of oil return to compressor. Provide oil traps and double risers required to provide oil return.

D. Clean refrigerant piping by swabbing with dry lintless (linen) cloth, followed by refrigerant oil soaked swab. Remove excess oil by swabbing with cloth soaked in high flash point petroleum solvent, squeezed dry.

E. Provide bushings between copper piping and pipe supports to eliminate dissimilar metal condition.

F. Bleed dry nitrogen through refrigerant piping during brazing operations.

G. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.


MSA# 11172.00


3.3 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT VALVES

A. Solenoid Valves: Install in refrigerant piping as indicated with stem pointing upwards.

1. Wiring of solenoid valves is specified in applicable Division 26 sections and is included as work of this section.

B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of strainers if they are not an integral part of the strainers.

C. Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves at filter dryers.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT ACCESSORIES

A. Refrigerant Strainers: Install in upstream of solenoid valves and as indicated. Locate in accessible location for service.

B. Moisture-Liquid Indicators: Install as indicated on refrigerant liquid lines, in accessible location.

C. Refrigerant Filter-Dryers: Install in refrigerant lines as indicated and in accessible location for service. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around replaceable core filter dryers.


A. Refrigerant Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean and test refrigerant piping in accordance with ANSI B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping". Perform initial test with dry nitrogen, using soap solution to test all joints. Perform final test with 27" vacuum and then 200 psi using halide torch or electronic leak detector. System must be entirely leak-free.

B. Repair or replace refrigerant piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance.

3.6 DEHYDRATION AND CHARGING SYSTEM:

A. Install core in filter dryer after leak test but before evacuation.

B. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump; until temperature of 35 deg. F (2 deg. C) is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator.

C. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.

D. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between vacuum pump and system.

E. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allow pressure to build up to 2 psi.

F. Complete charging of system, using new filter dryer core in charging line. Provide full operating charge.


MSA# 11172.00


3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Cleaning and Inspecting: Clean and inspect refrigerant piping systems.



MSA# 11172.00

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 – METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round and flat oval duct and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 23 Sections for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and -distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Sealants and gaskets.

B. Shop Drawings: 1/4"=1’-0” scale. Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes. 3. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts. 4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 5. Fittings. 6. Reinforcement and spacing. 7. Seam and joint construction. 8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.


MSA# 11172.00


10. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels. 11. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration isolation,

and seismic restraints.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts. 3. Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access to dampers and

other operating devices. 4. Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access

panels, and special moldings.


A. Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. NFPA Compliance:

1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 653, lock forming quality; with G 90 zinc coating and mill phosphatized for exposed locations. Minimum gauge shall be 24.

B. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. Exposed ductwork which is to be painted shall have paint grip applied.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.

B. Ductwork Support Materials: Fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork shall be of the same material and finish as the ductwork being supported.


MSA# 11172.00


2.3 FACTORY-FABRICATED LOW PRESSURE (STATIC PRESSURE CLASS 2” WG OR LESS) DUCTWORK

A. General: At installer's option, provide factory-fabricated duct and fittings, in lieu of shop-fabricated duct and fittings.

B. Rectangular Ductwork:

1. Construct of galvanized sheet steel.

Duct Width Minimum

Gauge Transverse Joint Type

0" to 10" 24 1” Flat Slip & Drive

11" to 26" 24 1-1/8” Standing S Slip & Drive*

27" to 30” 24 TDC

31" to 54" 22 TDC

55" to 60" 22 TDC w/ Tie-Rod



120" - UP 18 2” x 2” x 1/4” compression Angle w/ Tie Rod

a. *For duct depth 19” and greater the transverse joint type shall be TDC (transverse duct connectors).

2. Provide Tie Rods at 48” maximum spacing along joints and intermediates. Locate rod(s) at even dimensions of duct width, on center, or (for multiple rods) spaced evenly across width of duct. For duct width 28” and under CTR’s are not required.

3. Reinforcement shall be per SMACNA Standards.

C. Round and Flat Oval Ductwork:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel, lock forming quality, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. 2. Gauge: 26 gauge minimum for round and oval spiral ducts, 26 gauge for round duct and fittings,

4" through 24" diameter. 3. Elbows: One piece construction for 90 deg. and 45 deg. elbows 14" and smaller. Provide multiple

gore construction for larger diameters with standing seam circumferential joint. 4. Divided Flow Fittings: 90 degree tees, constructed with saddle tap spot welded and bonded to

duct fitting body.

D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide factory-fabricated ductwork of one of the following:

1. Dixie Sheetmetal 2. Eastern Sheetmetal of Cincinnati 3. Lindab 4. Semco Mfg., Inc. 5. United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp. 6. Regional Sheetmetal Manufacturing 7. Tangent Air 8. Hranec


MSA# 11172.00


2.4 FACTORY-FABRICATED MEDIUM PRESSURE (STATIC PRESSURE CLASS GREATER THAN 2” WG) DUCTWORK

A. General: At Installer's option, provide factory-fabricated duct and fittings, in lieu of shop-fabricated duct and fittings.

B. Rectangular Ductwork:

1. Construct of galvanized sheet steel.

Duct Width Minimum

Gauge Transverse Joint Type

0" to 30" 24 TDC

31" to 36" 22 TDC

37" to 42” 22 TDC w/ Tie-Rod



97" to 119" 18 Ductmate with Tie-Rod

120" - UP 18 2” x 2” x 1/4” compression Angle w/ Tie Rod

2. Provide Tie Rods at 48” maximum spacing along joints and intermediates. Locate rod(s) at even dimensions of duct width, on center, or (for multiple rods) spaced evenly across width of duct. For duct width 28” and under CTR’s are not required.

C. Single-wall Round Ductwork:

1. Construct of galvanized sheet.

Diameter Minimum

Gauge Method of Manufacture

3" to 14" 24 Spiral Lockseam


27" to 36 22 Spiral Lockseam



Over 60" 16 Longitudinal Seam

2. Provide locked seams for spiral duct; fusion-welded butt seam for longitudinal seam duct. 3. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gages listed. Provide continuous welds along

seams.

Diameter Minimum

Gauge

3" to 36" 20

38" to 50" 18

Over 50" 16

D. Flat-Oval Ductwork:

1. Construct of galvanized sheet steel, spiral lockseam construction, in minimum gages listed.


MSA# 11172.00


Maximum Width Minimum

Gauge

Under 25" 24

25" to 48" 22

49" to 70" 20

Over 70" 18

2. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gages listed. Provide continuous weld along seams.

Maximum Width Minimum

Gauge

Under 37" 20

37" to 50" 18

Over 50" 16

E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide factory-fabricated ductwork of one of the following:

1. Dixie Sheetmetal 2. Eastern Sheetmetal of Cincinnati 3. Lindab 4. Semco Mfg., Inc. 5. United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp. 6. Regional Sheetmetal Manufacturing 7. Tangent Air 8. Hranec

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate ductwork in 4, 5, 8, 10 or 12-feet lengths, unless otherwise indicated or required to complete runs. Preassemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field assembly of systems. Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping and handling. Match-mark sections for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. All ductwork shall be Pittsburgh Construction with a minimum of thickness of 24 gauge.

C. Shop fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible". Use static pressure classes as follows:

1. Supply ductwork from constant volume air handling equipment: 2” wg. 2. Supply ductwork from single zone VAV air handling equipment: 2” wg.


MSA# 11172.00


3. Supply ductwork from VAV air handling equipment: 3” wg. 4. Return air ductwork: 1” wg. 5. Toilet exhaust ductwork: 1” wg. 6. General exhaust ductwork: 1” wg. 7. Ductwork not listed above: Static pressure class greater than total static pressure of fan serving the

ductwork.

D. Seal joints and seams of shop fabricated sections same as indicated in paragraph “Installation of Metal Ductwork” below.

E. Fittings:

1. Round and Flat Oval: Provide radius type elbow fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 18 degree change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45 degree laterals and 45 degree elbows for round and flat oval branch takeoff connections. Where 90 degree round branches are indicated, provide conical type tees with spin-in connection.

2. Rectangular: Provide radius elbows unless square throat elbows are indicated on drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, use turning vanes in square throat elbows. At rectangular branches, provide 45 degree clinch collar take-off fittings with clinch lock connection and corner filler pieces or gaskets for airtight connection.

F. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30 degrees for contracting tapers and 20 degrees for expanding tapers.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK

A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air-tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" wg and under; 1% for systems rated over 3" wg) and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor.

B. Inserts: Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with form work, as required to avoid delays in work.

C. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table "Standard Duct Sealing Requirements," unless otherwise indicated.

1. For static-pressure classes 1- and 1/2-inch wg, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Seal Class C, except ducts that are located directly in zones they serve.

D. Balancing Dampers: Provide volume dampers for balancing at all branch duct take-offs except in supply ductwork upstream of VAV terminal units. The sheet metal contractor shall be fully responsible for installing balancing dampers in the ductwork, (whether shown on the drawing or not) in order to arrive at the intended air flow. The balancing sub-contractor shall provide direction and assistance in determining locations where dampers are required. Additional dampers, if required shall be installed at no additional cost to the owner.


MSA# 11172.00


E. Wall Penetrations: Seal and pack around all ducts and piping sleeves which pass through walls that extend to bottom side of structure and rated walls.

F. Roof Penetrations: All ducts that penetrate roofs shall be installed within roof curbs. Duct shall have positive flashing to roof curb to prevent moisture from entering penetration. Flash curb to roof as required by roofing manufacturer.

G. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop-fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements.

H. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.

I. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults and their electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

J. Expansion Joints: Where ducts pass through an expansion joint provide ductwork with flexible connection to allow for sufficient movement at the joint.

K. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2". Fasten to duct and substrate.

L. Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide fire dampers and/or firestopping between duct and substrate. Provide firestopping in accordance with requirements of Division-7 Section "Penetration Firestopping". Provide fire dampers in accordance with Section “Fire Dampers.”

M. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.


A. Duct System Cleanliness:

1. Clean ductwork internally, section by section as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances, which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.

2. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed.


MSA# 11172.00


3.5 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated. Provide flexible connection for ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors adjacent to connection.



MSA# 11172.00

DAMPERS 233313 - 1

SECTION 233313 - DAMPERS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1. Volume dampers. 2. Motor Operated Dampers. 3. Gravity backdraft dampers. 4. Counterbalanced relief dampers. 5. Fire dampers. 6. Smoke dampers. 7. Combination fire/smoke dampers.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain dampers through one source from a single manufacturer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Submittal information for fire dampers shall include the fire protection rating and the manufacturer’s UL installation instructions. Each fire damper shipment shall include the same UL installation instructions.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.


MSA# 11172.00

DAMPERS 233313 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers of one of the following:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc. 3. Arrow Louver and Damper, Div. of Arrow United Industries, Inc. 4. Greenheck 5. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 6. Penn Ventilator Co. 7. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 8. United Enertech 9. Nailor

2.2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. For units 36" wide or smaller or 12" high or smaller the frame shall be 22 gage galvanized steel. The blade shall be single skin, 22 gage galvanized steel with center "V" groove for reinforcement. Bearings shall be corrosion resistant synthetic sleeve type turning in an extruded hole in the damper frame. Axles shall be 3/8" square shaft positively locked into damper blade.

B. For units over 36" wide or 12" high the frame shall be 18 gage galvanized steel formed into a structural hat channel shape with tabbed corners for reinforcement. The blades shall be single skin 18 gage galvanized steel with three longitudinal grooves for reinforcement. Bearings shall be corrosion resistant synthetic sleeve type turning in an extruded hole in the damper frame. Axles shall be hexagonal positively locked into damper blade.

2.3 MOTOR OPERATED DAMPERS

A. All louvers, gravity roof ventilators, etc. shall have motor operated dampers. Dampers shall be low leak with blade and edge seals.

B. All motor operated dampers shall be furnished and installed by the mechanical contractor, unless otherwise noted. All damper actuators shall be furnished, installed and wired by the TCC, unless damper and actuator are provided by equipment manufacturer. TCC shall provide all necessary transformers, contactors, controls and wiring for interlocking equipment to motor operated dampers. Frames shall be 4" x 1" x 0.081" minimum thickness, 6063T5 extruded aluminum hat channel with hat mounting flanges on both sides of the frame. Each corner shall be reinforced with two die formed internal braces and machine staked for maximum rigidity.

C. Blades shall be airfoil type extruded aluminum, maximum 4" depth, with integral structural reinforcing tube running full length of each blade. Blade edge seals shall be extruded vinyl double edge design with inflatable pocket which enables air pressure from either direction to assist in blade to blade seal off. Blades seals shall be mechanically locked in extruded blade slots, yet shall be easily replaceable in field. Adhesive or clip-on type blade seals are not acceptable.

D. Bearings shall be non-corrosive molded synthetic. Axles shall be hexagonal to provide positive locking connection to blades and linkage. Round axles are not acceptable. Linkage shall be concealed in frame.


MSA# 11172.00

DAMPERS 233313 - 3

E. All dampers shall be tested in accordance with AMCA 500 and shall be rated AMCA Class 1A for 3.5 cfm/sf at 1” wg pressure for all sizes 24” wide and above.

F. Dampers shall be parallel blade for 2-position control and opposed blade for modulating control.

G. Control dampers wired to emergency power shall have spring loaded normally closed actuators.

2.4 GRAVITY BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Frame shall be 0.063" thickness, 6063-T5 extruded aluminum alloy channel.

B. Blades shall be 0.050" thickness 6063T5 extruded aluminum with extruded vinyl blade edge seals mechanically locked into blade edge. Adhesive or clip-on type seals are unacceptable.

C. Bearings shall be dustproof ball type for low pressure operation.

D. Linkage shall be 1/2" wide tie bar connected to stainless steel pivot pins.

E. Dampers shall be designed for maximum 3500 fpm spot velocities and minimum 3 inches wg back pressure.

2.5 STATIC FIRE DAMPERS:

A. Fire dampers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with the current edition of UL555 Standard for Fire Dampers. Dampers shall also meet the requirements of NFPA 90A, 92A and 92B. Each fire damper shall be marked with a UL classified rating and “for use in static systems only”. Consult the plans to determine the fire protection rating of each fire damper.

B. Construct casings of 11-gage galvanized steel with bonded red acrylic enamel finish or galvanized steel. Provide spring loaded linkage for dampers in the horizontal position. Provide support frame for ceiling damper applications.

C. Each fire damper shall include a 165 deg F fusible link.

D. Each fire damper shall include a steel sleeve and retaining angles furnished by the damper manufacturer to ensure appropriate installation.

E. Dampers in their opened position shall have blades located out of the air stream (high hat dampers).

F. Provide multiple sections of dampers and linkages as required by manufacturer to meet the UL protection needs of large openings.

2.6 SMOKE CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Smoke dampers shall meet the requirements of NFPA90A, 92A and 92B and shall be classified as Smoke Dampers in accordance with the latest version of UL555S. The leakage rating under UL555S shall be leakage Class 2. The dampers and their actuators shall be qualified under UL555S to an elevated temperature of 250°F or 350°F depending upon the actuator.


MSA# 11172.00

DAMPERS 233313 - 4

B. Damper frame shall be constructed using the UniFrame Design Concept (UDC) and shall be minimum 16 gage galvanized steel structurally superior to 13 gage formed into a structural hat channel reinforced at corners.

C. Damper blades shall be single skin galvanized steel 16 gage minimum with three longitudinal grooves for reinforcement.

D. Bearings shall be stainless steel sleeve turning in an extruded hole in the frame. Blade edge seals shall be inflatable silicone coated fiberglass and galvanized steel mechanically locked into blade edge. Adhesive or clip-on seals are not acceptable. Jamb seals shall be stainless steel compression type.

E. Appropriate electric/pneumatic actuators shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at time of damper fabrication. Electric actuators, factory installed on dampers, shall have been energized hold open tested for a period of at least 1 year with no evidence of reduced spring return performance. Damper and actuator shall be supplied as a single entity which meets all applicable UL555S qualifications for both dampers and actuators.

1. Consult with building fire alarm system contractor for electric damper actuator voltage. 2. Provide disconnect switch for all electric damper actuators.

F. Each damper shall be rated for leakage and airflow in either direction through the damper.

G. Provide multiple sections of dampers linkages and actuators as required by manufacturer to meet the UL protection needs of large openings.

H. *Minimum Leakage rate of dampers shall be equal to or exceed the requirements of the local Building/Mechanical code for the Authority Having Jurisdiction. If in question the minimum leakage rate shall be Class II.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Install dampers in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.

B. Provide and install all motor operated dampers and provide all necessary wiring to interlock with associated equipment.

C. Furnish and install manual volume dampers at locations shown on plans, at each duct run out to a supply diffuser, supply register, return register or exhaust register, and in accordance with schedules and details.

D. Manual volume dampers shall be installed in the duct system to arrive at intended air quantities. These dampers, whether shown or the drawings or not, shall be installed at no additional cost to the Owner.


MSA# 11172.00

DAMPERS 233313 - 5

Consult with Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency prior to ductwork installation to establish damper locations.

E. Control damper size shall be based on an air velocity of 1200 to 1500 fpm and 1/4" wg static pressure drop when wide open. Provide transition in ductwork as required to arrive at this velocity. Consult engineer for exact type of transition.

F. Install fire dampers in accordance with the submitted installation instructions.

G. Provide access doors at all duct mounted dampers. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter, at all fire, smoke, and fire/smoke dampers. Doors shall be of size sufficient to access fusible links and damper linkages for service and replacement. Contractor shall demonstrate the ability to service and access fusible links and damper linkages at each fire, smoke and fire/smoke damper installed. Undersized access doors shall be replaced with larger access doors.


A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.


A. Adjusting: Adjust dampers for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for proper action.

B. Final positioning of manual dampers shall be based on the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of the duct system.

C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.



MSA# 11172.00

TURNING VANES 233323 - 1

SECTION 233323 – TURNING VANES

PART 1 - GENERAL





1. Manufactured turning vanes.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1.4 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated turning vanes and vane runners, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible."

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes constructed of 1-1/2" wide curved blades set at 3/4" on center, supported with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2" on center, and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.

2.2 MANUFACTURER:

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide turning vanes of one of the following:

1. Aero Dyne Co. 2. Anemostat Products Div., Dynamics Corp. of America. 3. Barber-Colman Co. 4. Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co. 5. Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc.


MSA# 11172.00

TURNING VANES 233323 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF TURNING VANES

A. Install turning vanes in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.

B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 degree elbows in supply and exhaust air systems.



MSA# 11172.00

DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS 233333 - 1

SECTION 233333 - DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1. Duct access doors.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Construct of same or greater gage as ductwork served.

B. Provide double wall insulated doors for insulated ductwork.

C. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally insulated duct.

D. Provide one side hinged, other side with one handle-type latch for doors 12" high and smaller, 2 handle-type latches for larger doors.

1. Latch equal to Ventlok-figure 140 and 260

2.2 MANUFACTURER:

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct access doors of one of the following:

1. Air Balance Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc.


MSA# 11172.00

DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS 233333 - 2

4. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 5. Ventfabrics, Inc. 6. Zurn Industries, Inc., Air Systems Div.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION


3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCT MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS

A. Install duct access doors in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.

B. Seal joint between access door frame and duct to prevent air leakage.

C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter.

D. Install duct access doors in the following locations:

1. Adjacent to and close enough to fire and fire/smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. 2. Adjacent to duct smoke detectors to perform operation testing. 3. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, smoke dampers, and equipment. 4. Upstream from backdraft dampers and turning vanes.

E. Coordinate with other work to interface installation of ductwork accessories properly with other work.

F. Minimum Access Door Sizes:

1. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 8 inches. 2. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 12 inches. 3. Head and Shoulders Access: 22 by 16 inches, or 2 inches smaller than duct dimension for ducts

smaller than 18 inches.


A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements.

B. Test for air leakage while system is operating.

C. Repair or replace faulty access doors, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.



MSA# 11172.00

FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS 233343 - 1

SECTION 233343 – FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1. Duct flexible connectors.


A. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product specified:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 22 gage minimum galvanized sheet steel for attachment to duct and equipment.

B. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

C. Make with airtight joints.

2.2 MANUFACTURER:

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible connections of one of the following:

1. American/Elgen Co., Energy Div. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Flexaust (The) Co. 4. Ventfabrics, Inc.


MSA# 11172.00

FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS 233343 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION


3.2 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.

B. Install flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment.

C. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment.

D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork accessories properly with other work.


A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.



MSA# 11172.00

FLEXIBLE DUCTS 233346 - 1

SECTION 233346 – FLEXIBLE DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1. Flexible ducts for final runouts to air outlets and terminal units.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Listed and labeled UL 181 for Class 0 or Class 1 flexible air ducts and label as such on outer surface.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. JP Lamborn Co. 3. McGill AirFlow LLC.

2.2 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, air tight 2-ply inner core supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire and a metalized reinforced outer vapor-barrier; R8 thermal value classified by UL and the ADC certification mark. 1" thick 1-1/2 pcf fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.


MSA# 11172.00

FLEXIBLE DUCTS 233346 - 2

1. Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg (4”-12”), 4-inch wg (14”-20”) positive and 1.0-inch wg (4”-10”), 0.5-inch wg (12”-20”) negative determined per ADC Test FD-72R1 at elevated temperatures with a 90 degree elbow.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: 0 - 200 deg F.

B. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action.

2. Nylon strap, self-locking.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Flexible ducts are limited to supply applications. Flexible ducts are not allowed for return, relief or exhaust applications.

B. Use insulated flexible ducts where connected to insulated ductwork. Where installed in unconditioned spaces other than return air plenums, provide insulated flexible ducts.

C. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with stainless steel clamps or nylon straps. Draw clamps or straps tight for no air leakage.

D. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 5' - 0" extended length.

E. Install with smooth full radius turns down to diffuser.

F. Installation of flexible ducts is not permitted above drywall ceilings and inaccessible ceilings.

G. Connect VAV terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 24-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.



MSA# 11172.00

DUCT LINERS 233353 - 1

SECTION 233353 – DUCT LINERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Section 23 31 13.13 – Rectangular Metal Ducts.


A. This Section includes the following types of duct liners:

1. Flexible duct liner blanket. 2. Rigid duct liner board.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners. 2. Liner adhesives.


A. Codes and Standards:

1. SMACNA Standards:

a. “HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible”.

2. NAIMA Standards:

a. AH116 “Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards”.

3. ASTM Standards:

a. C916-85(2001) “Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation”. b. C1071-05 “Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and

Sound Absorbing Material)”.

4. NFPA Compliance:

a. NFPA 90A “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”. b. NFPA 90B “Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems”.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLEXIBLE FIBROUS-GLASS DUCT LINER

A. Flexible mat-faced glass fiber insulation complying with ASTM C 1071 Type 1, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B.

B. Minimum thermal conductivity, ‘K’ value, of 0.26 Btu-inch/hour-sq ft-deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature when tested per ASTM C518.

C. Meet fungi resistance and bacteria resistance when tested per ASTM G21 and G22.

D. Meet or exceed 25/50 surface burning characteristics when tested per UL 723.

E. Thickness shall be 1-inch unless otherwise indicated. Where connecting to existing lined ductwork, match thickness of existing liner.

2.2 RIGID FIBROUS-GLASS DUCT LINER

A. Rigid mat-faced glass fiber insulation complying with ASTM C 1071 Type 2, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B.

B. Minimum thermal conductivity, ‘K’ value, of 0.23 Btu-inch/hour-sq ft-deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature when tested per ASTM C518.

C. Meet fungi resistance and bacteria resistance when tested per ASTM G21 and G22.

D. Meet or exceed 25/50 surface burning characteristics when tested per UL 723.

E. Thickness shall be 2-inch unless otherwise indicated. Where connecting to existing lined ductwork, match thickness of existing liner.

2.3 DUCT LINER ADHESIVE

A. Water or solvent based adhesive complying with ASTM C916.

B. Meet or exceed 25/50 surface burning characteristics when tested per UL 723.

2.4 DUCT LINER FASTENERS

A. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

B. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.


MSA# 11172.00


2.5 MANUFACTURER

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct liner of one of the following:

1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. 2. Knauf 3. CertainTeed. 4. Johns Manville.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER

A. General: Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and NAIMA AH124 "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard.”

B. Size of ductwork shown on the drawings is free net area; outside dimensions of ducts will need to be increased where lined duct is used.

C. Adhere liner to duct with minimum 90% coverage.

D. In addition to adhesive, secure liner with mechanical fasteners. Space mechanical fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Ensure mechanical fasteners do not compress duct liner/wrap more than 10 percent.

E. Inspect and repair all damaged lining prior to installation of ductwork. Repair cuts or gouges in surface of duct liner with adhesive in accordance with manufacturers instructions

F. Protect upstream edge of duct liner preceded by unlined duct with Zee or channel metal nosing.

G. The following ductwork shall be lined with flexible duct liner:

1. Transfer air ducts.

H. The following ductwork shall be lined with rigid duct liner:

1. Return from open ceiling plenum return to HVAC unit. 2. Field or shop fabricated return air/outside air mixing plenums at HVAC units. 3. Supply and return between serving Theater and Ballroom spaces.


A. Store internally lined ductwork up off of the floor. Protect internally lined ductwork from water and dust. "Butter the leading edge of all internal duct lining with the manufacturer's recommended adhesive.


MSA# 11172.00



A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances, which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.

B. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed.



MSA# 11172.00

AXIAL HVAC FANS 233413 - 1

SECTION 233413 – AXIAL HVAC FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. This section includes the following types of axial HVAC fans:

1. Mixed-flow fans.

B. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work; not work of this section.

1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on fan motor. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer.

2. Interlock wiring between fan units; and between fans and field-installed control devices.

C. Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section.

D. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division 26 sections:

1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and fan starters.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan performance ratings on sea level.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Fan speed controllers.


MSA# 11172.00


B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



B. Variable Speed Fans: All fans that are to have a VFD as scheduled, shall be inverter duty rated and manufacturer shall factory inverter balance the fan motor through the entire operating range. A/C motors shall be rated for both constant and variable speed applications.

C. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

E. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final locations, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


MSA# 11172.00


1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MIXED FLOW FANS

A. Description: Fan wheel and housing, straightening vane section, factory-mounted motor with belt drive, and accessories.

B. Housings: Steel.

1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Outer mounting frame and companion flanges. 2. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream from fan wheel designed to straighten

airflow.

C. Wheel Assemblies: Cast aluminum with airfoil-shaped blades mounted on cast-iron wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid-steel key..

D. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.

1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5. 2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of

first critical speed at top of fan's speed range. 3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. 4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with larger

motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.

5. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 6. Motor Mount: Adjustable base. 7. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning bearings.

a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 100,000 hours. b. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 of 100,000 hours. c. Extend lubrication lines to outside of casing and terminate with grease fittings.

E. Accessories:

1. Mounting Clips: Horizontal ceiling clips welded to fan housing, of same material as housing. 2. Motor Cover: Cover with side vents to dissipate motor heat, of same material as housing

F. Factory Finishes:

1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly. 2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly

G. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide centrifugal ceiling exhausters of one of the following:

1. Acme 2. Cook Co., Loren. 3. Greenheck.


MSA# 11172.00


4. Penn Barry

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which axial HVAC fans are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install axial fans level and plumb.

B. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.


D. Equipment Mounting: Install fans using restrained spring isolators. Minimum deflection of 1 inch.

E. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and

electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

4. Adjust belt tension. 5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 6. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


A. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.



MSA# 11172.00

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 1

SECTION 233423 – HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. This section includes the following types of HVAC power ventilators:

1. Utility set fans. 2. Centrifugal roof ventilators. 3. Prefabricated Roof Curbs.

B. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work; not work of this section:

1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on fan motor. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer.

2. Interlock wiring between fan units; and between fans and field-installed control devices.

C. Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section.

D. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division 26 sections:

1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and fan starters.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Roof curbs.


MSA# 11172.00


7. Fan speed controllers.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic

restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to

structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations. 2. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access



E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



B. Variable Speed Fans: All fans that are to have a VFD as scheduled, shall be inverter duty rated and manufacturer shall factory inverter balance the fan motor through the entire operating range. A/C motors shall be rated for both constant and variable speed applications.

C. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

E. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.



MSA# 11172.00


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Curb type and method of flashing shall be per roofing manufacturer requirements.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UTILITY FANS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and tested fan units consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, and fan drive. Clean, condition, and prime paint sheet metal parts prior to final assembly. Apply final coat of enamel to exterior surfaces after assembly. Provide the following fan Class based on maximum RPM:

1. Class I (low)

B. Housings: Construct of heavy-gage steel with side sheets fastened to scroll sheets by means of deep lock seam. Provide round inlet collar, slip joint discharge duct connection. Construct housings to be convertible to 8 standard discharges. Provide adjustable motor supports.

C. Wheels: Provide forward curved or backward inclined wheels as scheduled. Provide swaged hubs. Balance wheels statically and dynamically.

D. Shafts: Construct of ground and polished steel. Apply rust-preventive coating.

E. Bearings: Provide self-aligning, grease-lubricated, pillow block type bearings, selected for L10 life of 100,000 hours.

F. Motors: Provide open drip-proof energy efficient motors with ball or sleeve bearings. Provide split phase or capacitor start motors for fractional horsepower, with resilient base. Provide induction motors for integral horsepower, with rigid base.

G. Drives: Provide V-belt drives. Provide adjustable pitch sheave, selected for midpoint at design conditions.

H. Vibration Control: Provide the following types of vibration isolators, with number and size of isolators selected by manufacturer:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Isolator Type 3: Spring floor isolator.

I. Accessories: Provide the following accessories as indicated.

1. Backdraft Dampers: Provide gravity-actuated dampers on fan discharge, counterweighted, with interlocking aluminum blades with felt edges in steel frame.

2. Access Doors: Provide gasketed access door, with latch-type handles, in fan housing. 3. Scroll Dampers: Provide single blade damper at top of fan scroll, with linkage adjustable and

locked to fan housing. 4. Drain Connections: Provide 3/4" threaded coupling drain connection at lowest point of housing. 5. Weather Hoods: Provide protective weather hood with stamped vents over motor and drive

compartment.

J. Motor and Belt Guard: Provide protective enclosure over moving parts with opening for tachometer.

K. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide utility fans of one of the following:

1. Acme 2. Cook (Loren) Co. 3. Greenheck. 4. Penn Barry 5. Twin City Fan & Blower

2.2 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Description: Centrifugal fan, direct or belt driven as scheduled. Provide aluminum, galvanized steel, or fiberglass weatherproof housings as scheduled. Provide square base to suit roof curb. Provide permanent split-capacitor type motor for direct driven fans; capacitor-start, induction-run type motor for belt driven fans.

B. Provide the Following Types of Housing Design:

1. Hooded dome type.

C. Electrical: Provide factory-wired non-fusible type disconnect switch at motor in fan housing. Provide thermal overload protection in fan motor. Provide conduit chase within unit for electrical connection.

D. Provide NEMA 1 disconnect factory mounted. For single phase fractional HP fans use a toggle type disconnect switch. On three phase integral HP fans use a NEMA 1 safety switch.

E. Bird Screens: Provide removable bird screens, 1/2" mesh, 16-gage aluminum or brass wire.

F. Dampers: Provide motor-actuated louvered dampers in curb bases. Damper motor shall be 120V/ 1 phase unless otherwise noted. Provide local disconnect switch.

G. Roof Curb: Provide factory fabricated roof curb by the same manufacturer as the equipment. Roof curb to be insulated.

H. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide centrifugal roof ventilators of one of the following:

1. Cook Co., Loren.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Greenheck Fan Corp. 3. Penn Barry 4. Twin City Fan & Blower

2.3 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS

A. General: Provide fan manufacturer's standard shop-fabricated units, modified if necessary to comply with requirements.

1. Fabricate structural framing for units of structural quality sheet steel, formed to manufacturer's standard profiles for coordination with roofing, insulation and deck construction. Include 45 deg. cant strips and deck flanges with offsets to accommodate roof insulation. Weld corners and seams to form watertight units.

B. Clean and paint units with manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive metal primer paint.

C. Reinforce continuous runs of over 3'-0" length, by inserting welded stiffeners of heavy gage with flanges as required to provide sufficient rigidity and strength to withstand maximum lateral forces in addition to superimposed vertical loads.

D. Sloping Roof Decks: For deck slopes of 1/4" per foot and more, fabricate support units to form level top edge.

E. Gage and Height: Fabricate units of metal gage and to height above roof surface as indicated.

1. Where gage or height are not indicated, fabricate units of 14-gage metal, and nominal height of 14 inches.

F. Provide pressure treated wood nailer, not less than 1-5/8" thick and of width indicated, but not less than width of support wall assembly. Anchor nailer securely to top of metal frame unit.

G. Provide lumber pressure treated with water-borne preservatives for "above ground" use.

H. Insulate units inside structural support wall with rigid glass fiber insulation board of approximately 3-lb. density and 1-1/2" minimum thickness, except as otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which power and gravity ventilators are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF POWER AND GRAVITY VENTILATORS

A. Power ventilator(s) shall be installed a minimum of 10’-0” from any roof edge regardless of location indicated on plans, unless a screen wall or railing is installed per the local building code. See the architectural plans for coordination.


MSA# 11172.00


B. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

C. Make final duct connections to fans with flexible connectors.

D. Coordinate ventilator work with work of roofing, walls, and ceilings, as necessary for proper interfacing.

E. Access: Provide access and service space around and over fans as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer.

F. Roof Curbs: Furnish roof curbs to roofing Installer for installation. Install according to roofing manufacturer’s recommendation and specifications.

G. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.

H. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Ensure that rotation is in direction indicated and intended for proper performance. Do not proceed with centrifugal fan start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to fan Installer.


A. Testing: After installation of ventilators has been completed, test each ventilator to demonstrate proper operation of units at performance requirements specified. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units, which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.





MSA# 11172.00

VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME UNITS 233616 - 1

SECTION 233616 – VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Types of air terminals specified in this section include the following:

1. Central air terminals with or without reheat.

B. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division 26 sections:

1. Power all 120 volt power and low voltage wiring for all VAV boxes including wiring to controllers, actuators, valves, dampers, etc. from power source to power connections. Provide transformers and low voltage wiring to all devices.

2. Provide new circuit breaker(s) in spare(s) at panel board with 120 volt wiring to all transformers. Include transformers, disconnects and required electrical devices.

3. Provide all control wiring between field-installed controls and air terminals.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include rated capacities, furnished specialties, sound-power ratings, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Include a schedule showing unique model designation, room location, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" include the following:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes. 2. Instructions for adjusting software set points.



B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

C. Comply with ARI 880 standard for terminal boxes.

D. Comply with ARI 410 standard for reheat coils.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of air terminal units and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CENTRAL AIR TERMINALS

A. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components located inside a protective metal shroud.

B. Casings: Construct of sheet metal.

C. Provide hanger brackets for attachment of supports.

D. Linings: Line inside surfaces of casings with coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071 to provide acoustic performance, thermal insulation, and to prevent condensation on outside surfaces of casing. Provide minimum thickness of 1/2". Secure lining to prevent delamination, sagging, or settling.

E. Provide Controller and Controls Enclosure to cover controller.

F. Provide airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches.

G. Leakage: Construct casings such that when subjected to 0.5-in wg pressure for low pressure units, and 3.0-in wg pressure for high pressure unitsf, total leakage does not exceed 4% of specified air flow capacity with outlets sealed and inlets wide open. Construct air dampers such that when subjected to 6.0-in wg inlet pressure with damper closed, total leakage does not exceed 10% of specified air flow capacity.

H. Air Dampers: Construct of materials that cannot corrode, do not require lubrication, nor require periodic servicing. Provide maximum volume dampers, with velocity rings, both pressure dependent and pressure compensated, that are calibrated in cfm, factory-adjusted, and marked for specified air capacities.


MSA# 11172.00


Provide mechanism to vary air volume thru damper for minimum to maximum, in response from signal from thermostat.

I. Sound Power Levels: Provide sound power levels not exceeding the following:

1. Radiated:

a. 2nd octave: 78 b. 3rd octave: 74 c. 4th octave: 66 d. 5th octave: 64 e. 6th octave: 64 f. 7th octave: 60

J. Controls: Provide controls accurate to 1.5 deg F (0.8 deg C) and adjustable from 65 deg F (22 deg C) to 85 deg F (29 deg C) of the following types:

1. Low voltage controls. Actuators and valves by temperature control system specified in other Division-23 sections.

2. All VAV boxes shall have both discharge temperature and supply CFM sensors. 3. VAV Box manufacturer shall factory install DDC Controls for boxes at their factory as provided

by the Temperature Control Supplier. Box manufacturer shall be responsible for this mounting charge.

K. Identification: Provide label on each unit indicating Plant Number, CFM range, CFM factory setting, and calibration curve (if required).

L. Provide the following type of coil:

1. Hot Water Heating Coils: Provide heating coils constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins with galvanized steel casing.

M. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air terminals of one of the following:

1. E.H. Price 2. Enviro-Tec 3. Krueger 4. Titus Products Div., Philips Industries, Inc. 5. Trane (The) Co. 6. MetalAire 7. Tuttle & Bailey 8. Johnson Controls 9. Nailor

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air terminals are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.


MSA# 11172.00


3.2 INSTALLATION OF AIR TERMINALS

A. General: Install air terminals as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Location: Install each unit level and accurately in position indicated in relation to other work; and maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect upstream ducts to air terminal units with flexible ductwork according to Division 23 Section “Flexible Ducts.”

B. Connect downstream ducts to air terminal units according to Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts.”

C. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

D. Install piping adjacent to air terminal units to allow service and maintenance.

E. Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping," connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange.


A. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that air terminals, and duct connections to air terminals, are leak-tight.

B. Repair or replace air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks, and retest to demonstrate compliance.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturers touch-up paint.



MSA# 11172.00

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND LOUVERS 233713 - 1

SECTION 233713 – DIFFUSERS AND REGISTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Types of air outlets and inlets required for project include the following:

1. Ceiling air diffusers. 2. Registers and grilles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access

panels, and special moldings. 5. Duct access panels.


Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS

A. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate


MSA# 11172.00


support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems, which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser.

B. Diffuser Faces:

1. Square: Square housing, core of square concentric louvers, square or round duct connection.

C. Diffuser Mountings: Coordinate mounting type with architectural ceiling type prior to ordering:

1. Surface Mount: Diffuser shall have rolled edge below finished ceiling for surface mounting or diffuser shall be furnished with accessory plaster frame.

2. Lay-In: Diffuser housing sized to fit between ceiling exposed suspension tee bars and rest on top surface of tee bar.

D. Diffuser Patterns:

1. Adjustable: Manual adjustable core with concentric rings or louvers, fully adjustable for horizontal to vertical airflow.

E. Diffuser Acoustic Performance:

1. NC less than or equal to 30

F. Diffuser Accessories:

1. Equalizing Deflectors: Adjustable parallel blades in frame for straightening air flow. 2. Plaster Ring: Perimeter ring designed to act as plaster stop and diffuser anchor. 3. Blank-Off Baffles: Arc segments designed to fit into diffuser housing to divert airflow from

impinging on obstruction.

G. Diffuser Finishes:

1. White Enamel: Semi-gloss white with enamel prime finish.

H. Types: Provide diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories as listed below:

1. Square:

a. Model: Price, Model SCDA square cone diffuser with adjustable pattern control. Provide butterfly damper for diffusers installed in drywall ceilings, walls, bulkheads, etc..

I. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide diffusers of one of the following:

1. Krueger 2. Metal-Aire 3. Titus 4. Tuttle and Bailey. 5. Price 6. Nailor


MSA# 11172.00


2.2 REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A. Performance: Provide wall and ceiling registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.

B. Wall and Ceiling Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible with adjacent wall and ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of wall and ceiling construction which will contain each type of register and grille.

C. Provide registers and grilles with the following features:

1. Materials:

a. Steel Construction: Manufacturer's standard stamped sheet steel frame and adjustable blades.

2. Faces:

a. Horizontal Straight Blades: Horizontal blades, individually adjustable, at manufacturer's standard spacing.

b. Vertical Straight Blades: Vertical blades, individually adjustable, at manufacturer's standard spacing.

c. Horizontal 45 degree Fixed Blades: Horizontal blades, fixed at 45 degrees, at manufacturer's standard spacing.

3. Patterns:

a. Double Deflection: 2-sets of blades in face, rear set at 90 degrees to face set.

4. Dampers:

a. Opposed Blade: Adjustable opposed-blade damper assembly, key operated from face of register. Installed in drywall ceilings, walls, bulkheads, etc..

5. Accessories:

a. Plaster Frame: Perimeter frame designed to act as plaster stop and register or grille anchor. b. Operating Keys: Tools designed to fit through register or grille face, and operate volume

control device and/or pattern adjustment.

6. Acoustic Performance:

a. NC less than or equal to - 30

7. Finishes:

a. White Enamel: Semi-gloss white enamel prime finish.

D. Types: Provide diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories as listed below:

1. Supply:


MSA# 11172.00


a. Model: Price, Model 520D, louvered face, double deflection, 3/4” blade spacing, steel supply register with opposed blade damper installed in drywall ceilings, walls, bulkheads, etc. Vertically installed registers with front blades vertical.

2. Return and Exhaust:

a. Model: Price, Model 530D, louvered face, fixed deflection, 3/4” blade spacing, steel return register with opposed blade damper installed in drywall ceiling, walls, bulkheads, etc..

E. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide registers and grilles of one of the following:

1. Krueger 2. Price 3. Metal-Aire 4. Titus 5. Tuttle and Bailey. 6. Nailor

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions.

B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.

C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction documents. Coordinate installation with Reflected Ceiling Plan and Electrical Lighting Plan. Locate diffusers in the center of ceiling modules.

D. Where used on the inlet to diffusers, flexible duct, as specified in Division 23 Section “Flexible Ducts,” is limited to 5 feet in length and is to be installed without sharp bends.

3.3 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 3 operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that require them.



MSA# 11172.00

HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS 233723 - 1

SECTION 233723 – HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Types of ventilators required for project include the following:

1. Louvered Penthouse Ventilators.


A. Structural Performance: Intake and relief ventilators shall be capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads, wind loads, and thermal movements without permanent deformation of components, noise or metal fatigue, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: For intake and relief ventilators. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and ventilator attachments to curbs and curb attachments to roof structure.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain ventilators through one source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of intake and relief ventilators and are based on the specific equipment indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GRAVITY VENTILATORS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard prefabricated gravity ventilator units of type and size indicated, modified as necessary to comply with requirements, and as required for complete installation.

B. Louvered Penthouse Ventilators: Extruded aluminum construction, 4-inch deep louvers on all sides, internally insulated aluminum cross-broken roof and extended bottom to fit over roof curb..

C. Louvers shall be sized and constructed to prevent water entry at 500 fpm net area face velocity..

D. Provide square or rectangular base to suit roof curb.

E. Bird Screens: Provide removable bird screens, 1/2" mesh, 16-gage aluminum or brass wire.

F. Mill finish.

G. Dampers utilized for pressure relief applications shall be tight seal, motorized, with blade and edge seals.

H. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Cook Co., Loren. 2. Greenheck Fan Corp. 3. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc. 4. Jenn Fan 5. Twin City Fan

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which power and gravity ventilators are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF POWER AND GRAVITY VENTILATORS

A. The power ventilator(s) shall be installed a minimum of 10’-0” from any roof edge regardless of location indicated on plans, unless a screen wall or railing is installed per the local building code. See the architectural plans for coordination.

B. Mount new ventilators on existing roof curbs.

C. Secure ventilators to curbs with minimum 2 stainless steel screws or lag bolts per side.


MSA# 11172.00



A. Testing: After installation of ventilators has been completed, test each ventilator to demonstrate proper operation of units at performance requirements specified. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units, which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.





MSA# 11172.00

MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313 - 1

SECTION 237313 – MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Types of packaged air handling units specified in this section include the following:

1. Indoor draw-through.


1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on unit. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed by manufacturer.

2. Interlock wiring between electrically-operated equipment units; and between equipment and field-installed control devices.

C. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division 26 sections:

1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control panels.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Show mechanical-room layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of unit bases.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR HANDLING UNITS ARE PRE-PURCHASED BY THE OWNER FROM JOHNSON CONTROLS.

A. Copies of Johnson Control’s submittal, terms and conditions are available upon request. Contractor shall abide by all Johnson Controls terms and conditions and include any additional costs needed for complete unit installations to not void any warrantees of the units.


MSA# 11172.00


B. In general, Contractor shall take delivery of unit sections, rig into mechanical rooms, assemble sections, connect ductwork, connect chilled water and hot water to respective coils, install humidifier manifolds in casing and connect to steam-to-steam humidifier and condensate drain, connect to unit condensate drain connections and route drain to floor drain, and start units.

C. Contract with Johnson to inspect and approve pipe penetrations of unit walls for humidifiers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air handling units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. Coordination: Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, floor construction, roof decking, and piping, as necessary to interface installation of air handling units with other work.

B. Access: Provide access space around air handling units for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer.

C. Support: Install new units in approximately the same location as existing units. Enlarge housekeeping pads so they are at least 4-inches larger than plan outline of unit.

D. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

E. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.

F. Hot and Chilled Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection. Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return connection.

G. Steam and Condensate Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping." Install gate valve and inlet strainer at supply connection of dry steam humidifiers, and inverted bucket steam trap to condensate return connection.

H. Humidifiers: All steam vents, traps, condensate overflows, drain lines, relief valves, or anything that produces steam or steam condensate to be disposed, shall be routed to after coolers prior to being introduced into the sanitary system.

I. Connect condensate drain pans and extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.

J. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

K. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.


MSA# 11172.00


L. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

M. Grounding: Provide positive equipment ground for air handling unit components.


A. Testing: Upon completion of installation of air handling units, start-up and operate equipment to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Before startup, clean air-handling units internally on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheels, cabinets, and coils entering air face.

B. Remove debris from exterior of units.

C. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new, clean filters.



MSA# 11172.00

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 1

SECTION 238126 – SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.


A. Summary:

1. Section includes split system air conditioners of the following types:

a. Indoor air handler section coupled with outdoor condensing unit.


1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on Air Conditioning units. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer.


1. Interlock and Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control panels.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

D. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."


MSA# 11172.00


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.


C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit. 2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS:

A. General: Provide factory-assembled and tested units as indicated, consisting of insulated casing, filter and rack, fan, motor and drive, fan and limit controls, and control transformer. Provide full cased evaporator coil.

B. Refrigeration Circuit: Provide refrigerant thermal expansion valve for refrigerant control. Provide access valves in suction and liquid lines.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Compressors: Provide welded shell, hermetic compressors, or serviceable hermetic compressors, 1750 RPM. Provide crankcase heaters. Provide 5 year extended warranty on compressor.

D. Evaporator Coil: Construct of copper tubing and aluminum fins, pressure and leak tested at 1.5 times working pressure.

E. Fans: Provide direct double-inlet, forward curved, centrifugal fans with drive. Provide permanently lubricated fan and motor bearings, and thermal overloads in motor.

F. Filters: Provide 1" thick throwaway filters.

G. Low Ambient Control: Provide head pressure control, designed to operate at temperatures down to -20 deg. F.

H. Controls: Provide factory-installed and wired controls, with terminal strip. Provide connections for remote thermostat.

2.2 AIR HANDLERS

A. General

1. Air handler units shall be completely factory assembled including coil, condensate drain pan, fan motor, filters and controls in an insulated casing that can be applied in either vertical or horizontal configuration. Units shall be rated and tested in accordance with ARI standard 210. Units shall be UL listed, labeled, classified in accordance with UL 465 and 559 for indoor blower coil units. All units shall be CSA certified for Canadian application.

B. Casing

1. Unit casing shall be constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, galvanized steel. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized and finished with a weather-resistant baked enamel finish. Casing is completely insulated with fire-retardant, permanent, odorless glass fiber material. Knockouts shall be provided for unit electrical power and refrigerant piping connections. Captive screws shall be standard on all access panels.

C. Refrigerant System

1. The units shall have dual refrigeration circuits. Each refrigeration circuit is controlled by a factory installed thermal expansion valve.

D. Evaporator Coil

1. Configurated aluminum fin surface shall be mechanically bonded to 3/8" internally enhanced copper tubing and factory pressure and leak tested at 425 psig. Coil is arranged for draw-through airflow and shall provide condensate drain pan constructed of PVC plastic and provide external connections on either side of the unit. Provide full cased cover around evaporator coil for duct mounting.

E. Evaporator Fan

1. Double inlet, double width, forward curved, centrifugal-type fan(s) with adjustable belt drive shall be standard. Thermal overload protection shall be standard on motor. Fan and motor bearings


MSA# 11172.00


shall be permanently lubricated. Motors and bearings shall be resilient mounted. Oversized motors shall be available as an option for high static application.

F. Controls

1. Magnetic evaporator fan contactor, low voltage terminal strip, check valves, and single point power entry shall be included. All necessary controls shall be factory-installed and wired. Evaporator defrost control shall be included to prevent compressor slugging by temporarily interrupting compressor operation when low evaporator coil temperatures are encountered.

G. Filters

1. One inch, throw-away filters shall be standard. Filters shall be accessible from the side coil access panel. Filter rack can be field converted to two inch capability.

H. Accessories

1. Vibration Isolators - Shall reduce transmission of noise and vibration to building structures, equipment and adjacent spaces. Packages shall be available in either neoprene-in-shear or spring-flex types in floor or ceiling mountings.

2. Oversized Motors - Field installed oversized motors shall be available for high static pressure applications.

I. Control Options

1. Standard Indoor Thermostats - Two stage heating and cooling operations or one stage heating and cooling thermostats shall be available in either manual or automatic changeover.

2. Provide the Following:

a. Motor with individual overload protection. b. High and low refrigerant cutouts. c. Time delay relay to prevent short cycling compressor. d. Two stage heat/cool for dual circuit units. e. Outdoor thermostat. f. Crankcase heater. g. Low ambient control. h. Moisture indicator. i. Filter drier. j. Refrigerant service valves.

J. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide AC units of one of the following:

1. Trane Co. 2. Carrier 3. Johnson Controls

2.3 OUTDOOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. General


MSA# 11172.00


1. Factory assembled, single piece, air-cooled outdoor unit. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, compressor, full charge of HFC Refrigerant, and special features required prior to field start-up.

B. Unit Cabinet

1. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with a baked-enamel finish.

2. Unit access panels shall be removable with minimal screws and shall provide full acce4ss to the compressor, fan, and control components.

3. Outdoor compartment shall be isolated and have an acoustic lining to assure quiet operation.

C. Fans

1. Outdoor fans shall be direct-drive propeller type, and shall discharge air horizontally. Fans shall below air through the outdoor coil.

2. Outdoor fan motors shall be totally-enclosed, single-phase motors with Class B insulation and permanently-lubricated sleeve bearings. Motor shall be protected by internal thermal overload protection.

3. Shaft shall have inherent corrosion resistance. 4. Fan blades shall be corrosion resistant and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. 5. Outdoor fan openings shall be equipped with PVC coated protection grille over fan and coil.

D. Compressor

1. Compressor shall be fully hermetic reciprocating or scroll type. 2. Compressor shall be equipped with oil system, operating oil charge, and motor. Internal overloads

shall protect the compressor from overtemperature and overcurrent. Scroll compressors shall also have high discharge gas temperature protection if required.

3. Motor shall be NEMA rated Class F, suitable for operation in a refrigerant atmosphere. 4. Reciprocating compressors shall be equipped with crankcase heaters to minimize liquid refrigerant

accumulation in compressor during shutdown and to prevent refrigerant dilution of oil. 5. Compressor assembly shall be installed on rubber vibration isolators and shall have internal spring

isolation. 6. Compressors shall be single-phase or 3-phase a specified on the contract drawings.

E. Outdoor Coil

1. Coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to internally enhanced, seamless copper tubes which are cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed.

F. Refrigeration Components

1. Refrigerant circuit components shall include brass external liquid line service valve with service gage port connections, suction line service valve with service gage connection port, service gage port connections on compressor suction and discharge lines with Schrader-type fittings with brass caps, accumulator, pressure relief, and a full charge of refrigerant.

G. Controls and Safeties

1. Operating controls and safeties shall be factory selected, assembled, and tested. The minimum control functions shall include the following:


MSA# 11172.00


H. Controls

1. Time delay restart to prevent compressor reverse rotation on signal-phase scroll compressors. 2. Automatic restart on power failure. 3. Safety lockout if any outdoor unit safety is open. 4. A time delay control sequence provided through the fan coil board, thermostat, or controller. 5. High-pressure and liquid line low-pressure switches. 6. Automatic outdoor fan motor protection. 7. Start capacitor and relay (single phase units without scroll compressors).

I. Safeties

1. System diagnostics. 2. Compressor motor current and temperature overload protection 3. High pressure relief. 4. Outdoor fan failure protection.

J. Electrical Requirements

1. Unit electrical power shall be a single point connection. 2. Unit control voltage to the indoor-fan coil shall be 24 volt 3. All power and control wiring must be installed per NEC and all local building codes. 4. High and low voltage terminal block connections.

K. Special Features (Field Installed)

1. Low-Ambient Kit

a. Control shall regulate fan-motor cycles in response to saturated condensing pressure of the unit. The control shall be capable of maintaining a condensing temperature of 100 F +/- 10 F with outdoor temperatures to -20F. Installation of kit shall not require changing the outdoor-fan motor.

2. Liquid Solenoid Valve

a. This electronically operated shutoff valve shall close and opening response to compressor operation. The valve should be used with all long-lines applications (over 100 ft.).

3. Winter Start Control

a. Field supplied and installed winter start control shall permit start-up for cooling operation under low-load conditions and at low-ambient temperatures by bypassing the low-pressure switch for a 3-minute delay period.

b. NOTE: Winter start control shall be required when unit is intended to operate in cooling at outdoor ambients below 40F.

4. Crankcase Heater (units with scroll compressors only).

a. Unit shall be shipped with a clamp-on compressor oil sump heater.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air conditioning units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS:

A. General: Install units in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

B. Support: Install exterior units on roof equipment support rails flashed into roofing.

C. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.

D. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.

E. Ductwork: Connect supply and return ducts to unit with flexible duct connections. Provide transitions to exactly match unit duct connection size. Provide 1" acoustic duct lining on return air side a minimum of 10' from fan. Connect outside air duct to unit with flexible connection, provide manual damper and motorized damper.

F. Drain Piping: Connect unit drain to nearest indirect waste connection. Piping to be type L copper. Provide trap at drain piping connection to unit sized per manufacturer’s recommendations.

G. Start-up AC units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.3 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL:

A. Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for 1-half day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of units. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7-day notice to Contractor and Engineer of training date.

3.4 SPARE PARTS:

A. General: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for AC unit:

1. 1 set of matched fan belts for each belt driven fan. 2. 1 set filters for each unit.



MSA# 11172.00

DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 238129 - 1

SECTION 238129 - DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Types of ductless split system units specified in this section include the following:

1. Outdoor Condensing Units 2. Indoor Ceiling Suspended Units


1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on Air Conditioning units. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer.


1. Interlock and Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control panels.


A. Test and rate systems in accordance with ARI 210/240.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.4 WARRANTY:

A. Warranty on Motor/Compressor: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, motors/compressors with inadequate or defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement is limited to component replacement only, and does not include labor for removal and reinstallation.

B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of owner acceptance.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER:

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ductless split system air conditioning units of one of the following manufacturers:

1. Carrier 2. Mitsubishi 3. Sanyo 4. EMI 5. Fujitsu 6. LG 7. Daikin 8. Samsung

2.2 OUTDOOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. General

1. Factory assembled, single piece, air-cooled outdoor unit. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, compressor, full charge of HFC refrigerant, and special features required prior to field start-up.

B. Unit Cabinet

1. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with a baked-enamel finish.

2. Unit access panels shall be removable with minimal screws and shall provide full acce4ss to the compressor, fan, and control components.

3. Outdoor compartment shall be isolated and have an acoustic lining to assure quiet operation.

C. Fans

1. Outdoor fans shall be direct-drive propeller type, and shall discharge air horizontally. Fans shall below air through the outdoor coil.

2. Outdoor fan motors shall be totally-enclosed, single-phase motors with Class B insulation and permanently-lubricated sleeve bearings. Motor shall be protected by internal thermal overload protection.

3. Shaft shall have inherent corrosion resistance. 4. Fan blades shall be corrosion resistant and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. 5. Outdoor fan openings shall be equipped with PVC coated protection grille over fan and coil.

D. Compressor

1. Compressor shall be fully hermetic reciprocating or scroll type. 2. Compressor shall be equipped with oil system, operating oil charge, and motor. Internal overloads

shall protect the compressor from overtemperature and overcurrent. Scroll compressors shall also have high discharge gas temperature protection if required.

3. Motor shall be NEMA rated Class F, suitable for operation in a refrigerant atmosphere.


MSA# 11172.00


4. Reciprocating compressors shall be equipped with crankcase heaters to minimize liquid refrigerant accumulation in compressor during shutdown and to prevent refrigerant dilution of oil.

5. Compressor assembly shall be installed on rubber vibration isolators and shall have internal spring isolation.

6. Compressors shall be single-phase or 3-phase a specified on the contract drawings.

E. Outdoor Coil

1. Coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to internally enhanced, seamless copper tubes which are cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed.

F. Refrigeration Components

1. Refrigerant circuit components shall include brass external liquid line service valve with service gage port connections, suction line service valve with service gage connection port, service gage port connections on compressor suction and discharge lines with Schrader-type fittings with brass caps, accumulator, pressure relief, and a full charge of refrigerant.

G. Controls and Safeties

1. Operating controls and safeties shall be factory selected, assembled, and tested. The minimum control functions shall include the following:

H. Controls

1. Time delay restart to prevent compressor reverse rotation on signal-phase scroll compressors. 2. Automatic restart on power failure. 3. Safety lockout if any outdoor unit safety is open. 4. A time delay control sequence provided through the fan coil board, thermostat, or controller. 5. High-pressure and liquid line low-pressure switches. 6. Automatic outdoor fan motor protection. 7. Start capacitor and relay (single phase units without scroll compressors).

I. Safeties

1. System diagnostics. 2. Compressor motor current and temperature overload protection 3. High pressure relief. 4. Outdoor fan failure protection.

J. Electrical Requirements

1. Unit electrical power shall be a single point connection. 2. Unit control voltage to the indoor-fan coil shall be 24 volt 3. All power and control wiring must be installed per NEC and all local building codes. 4. High and low voltage terminal block connections.


1. Low-Ambient Kit

a. Control shall regulate fan-motor cycles in response to saturated condensing pressure of the unit. The control shall be capable of maintaining a condensing temperature of 100 F +/- 10


MSA# 11172.00


F with outdoor temperatures to -20F. Installation of kit shall not require changing the outdoor-fan motor.

2. Liquid Solenoid Valve

a. This electronically operated shutoff valve shall close and opening response to compressor operation. The valve should be used with all long-lines applications (over 100 ft.).

3. Winter Start Control

a. Field supplied and installed winter start control shall permit start-up for cooling operation under low-load conditions and at low-ambient temperatures by bypassing the low-pressure switch for a 3-minute delay period.

b. NOTE: Winter start control shall be required when unit is intended to operate in cooling at outdoor ambients below 40F.

4. Crankcase Heater (units with scroll compressors only).

a. Unit shall be shipped with a clamp-on compressor oil sump heater.

2.3 CEILING SUSPENDED UNITS

A. General

1. Indoor, direct-expansion, ceiling-suspended fan coil. Fan coil shall be shipped complete with cooling coil, fan, fan motor, piping connectors, electrical controls, solid-state electromechanical control system, and ceiling mounted brackets.

B. Unit Cabinet

1. Cabinet shall be zinc-coated bonderized steel finished with a baked enamel paint. Inlet grilles shall be attractively styled, high-impact polystyrene. Matching mounting brackets shall be provided.

C. Fans

1. Fans shall be centrifugal blower type with air intake in the bottom rear of the unit and discharge in the front. Automatic motor-driven vertical air sweep shall be provided.

D. Coils

1. Coils shall be copper tube with aluminum fins and galvanized steel tube sheets. Fins will be bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion. A drip pan under the coil shall have a drain connection for attachment of piping to remove condensate.

E. Motors

1. Motors shall be permanently lubricated with inherent overload protection. Fan motor shall be 3-speed.

F. Controls


MSA# 11172.00


1. Controls shall consist of a solid-state electromechanical control system which shall control space temperature and determine optimum fan speed. The temperature control range shall be from 64 F to 84 F. The unit shall have the following functions as a minimum.

a. Provide hard wired wall thermostat secured to wall. (remote control stats are not acceptable).

b. An automatic restart after power failure at the same operating conditions as at failure. c. Programmable thermostat to provide cooling and heating set points and day/night setback

modes. d. Wired control to enter set points and operating conditions. e. Filter status indication after 250 hours of indoor fan operation. f. Automatic air sweep control to provide on or off activation of air sweep louvers. g. Cooling mode to provide modulating fan speed based on difference between temperature

set point and space temperature. h. Fan only operation to provide room air circulation when no cooling is required. i. A 50-ft indoor to outdoor control connection cable shall be provided with the fan coil unit. j. Fan speed control shall be user-selectable: high, medium, low or automatic operation

during all operating modes. k. A time delay shall prevent compressor restart in less than2 or 4 minutes (adjustable).

G. Filters

1. Unit shall have filter track with factory-supplied cleanable filters.

H. Electrical Requirements

1. Unit shall operate on a 208 volt or 230 volt, 60 Hz power supply as specified on the equipment schedule.

I. Operating Characteristics

1. The unit shall be matched with an outdoor unit. The combination of the outdoor unit and the indoor fan coil unit shall be sized as scheduled.

2. The system shall have a minimum listed SEER (seasonal energy efficiency ratio) of 10.0 at ARI conditions.

J. High Water Alarm

1. Provide sensor in cooling drain pan that will alarm and shut down unit on high condensate levels for ceiling mounted unit.


1. Internal Condensate Pump

a. The condensate pump shall remove condensate from the pan when gravity cannot be used. The lift capability shall be 20 inches. Float control shall be in the condensate sump to shut unit down in case of pump malfunction.

2. Electronic Programmable Thermostat

a. Provide hard wired wall thermostat secured to wall. (remote control stats are not acceptable).


MSA# 11172.00


b. Thermostat shall be commercial grade and shall provide 7-day, 4-event scheduling. Integral subbase shall be included. Thermostat shall also provide 3-speed fan switchover capability, air sweep auto changeover, and shall not require a battery to retain memory.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air conditioning units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM UNITS:

A. General: Install units in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

B. Support: Install exterior units on grade on 4" thick concrete pad.

C. Support: Install exterior units on roof on equipment curb with flashing to roof. Provide curb type and flashing per roofing manufacturer requirements.

D. The condensing units shall be installed a minimum of 10’-0” from any roof edge regardless of location indicated on plans, unless a screen wall or railing is installed per the local building code. See the architectural plans for coordination.

E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.

F. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.

G. Drain Piping: Connect unit drain to nearest indirect waste connection. Provide trap at drain pan; construct at least 1" deeper than fan pressure in inches of water.

H. Start-up AC units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.3 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL:

A. Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for 1-half day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of units. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7-day notice to Contractor and Engineer of training date.



MSA# 11172.00

STEAM HUMIDIFIERS 238413 - 1

SECTION 238413 – STEAM HUMIDIFIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Types of steam humidifier products specified in this section include the following:

1. Steam-to-steam humidity generator. 2. Steam humidification manifold.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of steam humidifier specialty. Submit schedule indicating manufacturer's figure number, size, location, rated capacities, and features for each required steam and condensate specialty.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturers' assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and method of assembly of components.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of steam humidifier specialty. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain steam humidification equipment through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of steam condensate pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

C. Codes and Standards:

1. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label steam pressure vessels to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.


MSA# 11172.00



A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of steam and condensate specialties of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Provide steam humidifiers and specialties of same type by same manufacturer.

C. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

D. Store steam humidification equipment in dry location.

E. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.

F. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEAM GENERATOR TYPE HUMIDIFIERS

A. General: Steam humidifier for distribution of humidity (steam vapor) using DI water into an air handling system, electrically controlled design.

B. Humidifier shall generate steam from demineralized water by passing existing plant steam through a heat exchanger submerged in water. Heat exchanger will be constructed of stainless steel with P403 coating, and will be properly sized to produce amount of steam required based on inlet steam supply pressure.

C. Humidifier shall have modulating control to provide 0% to 100% of maximum capacity. Humidifier is field-adaptable to 0-10 VDC or 4-20 milliamp

D. Humidifier shall incorporate a float valve compatible with DI water for liquid level control.

E. Humidifier shall incorporate electrical terminals for system control signal.

F. Humidifier shall be supplied with matching prefabricated separator/header and multiple dispersion tube assembly designed for the application in order to shorten the non-wettable vapor trail.

G. Humidifier tank shall be constructed of stainless steel.

H. Humidifier fill water line shall have an air gap to prevent back-flow (siphoning) of tank water into the water supply system.

I. Humidifier shall have a 4” Flanged Outlet.


MSA# 11172.00


J. Humidifier shall include support legs and a factory insulation kit.

K. Panel drain shall be tempered using an Armstrong Temp-R-Drain.

1. Body and fittings shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel with welded seams. 2. Cold water supply valve shall be brass, controlled by thermostatic element. 3. Drain temperature shall be factory preset to 140°F and shall be field adjustable. 4. Unit shall have integral air gap to allow for hard piping into plumbing system. 5. Unit shall be installed horizontally and shall drain completely without using separate drain valve.

2.2 HUMIDIFIER MANIFOLD

A. General: packaged steam injection type humidifier or multiple tube dispersion assembly ready for insertion into air handling unit.

B. HumidiPack includes a fabricated separator/header and multiple dispersion tube design of all stainless steel construction; No O-rings or slip couplings are required. Each active tube is fitted with a series of stainless steel nozzles, which extend from the center of the tube. The nozzles are sized and spaced to accept steam from the separator/header and provide a dry and uniform discharge of steam.

C. Each HumidiPack segment is designed for simplified duct mounting including stacking of header/separator/dispersion tube segments when necessary.

D. HumidiPack uses Atmospheric Steam from an Armstrong Series CS-10 Steam-to-Steam Humidifier.

E. Active dispersion tubes are insulated with 60 to 80 mills of ceramic coating.

F. Ceramic Coating or equal must be able to bond with outer stainless steel pipe so that no moisture will collect between the two layers.

G. With the use of this insulation the steam to air stream efficiency will be 87% or above.

H. Complete dispersion panel assembly must be all welded construction. O-rings or slip fit couplings are not acceptable as O-rings add another level of required annual maintenance.

I. Panel drain shall be tempered using an Armstrong Temp-R-Drain.

1. Body and fittings shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel with welded seams. 2. Cold water supply valve shall be brass, controlled by thermostatic element. 3. Drain temperature shall be factory preset to 140°F and shall be field adjustable. 4. Unit shall have integral air gap to allow for hard piping into plumbing system. 5. Unit shall be installed horizontally and shall drain completely without using separate drain valve.

2.3 MANUFACTURER

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide float and thermostatic traps of one of the following:

1. Armstrong Machine Works. 2. CArel. 3. Dri-Steem.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION:

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which steam humidifiers are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEAM HUMIDIFIERS

A. Install humidification equipment per drawing details and manufacturers printed instructions.

B. Supply services of factory trained representative to check installation for compliance with manufacturer's requirements and to supervise start-up and testing of humidifiers.

C. Demonstrate all humidifiers to be fully functional



MSA# 11172.00

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260001 - 1

SECTION 260001 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of Division 26 sections.

B. E-series drawings apply to work of Division 26 sections and vice versa.

C. See NKU standards at end of specifications.





1.3 SPECIAL CONDITIONS

A. Owner's representative or engineer may relocate fixture, device or equipment outlets prior to installation within a 15 foot limit at no additional charge. This would not include floor receptacles.

B. Complete work, or part(s) thereof, at such time as may be designated by the owner's representative, so that it can be used for temporary or permanent use. Do not construe such use of the system as an acceptance of same by Owner.

1.4 GENERAL STANDARDS

A. Provide work in compliance with applicable provisions of the following standards. Provide UL listing and UL label for electrical materials, equipment luminaires, devices, etc.

B. Provide work in strict accordance with the latest edition of applicable codes including (but not limited to) the following codes and standards. 1. National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA 70. 2. Life Safety Code, NFPA 101. 3. Other Provisions of NFPA as applicable. 4. Local Electrical Codes. 5. Local utility company requirements. 6. ADA/ADAAG requirements. 7. ASME. 8. IECC 2009.


MSA# 11172.00


1.5 PERMITS AND REGULATIONS

A. Provide written notification to Engineer's office with list of agency choices if multiple electrical plan review or inspection agencies are permitted in the jurisdiction of the project. The final agency selection is Engineer’s

B. Provide electrical materials, installation methods, workmanship, testing, etc., unless otherwise specified, that conforms with the latest rules, regulations and specifications of the National Electrical Code, the National Board of Fire Underwriters, local and state codes having jurisdiction and applicable utility companies.

C. If a discrepancy between Division 26 drawings and specifications and codes, laws, ordinances, rules and regulations is discovered, immediately notify the engineer and proceed no further with related work until response is received.

D. Obtain and pay for permits, certificates of inspection and approval, etc. required for this branch of the work. All inspections must be scheduled a minimum of two weeks with agency before inspection is required.

E. Furnish Owner with certificates of final inspection and approval prior to final acceptance of this branch of the work.

1.6 SPECIFICATIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

A. Wherever the term "furnish" appears in documents, interpret to mean "supply and deliver to project site, ready for installation".

B. Wherever the term "install" appears in documents, interpret to mean "Assemble, wire and connect loose-shipped components on site. Place in position for service or use, including material, labor, accessories, services, and testing. Wire, connect, and render fully operational for intended use ". Note that most products to be installed shall also be furnished under Division 26, though some products require only installation under Division 26 - depending on context and application.

C. Wherever the terms "provide", "include”, “shall be”, “to be", “equip with”, “consisting of”, or similar terms appear in documents, interpret to mean "Furnish and Install".

D. Wherever the word "work" appears in documents, interpret to mean “material, labor, accessories, services, testing, etc. as required to render respective work fully operational”.

E. Wherever the word “flush” appears, interpret to mean “recessed in respective surface with visible face flush and even with respective surface”.

F. Wherever the words "(the) (this) contractor", "(the) (this) subcontractor", "E.C./EC", “electrical contractor”, “electrical subcontractor” or similar terms appear in Division 26 specifications or on electrical drawings, they refer the entity responsible for providing electrical work indicated on electrical drawings, and Division 26 Project Manual sections.

1.7 EXPLANATION AND PRECEDENCE OF DRAWINGS


MSA# 11172.00


A. For the purposes of clearness and legibility, drawings are essentially diagrammatic and although size and locations of equipment are drawn to scale wherever possible, make use of data on drawings and verify information at building site.

B. The drawings indicate required size and points of termination of conduit and partially suggest proper routes to conform to the structure, avoid obstructions and preserve clearances. However, it is not intended that drawings indicate necessary offsets. Install conduit and equipment in such manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear without further instructions.

C. Coordinate work with affected entities and installers. Locate and install equipment and devices accordingly. Refer to coordination drawings of other trades.

D. Locate apparatus be located symmetrical with architectural elements and install at exact height and locations as shown on architectural drawings.

E. Fully research peculiarities and limitations of space available for installation of work along with materials to be furnished and installed. Exercise due and particular caution to ensure that parts of the installed work are made quickly and easily accessible. Although the locations of the equipment and conduit may be shown on the drawings in certain positions, be guided by the architectural details and conditions existing at the job site, correlating electrical work with that of others. Provide offsets as required to provide a neat workmanlike arrangement.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide Equipment List for items of material and equipment, which must be reviewed by the Engineer prior to the start of work. Provide submittals in a timely manner allowing for long lead items. No item of equipment will be permitted on the site until acceptance of that equipment has been given. Provide copies of drawings and manufacturer cuts and performance data for Engineer’s review. Organized in same order as listed in equipment list and include reference to page and paragraph numbers of the specifications. Bind in identical sets. Do not purchase material until the submittals are approved by the Engineer.

B. Clearly indicate sufficient definition in submittals so they can be properly reviewed for compliance with documents.

C. Refer to Division1 Section pertaining to Submittals.


A. Unless specifically indicated otherwise provide (furnish and install) all specified and drawn equipment, raceway, boxes, luminaires, controls, wiring, cabling, supports and other materials as required to render all electrical and electrically operated equipment, luminaires, devices, etc. fully operational. Unless specifically indicated otherwise provide (furnish and install) all materials that are specified under Division 26. Discrepancies or uncertainties perceived by a bidder, or other questionable interpretations by a bidder, are subject to final interpretations and decisions by the owner’s representative unless addressed before bidding by addendum or unless qualified or excepted within bids.

B. Provide materials that are new, full weight, of the best quality. Provide similar materials that are of the same type and manufacturer. Provide materials, apparatus and equipment with Underwriter's Laboratory, Inc. label where regularly supplied.

C. Maintain safety and good condition of the materials and equipment installed until final acceptance by the Owner. Store materials to prevent damage and weathering prior to installation.

D. When several materials, products or items of equipment are specified by name for one use, select one of those specified.


MSA# 11172.00


E. Provide material manufacturers equal in quality, performance, aesthetics, and product support (factory and local) to that specified as basis of design. Other products, material, article, device, fixture or form of construction not mentioned as approved equal is subject to advance review by the Engineer and possible rejection.

F. Bear costs incurred from deviation from basis of design equipment, fixtures, materials, methods, etc. Use of equipment, fixtures, materials methods, etc. that deviate from the basis of design will be considered as a statement that clearances, arrangements, performance, etc. have been checked, found satisfactory, and is compliant with applicable codes and regulations.


A. Deliver equipment and materials according to factory shipping requirements. Pack components in factory-fabricated protective containers. Deliver units in sections of such size as will pass through available openings.

B. Store equipment and materials in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.

C. Handle and rig work for equipment and products as recommended by the manufacturer. Do not install components and equipment damaged during shipment or handling - return damaged components to the manufacturer and replace with new.


A. Provide references on request that demonstrate ability to perform work of this division, including list of past projects similar in size, scope of work and complexity.

B. Interpret specifications in connection and conjunction with the drawings. If work is shown on drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, provide the work as though clearly set forth by both.

C. Provide materials and labor required to fully complete the work even though each item necessarily involved may not be specifically mentioned or shown. Provide such work and materials of the same grade or quality as the parts actually specified and shown.

D. Provide the quantity and quality levels indicated as a minimum. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Should there be a conflict between the plans and specifications, provide the greater quantity and better quality.

E. Install equipment and materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified by applicable UL Standards. Accomplish tightening by utilizing proper torquing tools, including torque screwdriver, beam-type torque wrench, and ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings. Ensure that sealing grommets expand to form watertight seal.

G. Upon completion of installation of equipment and electrical circuitry, energize circuitry and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.


MSA# 11172.00


H. Prior to energizing, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to assure requirements are fulfilled. Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for proper phase to phase connections, for electrical continuity and for short-circuits. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement.

I. Furnish the service of an experienced superintendent who is constantly in charge of the work, together with qualified journeymen, wiremen and specialists as required to properly install, connect, adjust, start, operate and test the work involved.

J. The superintendent's qualifications are subject to the review and acceptance by the owner's representative. Unless the owner's representative grants prior special permission, utilize the same electrical superintendent throughout the duration of the project.

1.12 CLEANING EQUIPMENT AND PREMISES

A. Clean parts of the apparatus and equipment. Clean exposed parts of cement, plaster and other materials. Remove oil and grease spots. Carefully wipe such surfaces and neatly scrape out corners and cracks.

B. Brush down exposed metal work with steel brushes to remove rust and other spots and leave them smooth and clean. Remove trapped elements during cleaning and flushing period, after which replace and adjust them.

C. During the progress of the work, clean up and leave the premises and portions of the building in which work has occurred in a clean and safe condition. Provide this cleaning on a daily basis.

1.13 PROGRAMMABLE AND SOFTWARE OPERATED EQUIPMENT

A. This subsection applies for systems that incorporate microprocessor based equipment and components. The systems themselves are specified elsewhere within Project Manual.

B. Provide detail design, accessories, equipment, devices, wiring, and programming as required to render systems fully operable. Program, check, and test each system using respective certified factory technician. After making tests and corrections, demonstrate systems to owner's representatives and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Provide complete design and installation drawings using information supplied by respective system supplier. Show layouts, conduit sizes, number and types of cables/conductors required to components, and detailed wiring connections required at each type of device. Provide these submittals in full compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Provide latest release of system software (furnished, installed and adapted). Provide upgrade(s) at final close-out of project, where system software originally installed has been upgraded since it was originally installed.

E. Provide custom programming described below for programmable systems, and for systems with room number identifications that are required for successful system operation. Wherever the term "programming" is used below, interpret it to mean "programming, configuration and identification".

1. Provide custom programming. Room names and numbers may change from architectural drawing names and numbers to actual operational room names and numbers; program using actual operational names and numbers. Provide interim and permanent programming and configuration work as required to render and maintain systems in full operation.

2. Provide programming related services (including machine language, English language, etc.) associated with rendering work fully operational, and neatly document in detail. Archive


MSA# 11172.00


intermediate and final programming work. Provide, replace and re-burn EPROM's and other integrated circuits as required to accommodate construction schedules and progress.

3. Provide custom and detailed programming to a level satisfactory to the Owner, including correct operational room numbers, and room names. Provide neatly typed orderly and logical submittal of proposed programming for review; prior to entering data; revise this submittal as much as required to satisfy the Owner. Determine project-specific requirements in field.

4. Provide programming for auxiliary control and interface functions. Provide custom programming for address labels. Provide detailed English language print statements for each system point/address, and for each respective auxiliary control sequence. Include in these print statements as many characters, sentences, lines, or paragraphs required to provide extremely detailed descriptions of system status including alarm or trouble condition, and status of related auxiliary controls. Provide level of detail acceptable to the Owner. Provide clear specific English language descriptions for remote annunciators.

F. Become familiar with existing characteristics, devices, equipment, cabling, configuration, components and programming of affected systems so that expansions, extensions, and retrofits are fully compatible with the existing conditions. Provide a complete fully operable systems accordingly.

G. Provide programming services for new work, for retrofit work, and for interfaces with new and existing systems. Provide schedule for cross-reference of new system labels to nomenclature used to enter them into existing systems.

H. Verify that the system is in proper working order prior to beginning work on an existing system. If not, bring defects to the attention of the owner’s representative. If no notification occurs, it is assumed that the system was in working order. Provide remedial work for subsequent system problems that occur, if any.

I. Account for, and indicate, differentiation for construction phasing and sub-phasing on submittals. Provide custom services and programming (including machine language, English language, etc.), testing, certification, and documentation after each phase (and sub-phase) of the project (for projects with multi-phase construction) as required to render systems fully operable after each construction phase. Change room names and numbers from architectural drawing names and numbers to actual operational room names and numbers, after each phase of construction. Provide these services also at the end of construction phases, including programming of final room names and numbers.

J. Provide interim, and permanent, programming and configuration work. Replace or re-burn EPROM's, and other integrated circuits, as required to accommodate multiple construction phases. Do not begin warrantee periods until final acceptance of work by the Owner after completion of the final construction phase.

1.14 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. General 1. Refer to Division1 Section pertaining to Project Closeout. 2. Final payment will not be made until receipt, review and acceptance, by the owner's

representative, of documentation defined hereafter. 3. Provide proper instruction of equipment and systems to the satisfaction of the owner's

representative 4. Furnish certificates of final inspection and approval prior to final acceptance of this branch of the

work. 5. Test electrical work and ensure that it rings entirely free from ground. 6. At the conclusion of the project when the system is in full operation, make a final balance of

circuits. Provide necessary labor, metering, etc., to accomplish this task. Provide written documentation.


MSA# 11172.00


7. Provide proper instruction of equipment and systems to the satisfaction of the owner's representative.

8. Make arrangements for a meeting at such time as will be convenient to entities concerned for the purpose of instructing the designated personnel on the correct operation and maintenance of each individual system furnished and each system installed. Video-record these instructions (mpg format or equivalent) with one DVD submitted for each O & M manual.

B. Maintenance Manuals 1. Provide description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance

curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

2. Provide manufacturer's printed operating procedures including start-up, break-in, normal operating instructions, regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions.

3. Provide maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Provide index, typed at front w/typed tabs for each section; Provide lists of materials and equipment furnished with name, address and telephone number of vendor.

5. Provide itemized list of each piece of mechanical equipment having electrical connections with circuit and panelboard locations. Also list with each item related expendable equipment required such as fuse size and type, pilot lights, Cat. no. of magnetic starter overload, etc.

6. Provide Operating Instruction Manuals and Service Manuals for equipment furnished. Provide a complete set of final approved shop drawings as submitted during construction.

7. Provide an itemized list of each fixture type with catalog number of replacement lamps and ballasts. Provide a complete spare parts schedule for components of equipment furnished; provide schedules that are not factory generic information, but accurate for the equipment actually provided.

8. Provide a complete set of detailed wiring diagram and schematic drawings for components of systems furnished; provide drawings that are not factory generic information, but are complete and accurate for the equipment actually provided.

C. Record Documents 1. Obtaining two complete sets of electrical prints and use them to provide progress record drawings

which are separate, clean, prints reserved for the purpose of showing a complete picture of the work as actually installed (including routing of conduit and cables). These drawings also serve as work progress report sheets. Make notations, neat and legible thereon daily as work proceeds. Make these drawings available for inspection at all times and keep them at the job at a location designated by the owner's representative.

2. Maintain the clean, undamaged set of prints of drawings as well as a set of submittal drawings and coordination drawings. Mark the sets to show the actual installation where the installation varies from the Documents as originally shown. Include locations of underground and concealed items if placed other than shown on the Documents. Do not permanently conceal construction until this required information is recorded. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Where shop drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.

3. Show changes in: size, type, capacity, etc., of material, device or piece of equipment, location of device or piece of equipment; location of outlet or source of building service systems; routing of piping, conduit, or other building services. Record location of concealed equipment, electrical service work, conduits and other piping/work by indication of measured dimensions to each line from readily identifiable and accessible walls or corners of building. Indicate approved substitutions, modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.

4. For electrical work installed below slabs, pavements, grade, etc., record location of nearby concealed water piping, sewers, wastes, vents, ducts, conduit and other piping, etc. by indication of measured dimensions to each line from readily identifiable and accessible walls or corners of


MSA# 11172.00


building and from adjacent electrical work. Show invert elevation of underground electrical work relative to work installed by other trades.

5. Affix near the titleblock on each drawing the Contractors' Company Names, signature of Contractors' Representative and current date.

6. Provide "as-built" record documentation for submittals and coordination drawings .

1.15 GUARANTEE

A. General 1. Provide a guarantee in written form stating that work, materials, equipment and parts are

warranted to be free of defect for a period of one year from the date of owner's final acceptance, and defects will be repaired, revised or replaced (owner’s option) at no cost to the owner if such defects occur within the guarantee period. Also state in written form that occurrences arising during the guarantee period will be attended to in a timely manner and will in no case exceed four (4) working days from date of notification by owner. Replace defective items to the satisfaction of the owner's representative and the Engineer.

1.16 NKU GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Below are the current NKU standards. These requirements shall be included within this project, where an inconsistency occurs between these standards and the specifications, these standards shall take precedence. General Electrical Requirements (Per KY State Electrical Inspectors Office): 1. It is the Electrical Contractor’s responsibility to contact the Kentucky State Electrical

Inspector 502-573-1797 for electrical inspections. As of Spring 2012, the inspector assigned to NKU is Brian Vandenburg. All electrical work subject to concealment such as above ceiling, in-wall and below ground shall be inspected prior to concealment. A Master electrician highly familiar with the project shall be present for all electrical inspections and to sign and receive copies of inspections.

2. All electrical wiring, devices and equipment shall be de-energized and will be properly

Locked Out/Tagged Out by the electrical contractor except for testing purposes in order to prevent usage by end user until passing a Final Electrical Inspection. Only the Electrical Inspector can make exceptions as necessary in writing.

3. All Electrical Contractors must have a valid active Kentucky Contractor’s license and

Master’s license to perform work. A minimum of one Kentucky Electrical licensed person shall be on the work site at all times during performance of electrical work. Larger jobs may require more than one licensed person.

4. Electrical Contractors shall supply a copy of all electrical inspections to the Construction

Manager/General Contractor within 2 days of each inspection. Electrical Contractor must also identify any non-electrical violations from that inspection to the Construction Manager/General Contractor within this same 2 day period.


MSA# 11172.00


5. All data/voice installations shall be completed and ready for inspection at the time of any above Ceiling, In Wall, In Ground and Electrical Final Inspections.

6. Certified lightning protection installers shall perform all work requiring or affecting

lightning protection. Certification/Recertification documentation of lightning protections systems shall be provided to the electrical inspector and owner at the time of the Electrical Final Inspection.

7. All installed electrical equipment/devices shall be listed individually and large electrical

equipment containing such listed devices shall be listed as an assembly by a certified testing laboratory.

8. No electrical equipment/devices/raceways/wiring shall be abandoned and left in place

unless approved by the owner for future use and then such shall be clearly tagged “For Future Use”.

9. All electrical circuits shall have a “wire” green grounding conductor pulled with them. No

raceway shall be accepted as a grounding conductor. This includes any work using existing circuits, in which case a wire-grounding conductor (if not available) will be installed back to the applicable electrical panel and terminated on the grounding bar. If no grounding bar exists, one will be installed.

10. GFCI protection shall be used by all trades to protect all 120-volt tools and equipment

during all phases of construction/renovation projects.

11. All recessed fluorescent lighting fixtures (troffers) shall be independently and directly supported from the structure above with a minimum of 2 support wires, and shall also be attached to the ceiling with 4 listed clips or screws.

12. Neither MC nor FMC raceways shall be installed in new walls being constructed. Only

EMT or Rigid will be accepted.

13. EMT and Rigid raceways shall be a minimum size of 3/4 inch.

14. All Safety Switches, Electrical Panels, Switchboards, Control Panels, Meter Sockets and Motor Control Centers shall have clearly visible warning labels on their front side warning of Arc Flash Hazards.

15. Any Electrical Panel ledgers affected by construction/renovation shall be replaced with

newly typed updated ledgers.

16. All wall/floor/ceiling penetrations shall be sealed with material equivalent to the surrounding surfaces or fire caulked with approved material for fire-rated areas.

17. Lighting fixtures shall not be connected in tandem (daisy chained) looping raceways

from fixture to fixture without the use of an external junction box. Electrical Material Requirements:


MSA# 11172.00


1. All electrical outlet and switch receptacle cover plates shall be stainless steel. Plastic is NOT acceptable.

2. All wiring shall be in ¾” or larger conduit, wireway, or raceway. Exposed raceway in finished areas shall be in 750 or larger wire mold.

3. All wiring shall be 98% conductivity copper. 4. All buss and buss duct conductors shall be 98% conductivity tin plated copper. 5. Aluminum or aluminum alloy connectors shall not be used on copper. 6. All wiring shall have THHN insulation minimum for installation in conduit. 7. Wire size, #12 AWG minimum for power circuits. 8. Conductors No. 12 and smaller shall be stranded copper. Conductors No. 8 and larger

shall be stranded. 9. Driven ground rods shall be 5/8" X 8'-0" copper weld. 10. All panel boards shall have both neutral and ground bus separate. All panel boards shall

use bolt-on breakers, only. 11. No plastic anchors are to be used to support electrical conduit and/or equipment. Use

metallic expansion type anchors. Do not use lead anchors. No explosive type install anchors shall be used.

12. Provide utility markers inside buildings, structures and facilities to identify exposed and concealed utilities, including electric.

13. All electrical equipment shall be UL listed for the application in which it is used. 14. Do not provide any devices which contain mercury unless there is not a mercury free

device on the market which will perform the same function. 15. Rigid conduit shall be standard weight, mild steel pipe. The conduit shall receive a

protective zinc coating both inside and outside by means of hot-dip galvanizing. Threads shall not have any coating which will reduce the conductivity of the joint. Couplings, bends, elbows, fittings, etc., shall be subject to the same requirements as for straight lengths. All conduit and fittings shall meet UL-8 and labeled accordingly. Rigid conduit shall be delivered with plastic protectors on the threads.

16. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be cold rolled tubing with a zinc coating on the outside and zinc coating or a protective enamel coating on the inside. All EMT fittings shall be the steel compression type and meet the same requirements as EMT. All entries into boxes, cabinets, etc., shall have insulated throat and compression ring type connectors conforming to UL-514. All EMT shall meet UL-797 and be labeled accordingly.

17. Surface Metal Raceway shall be two piece type, base mounted with snap-on cover as manufactured by wire mold or equal. Raceway installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions using adapters and fittings specifically designed and manufactured for the raceway used.

18. Flexible metallic conduit shall be constructed from flexibly or spirally wound electrogalvanized steel. Connections shall be by means of galvanized, malleable iron squeeze type fittings, or tomic twist-in type in sizes not exceeding 3/4" size.

19. Except in mechanical/electrical rooms and data/communication closets, all conduits shall be concealed unless otherwise specified and approved in writing by the NKU Project Manager. Conduits not concealed must be surface mounted metal raceway unless otherwise noted in the written exception. All conduit, wire mold and junction boxes (if not factory finished to match existing surface color), shall be painted to match existing surface except in mechanical/electrical rooms and data/communication closets.


MSA# 11172.00


20. Liquid tight flexible metallic conduit shall be light gray in color (if left unpainted). It shall have seal tight fittings and shall be equal to American Brass "Sealtite" Type UA.

21. Plastic conduit shall be high impact, high grade, self extinguishing polyvinyl chloride (PVC) schedule 40, 90 deg. C, U.L. rated. Material must have tensile strength of 7,000 psi at 73.4 deg. F., flexural strength of 11,000 psi and compressive strength of 8,000 psi. Conduit fitting and elbows shall have the same requirements as the conduit.

22. Fire stop all penetrations in accordance with the current edition of the National Electric Code.

23. During construction, cover all equipment subject to mechanical damage or contamination in any way.

24. All electrical panels shall be clearly labeled to identify the specific circuit, electrical outlet, and/or room each breaker location feeds. Also, label each device as to the panel from which they are fed. Install mechanical identification to properly identify every system and its components.

25. Corridor outlets shall be provided at a maximum 65 feet spacing for floor cleaning equipment, and each 120 volt receptacle shall be individually protected by a 20 amp breaker and GFI receptacle. In common areas with lounge/student seating and informal gathering space potential, more frequent outlets should be provided to facilitate the use of laptops and other portable electronic equipment.

26. All Fire Alarm, Security Alarm, Communications Equipment, Elevator Controllers (minimum of 1 elevator per building), Life Safety (including emergency lights, exit lights and combination emergency\exit lights), Handicap Access, Mechanical and Electrical Room lights and receptacles, and other similar systems shall be supplied by emergency generator distribution panels. Note: Due to battery maintenance cost, do not specify battery backup emergency/exit lighting unless the University specifically requests this strategy in writing.

27. A separate ground wire shall be run continuous to all equipment and receptacles. The University does not recognize or accept the conduit ground as an equipment ground. Any ground required must be a properly sized wire or wires (insulated or uninsulated) from the buildings single point ground bus and running through all distribution panel boards and connecting to the equipment to be grounded.

28. All buildings shall have ground rods and ground planes to meet the requirements of the NEC and also the grounding requirements of equipment within the building. All main ground points shall be meggered. If more than 10 OHMS, additional ground rods shall be driven. Additional ground rods shall not be less than 6 ft. apart. If more than 25 OHMS, special care shall be used to obtain less then 10 OHMS.

29. Main service entrance conduit shall have grounding locknuts on one end. Meter shall be grounded to main service disconnect by a bare copper ground wire, sized to NEC.

30. Main electrical service neutral shall be grounded at only one point (the main service disconnect) and the ground shall extend out to the main water service entrance point before the main water valve.

31. Provide power factor correction capacitors on induction motors of 10 H. P. or above. Provide a disconnect switch for each h capacitor bank.

32. All 3 phase electric motors, (5 Hp. and larger), shall be protected against single phasing. 33. Motor efficiency shall be as noted below:

a. 1-10 HP 91% minimum b. 10-15 HP 93% minimum


MSA# 11172.00


c. 15-99 HP 95% minimum d. 100-199 HP 96% minimum e. Greater than 200 HP Greater than 96%.

34. A specific motor efficiency should be selected for a particular project based on duty of motor. Efficiencies specified shall be according to US efficiency test protocol. Efficiencies shall be stamped on the nameplate of the motor.

35. Combination starter/disconnects must be equipped with a factory disconnect micro switch and this switch must be wired into control circuit to de-energize the starter before disconnect opens.

36. Transformers to be 90% efficient Powersmith or equivalent. 37. All new buildings must have lighting protection systems specified per the governing

building code and applicable NEC standards, including a properly documented grounding system. Lightning damage has been a problem in various campus buildings due to the high elevation of campus relative to the surrounding area.



MSA# 11172.00

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260002 - 1

SECTION 260002 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 EXPLOSIVES

A. Do not use explosives.

1.2 WELDING

A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel." Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

1.3 HEIGHT OF BOXES

A. Outlet mounting heights as indicated on the plans are approximate. Determine the exact mounting heights (and locations) of outlets in the field with relation to architectural detail and equipment being served. Coordinate outlet location with equipment, with furniture plans and with architectural elevation plans. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, contact the owner's representative for direction.

B. Prior to rough-in, coordinate final mounting heights of system outlet boxes in field with Owner's representative. Install boxes at heights as follows, to center of box, unless directed otherwise in field or otherwise noted on E-series drawings or architectural plans. Height of boxes dimensioned from ceiling apply to rooms having ceilings 9' or less; in rooms having higher ceilings, locate these as directed in the field.

Switches – Counters 44” (field verify & match counter recept. heights) Switches – Elsewhere 46” Occupancy Sensors – Wallbox Switches 46” Occupancy Sensors - Elsewhere As recommended by manufacturer Receptacles - Counters 44” (field verify) Receptacles - Elsewhere 18” Starters 46” Disconnects 46”

Circuit Breaker Panelboards 72” to top of panel unless special circumstances are indicated or otherwise apply

Wall Mounted Luminaires As noted on plans or as directed by Architect Control Stations 46” Fire Alarm Manual Pull Stations 46” to top of operating handle Fire Alarm Audio/Visual Annunciators 80” to bottom of outlet box Fire Alarm Door Holders 84” Other Outlets/Fixtures/Equipment As directed by Architect


MSA# 11172.00


1.4 ACCESS DOORS

A. Do not use access doors used unless special prior written permission is granted from the Owner's representative. Install pull boxes, junction boxes, etc. in areas which are accessible after completion of construction. Do not install pull boxes or junction boxes above gypsum board or similar inaccessible ceiling systems. Where there is no other recourse but to provide an access door/panel, and where approval of Owner’s representative has been obtained, provide required access doors/panels as required for a complete code-compliant electrical installation as defined below.

B. For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile and wood paneling provide 1 inch-wide-exposed perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors. For gypsum wallboard and plaster provide perforated flanges with wallboard bead. For full-bed plaster applications provide galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame.

C. Set frames accurately in position and securely attached to supports, with face panels plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. Provide locking devices that are flush screwdriver-operated cam locks.

D. Provide factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Provide continuously welded steel joints and seams, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Provide frames that are 16-gage steel, with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in unit masonry, pre-cast or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile and wood paneling. Provide Standard Flush Panel Doors that are 14-gage sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint. Provide Fire-Rated Units that are insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and self-closing mechanism.

E. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Bar-Co., Inc. 2. J.L. Industries. 3. Karp Associates, Inc. 4. Milcor Div. Inryco, Inc. 5. Nystrom, Inc.

1.5 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. Install work conduit, wiring, outlet box type work in finished areas concealed. Such work installed in unfinished areas may be exposed at the discretion of the Owner's representative.

B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work.

C. Provide systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible.

D. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and architectural/structural components.

E. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair and replacement of equipment components. Install equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other


MSA# 11172.00


installations. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials.

F. Verify dimensions by field measurements. Take measurements and be responsible for exact size and locations of openings required for the installation of work. Figured dimensions are reasonably accurate and should govern in setting out work. Where detailed method of installation is not indicated or where variations exist between described work and approved practice, follow direction of the owner's representative.

G. Provide branch subfeeder circuits as shown on the plans. The symbols used to indicate the purpose of which the various outlets are intended are identified in the Electric Legend. Where outlets are indicated by letters on plans, provide corresponding switches to control them.

H. Provide no wire size smaller than No. 12 for branch circuits unless otherwise noted on plans for control circuits. Provide larger sizes where required by prevailing codes or indicated on contract documents. Provide neutral conductor for all multi-pole feeders. Provide neutral conductor(s) for all multi-pole feeders and branch circuits unless this contractor determines in field that the affected load(s) will never have need for a neutral conductor and NEC does not mandate otherwise. Provide minimum 3/4” conduit size.

I. Do not install device wall outlets directly back to back, where located on opposite sides of common walls. Offset outlets by at least two feet for applications in fire rated walls and smoke rated walls and applications in acoustically treated walls. Offset outlets by at least one foot for other applications.

J. Provide wires continuous from outlet to outlet and properly splice joints. Provide insulation value for joints 100% in excess of that of the wire. Mechanical wire splicers may be used. Where friction and rubber tape is used, provide tape conforming to Federal Specifications HH-T-11 and HH-T-111. Where plastic electrical tape is used, provide Scotch #33, or approved equal. Provide minimum 8” tail for conductors terminating at each wired outlet at their outlet fittings to facilitate installment of devices, luminaires, etc.

K. If during construction it becomes apparent that some specific minor changes in layout will effect a neater job or better arrangement, make such alterations without additional compensation and without having to offer credit.. Obtain Engineer's review before making such changes.

L. Provide workmanship throughout that conforms to the standards of best practice. Marks, dents and finish scratches are prohibited on exposed materials, luminaires, fittings, etc. Clean inside of panels and equipment boxes.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Commence with coordination in a timely manner. Subsequent additional compensation, special allowances, additional construction time, etc. will not result from failure to coordinate (including providing related information to other trades for review) in a timely manner. Do not fabricate or install work before properly coordinating with other trades.

B. Plans are diagrammatic indicating design intent and indicating required size, points of termination and, in some cases, suggested routes of raceways, etc. However, it is not intended that drawings indicate fully coordinated conduit routing, necessary offsets, etc. The drawings are an outline to indicate the approximate location and arrangement of ductwork, piping, equipment, outlets, raceways, cables, etc. Install piping, conduit, raceways, cable assemblies, etc. as straight as possible and symmetrical (perpendicular to or parallel with) with architectural items. Work in and on the building installed diagonal to building members is prohibited.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Consult the plans of other trades before installing work so that work will not interfere with those.

D. Participate in coordination efforts and in preparation of coordination drawings prior to fabrication or installation of equipment, materials, etc. Coordinate actual clearances of installed equipment. Coordinate exact location of electrical outlets, lighting fixtures, conduits, raceways, equipment, cable assemblies, applicable devices, etc. well in advance of installation so there will be no interferences at installation between the various trades.

E. Ensure that work and working clearances in electrical rooms and similar spaces complies with NEC Article 110. This also applies to finalizing locations of disconnects, starters, contactors and other electrically operated equipment that may require testing or maintenance while energized.

F. Coordinate and correct conflicts in equipment and materials prior to installation. If a conflict cannot be resolved, refer the matter to the owner's representative for a final decision as to method and material.

1.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. General

1. Submit manufacturer's data on electrical identification materials and products. Submit detailed nameplate schedule indicating proposed nomenclature, colors, text heights, fastening methods, etc. If requested by Owner's representative, submit samples of each color, lettering style and other graphic representation required for each identification material and system.

2. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each application. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require finish, install identification after completion of painting. Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authorities for identification.

B. Cable and Conductor Identification

1. Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl-cloth self-adhesive conductor markers of wrap-around type, either pre-numbered plastic coated type, or write-on type with clear plastic self-adhesive cover flap; numbered to show circuit identification. Provide on conductors. Provide color coded insulation for conductors. provide color coded jackets for cables. Match color schemes with marking system used in submittals, contract documents, industry standards, etc. Apply cable/conductor identification on each cable in each box/enclosure/cabinet for cables that are not available with color coded insulation or jackets.

2. Use the following insulation color code for power system and voltage identification. This applies to both feeder and branch circuit wiring. Do not interchange colors. The use of Scotch color coding tapes for phase identification may be used on feeder cables only (#4 AWG and larger). 480Y/277V System Brown, Orange, Yellow & Gray (neut.) 208Y/120V System: Black, Red, Blue & White (neutral) Electronic Ground: Green with Yellow tracer (neutral) Equipment Grounding: Green

3. In addition to the above, provide labeling for electrical wiring work using 3M DCI No. 054007-11954 "SWD" Write-on Tape Dispenser Kit with factory provided special fast drying marker included with kit. Provide clear and legible markings.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Raceway Identification

1. Provide manufacturer's standard self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1-1/2" wide. Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations provide black lettering on orange base with minimum 1/2" high lettering. As a minimum, neatly install markers at each and every entry point to rooms, junction boxes, pull boxes, equipment connections, etc. Do not install these markers on exposed raceways in finished areas that will be occupied.

2. Where electrical conduit is exposed in spaces with exposed mechanical piping which is identified by color-coded method, provide painted color-coded identification on electrical conduit, boxes, etc. in color schemes as indicated on the chart at the end of this section unless otherwise directed in field.

D. Emergency Systems

1. Provide permanent identification for boxes, enclosures, etc. that are associated with emergency system work. Paint and identify emergency system pull boxes, junction boxes, and other access/pull points (boxes and covers) in accordance with NEC. Provide emergency system equipment panelboards, cabinets, enclosures, etc. with red mechanically fastened engraved nameplates with the first line of text to read "EMERGENCY CIRCUITS" and the remaining lines to include the necessary descriptive text.

E. Fire Alarm Systems

1. Provide permanent identification for boxes, enclosures, etc. that are associated with fire alarm system work. Paint and identify fire alarm system pull boxes, junction boxes, and other access/pull points (boxes and covers) in accordance with NEC/NFPA. Provide fire alarm system control panel equipment cabinets, enclosures, etc. with red mechanically fastened engraved nameplates with the first line of text to read "FIRE ALARM" and the remaining lines to include the necessary descriptive text.

F. Underground Cable Marking

1. Provide manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6" wide X 4 mils thick. Provide tape with printing which most accurately indicates type of service of buried cable. During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground electrical, signal or communication cable, install continuous underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6" to 8" below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16", install a single line marker. Install line marker for every buried cable, regardless of whether direct-buried or protected in conduit.

G. Underground Cable Identification

1. Provide correct identification on conductors and cables installed in manholes, grade mounted junction boxes and handholes. Provide tag in each location with not less than two tags per cable, one near each duct through which the cable enters and leaves the hole. Attach tags immediately after cable is installed. Provide tags of non-corroding metal and plainly marked (engraved). Provide tags that are circular in shape, 2 inches in diameter (minimum) and of not less than 0.020" thick copper or brass. Steel lettering dies, 1/4" minimum height of letters and figures, or the equivalent engraving process, may be used to mark the tags. Mark the tags to contain an abbreviation of the name of the system/facility served by the cable. Field verify identification nomenclature prior to fabrication of tags. Attach tags in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The identification described below is shown for schematic purposes only.


MSA# 11172.00


“A Loop” A, B or C Primary Electrical Loop as applicable “15” 15 kV "6" 600V "1" Under 100V Class of System "P" Power "T" Telephone "C" Control "EM" Emergency "F" Fire Alarm "S" Signal "A,B,C,N" Phases and Neutral

H. Operational Identifications and Warnings

1. Provide pre-manufactured operational and warning signage if indicated on drawings and where required by NEC or local authority having jurisdiction.

I. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs

1. Provide signs at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with stainless steel fasteners, except use permanent adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate substrate.

2. All equipment & system identification nomenclature shown on drawings and listed herein is shown for general design and installation reference only. Field verify the actual nameplate, etc. nomenclature prior to fabrication. Prepare record documents accordingly. Unless determined otherwise in field, provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and submittals.

3. Unless directed otherwise, provide black face and white core plies (letter color) for normal power applications and red face and white core plies (letter color) for emergency power applications, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is mandatory because of substrate. Provide 1/2" minimum text height for equipment identification and 1/4" minimum text height for nameplates with narrative descriptions/instructions. Provide 1/16" thickness for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8" length; provide 1/8" thickness for larger units. As a minimum provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work where such work exists on the project.

a. Starters, disconnects, contactors and control stations. b. Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures. c. Switch wallplates (via engraving) for switches that control remote lights or loads. d. Other similar equipment designated by owner's representative or engineer in field.

1.8 CUTTING, PATCHING AND SEALING

A. General

1. Comply with requirements of Division 07 “Thermal and Moisture Protection”. 2. Provide cutting and patching for the admission of work. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching for

electrical equipment and materials as required to:

a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. b. Remove and replace defective Work. c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.


MSA# 11172.00


e. Install equipment and materials in existing buildings.

3. Upon written instructions from the owner's representative, uncover and restore work to provide for observation of concealed work by owner's representative or by inspection authority having jurisdiction.

4. During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations (structure, finishes, furnishings, etc.). Where applicable, provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to system components and components of other trades.

5. Patch surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials as applicable and using experienced Installers. Refer to Division 1 for definition of experienced "Installer" or determine qualifications as directed in field by owner's representative.

6. Patch through fire rated walls and enclosures in a manner that does not diminish the rating of that wall or enclosure. Provide materials used for patching to meet or exceed the smoke and fire rating of the respective surface being patched.

7. Neatly cut and drill openings in walls and floors required for the installation. Secure approval of Owner's Representative before cutting and drilling in work that is already in place. Neatly patch openings cut.

8. Hold cutting and patching to a minimum by arranging with other trades for sleeves and openings before construction is started.

9. Provide factory-assembled watertight wall and floor seals, of types and sizes required; suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe, and tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.

10. Fabricate pipe sleeves from Schedule 40 rigid, heavy wall, full weight galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. Use sleeves which are two standard sizes larger than conduit passing through respective sleeve.

11. Provide sleeve seals for piping which penetrates foundation walls below grade, exterior walls and roofs, caulk between sleeve and pipe with non-toxic, UL-classified caulking material to ensure watertight seal. Elsewhere modular provide mechanical type seals, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

12. Provide standard Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves two sizes larger than pipes passing through floors, bearing walls and masonry construction. Cut sleeves through walls flush with both faces. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above floor top elevation. Provide a pipe curb assembly equal to Pate Co. for piped penetrating roof. Furnish and set forms required in masonry walls and foundations to accommodate pipes.

13. Seal all new floor, ceiling, wall, slab, etc. penetrations to match or exceed existing assembly fire ratings. Provide sleeve seals for all sleeves, provide sleeves for all penetrations. All penetrations of fire-rated or smoke-rated wall, floors ceilings, etc. shall be sealed immediately after raceways are installed. All new electrically related work shall be supported directly from building structural members. New electrically related work shall not be supported from ductwork, ductwork hanger, ceiling supports, existing conduit support, etc. All conduits (and cable assemblies, where applicable) shall be routed parallel to building structural members. Any and all noncomplying work installed by the electrical contractor shall be removed and reinstalled to the satisfaction of the owner’s representative and the engineer, at the expense of the electrical contractor.

B. Grout

1. Provide non-shrink, nonmetallic grout, premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications.


MSA# 11172.00


C. General Joint Sealer Application

1. Provide joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application.

2. Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions within the limits permitted by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do not apply joint sealers to wet substrates.

3. Clean affected surfaces, joints, etc. immediately before applying joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer.

4. Apply sealant primer to substrates as recommended by manufacturer. Protect adjacent areas from spillage and migration of sealant, using masking tape. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing seal.

5. Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

6. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint sealers. 7. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic-emulsion joint sealants. 8. Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to

form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

9. Provide colors for exposed seals that are selected by the Owner's representative from manufacturer's standard colors.

D. Elastomeric Joint Sealers

1. Comply with requirements of Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”. 2. Provide one-part, nonacid-curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade

NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

3. Provide one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and nonporous joint substrates; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates; and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes. Provide silicone sealant equal to the following:

a. "Dow Corning 790", Dow Corning Corp. b. "Gesil N SCS 2600", General Electric Co. c. "Dow Corning 786", Dow Corning Corp.

E. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealants

1. Provide one-part, non-sag, mildew-resistant, paintable complying with ASTM C 834 recommended for exposed applications of interior and protected exterior locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. "Chem-Calk 600", Bostik Construction Products Div. b. "AC-20", Pecora Corp. c. "Sonolac", Sonneborn Building Products Div. d. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834", Tremco, Inc.

F. General Fire Stopping Material Application


MSA# 11172.00


1. Fire stopping requirements/locations are not indicated on electrical drawings. Review architectural and other drawings to determine fire/smoke rated walls and floors and rating requirements of same. Provide required fire stopping work associated with electrically related penetrations. Provide fire stop pillows, putty or sealant, as applicable, with minimum UL classification for 3 hour fire and cold side temperature ratings.

2. Clean affected surfaces, joints, etc. immediately before applying fire stopping to comply with recommendations of manufacturer.

3. Comply with fire stop material manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

4. Install fire stop materials, including forming, packing, and other accessory materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and walls, to provide fire-stops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency.

5. Caulk between sleeves and pipes with rockwool and caulk around sleeves with sealing compound that meets applicable fire ratings required.

6. Provide patch equal to rockwool, firestop, caulk or approved "rated" patch. 7. Where a smoke or fire-resistance classification is indicated on architectural drawings or otherwise,

provide the following as applicable.

a. Fire stop pillows, putty or sealant with minimum UL classification for 3 hour fire and cold side temperature ratings for electrically related penetrations.

b. Access door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in the UL "Building Materials Directory" for rating required; Provide UL Label on each fire-rated access door.

G. Wall and Floor Opening Fire Stopping for Open Cable Tray and J-Hook Paths

1. Provide Fire Stop Pillows equal to Nelson FSP #AA500 PLW or #AA501 PLW as applicable, UL Classified for 3 hour fire and cold side temperature ratings, quickly removable and reusable, non-toxic and requiring no special tools.

H. Wall/Floor Opening Fire Stopping for Work Likely to Need Ongoing Moves/Adds/Changes

1. Provide Fire Stop Putty equal to Nelson FSP #AA400 series, UL Classified for 3 hour fire and cold side temperature ratings, reusable when penetrating items are removed or added and requiring no special tools, mixing, curing or drying time.

I. Fire Stopping for Other Wall and Floor Openings

1. Provide Fire Stop Sealant equal to Nelson #AA491 series, UL Classified for 3 hour fire and cold side temperature ratings, non-sagging, permanently flexible, non-toxic, non-shrinking, water/air/smoke-tight and easily repenetrated. Provide firestopping materials for the following locations:

a. For Floor Openings b. For Wall Openings c. Mineral Felt d. For Insulated Pipes e. For Fill Areas

2. Apply sealant primer to substrates as recommended by manufacturer. Protect adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.


MSA# 11172.00


3. Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or that are not approved by sealant manufacturer.



MSA# 11172.00

EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DEMOLITION 260501 - 1

SECTION 260501 - EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Where the term “demolition” is used herein, interpret it to mean “demolition” or “selective demolition” as applicable.

B. Perform a detailed pre-bid walk-through field inspection to review the existing structures and premises, to determine existing conditions, and to determine scope of required electrically related demolition work. Include applicable accessible ceiling cavity areas in this inspection.

C. It is not the intent of these this section, or of drawings, that existing conditions be accurately shown. Existing electrical work is shown to a very limited extent on drawings and is shown for general planning reference only. Locations and information were derived from cursory visual observations or from portions of documents that were prepared for previously installed work (not from record drawings or "as-builts").

D. Do not reuse removed electrical materials unless specifically indicated in project manual or on drawings. Existing wiring systems may be utilized only to the extent indicated in project manual, or on drawings, or as directed by Owner's representative in field.

E. Hold routing of new raceways in existing buildings as tightly as possible to the structure above. Obtain approval of owner's representative prior to installation.

1.2 AFFECT ON ADJACENT OCCUPIED AREAS

A. Maintain existing electrical service and feeders to occupied areas and operational facilities, unless otherwise indicated, or when authorized otherwise in writing by owner’s representative. Provide temporary service during interruptions to existing facilities. Schedule momentary outages when necessary for replacing existing wiring systems with new wiring systems. When that "cutting-over" has been successfully accomplished, remove related wiring that has been abandoned.

B. Locate, identify, and protect electrical services passing through demolition areas and serving other areas outside the demolition limits. Maintain services to areas outside demolition limits. When services must be interrupted, install temporary services for affected areas.

C. It is recognized that there may be some conduit systems rendered inactive by demolition, causing disconnection of "downstream" outlets, etc. Investigate these types of conditions (for all systems) prior to demolition. Provide necessary corrective electrical work prior to demolition to ensure that such "downstream" devices remain permanently active throughout demolition, during new construction, and after project completion.

D. Carefully coordinate work and system shutdowns in advance with owner's representative, and with affected trades so that normal building activities and other construction trades are minimally affected. Perform electrically related demolition and new construction work, which will affect an occupied area (including those which are located outside the immediate area of project work) at special times as directed by owner's representative in field.


MSA# 11172.00


E. Determine which existing branch circuits must remain active. Reconnect (or maintain in operation as applicable) and schedule them. Completely re-type panelboard directories for panelboards affected by this project using accurate information for information. Where applicable ensure that reconnected shared neutrals are properly balanced with the correct phase conductors. Where applicable provide correct color-coding for insulation of reconnected conductors in a manner compliant with NEC.

F. Provide work in a manner that ensures existing systems and components remain fully operational in occupied spaces during occupied periods.

G. Provide and maintain temporary partitions and dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent finished areas and other system components. Protect adjacent installations during cutting and patching operations. Remove protection and barriers after demolition operations are complete.

1.3 GENERAL DEMOLITION

A. Provide electrical demolition work as required to accommodate project demolition and as required to accommodate new construction.

B. Disconnect and remove work to be abandoned, and as required to accommodate work of other trades, in areas affected by this project unless specifically noted otherwise on plans or determined otherwise during pre-demolition survey.

C. Remove accessible abandoned, inactive and obsolete raceway systems. Remove abandoned, inactive and obsolete wiring and controls. Remove abandoned, inactive and obsolete equipment, luminaires and devices. Abandoned raceways embedded in floors, walls, and ceilings may remain if such materials do not interfere with new installations. Remove abandoned electrical materials above accessible ceilings.

D. Remove related abandoned unused raceway back to the nearest respective "upstream" junction box that remains active even if outside of the confines of the project area.

E. Remove abandoned unused wiring back to its source even if sources are outside the confines of the project area.

F. Extend raceway and wiring as required to accommodate new or relocated electrical work.

G. Perform cutting and patching required for demolition.

H. Coordinate work carefully with owner prior to beginning electrical demolition work.

I. Maintain (or reconnect if applicable) remaining wiring.

J. Remove and relocate wiring, devices, conduit, etc. that conflict with construction related work of other trades as necessary to accommodate new work of respective trade.

K. Provide electrical disconnections, and reconnections where applicable, for equipment to be removed (or relocated) by other trades.

L. Existing branch circuit and systems conduit, not conflicting with new construction and not conflicting with ceiling cavity requirements, may be re-used at the discretion of the electrical installer. Do not exceed NEC required conduit fill and do not install wiring fed from different sources in common conduit (see Section 26 05 33).


MSA# 11172.00


1.4 PRE-EXISTING CODE VIOLATIONS

A. Inspect existing electrical work in areas accessed under this project and bring into compliance with current NEC. This applies only to the extent that such work is uncovered in the immediate project areas affected by demolition or new construction, and only to the limited extent that it applies to pre-existing general installation methods such as missing J.B. plate, open J.B. knockout, minor conduit re-anchoring and minor exposed wiring/connections.

B. If more extensive code or safety violations are discovered, immediately bring them to the attention (detailed in writing) of the Owner's representative along with proposed cost for corrections and with impact (if any) on the construction schedule.

1.5 REMOVED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. If required to accommodate construction related activities remove, store in protected location on site, and reinstall conflicting equipment, luminaires, or devices that are to remain or to be relocated.

B. Refer to owner’s representative for disposal instructions for abandoned electrical materials removed during demolition and thereafter. Neatly store electrical materials that the Owner elects to retain at the site as designated by the owner's representative. Legally dispose of materials that the Owner elects not to retain.

C. Disconnect and remove electrical materials designated for salvage (removal and reuse, or for turning over to Owner) undamaged. Disconnect and remove wiring and "whips" from equipment terminal points.

D. The following applies to electrical materials that will remain or be reused under this project.

1. Protect during demolition and construction. 2. Clean and re-lamp luminaires immediately prior to occupancy of the area. 3. Clean and service (if service is required) equipment immediately prior to occupancy of the area.

E. Clean components to be reused inside and out, and reinstall where indicated on drawings. Modify and extend related existing wiring in conduit accordingly.

F. Carefully transport salvaged electrical materials to a protected on-site storage location as directed in field and neatly store them grouped by system type.

G. Affected equipment/materials are as follows.

1. Luminaires. 2. Wiring devices. 3. Door operator components. 4. Distribution equipment. 5. Fire alarm system devices & equipment.

1.6 INTERIM LIFE SAFETY WORK

A. Provide interim electrical fire alarm and life safety protection in demolition and construction areas as indicated below. Contact engineer if further definition is needed.


MSA# 11172.00


B. "Bag" existing smoke detectors within project area, and in adjacent areas that are exposed to construction-related dust or airborne particulates, during working periods. Remove "bags" after each shift.

C. Provide temporary emergency egress lighting along egress routes affected by this project. Remove this work when no longer needed.

D. Provide temporary emergency exit lighting along egress routes affected by this project. Remove this work when no longer needed.

E. Provide temporary pull station if required to accommodate an egress route. Remove this work when no longer needed.

F. Provide temporary audio/visual fire alarm annunciation devices along all affected egress routes. Remove this work when no longer needed.

G. Provide 100% temporary smoke detector coverage in areas affected by this project (maximum coverage of 900 square feet per detector with maximum spacing of 30 feet apart and 15 feet from walls). "Bag" these smoke detectors during working periods and remove "bags" after each shift. Remove this work when no longer needed.

1.7 INTERIM AIR QUALITY WORK

A. Prevent airborne dust and particulate matter from entering occupied spaces, and from entering air intakes to operating HVAC systems.

B. Make required openings through walls and floors immediately prior to installation of work. Properly and permanently seal openings immediately after installation of work. Provide temporary seals for applications where penetrations are made but can not be permanently sealed within four hours.

C. Meet with HVAC installer to determine special IAQ requirements that apply to this project. Cooperate fully with HVAC IAQ requirements that affect electrical work and are affected by electrical work.



MSA# 11172.00

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. See Division 26 Section 26 00 02 for color coding required for identification of phase, neutral, and ground conductors.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. This Section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control, and related systems rated 600 volts and less.

B. Install wire in raceway unless specifically permitted otherwise hereafter in this section, under other Division 26 sections, or on electrical drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Wire and Cable:

a. American Insulated Wire Corp. b. Brintec Corp. c. Cablec. d. Carol Cable Co. Inc. e. General Cable. f. Senator Wire and Cable Co. g. Southwire Company.

2. Connectors for Wires and Cable Conductors:

a. AMP b. 3M Company c. O-Z/Gedney Co. d. Square D Company.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature, conditions, and location where installed.


MSA# 11172.00


2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Provide copper conductor material for wires and cables unless specifically indicated otherwise on single-line diagram on drawings.

B. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper unless specifically indicated otherwise on single-line diagram on drawings.

C. In the event that aluminum wiring is permitted for the project, provide the following supplemental requirements and work for electrical equipment connections regardless of who furnishes the equipment.

1. Review equipment submittals, installation documents and nameplates to determine if there are any warranty or UL limitations regarding copper versus aluminum wiring connections at equipment.

2. If there are any limitations, provide local non-fused disconnect at or near equipment (external to the equipment) and terminate aluminum conductors to the line side terminals of the disconnect switch. Provide copper conductors from load side terminals of the disconnect switch to the respective equipment factory disconnect or terminals as applicable.

3. Coordinate all related work with all affected installers. 4. Provide UL-Listed AA-8000 series compact-stranded conductors with XLPE insulation. Provide

appropriately UL-Listed connectors as recommended by conductor manufacturer.

D. Provide minimum #12 AWG conductor size.

E. Provide stranded conductors unless indicated otherwise.

F. Provide the following minimum wire sizes based on distances from panel to first device of a 15 or 20 ampere general lighting or receptacle branch circuit. In addition to upsizing conductors as required for voltage drop, provide minimum #10 AWG conductors to the last device for branch circuits more than 150 feet in length. Distance AWG Wire Sizes Up to 60 feet #12 61 to 90 feet #10 91 to 150 feet #8 151 to 240 feet #6

G. Provide the following minimum AWG conductor sizes for general branch circuiting, based on using copper conductors. Where applicable increase as required to accommodate voltage drop and to accommodate special conditions. Do not derate any grounded (neutral) conductors.

60 Deg. C Rating 75 Deg. C Rating Equipment Grounding

Source Breaker/Fuse AWG Wire Size AWG Wire Size AWG Wire Size 15 Ampere #12 #12 #12 20 Ampere #12 #12 #12 25 Ampere #10 #10 #10 30 Ampere #10 #10 #10 35 Ampere # 8 # 8 #10 40 Ampere # 8 # 8 #10 45 Ampere # 6 # 8 #10 50 Ampere # 6 # 6 #10 60 Ampere # 4 # 6 #10 70 Ampere # 4 # 4 #8 80 Ampere # 3 # 4 #8 90 Ampere # 2 # 2 #8


MSA# 11172.00


100 Ampere # 1 # 2 #8

H. Provide conductor insulation rated at 600VAC and 90 degrees C. Provide THHN/THWN insulation for conductors size 500 kcmil (MCM) and larger, and for conductors # 8 AWG and smaller. Provide THW or THHN/THWN insulation for other sizes as appropriate for the locations where installed.

I. Provide XHHW-2 insulation for wiring below grade and for wiring subject to moisture conditions.

J. Provide XHHW insulation for isolated power systems.

K. Provide dedicated parity sized neutral conductor for each branch circuit phase conductor fed from 15 ampere and 20 ampere branch circuit breakers.

L. Provide neutral conductor for all multi-pole feeders. Provide neutral conductor(s) for all multi-pole feeders and branch circuits unless this contractor determines in field that the affected load(s) will never have need for a neutral conductor and NEC does not mandate otherwise.

2.4 TYPE AC/MC CABLES

A. Provide Type AC/MC Cables that are minimum 90 degrees C rated, with components and fittings listed for grounding, and compliant with the following.

1. UL Std.4 and UL Std. 83. 2. ANSI E119 and E814. 3. NEC Articles 250 and 333.

B. Provide cable formed from continuous length of spirally wound, interlocked zinc-coated or galvanized (inside & outside) strip steel. Provide cables with full parity sized green insulated equipment ground conductor.

C. Provide compatible steel fittings with integral red plastic insulated throat bushings, compliant with NEC 350-5.

D. Type AC/MC cable may be utilized only if NEC approved and if approved by local authority having jurisdiction and if included in the limited applications defined below.

1. Provide for final connections to luminaires that are installed in accessible tile ceiling systems (limited to 6' maximum in length and limited to “whips” from building electrical system junction boxes down to luminaires). Do not install Type AC/MC cable from fixture to fixture unless a special properly listed and labeled UL approved system is specifically indicated.

2. Provide for new 15 and 20 ampere branch circuit drops to outlets in existing hollow partitions for remodeling work. This applies only under all of the following circumstances and conditions.

a. Basis of design includes cutting and patching for such applications. Type MC/AC cable may be used only where Owner or Architect specifically directs installer case-by-case not to slot walls (limited to 10 feet maximum cable length from overhead conduit system junction box to respective wall outlet box).

b. Provide only where concealed (install wiring for exposed applications in raceway). c. Route cables perpendicular and parallel to the building architectural lines, surfaces, and

structural members, keeping offsets to a minimum and following surface contours where possible. Maintain a uniform elevation for cable runs wherever possible. Support and anchor cables at maximum 4 foot intervals and within 12" of box or outlet in a manner that


MSA# 11172.00


prevents sagging. Install cables in a manner that prevents overheating. Fasten cables directly to the structure using factory clamps and clips specifically designed for the respective cable (Caddy or equal).

d. Provide only where installed for normal utility circuits. Install wiring for emergency system circuits in steel conduit, no exceptions.

2.5 PORTABLE CORD (IF REQUIRED)

A. Provide Type S Portable Cord. Provide with full parity sized insulated equipment ground conductor.

B. Only use Portable Cord for flexible pendant leads to outlets, to equipment where indicated, and only where permitted by NEC, by local authority having jurisdiction, and by engineer.

2.6 CONNECTORS FOR CONDUCTORS

A. Provide UL-listed factory-fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Use connectors with temperature ratings equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used.

2.7 CABLE JACKETS

A. Provide color-coded factory-applied heat and moisture resistant PVC compound with external heat and light stabilized nylon jacket, tightly applied.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide grounded (“neutral”) conductor in all lighting control device (switch, dimmer, occupancy sensor, etc.) wall outlet boxes, even if not immediately used.

B. Refer to respective Division 26 Section and to drawings.

C. Connect wires #6 AWG and larger to panels and apparatus by means of approved lugs or connectors large enough to enclose all strands of the conductors. Provide solderless type connectors.

D. Do not pull wire until raceways are complete, plastering is complete, and raceways are free of moisture. Install joints and splices only at NEC approved panels, accessible junction boxes, or accessible outlet boxes. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary to prevent damage to conductors. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable. Conceal work in finished spaces.

E. Neatly dress work. Install work parallel and perpendicular to surfaces and exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. Keep conductor splices to minimum. Install splice and tap connectors that possess equivalent, or better, mechanical strength and insulation rating than conductors being spliced. Use splice and tap connectors that are compatible with conductor material. Install wires


MSA# 11172.00


continuous from outlet to outlet. Provide insulation value of joints at least 100 percent in excess of wire. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures, and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than #10 AWG cabled in individual circuits. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at the terminal.

F. Provide factory splice kits (U.L. approved for submersion in water and direct burial) for wire splicing in outdoor grade, or slab on grade, junction boxes.



MSA# 11172.00

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 260521 - 1

SECTION 260521 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Electrical connections include connections used for providing electrical power, control and monitoring to equipment, luminaires and devices. Refer to sections of other Divisions and to drawings of other trades for specific for electrical characteristics of equipment specified under respective divisions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products equal to those manufactured by one of the following as applicable.

1. Adalet-PLM Div, Scott and Fetzer Co. 2. Allen-Stevens Conduit Fittings Corp. 3. AMP Incorporated. 4. Appleton Electric Co. 5. Arrow-Hart Div, Crouse-Hinds Co. 6. Atlas Technologies, Inc. 7. Bishop Div, General Signal Corp. 8. Burndy Corporation. 9. Eagle Electric Mfg Co., Inc. 10. Electroline Mfg Co. 11. Gardner Bender, Inc. 12. General Electric Co. 13. Gould, Inc. 14. Harvey Hubbell Inc. 15. Ideal Industries, Inc. 16. ILSCO. 17. Pyle National Co. 18. Reliable Electric Co. 19. Square D Company. 20. Thomas and Betts Corp.

2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. Provide complete assembly of materials for each type of required electrical connection, including but not limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire-nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations of types indicated.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/cables (conductors) for electrical connections that match, including sizes and ratings, of wires/cables that are supplying electrical power. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 90 degrees C.


MSA# 11172.00

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 260521 - 2

C. Provide electrical connectors and terminals that mate and match, including sizes and ratings, with equipment terminals, and that are recommended by equipment manufacturer for intended applications.

D. Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing and boots, wirenuts, cable ties, etc. as recommended for use by accessories manufacturers for intended applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment. Cover splices with electrical insulating material to achieve insulation at least 100 percent in excess of electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Do not "ring" copper conductors while skinning wire.

B. There may be cases where circuit or feeder conductor sizes are too large or too small to fit into the lugs normally supplied with the end-use equipment, due to circumstances such as increasing conductor sizes to offset voltage drop, unusual breaker frame sizes, etc. In such cases provide appropriate factory lug kits for affected equipment if recommended by manufacturer; elsewhere provide insulated butt-splices with tails sized to fit respective lugs.

C. Ground metal frames of portable and stationary direct-wired electrically operated equipment by connecting frames to the circuit equipment grounding conductor and to grounded metal raceway. Provide necessary electrical connections between the specified equipment and junction boxes, disconnect switches, and starters near equipment with flexible metallic conduit and matched connectors. Do not expose flexible conduit in finished areas.

D. Connect electrical equipment furnished under this branch of work, other branches of work and by the owner. Review documents of other trades to identify electrically operated/controlled equipment that is furnished or installed by the owner, or by other trades. Provide power connections and local disconnects for same. Provide control wiring (including relays, starters, etc.), as required to render equipment fully operable unless indicated otherwise on drawings or in project manual. Determine exact requirements in field from respective equipment installer.



MSA# 11172.00

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. This section includes grounding and bonding requirements for electrical and telecommunications systems, circuits, and equipment.

B. Provide the following minimum requirements for grounding.

1. NFPA: - Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code” (NEC).

2. UL - Comply with UL 467, “Grounding and Bonding Equipment.” 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607, “Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Electrical Ground Bar: A copper ground busbar, typically installed in each electrical room, and bonded to service entrance ground.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grounding and bonding product manufacturers of the installer's choice unless noted otherwise.

B. Except as otherwise indicated, provide copper electrical grounding and bonding systems and materials with assembly of materials including but not limited to cables/wires, connectors, solderless lug terminals, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, and additional accessories needed for a complete installation. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products that comply with NEC, UL, and IEEE requirements, and with established industry standards for those applications indicated. Utilize compatible metallic materials throughout system to eliminate galvanic action.

C. Provide steel grounding electrodes with copper welded exterior, and 3/4" diameter by 10 feet length. Provide sheet copper plate electrodes that are 20-gage by 36" by 36", with cable attachments (minimum quantity of 2), sized for cables as necessary to fulfill project grounding requirements. Provide copper ground plates where ground rods cannot be used. Provide connections to ground electrodes at a point not less than 1 foot below grade level, and not less than 2 feet away from footings and foundations. Weld grounding conductors to underground grounding electrodes where mechanical connections can not, or should not, be utilized.

D. Grounding And Bonding Busbars

1. Provide Electrical Main Grounding Busbar with the following characteristics.


MSA# 11172.00


a. Electro-tin plated ¼” thick copper bar b. Insulated stand-offs c. Hole pattern type “CC” d. 4 inches high x 24 inches wide e. Standard of quality shall be Erico Electrical Products EGBA14424CC. f. Additional approved manufacturers: Chatsworth, Storm Copper Components.

2. Provide Electrical Room Grounding Busbar with the following characteristics.

a. Electro-tin plated ¼” thick copper bar b. Insulated stand-offs c. Hole pattern type “CC” d. 4 inches high x 18 inches wide e. Standard of quality shall be Erico Electrical Products EGBA14418CC. f. Additional approved manufacturers: Chatsworth, Storm Copper Components.

3. Provide Telecommunications Grounding Busbar with the following characteristics.

a. Electro-tin plated ¼” thick copper bar b. Insulated stand-offs c. 8 pairs of 5/16” holes and 3 pair of 7/16” holes d. 4 inches high x 15.5 inches wide e. Standard of quality shall be Erico Electrical Products TGB-A16L08PT. f. Additional approved manufacturers: Chatsworth, Storm Copper Components.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment grounding conductors with grounding lug, bus, or bushing. Route grounding connections and conductors to ground and protective devices in shortest and straightest paths as possible to minimize transient voltage rises.

B. Install clamp-on connectors on clean metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity.

C. Provide corrosion-resistant finish to field-connections, to places where factory applied protective coatings have been damaged, and where subject to corrosive action.

D. Route ground conductors used for bonding in protective conduit sleeves. Provide both ends of these conduit sleeves with ground bushings, and bond ground bushings to enclosures and ground terminations at both ends using jumpers. Size ground jumper conductors the same as the respective ground conductor that is being protected within the respective conduit.

E. Provide corrosion-resistant finish to buried metallic grounding and bonding products.

F. Terminate ground electrode conductors with two-hole compression lugs. Terminate bonding jumper conductors with one-hole compression lugs.

G. Install braided type bonding jumpers with ground clamps on valved water piping where such piping penetrates exterior walls and fire walls. Install water pipe connector fittings so that they make contact


MSA# 11172.00


with the water pipe for a minimum distance of 1-1/2 inches (measured along the axis), and have a minimum contact surface area of 3 square inches.

H. Provide and test a complete earthing (earth ground) system for the entire electrical and telecommunications infrastructure.

I. Equalize (bond together) ground potentials associated with the electrical distribution system, separately derived systems, steel structural systems, and water services per NEC and as applicable.

J. Service Entrance Grounding Requirements

1. Provide a parity sized insulated grounded conductor (neutral) for each set of service entrance feeder phase/line conductors, terminated and bonded to service equipment (i.e. to each and every service disconnect where applicable). This applies whether or not downstream loads require a neutral conductor. Install these neutral conductors unspliced and unbroken.

2. Ground and bond service entrance neutrals to room ground busbar, to effectively grounded structural steel member, to effectively grounded metallic water pipe, and to grounding electrode system as required per National Electrical Code and as applicable.

3. Provide an enclosed single ground busbar at electrical service entrance locations, bonded to the enclosure, and bonded to service ground with full parity sized green insulated ground conductor (sized same as service ground conductor). Provide quantity and sizes of lugs on busbars as required to accommodate bonding to service grounding electrode system, service neutrals, structural steel, effectively grounded metallic water pipe, and other grounding requirements set forth in project manual and in NEC. Provide UL listed lugs for use with copper and aluminum conductors.

4. Connect grounding electrode conductors to 1-inch diameter, or greater, metallic cold water pipe at service entrance using a suitably sized ground clamp. Provide connections to flanged piping at street side of flange. Ground electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to grounding electrodes. Install braided type bonding jumpers with code-sized ground clamps on water meter piping to electrically bypass water meters and water service entrance valves.

5. Contact AHJ electrical inspector in advance of installing service grounding work. Determine locally approved methods that must be used for re-bar grounding that the AHJ considers compliant with National Electrical Code Article 250.52.

6. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance-to-ground is over 3 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 3 ohms, or less, by driving additional ground rods or installing additional ground plates or chemically treating adjacent soil, or combinations thereof. Then retest to demonstrate compliance.

K. Separately Derived System Grounding Requirements (This applies only for projects with step-down/step-up transformers)

1. Ground and bond each separately-derived system neutral to room ground busbar, to effectively grounded structural steel member, to effectively grounded metallic water pipe, and to separate grounding electrode system as required per National Electrical Code and as applicable.

2. Provide an enclosed single ground busbar at derived electrical system locations, bonded to the enclosure, and bonded to derived system ground with full parity sized green insulated ground conductor (sized same as derived system ground conductor). Provide quantity and sizes of lugs on these busbars as required to accommodate bonding to derived system ground and other grounding requirements set forth in project manual and in NEC. Provide UL listed lugs for use with copper and aluminum conductors.

L. Grounding Requirements For Additions To Existing Structures (This applies only for additions to existing structures)


MSA# 11172.00


1. Equalize (bond together) ground potentials associated with the electrical distribution system,

separately derived systems, and steel structural related systems of new additions and existing structures. Bond together new structural steel (including re-bars) for full electrical continuity and for full potential equalization. Include the bonding of new structural steel to existing structural steel that is rendered accessible under this project.

2. For building additions/expansions with steel structural related systems, bond every new perimeter column to adjacent existing columns of existing structures. Provide an earth ground at every other new column in the north/south direction, and every other new column in the east/west direction. Provide a minimum surface contact area of 8 square inches, bolted or welded securely to clean areas of the steel, for structural steel bonding plates. Bond new structural steel (including re-bars) to the service entrance ground for full electrical continuity and for full potential equalization.

3. Provide a grounding electrode for each new steel column that extends down to grade level for vertical building additions/expansions that have steel structural systems. Attach ground terminals to such structural steel columns at the lowest available point.

M. Telecommunications Grounding Requirements

1. At minimum, bond together telecommunications racks, cabinets, tray, ladder rack, and risers in each telecommunications equipment room (ER) and telecommunications wiring closet/room (TR) to the busbar in the respective room. Bond each TR busbar to the ER busbar. Bond the ER busbar to the to the grounding electrode system and the electrical grounding system at the main building ground point. Bond additional points where indicated in the drawings and where required by NEC. Provide a common ground with the building’s grounding electrode system for the Telecommunications Infrastructure components.

2. Bond the Main telecommunication service entrances to the electrical service equipment ground using the most direct route possible to minimize conductor length.

3. Provide copper grounding conductor from main building grounding electrode system at service entrance to ground bus at the Telecommunications Entrance Facility.

4. Provide copper bus bars on plywood backboard in each ER and TR. 5. Provide copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from the electric service ground busbar to each

ER and TR ground busbar. 6. Provide #6 AWG bonding jumper (12 inches maximum) with appropriate lugs at each cable tray

joint, or provide manufactured braided copper grounding jumper equal to B-Line #CAM-GJ, T&B #BD12, OZ/Gedney type "FB", or Mono-Systems equal.

7. Provide #6 AWG insulated (green insulation) grounding conductor with appropriate lugs from side of cable trays to each ER and TR ground busbar. Drill and tap side of cable trays (for appropriate size bolt, 1/4 inch by 20 min.), and provide bolted connections making sure that bolts do not extend into wire management part of trays.

8. Provide Isolation for grounding busbars from the structure support with a 2 inch minimum separation using manufacturer’s recommended insulating stand-offs and hardware.



MSA# 11172.00

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Supervise the installation of and provide additional members, wood, and metal required to support permanent and temporary electrical apparatus. Provide required supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals (factory or field installed as applicable).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide manufacturer’s materials of the installer's choice as applicable.

B. Provide supporting devices that comply with manufacturer’s standard materials, design, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation.

C. Provide cable supports with galvanized steel body, and with insulating wedging plug for non-armored type electrical cables in risers.

D. Provide U-channel strut systems for supporting electrical equipment that are 12-gage hot-dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes required for complete installation for respective applications. Provide strut with 9/16 inch diameter holes and 8" O.C. top surfaces, with standard factory finish and with necessary fittings that mate and match with U-channel.

E. Provide the following as applicable and as required to install work in a proper manner.

1. Clevis hangers for supporting rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; with 1/2 inch diameter hole for round steel rod.

2. Riser clamps for supporting rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; with 2 bolts and nuts, and 4 inch ears.

3. Galvanized steel rod reducing couplings, 1/2 inch x 5/8 inch. 4. Galvanized steel clamps; 1/2 inch rod size. 5. Galvanized steel clamps, 1-1/4 inch x 3/16 inch stock; 3/8 inch cross bolt; 2 inch flange width. 6. One-hole conduit straps for supporting 3/4 inch rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel. 7. Two-hole conduit straps for supporting 3/4 inch rigid metal conduit, galvanized steel; 3/4 inch

strap width; and 2-1/8 inches between center of screw holes. 8. Hexagon nuts for 1/2 inch rod size; galvanized steel. 9. Galvanized steel rods; 1/2 inch diameter. 10. Offset conduit clamps for supporting rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel. 11. Lead expansion anchors, 1/2 inch. 12. Springhead galvanized steel toggle bolts; 3/16 inch x 4 inch.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Support electrical work directly from building structural members. Do not support electrical work from ductwork, ductwork hangers, ceiling supports, existing conduit supports, etc.

B. Do not suspend overhead hangers, or support any other overhead electrical work, from roof decks.

C. Suspend and support overhead electrical from roof trusses and joists/joist girders only at panel points, at top cord only, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Route conduits, raceways and cables (where applicable) parallel and perpendicular to building structural members.

E. Provide hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support work properly from building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with spacings indicated and in compliance with NEC requirements.

F. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code" for field welding.

G. Provide stem lengths for pendant luminaires as directed by the owner's representative.

H. Submit methods and materials proposed for hanging exposed work to the owner's representative for review before installation. Provide fasteners that are zinc-coated with type, grade, and class as required for a neat installation.

I. Plywood Equipment Boards

1. Provide Standard Grade light-framing-size lumber of any species for general wood supports and anchorage, which are Number 3 Common or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 boards complying with SPIB rules. Provide lumber that is preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent. Provide marine grade products where subject to moisture conditions. Provide Ackerman-Johnson (or equal) expansion screw anchors. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. Provide fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view, or will receive finish materials. Provide tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads

2. Unless directed otherwise in field, plywood equipment boards shall be 8 feet high by 3/4 inches deep by width shown on drawings (as dimensioned or as scaled) or width as required to accommodate equipment.

3. Provide plywood equipment boards at locations shown on drawings. Where not shown on drawings, and in addition to those shown on drawings where applicable, provide plywood equipment boards for surface mounted panelboards and systems "head-end" equipment for applications where located in unfinished rooms. Elsewhere only provide them where specifically shown on drawings.


MSA# 11172.00


4. Provide lumber that is preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent. Provide APA C-D PLUGGED INT plywood equipment boards with exterior glue. Provide marine grade plywood where subject to moisture conditions.

5. Provide Ackerman-Johnson (or equal) expansion screw anchors. Unless otherwise noted, paint boards with two coats of good grade weatherproof flat gray non-conductive fire-retardant paint on all sides and edges (prior to mounting). Install boards plumbed in a true vertical position. Provide nominal 1/2" rustproof spacers between back of plywood and wall for applications located on below-grade building foundation walls.

6. Cut, fit, and place plywood equipment boards accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. Provide fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Provide tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. Maintain at least 4 inches between bottom of plywood equipment boards and finished floor surfaces.



MSA# 11172.00

RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 – RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 270528 “Pathways for Communications” for pathway products used for Communications and Security work, including multiservice wall, floor and ceiling boxes, conduit, cable tray, discrete cable supports and other pathway and rough-in related requirements.

B. Section 271123 “Cable Management and Ladder Rack” for cable support and management products use within Communications Rooms and other designated locations.


A. Refer to Section 26 00 02 for raceway related identification requirements.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Install wire in raceway/conduit (sized per NEC, minimum 3/4“) unless specifically permitted otherwise elsewhere in Division 26 sections, or on drawings.

B. Install wiring for different power voltages in raceway systems separate from each other (i.e. 24V separate from 208Y/120V, separate from 480Y/277V, etc.).

C. Install wiring, with the exception of voice and data, for the various electrical systems in raceway systems, which are separate from each other (i.e. fire alarm separate from voice/data separate from etc.).

D. Install normal system power wiring, emergency system wiring and standby system wiring all in separate raceways from each other.

F. Do not install conduits within slabs unless specifically noted on drawings, or unless part of an underfloor duct raceway system.

G. Do not install conduits beneath slabs on grade, except if where specifically indicated otherwise on drawings, or unless special case by case permission is obtained from owner’s representative in the field.

H. Provide steel conduit and steel fittings for indoor above-slab applications, as specified in this section.

I. Provide conduit fittings with insulated throats, or plastic bushings for conduits 2" and larger where insulated throats are not readily available.

J. Provide pullboxes for conduit runs exceeding 100 feet in length, or having in excess of 270 degrees of offset.

K. Provide maximum of 40 percent fill for raceways, or a threshold of less if required by NEC.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide products manufactured by Steel City, T&B, Regal, Efcor, Wheatland, Allied, LTV, Carlon, Cantex or Walker/Wiremold as applicable.

2.2 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Provide galvanized or zinc coated steel EMT compliant with FS WW-C-563, ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

B. Provide galvanized or zinc coated steel compression fittings, concrete-tight. Do not use die-cast fittings.

C. Provide EMT for above-grade conduit, except where indicated otherwise herein, under other Division 26 sections, or on drawings.

2.3 STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Provide rigid steel, heavy wall, full weight, zinc-coated, threaded type (galvanized after cutting/threading) conduit conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. Provide zinc coating fused to inside and outside walls of conduit.

B. Provide galvanized or zinc coated steel threaded fittings.

C. Provide for the following applications.

1. Conduit installed embedded in concrete, or masonry. 2. Conduits (grounded) that turn up from below grade or below slab, excluding the 90 degree fittings

that connect to horizontal conduits below grade or slab. 3. Other applications as indicated in project manual or on drawings, as required by NEC, or as

otherwise required for special physical protection (i.e. nearby vehicular/equipment traffic, site maintenance equipment, etc.).

2.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Provide flexible metal conduit compliant with FS WW-C-566 and UL 1, and formed from continuous length of spirally wound, interlocked zinc-coated or galvanized (inside & outside) strip steel. Provide conduit fittings for use with flexible steel conduit of threadless hinged clamp type, with insulated throats. Provide Straight Terminal Connectors consisting of one piece body, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit, and male threaded end with locknut. Do not use 45 degree or 90 degree Terminal Angle Connectors for flexible or water-tight flexible metal conduit in locations that will not be fully accessible after completion of construction. Provide full size green insulated ground wire for all applications, regardless of length. Provide flexible metal conduit for the following conditions as applicable.

1. Provide for final 72 inches from outlet/junction boxes to recessed luminaires that are located in accessible ceiling systems. Optionally, Type AC/MC cable may be used for "fixture whips" (refer to Section 26 05 19).


MSA# 11172.00


2. Provide for final 24-72 inches of connection to indoor equipment that is subject to movement or vibration. Leave sufficient slack in flexible conduit to permit movement from vibration without adversely affecting conduits and connections.

3. Provide for conduits within movable partitions. 4. Provide in cells of precast concrete panels.

2.5 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Provide flexible metal conduit compliant with FS WW-C-566 and UL 1, and formed from continuous length of spirally wound, interlocked zinc-coated or galvanized (inside & outside) strip steel. Provide conduit fittings for use with flexible steel conduit of threadless hinged clamp type, with insulated throats. Provide Straight Terminal Connectors consisting of one piece body, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit, and male threaded end with locknut. Do not use 45 degree or 90 degree Terminal Angle Connectors for flexible or water-tight flexible metal conduit in locations that will not be fully accessible after completion of construction. Provide full size green insulated ground wire for all applications, regardless of length. Provide flexible metal conduit for the conditions as applicable.

B. Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit constructed of single strip that is flexible, continuous, interlocked, double-wrapped steel, and galvanized (inside and outside). Provide liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Provide smooth-wall type jackets (not a corrugated look) for finished area furniture whip (and similar) applications. Provide Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings compliant with FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 3, Style G. Provide cadmium plated, malleable iron fittings with compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings, with insulated throat. Provide Straight Terminal Connectors that are one piece body, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit, and male threaded end with locknut. Provide Terminal Angle Connectors that are 45 degree or 90 degree two-piece body construction with removable upper section, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit, and male threaded end provided with locknut. Do not use 45 degree or 90 degree Terminal Angle Connectors for flexible or water-tight flexible metal conduit in locations that will not be fully accessible after completion of construction. Provide full size green insulated ground wire for all applications, regardless of length. Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for the following conditions as applicable.

1. Provide for connections from wall outlet boxes/raceways to systems furniture. 2. Provide for final 24-72 inches of connection to outdoor equipment (including within outdoor

enclosures) that is subject to movement or vibration and/or that may be subject to corrosion. Leave sufficient slack in flexible conduit to permit movement from vibration without adversely affecting conduits and connections.

3. Provide for final 24-72 inches of connection to indoor equipment that is subject to movement or vibration, where subject to corrosion. Leave sufficient slack in flexible conduit to permit movement from vibration without adversely affecting conduits and connections.

4. Provide for conduits within movable partitions, where subject to moisture or corrosive conditions. 5. Provide in cells of precast concrete panels, where subject to moisture or corrosive conditions.

2.6 WIREWAYS

A. Provide electrical wireways of types, grades, sizes, and number of channels for each type of applicable service. Provide complete assembly of raceway including, but not limited to, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold down straps, end caps, and other components and accessories as required for complete system.

B. Provide lay-in wireways with hinged covers in accordance with UL 870, and with components UL-listed, including lengths, connectors, and fittings. Provide units that allow fastening of hinged cover closed


MSA# 11172.00


without use of parts other than standard lengths, fittings and connectors. Provide units capable of sealing cover in closed position with sealing wire. Provide wireways with knockouts.

C. Provide wireway connectors suitable for "lay-in" conductors, with connector covers permanently attached so that removal is not necessary to utilize the lay-in feature. Provide NEMA 3R units where used outdoors or in areas subject to moisture.

D. Protect sheet metal parts with rust inhibiting coating and baked enamel finish. Provide plate-finished hardware to prevent corrosion. Protect screws installed toward inside of wireway, with spring nuts to prevent wire insulation damage.

2.7 CONNECTORS, FITTINGS AND CONDUIT BODIES

A. Provide conduit fittings with insulated throats, or plastic bushings for conduits 2" and larger where insulated throats may not be not readily available.

B. Provide locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure with sharp edge for digging into metal, and ridged outside circumference for proper fastening. Provide screw type grounding terminal for metal bushings of standard or insulated type.

C. Provide miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece unions, split couplings, and plugs that are specifically designed for their particular application.

D. Provide expansion fittings and appropriate couplings in raceways wherever structural expansion joints are crossed, wherever deflection is expected, and as otherwise required to accommodate similar movement. Provide expansion fittings with ground bonding jumpers that are long enough to accommodate respective expansions and movement.

E. Provide galvanized cast-metal (steel) conduit bodies of types, shapes and sizes as required to fulfill job requirements and NEC requirements. Construct conduit bodies with threaded-conduit-entrance ends, with removable covers, either cast or of galvanized steel, and with corrosion-resistant screws.

2.8 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS

A. Provide electrical plastic conduits/ducts for applications below grade and below slab, and for special conditions if so noted on drawings or in other Division 26 sections.

B. Provide electrical plastic conduit equal to Carlon Plus 40. Provide heavy wall electrical plastic conduit that is Schedule 40, 90 degrees C rated, constructed of polyvinyl chloride, in conformity with NEMA TC-2, in conformity with NEC Article 354, and is UL listed and labeled for direct burial, concrete encasement, and above ground use.

C. Provide conduit/duct accessories of types, sizes, and materials, complying with manufacturer's published product information, which mate and match conduit and tubing.

D. Provide Duct Spacers ("chairs") equal to Carlon #S288*L series for base spacers, and #S289*L series for intermediate spacers.

E. Provide horizontal elbows for service entrance conduits that are maximum 45 degree. Provide minimum 24 inch radius. Provide larger minimum radius where indicated on drawings, or if directed in field.


MSA# 11172.00


Provide multiple units as necessary to obtain required offset (i.e. provide two 45 degree elbows to obtain a 90 degree offset where needed). Provide 90 degree maximum elbows.

F. Provide couplers, adapters, "O" rings, sealing, and other accessory components as required for a complete installation. Provide miscellaneous fittings that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their particular application.

2.9 SURFACE MOUNT RACEWAYS

A. Plugstrips And Two-Piece Surface Raceway Systems

1. Provide "plugstrips" and surface metal raceways equal to Wiremold #V3000 series for single service applications (i.e. power or communications) and #V4000 series for dual-service applications (i.e. power and communications). Provide Ivory “ScuffCoat” finish. Provide factory fittings, dividers, clips, and other accessories as required for a neatly installed complete and operable installation.

2. Where “plugstrips” are shown on drawings, provide with receptacles as specified under Section 26 27 26 and with duplex receptacles on 18” centers, starting 9” +/- from the end unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings.

B. Wide Two-Piece Surface Raceway Systems

1. Provide surface metal raceways that are nominal 4-3/4 inches wide by 1-3/4 inches deep, equal to Wiremold #V3000 series (2-piece) for single service applications (i.e. power or communications) and #V4000 series for dual-service applications (i.e. power and communications). Provide Ivory “ScuffCoat” finish. Provide factory fittings, dividers, clips, and other accessories as required for a neatly installed complete and operable installation.

C. Two-Piece Surface Raceway Systems For Communications Technology Voice And Data Outlets

1. Provide surface metal raceways, nominal 1-29/32 inches wide by 7/8 inches deep, equal to Wiremold #V2400 series (2-piece) for Communications Technology Voice and Data Outlets. Provide Ivory “ScuffCoat” finish. Provide factory fittings, dividers, clips, and other accessories as required for a neatly installed complete and operable installation.

2. Provide 2-3/4 inches deep surface mounted boxes for 2-gang Communications Technology Voice and Data Outlets, equal to Wiremold #V5744-2. Provide Ivory “ScuffCoat” finish.

D. Two-Piece Surface Raceway Systems For Communications Technology Local Input (Li) And Local Output (Lo) Plates

1. Provide surface metal raceways, nominal 1-29/32 inches wide by 7/8 inches deep, equal to Wiremold #V2400 series (2-piece) for Communications Technology Local Input (LI) and Local Output (LO) plates. Provide Ivory “ScuffCoat” finish. Provide factory fittings, dividers, clips, and other accessories as required for a neatly installed complete and operable installation.

2. Provide 3-1/2 inches deep surface mounted boxes for 3-gang Communications Technology Local Input (LI) and Local Output (LO) plates, equal to Wiremold #SPLV2444-3. Provide Ivory “ScuffCoat” finish.

E. Narrow Two-Piece Surface Raceway Systems


MSA# 11172.00


1. Provide surface metal raceways, nominal 1-1/4 inches wide by 7/8 inches deep, equal to Wiremold #V2100 series, 2-piece. Provide Ivory “ScuffCoat” finish. Provide factory fittings, dividers, clips, and other accessories as required for a neatly installed complete and operable installation.

F. One-Piece Surface Raceway Systems

1. Provide surface metal raceways equal to Wiremold #V200 series (nominal 1/2 inch wide by 11/32 inch deep), Wiremold #V500 series (nominal 3/4 inch wide by 17/32 inch deep), or Wiremold #V700 series (nominal 3/4 inch wide by 21/32 inch deep), as necessary to accommodate NEC required raceway wire fill allowances. Provide Ivory “ScuffCoat” finish. Provide factory fittings, dividers, clips, and other accessories as required for a neatly installed complete and operable installation.

2.10 SERVICE POLES (“TELE-POWER POLES”)

A. Provide Tele-Power poles that are multiple-service aluminum modular type, equal to Wiremold Vista series, small frame with rounded end panels. Provide number of compartments as required for each application. Determine specific configurations and applications in field. Provide finish color as directed by Architect or Owner in field. Provide factory fittings and accessories as required for a complete bonded installation. Provide a total of four duplex receptacles as specified under Section 26 27 26, or, where applicable, provide furniture feeds for powered systems furniture connections(coordinate requirements with furniture vendor).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. General

1. Provide conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for applications as needed to render electrical work fully operational.

2. Mechanically fasten together metal conduits, enclosures, and raceways to form continuous electrically conducting equipment grounding path. Connect to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide electrical continuity and firm mechanical assembly. Conduit shall be continuous between outlets to make a complete installation and to effect a continuous ground.

3. Avoid using dissimilar metals throughout the systems to eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals will be unavoidably in contact, coat surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling.

4. Provide miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece unions, split couplings, and plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their particular application.

5. Use rough-in dimensions of electrically operated equipment furnished by equipment installer. Install conduit and boxes for connection to equipment only after reviewing respective equipment and clearance dimensions, and after coordinating with other trades.

6. Properly support and anchor raceways for their entire length using structural materials. Do not span any space unsupported.

7. Do not use electrical "handee" boxes with surface raceway installations. 8. Level and square raceway runs, and install at proper elevations and heights. Wherever possible,

install horizontal raceway runs above liquid and steam piping. 9. Cut conduits straight, properly ream, and cut threads for heavy wall conduit deep and clean. Field-

bend conduits with benders designed for purpose so as not to distort, nor vary, internal diameters. 10. Fasten conduit terminations in sheet metal enclosures with two locknuts. Install locknuts inside

and outside enclosure.


MSA# 11172.00


11. Do not cross shafts, or ventilating duct openings, with raceways. Keep raceways a minimum distance of 12" from parallel runs of flues, hot water pipes or other sources of heat. Support risers at each floor level with suitable hangers.

12. Do not use running threads at conduit joints and terminations - use 3-piece union, or split coupling.

13. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/wires within raceways. Clean inside of conduit before wiring is pulled. Cap and plug conduit ends with standard accessories as soon as conduit has been permanently installed.

14. Provide heavy nylon pull-cord/drag-line (200 pound minimum strength) in conduits installed without conductors.

15. Provide joints made tight with water-tight couplings matching conduit. Install corners with long radius sweep bends, except conduit sizes 1 inch and over where standard elbows may be used.

16. Cut ends of conduits square and ream. Bring joints to a shoulder. Provide suitable supports and fasteners for conduit. Install exposed conduit parallel to walls, and plumb on walls. Secure to walls and ceiling with pipe straps at intervals not exceeding six feet. Support conduit by approved straps, fasteners and hangers. Provide hangers suspended from rods. Do not use perforated strap.

17. Provide fasteners that are lead expansion shields in block and concrete, toggle bolts in hollow walls, machine screws on metal surfaces, and wood screws on wood construction.

18. Provide sleeves in member for conduits passing through structural members. 19. Where moisture conditions are encountered, drill a hole at the lowest point in the conduit run so

that drainage will not interfere with conditions below. 20. Where conduit is capped at wall for future additions, do not extend more than threads-length past

wall (maximum of 3/4 inch past wall for EMT). 21. Install exposed conduits and extensions from concealed conduit systems neatly, parallel with, or at

right angles to, walls of building. 22. Install exposed conduit work so there is no interference with ceiling inserts, lights, or ventilation

ducts or outlets. 23. Where conduits for outlets must be installed on waterproof walls exposed, set anchors for

supporting conduit on waterproof wall in waterproof cement. 24. Requirements for exposed conduits also apply to conduits installed in space above hung ceilings,

and in crawl spaces. 25. Provide a 4 inch reinforced casing of concrete (3000-PSI minimum) around conduits that are

installed in cinders or cinder concrete, to protect them. 26. Install raceways concealed, except in electrical and mechanical type rooms where raceways may

be exposed. 27. Where raceways must be exposed in finished areas install them in a manner that minimizes

detrimental effects on room aesthetics. Review all proposed installation methods and routing for each application with the Architect and Owner prior to installation. Install so raceways are as out of site as reasonably possible. For instance, where applicable and if so directed by the Architect or the Owner, make drops near corners, window casings, door casings, etc. Likewise if a receptacle needs to be installed at the center of a wall, install the raceway down the wall in a corner of the room then transition and run horizontally to the outlet location if so directed by the Architect or the Owner. Utilize compression fittings and one-hole straps for EMT applications in these areas.

28. Provide surface metal raceway systems where mandatory at existing walls where it is impossible to fish or cut/patch, or where specifically indicated on drawings, or where specifically directed by Architect.

3.2 CONCEALED CONDUITS BELOW SLAB OR GRADE

A. Installation

1. Provide underground ducts/conduits at minimum of 24" below grade, securely mounted on chairs when banked, with base in newly disturbed earth. Properly align ducts on chairs before


MSA# 11172.00


backfilling. Provide heavy nylon pull-cord/drag-line (200 pound minimum strength) in empty conduits.

2. Provide grounded steel rigid metal conduit (full weight, heavy wall) for conduits that turn up from below grade or below slab, excluding the 90 degree fittings that connect to horizontal conduits below grade or slab.

3. Make changes in direction of raceway run with proper fittings that match raceway manufacturer. 4. Properly support and anchor raceways for their entire length with factory bases and intermediate

spacers. Provide spacers at each coupling location, at each termination location, and at maximum five foot intervals between. Do not span any space unsupported. Provide end bells with rounded pulling surfaces at manholes, pull boxes and other end points of underground raceways.

5. Apply corrosion inhibiting compound before couplings are assembled for applications where metallic raceways are installed underground, in floors below grade, or outside. Draw up couplings and conduits sufficiently tight to ensure water-tightness. Provide steel rigid metallic conduit for applications where metallic conduits are installed below grade or slab.

6. Extend underground conduits that are capped at wall for future additions five feet beyond building.

7. Arrange excavation for exterior conduits so that:

a. The lines are straight and true; b. Grades required for drainage are maintained; c. The tops of buried raceways are not less than 24" below finished grade.

8. Seal PVC joints with Carlon Cement. Make solvent cemented joints in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer.

9. Install work in accordance with NEC and in compliance with local utility practices. 10. Provide full parity size green insulated ground wire in PVC runs, except for those used exclusively

for optical fiber cables. 11. Do not field bend raceway sections, unless required radius exceeds that available from

manufacturer. Where field bends can not be avoided, use factory kit to perform the bends and follow factory instructions.

B. Encasement

1. Refer to Drawing details and Section 26 05 08 for further information related to encasement for underground conduits.



MSA# 11172.00

BOXES AND FITTINGS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260534 - 1

SECTION 260534 – BOXES AND FITTINGS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Refer to Section 26 05 33 for further requirements regarding fittings, bushings, and similar accessories.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Types of electrical boxes and fittings specified in this section include the following:

1. Outlet boxes. 2. Junction boxes. 3. Pull boxes. 4. Bushings. 5. Locknuts. 6. Knockout closures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INDOOR BOXES

A. Provide galvanized-coated flat rolled code-gage non-gangable sheet-steel outlet/junction/pull boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as indicated, suitable for installation at respective locations.

B. Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes and with cable and conduit-size knockout openings in bottom and sides where applicable. Provide boxes with threaded screw holes, with corrosion-resistant cover and grounding screws for fastening surface and device type box covers, and for equipment type grounding.

C. Provide minimum size of 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep for outlet boxes and junction boxes. Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including box supports, mounting ears and brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps, and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations. Provide with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers.

D. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior outlet boxes equal to products offered by one the following.

1. Adalet. 2. Appleton Electric. 3. Bell Electric. 4. Bowers. 5. Eagle Electric Mfg Co., Inc. 6. Midland-Ross Corp. 7. OZ/Gedney. 8. Pass and Seymour, Inc.


MSA# 11172.00


9. RACO. 10. Hubbell. 11. Thomas & Betts Co. 12. Thepitt.

2.2 FIRE WALLS, FIRE BARRIERS, SMOKE BARRIER WALLS AND FIRE PARTITIONS

A. Steel outlet boxes that do not exceed 16 square inches in area may be used in fire walls, fire barriers, smoke barrier walls, and fire partitions only if the total area of such openings does not exceed 100 square inches for any 100 square feet of wall area.

B. Provide a minimum of 24 inches of separation between outlet boxes on opposite sides of a common wall.

C. Provide outlet boxes, equipment back-boxes, etc. in fire walls, fire barriers, smoke barrier walls, and fire partitions that are of the type tested for use in fire-resistance-rated assemblies. Install in accordance with the tested assembly, and with the instructions included in the listing.

2.3 DAMP AND WET LOCATION OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS

A. Provide corrosion-resistant weathertight/raintight outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit, suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion-resistant plugs and fasteners. Provide weathertight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture, i.e. in damp or wet locations.

B. Provide weatherproof covers that mount on a single gang horizontal or vertical (depending on application) junction box to ensure weather protection for a standard outlet. Provide lockable covers that can mount on indoor or outdoor junction boxes and that include a weatherproof cover/base assembly with gasket, two universal inserts, and mounting hardware. Provide weatherproof cover that provides flexibility in installation. Provide covers that meet or exceed UL requirements for wet locations while in use, that meet requirements of NEC Article 406.9, and are NEMA 3R rated while in use. Provide weatherproof cover constructed of UV stabilized high impact polycarbonate material. Provide clear cover for the part that encloses the cord set, to allow visual inspection. Provide cover that meets agency requirements for cold impact at negative 60 degrees Fahrenheit (negative 51 degrees C). Provide covers with useable inside depth to accommodate plug heads with cover closed. Provide assemblies for outdoor applications, and for indoor applications that serve permanent or extended-use cord & plug load connected equipment.

C. Provide minimal profile assemblies that are rated NEMA 3R While In Use and that employ recessed box and cover design, equal to Thomas & Betts “Red Dot” series. Provide trim color(s) as directed by Architect.

D. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide raintight outlet boxes and covers equal to products offered by one of the following.

1. Appleton Electric. 2. Arrow-Hart. 3. Bell Electric. 4. Bryant 5. Eagle Electric Mfg Co., Inc. 6. Gould, Inc.


MSA# 11172.00


7. Hubbell 8. Leviton 9. OZ/Gedney. 10. Pass and Seymour, Inc. 11. Tay-Mac 12. Thomas & Betts 13. Intermatic

2.4 BUSHINGS, KNOCKOUT CLOSURES AND LOCKNUTS

A. Provide corrosion-resistant box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes, to suit respective installation requirements and applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Do not use access doors unless special prior written permission is granted from the owner' representative. Install pull boxes, junction boxes, etc. in areas which are accessible after construction. Do not install pull boxes or junction boxes above gypsum board, plaster or similar ceiling systems, nor above ductwork or equipment that renders them inaccessible.

B. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.

C. Install electrical boxes in those locations that ensure accessibility to enclosed electrical wiring.

D. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 6" (150 mm) separation in general, not less than 16” separation for acoustically rated walls and not less than 24" separation for the following applications: fire walls, fire barriers, smoke barrier walls, and fire partitions. Where outlet boxes are shown back-to-back on common walls, offset accordingly when installed.

E. Where outlet boxes occur in block, cinder or concrete block, facing tile or other material where such materials form the finished wall surface, neatly cut the opening for the box so that standard size (not "midway" or "jumbo") cover plates will cover all parts of the opening.

F. Do not install aluminum products in concrete.

G. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness. Do not use round boxes.

H. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates and structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry as applicable. Provide box supports that are independent of conduit. Refer to Section 26 05 29 for further supporting requirements. Protect boxes from construction debris and damage subsequent to installation of boxes.

I. Consider the outlet, junction, and pull box locations indicated on drawings approximate. Study the general construction with relation to spaces and equipment surrounding each outlet, and neatly install outlets accordingly.


MSA# 11172.00


J. Record junction and pull boxes on record drawings. Permanently mark and label (using methods approved by owner's representative) junction/pullboxes as to which types of electrical services are within. Refer to Section 26 00 02 for further related requirements.



MSA# 11172.00

MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 260580 - 1

SECTION 260580 - MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Provide all necessary electrically related work as required to render all mechanical equipment (including plumbing, heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment) fully operational and fully compliant with NEC. This includes, prior to ordering materials or commencing with rough-in, reviewing equipment submittal data and coordinating with installing contractors to ensure the correct size, rating and quantity of conductors are provided.

B. In the event that aluminum wiring is permitted for the project, provide the following supplemental work for electrical equipment connections regardless of who furnishes the equipment.

1. Review equipment submittals, installation documents and nameplates to determine if there are any warranty or UL limitations regarding copper versus aluminum wiring connections at equipment.

2. If there are any limitations, provide local non-fused disconnect at or near equipment (external to the equipment) and terminate aluminum conductors to the line side terminals of the disconnect switch. Provide copper conductors from load side terminals of the disconnect switch to the respective equipment factory disconnect or terminals as applicable.

3. Coordinate all related work with all affected installers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REFER TO APPLICABLE DIVISION 26 SECTIONS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General 1. Drawn locations of equipment and devices are shown only for schematic indication of wiring

requirements. Coordinate with locations and rough-in requirements as required to determine actual locations and termination requirements. Refer to all contract documents for additional electrical requirements and concerns, and for further representation of this work.

2. Provide raceway, wiring, connections, and terminations for power and interlocks for electrically operated equipment. Provide starters and disconnect switches for mechanical equipment unless specifically indicated otherwise herein or on the drawings.

3. Provide disconnect switch ahead of all equipment, including controls, unless the mechanical equipment comes with integral NEC-compliant disconnect(s). Provide NEMA 3R enclosures where installed outdoors and where installed indoors in areas subject to moisture. Ground metal frames of equipment by connecting frames to the grounded metal raceway or to a full size green ground conductor or both. Provide the necessary electrical connections between the specified equipment and the junction box near equipment with flexible metallic conduit (liquid-tight outdoors) and matched connectors (see Section 26 05 33). Where mechanical equipment lugs


MSA# 11172.00


cannot accommodate conductor sizes shown on drawings, provide ILSCO ClearTap Insulated Multi-Tap Connectors.

4. Sizes, electrical ratings, etc. of equipment and wiring shown on drawings are based on the respective equipment design base manufacturers. If different manufacturer(s) or model(s) are actually supplied, provide necessary coordination in field (prior to ordering materials and prior to rough-in) and provide the necessary size of related electrical equipment, wiring, conduit, etc.

5. Prior to furnishing submittals and prior to rough-in, determine exact electrically related characteristics, loads, voltages, disconnect and starter requirements, locations, mounting heights, connection points, etc. of mechanical equipment.

B. HACR Breakers 1. Coordinate in field with the respective trades and determine case by case, which equipment is

factory listed for use with Heating and Air Conditioning Rated (HACR) breakers. In an effort to minimize requirements for stocking of fuses by the owner, utilize HACR breakers at the source panelboards as the NEC required overcurrent protection wherever possible (in lieu of fusing local disconnect switches).

C. Disconnect Switch and Starter Locations 1. Locations of disconnects and starters shown on drawings are indicated for schematic purposes

only. Determine exact locations in field so that they are compliant with NEC Article 110 requirements for panelboards.

D. Rooftop Unit Receptacles

1. Provide Type WR duplex GFCI weatherproof receptacle at each rooftop mounted HVAC unit.

E. Rooftop Exhaust Fan Receptacles

1. Provide Type WR duplex GFCI weatherproof receptacle at each rooftop mounted exhaust fan where such fans are located more than 25 feet from another rooftop receptacle.

F. Condensing Unit Receptacles

1. Provide Type WR duplex GFCI weatherproof receptacles so that each condensing unit is no further than 25 feet from a receptacle.

G. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Equipment 1. Refer to HVAC / Electrical Coordination Schedule (HECS) on drawings. Provide disconnects,

starters, accessories, wiring, connections, services, etc. as defined as “EC” in the schedule. Information in this section supplements the information in the HECS.

2. Provide power wiring and connections for all equipment (including motor dampers and accessories where applicable) as required to render equipment fully operational.

3. Provide engraved plates at all local disconnects and starters with equipment identification and mark indicated.

4. Install local disconnects and starters at 48 inches above finished floor/slab/grade; provide flush mounted units in finished areas. Provide key operated manual starters where accessible to general staff and general public.

5. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Units - Provide power, wiring, and connections. Provide local non-fused disconnect at respective controlled mechanical equipment for all applications where the VFD and its disconnect are not within sight of the respective equipment, or where not within 50 feet of the equipment, or where not readily accessible. Provide these local disconnect switches with electrical interlock kits, with (2) #14 interlock wiring from interlock kit to respective VFD so


MSA# 11172.00


that VFD’s are automatically de-energized when the respective equipment disconnect switch is opened.

6. Air Handling Units – Provide separate power feeds or single power feed as directed in field by the HVAC installer (field verify prior to rough-in). Modify starter and disconnect requirements accordingly, if required. Provide additional dedicated 120V, 20A branch circuit for each unit from nearest panelboard (if not indicated clearly on the electrical drawings) for internal factory-installed lighting and receptacles. Provide conduit, wiring, and overcurrent protection for this work, and terminations to connections within the heat recovery units for this lighting and convenience power.

7. Heat Recovery Units – Provide separate power feeds or single power feed as directed in field by the HVAC installer (field verify prior to rough-in). Modify starter and disconnect requirements accordingly, if required. Provide additional dedicated 120V, 20A branch circuit for each unit from nearest panelboard (if not indicated clearly on the electrical drawings) for internal factory-installed lighting and receptacles. Provide conduit, wiring, and overcurrent protection for this work, and terminations to connections within the heat recovery units for this lighting and convenience power.

8. Split System Air Conditioning Systems - Provide (1) 3/4 inch empty conduit (with drag line) from each air handling segment to each condensing unit. Provide control conduit between pair to follow refrigerant piping routing wherever practical.

9. Ductless Split System Air Conditioning Units a. Provide power, control and interlock wiring and connections, to indoor and outdoor

equipment. b. Provide local weatherproof fused disconnect at each outdoor condensing unit. c. Provide power, control and interlock wiring in conduit from each outdoor condensing unit

to respective indoor air conditioning unit. Determine specific wiring requirements in field from HVAC installer since these wiring specifics vary by manufacturer. Provide related wiring as required to render systems fully operational.

d. Provide 2-pole local flush snap switch disconnect at each indoor air conditioning unit (with pilot light).

e. Route control conduit/wiring between each air conditioning unit and respective condensing unit to follow refrigerant piping routing wherever practical.

f. Provide power home-run from each outdoor condensing unit, or from each indoor air conditioning unit, or from both unit for each application. Determine specific wiring requirements in field from HVAC installer since these wiring specifics vary by manufacturer. Provide related power home-runs as required to render systems fully operational.

H. H.V.A.C. Control Wiring 1. General

a. Unless specifically indicated as empty conduit on drawings or herein, provide electrical control and interlock work as shown on drawings. Provide additional control work as specifically indicated herein.

b. Coordinate HVAC thermostat and sensor locations in field (case by case) with Architect and Owner’s Representative to ensure that they are placed in locations that will not interfere with furniture, equipment, artwork, wall-hung specialties, room finishes, etc. Field verify these wall locations case by case, prior to rough-in, since locations shown on drawings are schematic only.

2. Schematic Thermostat and Sensor Locations a. Refer to HVAC drawings and documents.


MSA# 11172.00


3. Low Voltage Thermostats and Sensors a. Provide 4 inch square by 2-1/8 inch deep wall outlet boxes at 48 inches above finished

floor (with single-gang rings) for each unit. Provide one 3/4 inch empty conduit from each location, turned out above accessible ceilings (in joist space or against overhead slab/deck). Identify conduit in ceiling cavity; provide sweep bends, bushings and drag line.

4. Line Voltage Thermostats and Sensors a. Provide 4 inch square by 2-1/8 inch deep wall outlet boxes at 48 inches above finished

floor (with single-gang rings) for each unit. Provide line voltage power wiring, in 3/4 inch conduit, and connections from thermostats and sensors to respective equipment that is to be controlled by same. Install thermostats and sensors.

5. Motor Operated Dampers a. Provide wiring associated with interlock of motors to associated motor dampers for

exhaust fans. Provide local disconnect at each motor damper if fan is not furnished with one.

b. Where HVAC equipment or exhaust fans are controlled by variable frequency drive (VFD) units, wire motor operated dampers (MOD’s) back to the respective variable frequency drive (VFD) unit separately from the respective exhaust fan power wiring, with (2) #12 AWG in 3/4 inch conduit. Provide local disconnect for each such MOD.



MSA# 11172.00

MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 260590 - 1

SECTION 260590 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Hand Dryers

1. Provide Excel XLerator hand dryers Model XL electric hand dryers. 2. Subject to compliance with specifications and project requirements, equivalent units by

the following are acceptable: Dyson, World, Saniflow or Comac Blast Hand Dryer. 3. Provide factory Recess Kit, finished to match hand dryers. Fabricate wall box with 22

GA 18-8 type 304 stainless steel with #4 satin finish. Fabricate dryer mounting plate with 16 GA 18-8 type 304 stainless steel. Provide all welded construction. Provide 14-1/2” wide recess kit designed to fit in standard 3-1/2” deep stud wall (4” deep overall opening). Provide stainless steel cable connected to the dryer mounting plate to hold the dryer in position when servicing the unit. Note that when installed, the bottom of the hand dryer will be approximately 10 inches above the bottom of the rough wall opening. Provide the rough wall opening and the recess kit at heights above finished floor that result in the bottom of the hand dryer unit ending up at the height(s) specified in this sub-section. Provide overall hand dryer assembly that meets ADA protrusion requirement of 4 inches or less out from finished wall surface.

4. Provide hand dryer covers that are one-piece, heavy-duty, rib-reinforced, die-cast zinc alloy, lightweight, unbreakable, rustproof, and installed with tamper-proof hardware.

5. Provide units with 10-15 second complete drying time. 6. Provide exposed surfaces that are brushed stainless steel. 7. Coat internal hand dryer parts according to Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. requirements. 8. Internally ground entire mechanism. 9. Provide hand dryer motor with minimum air velocity of 16,000 LFM (linear feet per

minute) at the air outlet and minimum 14,000 LFM at the hands (4 inches below air outlet).

10. Mount hand dryer heating element (1500 watt maximum) inside the blower housing so it is vandal proof. Protect unit with automatic resetting thermostat that opens whenever air flow is cut off and closes when flow of air is resumed. Provide unit that produces air temperature of up to 135°F at a 72°F ambient room temperature at the hands (4 inches below air outlet).

11. Provide 120 volt units, each with minimum #12 AWG circuit wiring fed from a dedicated 20A/1P branch breaker (verify with manufacturer's installation instructions prior to ordering breakers and prior to rough-in).

12. Provide infrared optical sensor located next to the air outlet that activates hand dryer control assembly. Provide unit that operates as long as hands are under the air outlet, with 35-second lockout feature if hands are not removed.

13. Coordinate all mounting heights with Architect prior to rough-in. Unless indicated otherwise on architectural documents or directed otherwise by Architect in field, install units at the following mounting heights (from finished floor to bottom of dryer). Where more than one unit is shown in a toilet room, coordinate with Architect regarding which units are to be installed at which heights.


MSA# 11172.00


a. Men’s: First unit at 37 inches (for compliance with ADA for use by the handicapped), and additional units (if any) at 45 inches.

b. Ladies’: First unit at 37 inches (for compliance with ADA for use by the handicapped), and additional units (if any) at 43 inches.

c. Teenagers’: First unit at 37 inches (for compliance with ADA for use by the handicapped), and additional units (if any) at 41 inches.

d. Small Children: First unit at 37 inches (for compliance with ADA for use by the handicapped), and additional units (if any) at 35 inches.

B. Systems Furniture

1. Provide final power (wiring and raceway) and communications (raceway) connections to systems furniture.

2. Participate in required meetings to discuss and note any required modifications to drawings.

3. Include actual layout, connection types/locations, wiring, fixture locations, etc. for systems furniture work in record drawings.

4. Install pre-wired power wiring harnesses. Provide final connections at wall outlet boxes. For bidding purposes, wiring harnesses will be configured for four 120V/20A circuits (three phase conductors, three neutral conductors, and one equipment ground conductor. Include each of these conductors in the home-runs to the respective source panelboard. Field verify wiring harness specifics prior to commencing with any related rough-in work. Provide wall plates for Power Wiring Harnesses, if not already supplied with the factory harnesses (single-gang and engraved, with straight or 90 degree fittings as required for making clean final connections to wall outlet boxes).

5. Provide empty "Seal-Tite" (with smooth outer wall) telecommunications empty flexible conduit whips (with drag lines) and associated connectors. Connect whips at systems furniture raceways and provide pre-connected engraved wall plates and screws at other end. Size diameters of whips for maximum 40% fill. Unless indicated larger elsewhere in project manual, provide 4" square by 2-1/8" deep backbox for each telecommunications wall outlet location (with single-gang plaster ring).

6. Determine exact mounting heights and locations of electrical system outlets and "seal-tite" conduit fitting types (straight, 90 degree, etc.) in the field with relation to architectural detail, equipment being served and final locations of systems furniture.

7. Provide permanent identification on wall plates indicating whether the outlet provides power, telephone or data service to the respective systems furniture connection.

8. Use manufacturers' recommended tools and installation procedures for connecting and installing systems furniture electrical components, and install same in a level, plumb and secure manner.

C. Electrically Operated Entry Doors

1. Provide 120V dedicated circuit and make connection to each electric operated entry door set.

2. Provide a 20A/120V single pole snap switch and JB at each motor connection. 3. Provide conduit, wiring and connections to remote push-pad operators. Also, provide

outlet box for same and install push-pads. 4. Provide identified flush mounted local disconnecting means within sight of each

controller location.


MSA# 11172.00


D. Projection Screens

1. Provide power and control wiring to operate each unit. 2. Install/wire flush wall mounted 120V key operated power supply local disconnect

switches and provide 120V wiring and connections “downstream” to the wiring in the internal screen junction box and to the low voltage control module. Provide 3-conductor 24V cable (black/red/white) from the low voltage control module to each 24VDC flush wall mounted control switch. Install and wire the control switches.

3. Provide identified flush mounted local disconnecting means within sight of each controller location.



MSA# 11172.00

OCCUPANCY SENSORS 260923 - 1

SECTION 260923 – OCCUPANCY SENSORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Provide labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, sensor, wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation and furnishing of completely operational occupancy sensor lighting controls, as described herein.

B. Provide products supplied from a single manufacturer that has been continuously involved in manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of five (5) years.

C. Provide occupancy sensors for entire project that are all made by the same manufacturer, regardless of where the materials are specified in Division 26 documents. Provide components that are all made by the same manufacturer in cases where occupancy sensor components are also connected to a building lighting control system, regardless of where the materials are specified in Division 26 documents.

D. Provide components that are U.L. listed, offer a five (5) year warranty and meet state and local applicable code requirements.

E. Provide products manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility with a defect rate of less than one-third of one percent.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Sensor quantities, types and locations shown on drawings are shown only for schematic representation that a room or area is to have occupancy sensor control. Actual sensor quantities, types and locations shall be furnished based on review of submittals by engineer, architect and/or owner.

B. In addition to submittal requirements specified elsewhere in the project manual, provide the following.

1. Submit lighting plans clearly marked by manufacturer showing proper product, location, orientation and coverage (ultrasound or infrared or both as applicable) of each sensor along with quantity of sensors required to provide proper coverage for the respective room or space.

2. Select and locate sensors so that controlled lights automatically turn on immediately upon entering the room or space.

3. Select and locate sensors so that controlled lights will not be turned on by motion that occurs outside of the respective room or space (including applicable when doors are open).

4. Select and locate sensors so that full coverage for the respective room/area is provided. 5. Submit interconnection diagrams per major subsystem showing proper wiring. 6. Submit standard catalog literature that includes performance specifications indicating compliance

to the specification. 7. Submit catalog sheets that clearly state load restrictions when used with electronic ballasts.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 2 - SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS


A. Basis of design manufacturer is WattStopper. Other acceptable manufacturers are Hubbell, Sensor Switch, Leviton, Lutron, LC&D and Cooper Greengate CA in as much the systems meet the intent and functionality and sustainability of the design.

2.2 PRODUCTS

A. Ceiling Sensors

1. Provide Standard of Quality equal to WattStopper: WT-605, WT-600, WT-1105, WT-1100, WT-2205, WT-2200, WT-2250, WT-2255, WP-605, WP-1105, WP-2255, WP-2205, W-500A, W-1000A, W-2000A, W-2000H, UT-300, UT-305, UT-355, WPIR, HB-100, HB-150, DT-200, DT-205, DT-300, DT-305, DT-355, CX-100, CX-105, CI-200, CI-205, CI-300, CI-305, CI-355, CI-12 or CI-24 series.

B. Wall switch sensors

1. Provide Standard of Quality equal to WattStopper: PW-100, PW-100-24, PW-200, WI-200, WI-300, WS-200, WD-170, WD-180, WD-270, WD-280, WN-100-120, WN-100-277, UW-100, UW-100-24, UW-200, DW-100, DW-100-24 or DW-200 series.

2. Provide wall switch sensors capable of detection of occupancy at desktop level up to 300 square feet, and gross motion up to 1000 square feet.

3. Provide units that accommodate loads from 0 to 800 watts at 120 volts; 0 to 1200 watts at 277 volts and that have 180˚ coverage capability.

4. Provide wall switch products that utilize Zero Crossing Circuitry to increase relay life, protect from the effects of inrush current, and increase sensor’s longevity.

5. Provide wall switch sensors that have no leakage current to load, in manual or in Auto/Off mode for safety purposes, and that have voltage drop protection.

6. Where specified, provide wall switch sensors with field selectable option to convert sensor operation from automatic-ON to manual-ON.

7. Where specified, provide vandal resistant wall switch sensors that utilize hard lens with minimum 1.0mm thickness. Do not provide products that utilize a soft lens.

C. Power and Auxiliary Packs

1. Provide Standard of Quality equal to WattStopper: B120E-P, B277E-P, BZ-100, LC-100, C120E-P, C277E-P, S120/277-P, AT-120 or AT-277 series.

D. HID Control

1. Provide Standard of Quality equal to WattStopper: DM-100, DM-105 or DM-105-WP series. 2. Provide HID controller compatible with all types of High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps,

including Metal Halide, Metal Halide Pulse Start, and High Pressure Sodium. 3. Provide HID controller that operates with HID lamps utilizing Constant Wattage Autotransformer

(CWA) type ballasts. 4. Maintain a full light level during lamp warm up for 15 minutes to avoid lamp damage during the

HID power up period.


MSA# 11172.00


5. To maximize lighting control scenarios, provide HID controllers compatible with any 24 VDC controlling device, such as occupancy sensors, time switches, control panels, or photocells.

6. Provide HID controllers capable of linking to other HID control modules to enable effective multi-zone control, with more than 100 individual devices capable of being connected.

E. Digital Time Switches

1. Provide Standard of Quality equal to WattStopper: TS-400, TS-400-24

F. Passive infrared sensors

1. Provide sensors that utilize Pulse Count Processing and Digital Signature Analysis to respond only to those signals caused by human motion and that provide high immunity to false triggering from RFI (hand-held radios) and EMI (electrical noise on the line). Provide sensors that also have multiple segmented Fresnel lens, in a multiple-tier configuration, with grooves-in to eliminate dust and residue build-up.

G. Dual technology sensors

1. Provide sensors that are either wall mounted, corner mounted or ceiling mounted in such a way as to minimize coverage in unwanted areas. Provide passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies for occupancy detection.

H. Ultrasonic sensors

1. Provide sensors that utilize Advanced Signal Processing to adjust the detection threshold dynamically to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and air flow throughout controlled space. Crystal control operating frequency at 25 kHz within ± 0.005% tolerance, 32 kHz within ± 0.002% tolerance, or 40 kHz ± 0.002% tolerance to assure reliable performance and eliminate sensor cross-talk. Do not use sensors with multiple frequencies.

I. General Standards

1. Provide sensors capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp systems and rated motor loads.

2. Provide sensors with coverage that remains constant after sensitivity control has been set. Automatic reduction in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans is not permitted.

3. Provide sensors with readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay and sensitivity. Locate settings on the sensor (not the control unit) and recess to limit tampering.

4. Provide bypass manual override on each sensor to accommodate failures. Configure so that when bypass is utilized, lighting remains on constantly or control diverts to a wall switch until sensor is replaced. Recess this control to prevent tampering.

5. Provide sensors with an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to verify that motion is being detected during both testing and normal operation.

6. Where specified, provide sensor with internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open, Normally Closed and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and other control options. Do not use sensors that utilize separate components or specially modified units to achieve this function.

7. Provide sensors with UL rated, 94V-0 plastic enclosures.


MSA# 11172.00


2.3 CIRCUIT CONTROL HARDWARE - CU

A. Control Units - For ease of mounting, installation and future service, provide control units that are able to be externally mounted through a 1/2" knock-out on a standard electrical enclosure and be integrated, self-contained units consisting internally of isolated load switching control relay and transformer to provide low-voltage power. Provide control units that provide power to a minimum of two (2) sensors.

B. Provide Relay Contacts with ratings of:

13A - 120 VAC Tungsten 20A - 120 VAC Ballast 20A - 277 VAC Ballast

C. Provide control wiring between sensors and controls units that is Class II , 18-24 AWG, stranded U.L. Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums.

D. Provide minimum #12 AWG wire gauge to and from the circuit control hardware relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Locate and aim sensors in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage in rooms to completely cover the controlled area to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the rooms. The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. Provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room.

C. Where occupancy sensor control is shown for lighting in a room or area where manual switching is also indicated, wire controls in series (unless specifically stated otherwise on drawings) with the manual switching ahead of respective occupancy sensor contacts.

D. Arrange a pre-installation meeting with manufacturer's factory authorized representative, at owner's facility, to verify placement of sensors and installation criteria.

E. Exercise proper judgment in executing the installation to ensure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components.

F. Provide, at the owner's facility, the training necessary to familiarize the owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing controls.



MSA# 11172.00

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262201 - 1

SECTION 262201 – LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Types of transformers specified in this section include dry-type Low Voltage Distribution Transformers (600 Volts and Less).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of transformer).

1. General Electric Co. 2. Hevi-Duty Electric. 3. Siemens/ITE. 4. Square D Co. 5. Eaton.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Dry-Type Transformers for Non-Linear Load Distribution

1. Provide transformers equal to Square D "NLP" series, with K-factor rating of 13.0 to accommodate non-linear loads.

2. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard materials and components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, and as required for complete installation.

3. Provide transformer insulating materials that are in accordance with NEMA ST20 Standards for 220 degrees C., UL component recognized insulation system. Manufacturer and test transformers in accordance with ANSI Standards C57.12.01 and C57.12.91.

4. Provide transformers that are UL Listed and Labeled for their specific use. 5. Provide transformers rated for continuous operation at listed kVA. 6. Provide copper windings. 7. Provide factory-assembled, general-purpose, air-cooled, dry-type distribution transformers where

shown of sizes, characteristics, and rated capacities indicated. Provide transformers rated at 60-hertz with 480-volts delta connection primary and 208/120 volts secondary wye connections. Provide 6 full capacity taps; 2 above rated voltage and 4 below rated voltage.

8. Provide transformers with UL recognized 220 degrees C insulation system. Limit transformer coil surface temperature rise to maximum of 150 degrees C above 40 degrees C ambient. Provide transformers with primary and secondary temperatures that do not exceed 220 degrees C at any point in the coils while carrying their full rating of non-sinusoidal load. Provide transformers with hot spot temperatures that do not exceed 220 degrees C at K-factor rating of 13.0. Limit transformer enclosure surface temperature rise to maximum of 50o C. above 40o C. ambient.

9. Provide transformers with 10 kV minimum BIL ratings


MSA# 11172.00


10. Provide terminal enclosure, with cover, to accommodate primary and secondary coil wiring connections, and to accommodate electrical supply raceway terminal connectors. Provide terminal leads with connectors installed. Provide wiring connectors suitable for copper or aluminum wiring. Cushion-mount transformers with external vibration isolation supports. Provide sound-level ratings that do not exceed the following values as determined in accordance with ANSI/NEMA standards:

15 to 50 kVA - 45 dB. 51 to 150 kVA - 50 dB. 151 to 300 kVA - 55 dB. 301 to 500 kVA - 60 dB.

11. Electrically ground core and coils to transformer enclosure by means of flexible metal grounding strap. Provide transformers with fully enclosed ventilated sheet steel enclosures. Provide enclosures with manufacturer's standard light gray indoor enamel over cleaned and phosphatized steel enclosure. Provide transformers suitable for wall mounting where required to accommodate such applications. Coat interior and exterior surfaces of transformer, including bolted joints, with manufacturer's standard color baked-on enamel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units on vibration mounts; comply with manufacturer's indicated installation method. Provide 4" elevated concrete housekeeping pad for each floor mounted transformer. Provide transformers in strict compliance with NEC Article 450.

B. Transformer locations shown on drawings are shown approximately to scale. Provide final coordination between affected trades (prior to rough-in) so that code required, and factory recommended, ventilation and working clearances around transformer installations are maintained.

C. Provide final connections with an accurate torque wrench, and tighten to factory published torque values, and submit written documentation showing factory recommendations and actual values.

D. Provide final connections to primary and secondary taps as necessary to fulfill project voltage requirements.

E. Vacuum and wipe down transformer, enclosure interior and enclosure exterior. From the time of manufacture, through shipping/storage phases, keep transformers dry, free of condensation, and free of rapid temperature fluctuations. Do not store transformers outdoors. Maintain transformers at temperatures above ambient while in storage.

F. Provide factory wall and ceiling mounting brackets where transformers are required to be wall mounted or mounted overhead, and install as recommended by transformer manufacturer. Also provide companion factory vibration isolators. Locations for such transformers are shown for schematic purposes. Determine exact location in field based on surrounding building conditions, work of other trades, factory recommendations, ventilation requirements, maintenance access, and requirements of the National Electrical Code (including working clearance requirements). Submit specific proposed installation methods, sketches and details to architect and structural engineer for review and comment prior to commencing with any related work.


MSA# 11172.00


3.2 TESTING

A. Provide testing, and keep written and dated log, for the following.

1. “Hi-Pot” or "Megger", at factory at time of shipping. 2. "Megger", at job site, immediately prior to final connections. 3. Phase rotation and turns ratio, at factory at time of shipping. 4. Phase rotation and turns ratio, at job site, immediately prior to final connections. 5. Secondary voltage under no load, after installation. 6. Secondary voltage under full load, after installation.

B. Upon completion of installation of transformers, energize primary circuitry at rated voltage and frequency from normal power source. Then provide transformers testing including audible sound levels to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units or components, and proceed with retesting.



MSA# 11172.00

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Types of panelboards and enclosures required for the project include the following.

1. Power-distribution panelboards. 2. General use panelboards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide panelboard products of one of the following (for each type and rating of panelboard and enclosure):

1. Square D Company. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Siemens/ITE. 4. Eaton.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials; with the design and construction in accordance with published product information.

B. Provide panelboards with proper number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for those applications indicated.

C. Provide panelboards that are new and manufacturer's latest standard catalog design.

D. Provide panelboards that bear UL labels for their specific applications.

E. Provide panelboards suitable for service voltage with number of branch circuits of capacity scheduled.

F. Provide panelboards, and sections thereof if applicable, with main-lugs-only of capacity equal to, or greater than, the rating or setting of the overcurrent protective device next back on the line.

G. Provide panelboard branches as scheduled on the drawings.

H. Provide circuit breaker panelboard bus assemblies with distributed (sequence) type bussing throughout, so that any two adjacent single-pole breakers, or spaces, are replaceable by a two-pole internal common trip breaker, and so that any three adjacent single-pole breakers, or spaces, are replaceable by a three-pole


MSA# 11172.00


internal common trip breaker. This applies for branch breakers sized 15 amp through 70 amp inclusive, without disturbing any other breaker.

I. Provide panelboards that are UL listed and labeled for use as service entrance equipment.

J. Provide dead-front safety type panelboards as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and with arrangement shown. Provide with anti-turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for use with copper or aluminum conductors.

K. Provide full-sized (100 percent) neutral bus. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections.

L. Provide panelboards with bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures.

2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS

A. Provide power distribution circuit breaker panelboards equal to Square D I-Line, "HCM" or "HCW" series as applicable.

B. Where located in an area accessible to anyone other than only authorized personnel, provide doors that are hinged, latched and locking type.

2.4 GENERAL USE CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS

A. Provide 208Y/120V three-phase general use panelboards equal to Square D NQOD with bolt-on branch breakers.

B. Provide 480Y/277V three-phase general use panelboards equal to Square D NF with bolt-on branch breakers.

C. Provide panelboard construction, not load center construction, if equipment is described on drawings as “load center”.

2.5 BUSSING

A. Provide copper bussing.

2.6 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARD ENCLOSURES

A. Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, in sizes and NEMA types as indicated, code-gage, minimum 16-gage thickness.

B. Provide boxes with code-compliant side and end gutters (minimum 4 inches), and of code gauge galvanized steel. Provide boxes that are 20 inches wide minimum, and 5-3/4 inches deep minimum. Provide boxes with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters.

C. Provide panelboard trims that are flush or surface as required for respective application, that are constructed of code gauge steel, that are finished with rust inhibiting prime coat and then factory applied hot spray lacquer or baked-on enamel, and that are factory painted manufacturer's standard light gray.


MSA# 11172.00


Provide trims complete with concealed hinges and concealed trim clamps. Provide doors with flush chromium plated combination cylinder lock and catch, and with directory suitable for clear plastic. Provide locks that are keyed alike.

D. Provide enclosures that are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards to be enclosed.

2.7 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Provide factory-assembled, molded-case circuit breakers of frame sizes, characteristics, and ratings including RMS symmetrical interrupting ratings required for each application. Provide breakers with permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip, with fault-current limiting protection, and with ampere ratings as indicated.

B. Provide coordinated series-rated circuit breakers as applicable throughout, accommodating respective available fault current.

C. Provide breakers that are designed to be mounted and operated in any physical position, and to be operated in a minimum ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated.

D. Provide branch circuit breakers that are full ambient compensated thermal magnetic molded case type, with quick-make and quick-break action, and with positive handle trip indication (on both manual and automatic operation). Provide breakers of the over-the-center toggle operating type with the handle going to a position between "on" and "off" to indicate automatic tripping.

E. Provide bolt-on branch breakers.

F. Provide full size circuit breakers. Do not provide "tandem" or "split" breakers.

G. Provide circuit breakers above 225-ampere capacity with adjustable trip mechanism, accessible only after removing dead front of panel, compliant with NEC requirements.

H. Provide circuit breakers with sealed cases to prevent tampering.

I. Provide molded-case main and branch circuit-breaker types for each circuit as shown on drawings, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped.

J. Provide multi-pole breakers with all load side box lugs of one breaker in the same gutter.

K. Where multiple-pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously.

L. Provide multi-pole breakers with common trip or with handle-ties (if needed because breakers have already been installed) for applications where it is determined that a common disconnecting means is required for multi-wire branch circuits serving, or within, the same enclosure, outlet box, equipment, or device.

M. Provide branch breakers (not sub-feed breakers) where breakers are shown as branches on drawings or schedules.

N. Provide 15 and 20 ampere branch circuit breakers that are UL Listed as SWD (switching duty).


MSA# 11172.00


O. Provide 15 through 70 ampere branch circuit breakers that are HACR Type.

P. Provide GFCI circuit breakers that are UL Class A with maximum threshold of 5 mA.

Q. Provide HID rated branch circuit breakers for circuits serving ballasted (fluorescent/HID) lighting loads.

R. All circuit breakers that are spares shall be put in the ‘OFF’ position and provided with a breaker lock.

2.8 FAULT CURRENT RATINGS

A. Provide electrical distribution related equipment with appropriately braced bussing and properly rated breakers, fuses, etc. for the available fault currents.

B. In existing buildings where fault current values are not indicated on drawings, coordinate with existing “upstream” distribution equipment, and provide equipment AIC ratings that meet or exceed same.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily limited to, branch circuit breakers, neutral & ground busses, ground-fault protection units, etc., as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated.

B. Provide distribution equipment with ground bus bars. Except where used as service entrance equipment, or as a derived service, provide insulated stand-off for neutral bus bars.

C. Provide a minimum of 20 handle, lock-on devices of the non-padlocking type for life safety, special systems and other essential circuits.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide enclosures fastened firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically anchored.

B. Provide properly wired electrical connections for panelboards within enclosures.

C. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are level, and permanently & mechanically secure.

D. Provide neatly typewritten circuit directory card for each panelboard upon completion of installation work. Include the actual room names/numbers that are selected for interior signage/designation.

E. Scheduling shown on drawings is shown to indicate feeder and branch circuiting requirements. Determine exact numbering sequence of circuits in field after performing final balancing.



MSA# 11172.00

WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. See Section 26 00 02 for special identification-related requirements.

B. See Section 26 05 34 for damp and wet location cover plate requirements.

C. See E-series drawings for Occupancy Sensors.

D. See Section 26 09 23 for Occupancy Sensors.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics, grades, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated which are UL listed and which comply with NEMA WD 1 and other applicable UL and NEMA standards. Verify color selections with Owner's representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following.

Switches: Leviton, Hubbell, Bryant, Pass & Seymour, Cooper Dimmers: Lutron Receptacles: Leviton, Hubbell, Bryant, Pass & Seymour, Cooper Wall Plates: Leviton, Hubbell, Bryant, Pass & Seymour, Cooper

2.2 WIRING DEVICE COLORS

A. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, or directed otherwise in field, provide white color for normal utility wiring devices.

B. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, or directed otherwise in field, provide gray color for “standby” utility wiring devices.

C. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, or directed otherwise in field, provide red color for “emergency” utility wiring devices.


MSA# 11172.00


2.3 SWITCHES

A. Wall Switches

1. Provide wall switches, that are flush self-grounding with green ground screw and color coded cover, snap toggle type, back and side wired, specification grade. Provide wall switches rated 20A, 120/277 volts, 1 HP at 120V, A.C. quiet type. Where locking type switches are indicated, provide same as below except with "L" suffix (provide six keys). Catalog numbers below are based on Leviton.

Single pole, toggle: Equal to Leviton 1221-2 series. Double-pole, toggle: Equal to Leviton 1222-2 series. 3-way, toggle: Equal to Leviton 1223-2 series. 4-way, toggle: Equal to Leviton 224-2 series.

B. Dimmer Switches

1. Provide dimmer switches that are specification grade, equal to Lutron "Nova T" (NT) series with thin profile and matching factory wall plates.

2. Provide Incandescent Lamp Dimmer Switches that are solid state type, conforming to NEMA WD 1, modular dimmer switches for incandescent fixtures; switch poles and wattage as required to serve respective load, 120-volts, 60-Hz, with continuously adjustable slide control (down to off). Equip with filter to eliminate noise, RF and TV interference, and 5 inch wire connecting leads.

3. Do not break off side sections when ganging. 4. Provide dimmer and wall plate colors that match other wiring devices in the respective

room. 5. Provide lamp de-buzzing coils for incandescent lamp applications; install coils outside of

rooms that are acoustically sensitive. 6. Multiple wallbox dimmers may be used sporadically throughout the project on common

circuits; provide compatible dimmers accordingly. 7. Provide dedicated neutrals for circuits serving loads controlled by dimmers.

2.4 SPECIFICATION GRADE RECEPTACLES

A. Standard Specification Grade Duplex/Single Receptacles

1. Provide duplex and single specification grade receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, self-grounding, green grounding screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke, color coded base, 20-amperes, 125-volts, with metal plaster ears, back & side wiring, NEMA configuration 5-20R.

2. Provide duplex receptacles equal to Leviton #5362 series. For receptacle circuits protected with 15A breakers, provide NEMA 5-15R equivalents. Provide receptacles equal to Leviton #5361 series for simplex (single) applications. Provide clock hanger receptacles equal to Leviton #5361-CH.

B. Ground-Fault Interrupter Specification Grade Receptacles


MSA# 11172.00


1. Provide self grounding commercial specification grade, duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters; feed-thru type, capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on single circuit, grounding type UL-rated 943, Class A, Group 1, specification grade, 20-amperes rating (device & feed-thru), 125-volts, 60 Hz; with solid-state ground-fault sensing and signaling (maximum threshold of 5mA at 0.025 seconds maximum); equip with 20-ampere plug configuration, NEMA 5-20R.

2. Provide ground fault circuit interrupter duplex receptacles equal to Leviton #8898 series. For receptacle circuits protected with 15A breakers, provide NEMA 5-15R equivalents.

3. Receptacles indicated as GFI may be GFI-protected by an upstream GFI receptacle on the same circuit only if located in the same room. Otherwise provide a separate GFI receptacle for each one shown.

4. Provide Weather-Resistant Receptacles with UL “WR” marking, compliant with NEC 406.8, for all applications in wet or damp locations.

C. Ground-Fault Interrupter Switch-Rated Devices (with blank face)

1. Provide self grounding commercial specification ground-fault circuit interrupters; feed-thru type, capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on single circuit, grounding type UL-rated 943, Class A, Group 1, specification grade, 20-amperes rating, 125-volts, 60 Hz; with solid-state ground-fault sensing and signaling (maximum threshold of 5mA at 0.025 seconds maximum).

2. Provide ground fault circuit interrupter blank-face switch-rated devices equal to Leviton #6490 series.

D. Surge Suppression (TVSS) Specification Grade Receptacles

1. Provide self grounding commercial specification grade, duplex receptacles, surge suppressor; feed-thru type, capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on single circuit, grounding type UL-rated 1449 and 498; suitable for ANSI/IEEE C 62.41-1980 (IEEE 587 A & B), specification grade, 20-amperes rating (device & feed-thru), 125-volts, 60 Hz; with solid-state transient voltage surge sensing and suppression; power-on light, damage alert audible beeper; blue in color; equip with 20-ampere plug configuration, NEMA 5-20R. Provide blue surge suppression receptacles, or blue marking.

2. Provide surge suppressor duplex receptacles for standard applications equal to Hubbell #5362_S series. Provide surge suppressor duplex receptacles for isolated ground applications equal to Hubbell #IG5362_S series, with isolated ground construction and factory triangular marking on face. Provide surge suppressor quadruplex (4-plex) receptacles for retrofit isolated ground applications equal to Hubbell #HBL420_S series with #HBL4AP_ surface mounted adapter plate for use on 1-gang or 2-gang outlet boxes. For receptacle circuits protected with 15A breakers, provide NEMA 5-15R equivalents.

E. Isolated Ground Specification Grade Receptacles

1. Provide duplex and single specification grade receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, self-grounding, green grounding screw, ground terminals and poles internally isolated from mounting yoke, color coded base, 20-amperes, 125-volts, with metal plaster ears, back & side wiring, NEMA configuration 5-20R. Provide with isolated ground construction and orange in color with green triangle marking on face.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Provide duplex isolated ground receptacles equal to Leviton #5362-IG. Provide simplex (single) isolated ground receptacles equal to Leviton #5361-IG. For receptacle circuits protected with 15A breakers, provide NEMA 5-15R equivalents. Provide dedicated insulated isolated ground conductors (green with yellow tracer) for each application.

F. “Safety” Type Receptacles (Tamper Resistant)

1. Provide self-grounding, duplex specification grade receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, self-grounding, green grounding screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke, color coded base, 20-amperes, 125-volts, with metal plaster ears, back & side wiring, NEMA configuration 5-20R, with shutter mechanisms for tamper resistant applications.

2. Provide tamper resistant receptacles with tamper resistant wall plate mounting screws (with 50 spare screws and six spare drivers for same).

3. Provide duplex tamper resistant receptacles equal to Leviton #5262-SG series. For receptacle circuits protected with 15A breakers, provide NEMA 5-15R equivalents.

G. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles

1. Provide Weather Resistant GFCI receptacles for all receptacles installed in damp or wet locations. Any receptacle shown on the drawings with “WP/GFI” next to it denoting exterior cover shall be installed with a weather resistant GFCI receptacle.

2. Provide duplex weather resistant receptacles equal to Leviton # W7899 series. For receptacle circuits protected with 15A breakers, provide NEMA 5-15R equivalents.

2.5 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES

A. Wall Plates

1. Provide single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as required to accommodate each application. Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads colored to match finish of plates.

2. Provide standard size wall plates. Do not provide "midway", "oversized" ("jumbo") or "extra deep" wall plates.

3. Provide galvanized steel wall plates in unfinished exposed-conduit areas. 4. Provide commercial grade, satin finish stainless steel wall plates in finished areas, with

beveled edges, equal to Leviton Type 302 series. 5.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



MSA# 11172.00


B. Install receptacles so that the ground pin is oriented in a consistent manner throughout the facility, so that the orientation is compliant with all prevailing codes and regulations, and so that the orientation is acceptable to the electrical inspector.

C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes that are clean; free from building materials, dirt, and debris. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed. Install wall plates only after respective wall surfaces have received their final finish.

D. Prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical continuity and for short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity and grounding of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing, test wiring devices and demonstrate compliance with requirements, operating each operable device at least six times. Test ground fault interrupter operation with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.



MSA# 11172.00

FLOOR DEVICES 262730 - 1

SECTION 262730 - FLOOR DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. See Communication Specifications for model and manufacturer of floor boxes and poke throughs.


A. See Section 26 27 26 for wiring devices and cover plates. Provide wiring devices in floor boxes as required to fulfill respective applications.


A. Provide electrical floor devices (boxes/outlets) specified in this section including the following types.

1. Recessed activation floor outlets. 2. Flush activation floor outlets. 3. Poke-through floor outlets. 4. Floor Outlet Accessories.

B. Meet with Architect before making final room-by-room catalog number selections for cover plates to ensure compatibility with room finishes (i.e. height and color of carpet edging, special floor finishes, etc.).

C. Meet with telecommunication system installers before making final box-by-box catalog number selections for the internal mounting bracket assemblies to ensure compatibility with outlet functions.

D. Make exact catalog selection based on type of floor structure in the respective room, and based on type of final floor finish in the respective room. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings and Architect as required to make proper selections, including selection of brass vs. aluminum flanges.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide floor outlets of one of the following:

1. Legrand/Wiremold. 2. FSR Inc. 3. Hubbell.

2.2 RECESSED ACTIVATION FLOOR OUTLETS

A. Communications Technology Multi-Service Flush Floor Boxes with Recessed Activation


MSA# 11172.00


1. Provide internal duplex receptacles, and communications plates, as required to accommodate services within. Provide blanks for unused outlet openings.

2. Provide two duplex receptacles, installed in internal duplex brackets. Provide communications brackets as required to accommodate services within. Provide blank brackets for unused outlet openings.

2.3 FLUSH ACTIVATION FLOOR OUTLETS

A. Multi-Service Recessed Floor Boxes with Flush Activation

1. Provide square or rectangular flush floor boxes equal to Walker “Omnibox” series. 2. Provide cast iron units (#880CS2-1) for slab on grade applications, with internal compartment

dividers. 3. Provide steel units (#880S2) for floors above grade, with internal compartment dividers. 4. Provide Walker #827B two-gang brass combination carpet and tile flange. 5. Provide one duplex receptacle, and one #828P brass duplex cover plate with screw plugs. 6. Provide one #828P brass duplex cover plate with screw plugs. 7. For direct connections to systems furniture, millwork, equipment, etc., provide #829C series brass

cover plates (with brass screw plugs) as required to accommodate the necessary flexible conduit “whips”. Provide smooth-outer-wall type Seal-Tight flexible metal conduit for related “whip” connections.

8. Provide adjustable flush floor boxes as indicated, with vertical adjusting rings, gaskets, floor plates with flush covers with ground flange and stainless steel cover screws.

9. Provide shallow units for shallow pour applications (only); verify in field.

B. Single-Service Flush Floor Boxes with Flush Activation

1. Provide round floor boxes equal to Walker #800 Series. 2. Provide watertight adjustable flush floor boxes as indicated, with and vertical adjusting rings,

gaskets, brass floor plates with flush screw-on covers with ground flange and stainless steel cover screws.

3. Provide cast iron units for slab on grade applications and steel units for floors above grade. 4. Provide shallow units for shallow pour applications (only); verify in field. 5. Provide units capable of either power or communication technology use, and of flush or pedestal

activation (for future changes in application).

2.4 POKE-THROUGH FLOOR OUTLETS

A. Flush Poke-Throughs with Flush Activation

1. Provide poke-through units equal to Walker #RC900 or RC2001 Series as applicable. 2. Provide factory power-pre-wired poke-through units, suitable for power work, or suitable for

communication work, or suitable for both. 3. Provide minimum UL fire resistance rating of 3-hours. 4. Provide integral fire-stop with cold smoke barrier to prevent passage of smoke where heat is not

present. 5. Provide multi-service units with separation barrier between power and communication

compartments. 6. Provide multi-service units with a single divided through-floor conduit. 7. Provide units with through-floor conduit of proper length for floor thickness indicated, and

junction box, which is self supporting without attachment of above-floor fitting. 8. Provide units with gaskets.


MSA# 11172.00


9. Provide units with brass floor plates and flush screw-on covers. 10. Provide units with necessary accessories for a complete operable installation, including ground

flange and stainless steel cover screws.

B. Flush Poke-Throughs with Pedestal Furniture Feed Activation

1. Provide poke-through units equal to Walker #RC900-FF Series. 2. Provide Seal-Tite flexible conduit whips (with smooth outer covering) for direct connections. 3. Provide factory power-pre-wired poke-through units, suitable for power work, or suitable for

communication work, or suitable for both. 4. Provide with minimum UL fire resistance rating of 3-hours. 5. Provide integral fire-stop with cold smoke barrier to prevent passage of smoke where heat is not

present. 6. Provide multi-service units with separation barrier between power and communication

compartments. 7. Provide multi-service units with a single divided through-floor conduit. 8. Provide units with through-floor conduit of proper length for floor thickness indicated, and

junction box, which is self supporting without attachment of above-floor fitting. 9. Provide units with gaskets. 10. Provide units with brass floor plates and flush screw-on covers. 11. Provide units with necessary accessories for a complete operable installation, including ground

flange and stainless steel cover screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide factory plates, adapters, inserts, extensions, nipples, flanges, mudcaps, rings, conversion kits, etc. accessories as required for complete working units for each application.

B. Do not scale floor outlet locations from drawings.

C. Consider locations indicated on the drawings to be approximate (unless specifically dimensioned on drawings). Determine exact locations of each floor outlet, case by case, after consulting with Owner and Architect, and after reviewing architectural documents so outlets are properly located to accommodate the final furniture and equipment layouts. Study the general construction with relation to spaces and equipment surrounding each outlet.

D. Provide sealed knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. Install outlets in locations that ensure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical wiring.

E. Do not use aluminum products in concrete.

F. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. Support boxes independent of conduit.

G. Set floor boxes so that the finished product is level and flush with finish flooring material. END OF SECTION 262730


MSA# 11172.00

DISCONNECTS, STARTERS, CONTACTORS 262740 - 1

SECTION 262740 - DISCONNECTS, STARTERS, CONTACTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Provide NEMA standard equipment, including those incorporated as an integral part of a factory/shop pre-fabricated piece of equipment. Do not use IEC standards for equipment.

B. Provide units as indicated on drawings and as indicated under Division 26 sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide equipment of one of the following (for each type and rating):

1. Allen-Bradley Co. 2. General Electric Co. 3. Siemans/ITE 4. Square D Co. 5. Eaton

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Disconnect Switches

1. Provide disconnect switches equal to Square D Type HD, heavy duty, safety type, quick make and quick break and externally operated.

2. Provide fusible disconnects unless noted otherwise on drawings or directed otherwise in field. 3. Provide disconnect switches braced for 200,000 A.I.C. 4. Provide units with fuses of classes and current ratings indicated, and UL listed for use as service

equipment under UL Standard 98 or 869. See Section "FUSES" for fuse specifications. Where current limiting fuses are indicated, provide switches with non-interchangeable feature suitable only for current limiting type fuses.

5. Install disconnect switches within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated.

B. Starters

1. General

a. Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor starters and ancillary components of types, sizes, ratings, and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installations.

b. Provide pilot lights in covers of starters.


MSA# 11172.00


c. Size starters according to load being served or as noted on drawings, whichever requirement is larger.

d. Provide manual and magnetic starter thermal overload elements between 115 percent and 125 percent of full load current, unless otherwise called for under NEC.

e. Install and connect capacitors ahead of overloads where applicable.

2. Manual Starters

a. Provide single-phase AC fractional HP manual motor starters, of sizes and ratings required for specific applications.

b. Provide starters with manually operated quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanisms, and with one-piece melting alloy type thermal units.

c. Provide starters with thermal overload relay, with field adjustment capability of plus or minus 10 percent variation of nominal overload heater rating, for protection of fractional HP motors as shown on drawings.

d. Provide starters that become inoperative when thermal unit is removed. e. Provide starters with double break silver alloy contacts, visible from both sides of starter. f. Provide starters with switch capable of being padlocked-OFF. g. Provide Manual Starters in Finished Areas equal to Square D #2510 or Allen-Bradley Bul.

600-TQX109. Provide starters that are flush mounted 2-pole toggle switch type, with neon pilot in cover and NEMA 1 Type B enclosure for flush wall installation.

h. Provide Manual Starters for Exposed Conduit Installations equal to Square D #8536 or Allen-Bradley Bul. 600-TAX109. Provide starters that are surface mounted 2-pole toggle switch type, with neon pilot in cover and NEMA 1 Type FG-2P enclosure for surface wall installation.

3. Combination HOA Starters

a. Provide AC motor starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics required for specific applications.

b. Provide starters with thermal overload relays, with field adjustment capability of plus or minus 10 percent variation of nominal overload heater rating, for protection of motors as shown on drawings.

c. Coordinate specific coil voltage requirements (case-by-case) in field with the respective installer who is providing the equipment to be served.

d. Provide external quick-make/quick-break non-fused disconnect switch in cover. e. Provide external "HAND-OFF-AUTO" (HOA) selector switch in cover (for local or remote

control as required based on respective application). f. Provide external pilot light in cover. g. Provide external reset button in cover. h. Provide Form 2 NC/NO auxiliary contacts (rated at 15A/120V); i. Provide fused control power transformer. j. Provide combination starters in finished areas that are Size I minimum, equal to Square D

#8538 or Allen-Bradley Bul. 512 with NEMA 1 Type B enclosure for flush wall installation.

k. Provide combination starters for exposed conduit installations that are Size I minimum, equal to Square D #8538 or Allen-Bradley Bul. 512 with NEMA 1 surface mount enclosure.

C. Contactors

1. Provide contactors equipped with external pilot lights in cover, and external HOA selector switches in cover.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Wire contactors for lighting applications so that the "AUTO" position is the normal activated condition (i.e. photocell controlled, photocell/time-clock controlled, remote switch controlled, BAS controlled, etc.); so that the "OFF" position is manual override to turn lighting off; and so that the "HAND" position is manual override to turn lighting on.

3. Provide contactors with field convertible N.O./N.C. contacts and descriptive nameplates. 4. Provide contactors equal to Square D Class 8903 (or Allen-Bradley Bul. 500L-BA*94 series) for

tungsten lighting loads, ballast lighting loads, and small resistance heating loads. Provide contactors that are electrically operated and electrically held (EOEH). Provide contactors in factory NEMA 1 enclosures, with 120V coils (unless indicated otherwise elsewhere or otherwise required to render controls fully operable).

5. Provide "dry" contacts rated at 30A, minimum 250V (600V if required by application). Provide number of poles (minimum of three poles) and number of contactors as required for each application. Field verify coil voltage ratings.

6. Provide magnetic (mechanically latched) contactors equal to Square D Class 8502 (or Allen-Bradley Bul. 500-BA*930 series) for heating loads, capacitor loads, transformer loads, motor loads, and similar loads. Provide contactors with factory NEMA 1 enclosures, with 120V coils (unless indicated otherwise elsewhere or otherwise required to render controls fully operable). Provide starters with holding circuit contacts (provide related interlock wiring). Provide magnetic contactors that are NEMA Size 1 minimum. Provide "dry" contacts rated at 30A, minimum 250V (600V if required by application). Provide number of poles (minimum of three poles) and number of contactors as required for each application. Field verify coil voltage ratings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide units with horsepower ratings suitable to the loads. Size units according to load being served or as noted on drawings, whichever requirement is larger. Install overloads and fuses as necessary to fulfill requirements of each application.

B. Furnish additional fuses/overloads amounting to 10 percent of fuses provided, but not less than one set of 3 of each kind, for required types and ratings.

C. Provide NEMA 3R enclosures for units that are installed outdoors, in moist areas, and in other atmospheres subject to similar moisture or exposure.

D. Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. Subsequent to completion of installation of equipment, energize circuits and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Begin by demonstrating switch operation through six opening/closing cycles with circuit unloaded. Open each switch enclosure and inspect interiors, inspect mechanical and electrical connections, inspect fuse/overload installations, and verify accuracy of type and rating of fuses/overloads installed. Correct deficiencies then retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace defective units with new units and retest.



MSA# 11172.00

FUSES 262813 - 1

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Types of fuses specified in this section include the following.

1. Class L current limiting/time-delay. 2. Class RK1 current limiting/time-delay. 3. Class RK5 current limiting/time-delay. 4. Class J current-limiting/time-delay. 5. Class T current-limiting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fuses of one of the following. Provide fuses of the same manufacturer.

1. Bussman. 2. LittelFuse. 3. Shawmut (A4BQ series).

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Fuses

1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings, and average time-current and peak let-through current characteristics indicated. Provide fuses that comply with manufacturer's standard design, and materials. Provide fuses constructed in accordance with published product information, and with industry standards and configurations.

2. Provide rejection type fuses for fuses 1 ampere through 600 amperes. 3. Provide Hi-Cap, bolt type fuses for fuses 601 amperes through 6000 amperes.

B. Class L Current-Limiting/Time-Delay Fuses

1. Provide UL Class L fuses for protecting transformers, motors, circuit-breakers, service entrances, and distribution feeders above 600 amperes. Provide fuses that are current-limiting, time-delay, dual-element type (with pure silver links), equal to Bussman #KRP-C (low peak). Provide fuses that are rated 600 volt, 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating.

C. Class RK1 Current-Limiting/Time-Delay Fuses

1. Provide UL Class RK-1 fuses for protecting service entrances, and distribution feeders 600 amperes and below. Provide fuses that are current-limiting, time-delay, dual-element type (with pure silver links), equal to Bussman #LPS-RK1 (600V) or Bussman #LPN-RK-1 (250V) as


MSA# 11172.00

FUSES 262813 - 2

applicable. Provide fuses that are rated 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating.

D. Class RK5 Current-Limiting/Time-Delay Fuses

1. Provide UL Class RK-5 fuses for protecting general duty motors. Provide fuses that are time-delay, dual-element type (with pure silver links), equal to Bussman #LPS-RK5 (600V) or Bussman #LPN-RK-5 (250V) as applicable. Provide fuses that are rated 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating.

E. Class J Current-Limiting/Time-Delay Fuses

1. Provide UL Class J fuses for protecting only service entrance equipment, and distribution feeder equipment, that is specifically designed to incorporate this size fuse. Provide fuses that are time-delay, dual-element type (with pure silver links), equal to Bussman #JJS (600V) or Bussman #JJN (250V) as applicable. Provide fuses that are rated 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating.

F. Class T Current-Limiting Fuses

1. Provide UL Class T current limiting fuses rated 600-volts, 60 Hz with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating. Provide Class T fuses only where specifically called for on specialty applications, or where specifically directed in field.

G. Cable Limiters

1. Provide cable limiters rated 600-volts, 60 Hz with tubular type terminals for compression connection to 500 kcmil (MCM) copper cable. Provide cable limiters only where specifically called for on specialty applications, or where specifically directed in field.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fuse Identification Labels

1. Provide factory fuse identification labels, installed on the inside of the door of each switch, indicating type and size of fuses installed.

B. Maintenance Stock

1. Furnish spare fuses, for types and ratings used on the project, amounting to 10 percent of active fuses provided, but not less than one set of 3 of each kind.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide fuses as required to render related electrical, and electrically operated, equipment fully operational.

B. Provide fuses rated at 600 volts minimum, unless the service entrance voltage does not exceed 240V.


MSA# 11172.00

FUSES 262813 - 3

C. Provide each fuse with clear factory markings indicating classification, characteristics, ampere ratings, voltage ratings, etc.

D. Do not ship fuses installed in switches. Do not install fuses in equipment until the equipment is ready to be energized.

E. Field verify recommended fuse size and type from respective equipment installer prior to installing fuses for protection of specific equipment, motors, etc. Contact engineer if a conflict in fuse size or type arises between manufacturer's recommendations and above specifications.

F. Install fuses in fused switches. END OF SECTION 262813


MSA# 11172.00

TRANSFER SWITCHES 263613 - 1

SECTION 263613 - TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Provide performance characteristics for the transfer switch components equal to or exceeding the quality and performance of the Design Base unit(s) specified in this section. Equal amperage ratings alone do not necessarily equate another manufacturer to the basis of design.

B. Provide necessary equipment, accessories, components, etc. to render systems fully operational.

1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. UL Compliance

1. Comply with applicable requirements of UL 1008, "Automatic Transfer Switches". Provide transfer switches and components that are UL-listed and labeled.

B. NEMA Compliance

1. Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds Pub/No.'s ICS 2, "Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies", ICS 6 and 250, pertaining to transfer switches.

C. NFPA Compliance

1. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 99; "Standard for Health Care Facilities", and NFPA 101; "Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures", pertaining to transfer switches.

D. Electrical Code Compliance

1. Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Articles 517, 700, 701, and 702 pertaining to construction and installation of emergency and standby systems.

E. IEEE Compliance

1. Comply with applicable portions of IEEE Std 446, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Industrial and Commercial Applications."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide transfer switches of one of the following.

1. Cummins Power Generation (OTPC series)


MSA# 11172.00


2. Russell (RMTD Series). 3. Kohler. 4. G.E./Zenith. 5. ASCO.

2.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. General Requirements

1. Refer to drawings for required voltage, phase and amperage ratings. 2. Provide 3-pole units. 3. Provide auxiliary contacts as required for interfaces to affected equipment, to render all ancillary

functions operational. 4. Provide switches with bar graph to view the information related to the switch. 5. Provide transfer switches with neutral position and adjustable time delay on retransfer-to-normal

from the emergency power system. 6. Provide minimum withstand capability, when coordinated with circuit breakers, of 50,000A RMS

symmetrical WCR at 480 volts. Provide minimum withstand capability, when coordinated with current limiting fuses, of 200,000A RMS symmetrical WCR at 480 volts.

7. Provide free-standing 14-gage welded steel NEMA Type 1 enclosures with swing-out service panels and door locks. Coat enclosures with manufacturer's standard color acrylic enamel finish over corrosion-resistive primer.

8. Provide factory-fabricated wall-mounted automatic adjustable load-transfer switch controls, of types and capacities indicated, to automatically start emergency generator units when line voltage drops to 70 percent normal value, transfer load to generator, and transfer load back to normal source when voltage is restored to 90 percent normal.

9. Provide electrically operated, mechanically held, and electrically and mechanically interlocked, transfer switches with limiters which open starting circuit after 45 seconds when engine fails to start. Provide main contacts that mechanically lock in all positions without the use of hooks, latches, magnets or springs.

10. Provide time-delay features to prevent excessive transfer and retransfer operation during momentary line voltage dips; for load retransfer; for start; for engine shutdown; and for cool down timer. Provide minimum of two Form C (12C, 12D) dry contacts to indicate switch in emergency position.

11. Equip units with trickle-charger (minimum 2 ampere) for the starting battery; with indicators for starting battery; and with load/no-load test switches for manual simulation of power outages including standby unit operation and load transfer, and time-clock exerciser circuit for automatic periodic exercise of engine-generator units.

12. Provide programmable clock exercisers (including "with/without load" selector switch). 13. Provide mechanical and electrical interlocking to prevent source-to-source connection through

either the power or control wiring. 14. Provide independent break-before-make action. 15. Provide contact to contact transfer speed for the manual operators identical to that for the

Automatic Transfer Switches electrical operator (independent of speed at which the handle is moved).

16. Provide main contacts that are 600VAC rated, long life, high pressure, silver alloy mechanically held contacts with magnetic "blowouts" and with multiple leaf arc chute barriers. Provide insulated transparent dead front within the enclosure (to protect servicing personnel when door is open). Provide neutral bar (with lugs).

17. Unless overridden by programmed transition, provide total transfer time (in either direction) that does not exceed 6 cycles at 60 Hz. with nominal voltage applied to the actuator.

18. Provide 20 #14 AWG, or cabled digital equivalent, in 1-1/2" conduit from transfer switch to remote annunciators.


MSA# 11172.00


19. Provide voltmeter, ammeter, frequency meter, programmed transition (0 to 7.5 seconds) and key operated test/normal/retransfer switch.

20. Equip transfer switches with permanently attached operating handles and quick-break/quick-make contact mechanisms suitable for safe manual operation under load.

B. Automatic Transfer Switches – Basis of Design

1. Design Base: Provide Automatic Transfer Switches equal to Cummins Power Generation (OTPC) series.

C. Bypass Isolation Units – Basis of Design

1. Design Base: Provide Bypass-Isolation units equal to Cummins Power Generation BTPC series. 2. Provide factory-fabricated, manually operated, bypass-isolation units and auxiliary equipment of

types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics, for services indicated to provide a means of directly connecting load conductors to either the normal or the emergency power source and isolating the automatic transfer switch.

3. Provide Bypass-Isolation component that is completely isolated from the associated Automatic Transfer Switch, via insulating barriers and separate access doors, to prevent hazard to operating personnel while servicing the Automatic Transfer Switch. Bus the Bypass-Isolation component (with copper bus) to the respective Automatic Transfer Switch, providing a complete pre-tested UL listed assembly. With the exception of manual operation, provide Bypass-Isolation Transfer Unit contacts, contact locking mechanisms, operating linkages, electrical ratings, etc. identical to those for the associated Automatic Transfer Switch. Provide all required control work so that the "engine run" circuit remains energized when the Bypass-Isolation Transfer Unit is in the "bypass-to-emergency" position, regardless of the status of the Automatic Transfer Switch.

4. Provide Bypass-Isolation Units with a true "drawout" design with safe means of manually bypassing and isolating the associated Automatic Transfer Switch, regardless of the condition or position of the Automatic Transfer Switch, and with an emergency back-up system should the Automatic Transfer Switch fail.

5. Provide switches with two-way bypass to emergency source, and with functionality as an independent manual transfer switch.

6. Provide bypass unit with an intermediate position to permit electrical operation and testing of automatic transfer switch without affecting power to critical load.

7. Provide drawout type units with gang operated externally operated handle mechanism arranged for padlocking in open position with 1 to 3 padlocks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide control wiring as required, in conduit, between transfer switches and generator control panels for engine start. Provide each installation with a 120V, 20A circuit to the battery charger and clock exerciser. Provide additional electrical work for other accessory components as required for a complete operational system (i.e. transfer switch, remote annunciator, monitoring equipment, support equipment, etc.).

B. Upon completion of installation and after circuitry has been energized, demonstrate capability and compliance of transfer switches with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Test, by means of simulated power outage, automatic start-up by remote-automatic starting, transfer of load, and automatic shut-down. Prior to this test adjust, for proper system coordination, transfer switch timers. Monitor throughout the test, engine temperature, oil pressure, battery charge level, generator voltage, amperes, and frequency.

D. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner's building personnel in procedures for starting-up, testing and operating transfer switches. Also train Owner's personnel in periodic maintenance of components.



MSA# 11172.00

LUMINAIRES 265113 - 1

SECTION 265113 - LUMINAIRES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Provide luminaires as indicated on drawings.

B. Provide submittals for luminaires, ballasts, lamps, and applicable accessories. Arrange luminaire submittals in booklet form with separate sheets for each luminaire, assembled by luminaire "type" in alphabetical order, with proposed luminaire and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet including job-specific full catalog number. Submit details indicating compatibility with ceiling grid system. Provide separately tabbed sections for lamp submittals and for ballast submittals. Include lamp/ballast schedules (by luminaire type) and related technical submittal data in lamp submittals and in ballast submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the manufacturers listed on the Luminaire Schedule. Provide products of one of the manufacturers listed in this section for products that are not defined on the Luminaire Schedule.

B. Various luminaire types and manufacturers are indicated on the Luminaire Schedule. Provide luminaires that comply with minimum requirements as stated therein.

C. Review drawings and specifications of other trades to verify ceiling types, modules, suspension systems appropriate to installation.

D. If a particular submittal does not include basis of design manufacturer or model number, provide "approved equal", “equal” and “equivalent” manufacturers and model numbers compliant with, and equivalent to: quality, performance, dimensions, and aesthetics as the respective basis of design.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Luminaires

1. Luminaires designated by letters are defined as indicated on the Luminaire Schedule. 2. Provide luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories with U.L. listing and labeling for their specific

application for this project. 3. Provide luminaires, of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not limited to,

housings, energy-efficient lamps, lampholders, reflectors, energy efficient ballasts, starters and wiring. Ship luminaires factory-assembled, with components required for a complete operating installation.

4. Fabricate luminaires with concealed hinges and catches, with metal parts grounded as common unit, and so constructed as to dampen ballast generated noise.

5. Install surface mounted ballasted luminaires with air spaces between luminaire and surface per latest edition of NFPA/NEC. Provide factory luminaire wiring that is per NEC, #16 AWG


MSA# 11172.00


minimum. Wire luminaires having medium base and mogul base sockets with not smaller than No. 16 or No. 14 wire respectively in accordance with the latest requirements of the National Electric Code.

B. Recessed Luminaires

1. Provide recessed luminaires with necessary gypsum board, plaster frames, and surface trim. 2. Provide recessed luminaires that are constructed without rolled edges and that are post-painted. 3. Provide door frames on troffer style luminaires with spring latches on door frames. 4. Provide static air function for luminaires unless otherwise noted. 5. Provide luminaires that are non-IC constructed unless otherwise noted. 6. Provide junction boxes and serviceable components (ballasts, thermal protection devices, fuses,

etc.) for recessed luminaires that are accessible for service and replacement from below the ceiling, without removing ceiling components.

7. Where plaster frames are inferred for luminaires (either by narrative, or by catalog number, or by application) interpret the actual function to mean for mounting within gypsum board, wet plaster or similar type inaccessible ceiling system. Field verify related requirements and provide required accessories, such as frames, accordingly.

8. Provide UL approved (listed and labeled) thermal protection per latest edition of NFPA/NEC for recess mounted luminaires.

9. Provide recessed fluorescent luminaires that are suitably constructed to operate with "P" rated ballasts as specified hereafter.

C. Ballasts

1. Provide same manufacturer and catalog number for ballasts of the same type. Refer to the drawings for input voltage requirements. If fusing requirements are indicated herein or on the Luminaire Schedule, fuse each ballast separately with a replaceable fuse external to the ballast.

2. Provide ballasts that are compatible with power line carrier systems, and that do not adversely impact such systems.

3. Provide luminaires shown on drawings with multi-level switching or similar special circuiting with multiple ballasts. Provide single ballasts wherever possible for other applications.

4. Provide outdoor ballasts (or ballasts indoors, but in unconditioned areas) that are cold weather low starting temperature type (-20 degrees Fahrenheit).

D. Solid State Programmed Rapid Start Electronic Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts - T8 & Long Twin-Tube Lamps

1. Provide electronic, programmed rapid start fluorescent lamp ballasts for T8 and Long Twin Tube fluorescent lamps, specifically designed for operating lamp types indicated. Electronic Ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance, Motorola or Magnetek, 100% electronic with reduced harmonics and the following characteristics.

a. High power factor (0.9 minimum). b. Full and constant lumen output at voltage ranges of 90V to 145V (120V ballast) and 200V

to 320V (277V ballast). c. Ballast Factor of 0.85 to .93. d. Programmed Rapid-start. e. Type 1, Class P. f. Sound rated "A". g. Automatic reset type thermal protection. h. U.L., CSA and CBM approved, listed and labeled. i. NAECA and EPCA compliant. j. FCC compliant (Class A) for EMI / RFI (conducted and radiated).


MSA# 11172.00


k. Input current Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) less than 20% of input current. l. Lamp Current Crest Factor >1.35 and <=1.5. m. Ballast shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without

damage. n. Ballast to be high frequency electronic type and operate lamps at a frequency above 42 kHz

to avoid interference with infrared devices and eliminate visible flicker. o. Line transient withstand capability per IEEE 587-A. p. Socket voltage to luminaire ground or another socket shall not exceed the socket voltage

rating under any operating condition. q. Capability of operating each type of Long Twin Tube fluorescent lamp and two, three or

four foot T8 lamps. r. Five year manufacturer warranty from date of manufacture against defect in material and

workmanship, including replacement.

E. Solid State Rapid Start Electronic Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts - Compact Fluorescent Lamps

1. Provide electronic, rapid start fluorescent lamp ballasts for compact fluorescent lamps, specifically designed for operating lamp types indicated. Electronic Ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance, Motorola or Magnetek, 100% electronic with reduced harmonics and the following characteristics.

a. High power factor (0.95 minimum). b. Full and constant lumen output at voltage ranges of 90V to 145V (120V ballast) and 200V

to 320V (277V ballast). c. Ballast Factor of .95 to 1.05. d. Rapid-start. e. Type 1, Class P. f. Sound rated "A". g. Automatic reset type thermal protection. h. U.L., CSA and CBM approved, listed and labeled. i. NAECA and EPCA compliant. j. FCC compliant (Class A) for EMI / RFI (conducted and radiated). k. Input current Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) less than 20% of input current. l. Lamp Current Crest Factor 1.7 or less. m. Ballast to provide Lamp End-of-Life (EOL) Protection Circuit. n. Ballast shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without

damage. o. Ballast to be high frequency electronic type and operate lamps at a frequency above 42 kHz

to avoid interference with infrared devices and eliminate visible flicker. p. Capability of operating each type of compact fluorescent lamp q. Five year manufacturer warranty from date of manufacture against defect in material and

workmanship, including replacement.

F. Lamps

1. Provide lamps of the same type that are of the same manufacturer and catalog number. Contact engineer for direction prior to ordering related materials if a luminaire manufacturer requires a special lamp that is not addressed herein.

2. Provide compact fluorescent luminaires with T-5 lamps and smaller with end-of-life circuit cutout feature equivalent to Osram Sylvania “Quick Sense”

G. Compact Fluorescent Twin-Tube, Dual Twin-Tube, Triple-Tube, and Long Twin-Tube Lamps


MSA# 11172.00


1. Provide compact fluorescent twin-tube, dual twin-tube, triple-tube, and long twin-tube lamps that are minimum 82 CRI and minimum 10,000 hours rated. Provide lamps manufactured by G.E., Osram Sylvania, or Philips - equal to Osram Sylvania Dulux series.

2. Provide lamp color temperature as indicated in Luminaire Schedule.

H. T8 Fluorescent Lamps

1. Provide T8 fluorescent lamps that are rapid start, energy saving type, minimum 82 CRI, and minimum 20,000 hours rated. Provide lamps manufactured by G.E., Osram Sylvania, or Philips - equal to Osram Sylvania Octron series.

2. Provide lamp color temperature as indicated in Luminaire Schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install surface and recessed ceiling luminaires on grid and tile ceilings to agree with module of ceiling either displacing a tile, or unit on center of tile, or centered on grid lines.

B. Install flush mounted luminaires properly to eliminate light leakage between luminaire frame and finished surface.

C. Do not locate splice or tap within an arm, stem, or chain. Provide wiring continuous from splice in outlet box of the building wiring system to lamp socket, or to ballasts terminals in fluorescent luminaires.

D. Provide Type AC/MC Cable or wiring in minimum 1/2” diameter flexible metal conduit (with full parity sized green insulated equipment ground wire) for "drops" from building wiring system junction boxes to suspended ceiling mounted luminaires. Limit the length of these “drops” to 72”. Install "drops" to luminaires in gypsum board, and similar inaccessible ceiling systems, from identified accessible junction boxes.

E. Connect the following ahead of switching and other controls as applicable: exit signs, night-lights, switch-bypass devices, generator transfer (and similar) devices, emergency battery ballasts and luminaires utilized for emergency egress lighting. The only exceptions to this are photocell-only controls for outdoor emergency egress luminaires.

F. Provide luminaires and luminaire outlet boxes with hangers to properly support luminaire weight. Submit design of hangers, method of fastening, other than indicated or specified herein, for review by Owner's representative and review by ceiling installer. Anchor luminaires installed in, or on, suspended ceiling systems in strict compliance with NEC, including advance coordination with the ceiling installer. Support surface mounted luminaires greater than 2 feet in length at a point in addition to the outlet box luminaire stud.

G. Fasten electrical luminaires and brackets securely to structural supports. Install luminaires level and plumb.

H. Where special mounting conditions are encountered, such as mounting to rounded columns or similar special circumstances, provide special factory fabricated mounting means (i.e., brackets designed to conform with curvature of rounded columns, or to conform with similar special surfaces).


MSA# 11172.00


I. Provide stems and chains for luminaires as designated by the Owner's representative where deemed necessary by the owner’s representative to achieve a functional and neat installation. Contact owner’s representative to determine pendant, stem, and chain lengths if mounting height is not indicated.

J. Provide plaster frames, or gypsum board frames, or similar kits for recessed luminaires installed in other than suspended grid type acoustical ceiling systems. Brace frames temporarily to prevent distortion during handling.

K. Where used for temporary lighting prior to time of Substantial Completion, replace incandescent lamps, as well as lamps that are defective, damaged or burned out.

L. Wear clean white cotton gloves when handling the luminaires reflective and diffusing surfaces. Clean surfaces including dust, finger prints, paint, etc with a clean dry cheesecloth after interior work has been completed. Remove plastic shipping bags from luminaires only after work in the respective area is complete.

M. Aim adjustable luminaires as directed in field by Owner's representative.

3.2 SPARE LAMPS

A. Furnish stock of unused, unopened replacement lamps amounting to at least 15 percent, but not less than 4 lamps in each case, of each type and size lamp used in each type luminaire. Deliver and neatly store this replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space.



MSA# 11172.00

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 270001 - 1

SECTION 270001 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Administrative requirements applicable to work of this Division.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Acceptance Testing Authorities (ATA): The individuals and/or business entities that participate in Acceptance Testing and report to the Owner when work appears to be compete. These parties represent the interest of the Owner.

B. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): The governmental agency or sub-agency having authority over the construction process and having the ultimate authority to enforce, uphold and rule on codes and safety compliance at the project site.

C. Contractor: The entity(s) contractually responsible for performing work of this Division.

D. Wherever the words “Site,” “Project Site,” or “Premises” appears in these specifications or related drawings, it shall be interpreted to mean real estate, buildings and structures where work shall be performed and where products shall be installed and reside.

E. Commissioning Authority: An agent of the Owner, often independent of the design team, responsible for ensuring compliance with the Owner’s project intent. The commissioning authority represents the interest of the Owner.

F. Communications Room: An architectural space designated for housing communications equipment and/or terminating and cross connecting communications circuits.

G. Contractor of Record: A business entity entering into a contract for any element of work defined in the Project Documents directly with the Owner, directly with the Construction Manager or directly with a General Contractor.

H. Designer: The Consultant(s) representing the Owner and directly responsible for specification of work within this Division, including related drawings. The Designer may or may not be affiliated with the architectural or an engineering firm of record for the Project. The Designer is a member of the project Design Team.

I. Furnish: To supply product or labor (context dependent) including associated shipping, storage, travel, lodging, miscellaneous and warranty expenses.


MSA# 11172.00


J. High Voltage: For the sake of this Division, greater than 70.7VAC RMS; greater than or equal to 100VAC P-P; greater than 70.7VDC.

K. Install: To supply labor, tools and incidental materials necessary to handle, store, mount, terminate, program, configure and adjust a product in order to fulfill the requirements of the Project.

L. Low Voltage: For the sake of this Division, less than or equal to 70.7VAC RMS; less than 100VAC P-P; less than or equal to 70.7VDC

M. Medium Voltage: For the sake of this Division, greater than 70.7VAC RMS; greater than or equal to 100VAC P-P; greater than 70.7VDC.

N. Nominal Operating Level: The standard signal voltage/power reference which a manufacturer has designed its products’ inputs and outputs to operate at in order to achieve specified performance.

O. Provide: To furnish and install, inclusive of accessories, modules, and ancillary items necessary to render the respective product and system fully operational and usable to the Owner for the intended purpose.

P. Structured Cabling: Cabling used as part of a “Structured Cabling System.”

Q. Structured Cabling System: A standardized repetitive passive physical infrastructure of cables, conductors, terminations, hardware and supporting products that together are used to enable the conveyance of signals, information, and data between different locations. Such systems are commonly constructed in accordance with standards published by various standards organizations, including but not limited to the TIA, EIA and BICSI. In some cases, specialized derivatives of these standards are constructed to meet specialized system needs. Common usages of structured cabling systems include such things as computer or data networks (including wireless infrastructure), telephone systems, building automation systems, electronic safety and security systems, and building intercommunications systems. The structured cabling system does not include any active electronic equipment.

R. Substantial Completion (Division 27 and 28 only):

1. The point in the Project where work of this Division that occurs at the project site has been completed. For work to be substantially complete, the following must be valid:

a. Products have been delivered and installed at the project site, and; b. Portable and loose equipment have been delivered to the project site, and; c. Systems have been installed, tested, adjusted and are operational for their intended purpose,

and; d. Products, including cables, have been labeled in accordance with the Contract Documents,

and; e. Systems are performing in accordance with the design intent, and; f. Systems have been demonstrated to the Owner as complete and working, and;

S. Supply: Used interchangeably with “furnish.”

T. TeleData: A term used to broadly categorize the elements that encompass the integrated voice, video and data communications systems within a building. Elements include of such things as wired and wireless electronics, cabling and connectivity and other products required for their installation and operation. Analog and VoIP telephone systems, Ethernet data network systems, structured voice, data and video cabling systems, and video distribution systems fall under this broad category.

U. This Division: This Section and each specification section beginning with the same two digit number.


MSA# 11172.00


V. Work: The supply of products, materials, labor, incidentals and services necessary to fulfill the requirements of the Project.

W. Acronyms and Abbreviations:

1. ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act. 2. AM: Amplitude Modulation. 3. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. 4. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 5. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials. 6. ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Mode. 7. AWG: American Wire Gauge. 8. BGP: Border (Boundary) Gateway Protocol. 9. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Services International. 10. BIT: Binary digit. 11. BOM: Bill of Materials. 12. Bps: Bits per second. 13. BRI: Basic Rate Interface. 14. CAD: Computer Aided Design. 15. CATV: Community Antenna Television. 16. CCITT: Consultative Committee for International Telegraphy and Telephony. 17. CCTV: Closed Circuit Television. 18. CDDI: Copper Distributed Data Interface. 19. CLEC: Competitive Local Exchange Carrier. 20. CPE: Customer Premises Equipment. 21. CPU: Central Processing Unit. 22. CSA: Canadian Standards Associations. 23. CSMA/CA: Carrier-Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance. 24. CSMA/CD: Carrier-Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. 25. CSU: Channel Service Unit. 26. dB: Decibel. 27. Device ID: A system specific label assigned to a product to uniquely identify it within a given a

system. 28. DSL: Digital Subscriber Line. 29. DSU: Data Service Unit/Digital Service Unit. 30. DTE: Data Terminal Equipment. 31. EF: Entrance Facility. 32. EGP: Exterior Gateway Protocol. 33. EIA: Electronics Industries Association. 34. EMI: Electromagnetic Interface. 35. ER: Equipment Room (a type of Communications Room). 36. FCC: Federal Communications Commission. 37. FDDI: Fiber Data Distributed Interface. 38. GB: Gigabyte. 39. Gb/s (Gbps): Gigabits per second. 40. GHz: Gigahertz. 41. IDF: Intermediate Distribution Frame (Replaced by TR). 42. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. 43. IP: Internet Protocol. 44. IPX: Internet Packet Exchange. 45. ISDN: Integrated Services Digital Network. 46. ISO: International Organization for Standardization. 47. ISP: Internet Service Provider. 48. LAN: Local Area Network.


MSA# 11172.00


49. LANE: LAN Emulation. 50. LASER: Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation. 51. LAT: Local Area Transport. 52. LATA: Local Access and Transport Area. 53. LEC: Local Exchange Carrier. 54. LED: Light Emitting Diode. 55. MAC: Media Access Control. 56. MAN: Metropolitan Area Network. 57. MB: Megabyte. 58. Mb/s (Mbps): Megabits per second. 59. MDF: Main Distribution Frame (Replaced by ER). 60. MHz: Megahertz. 61. MODEM: Modulator/Demodulator. 62. ms: Millisecond. 63. MTBF: Mean Time Between Failures. 64. MPLS: Multi Protocol Label Switching. 65. NEC: National Electric Code 66. OC: Optical Carrier. 67. OFCI: Owner Furnished Contractor Installed. 68. OFE: Owner Furnished Equipment. 69. OFOI: Owner Furnished Owner Installed. 70. OSI: Open Systems Interconnection. 71. PAN: Personal Area Network. 72. pps: Packets Per Second. 73. PRI: Primary Rate Interface. 74. PSTN: Public Switched Telephone Network. 75. QoS: Quality of Service. 76. RAID: Random Array of Inexpensive Disks. 77. RAM: Random Access Memory. 78. RBOC: Regional Bell Operating Company. 79. RF: Radio Frequency. 80. RFC: Request for Comment. 81. RFI: Request for Information/ Radio Frequency Interference. 82. RFP: Request for Proposal. 83. RFQ: Request for Quotation. 84. RIP: Routing Information Protocol. 85. RMON: Remote Monitor. 86. ROM: Read Only Memory. 87. SCTE: Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers 88. SMTP: Simple Main Transfer Protocol. 89. SNA: Systems Network Architecture. 90. SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol. 91. SONET: Synchronous Optical Network. 92. TB: Terabyte. 93. TCP: Transmission Control Protocol. 94. TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. 95. TIA: Telecommunications Industries Association. 96. TR: Telecommunications Room (a type of Communications Room) 97. VoIP: Voice over Internet Protocol. 98. WAN: Wide Area Network.


MSA# 11172.00



A. Comply with Section 270002 “Quality Assurance for Communications.”

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Supply submittals for the Work.

B. Comply with requirements of Section 270501 “Submittals for Communications.”

1.6 SUPPLEMENTAL ENGINEERING SERVICES

A. In the event that the Designer is required to provide additional services as a result of Contractor errors, omissions or failure to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, or if the Designer is required to examine and evaluate any changes proposed by the Contractor solely for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Designer's expenses in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the Contractor and shall be deducted from any monies owed to the Contractor or billed separately, solely at the discretion of the Designer. Billable rates are the Designers standard rates, up to a maximum of $150 per man-hour.

1.7 INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS

A. In the event of inconsistencies or conflict within or between the Contract Documents, provide the better quality, more costly or greater quantity of Work and comply with the more stringent requirement. Seek the direction of the Architect, Engineer or Designer for clarification of conflicts as soon as a conflict is identified.

1.8 WARRANTY (PERIOD OF CORRECTION)

A. Product and workmanship shall be covered by the Contractor for a period of (1) year from date of Substantial Completion.

1. Supplied products with manufacturer’s warranties of less than the warranty term shall be extended and warranted by the Contractor for the full specified warranty term.

2. Supplied products featuring a standard manufacturer’s warranty whose term extends beyond the Contract Warranty term shall be facilitated by the Contractor for the full duration and under the terms and conditions of the manufacturer’s warranty.

B. The Warranty supplied shall be a full “System Warranty” that covers workmanship and products and includes coverage of onsite and off-site labor and related personnel transportation and product shipping expenses.

1. During this period, the Contractor shall remedy (at no cost to the Owner) any problem with the system, or any of its related components that is the result of defective materials, equipment settings, workmanship, or loss of programming.

C. Individual sections of this Division may feature more stringent requirements than those set forth in this Section. The most stringent of these requirements shall apply.


MSA# 11172.00


D. Warranty work shall be performed at the Contractor’s expense and to the satisfaction of the Owner.

E. Response Requirements:

1. During the Warranty Period, the Contractor shall:

a. Respond by phone within four (4) business hours of notice by the Owner of a problem, and;

b. Supply qualified personnel onsite within (1) business day or (72) contiguous hours (whichever comes first) to begin remediation of the problem, if the problem cannot be remediated over the phone in less time, and;

c. Supply “on-call” emergency response service labor (at the request and authorization of the Owner) at an hourly rate that does not exceed the Contractor’s published emergency service rates, or two-times the Contractor’s standard hourly rate, whichever is lower.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Materials, apparatus and equipment shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratory, Inc. label (or other nationally recognized testing laboratory label) where regularly supplied, and as additionally required by Code.

B. Products furnished shall be new, full weight and of the best quality. Similar supplied materials shall be of the same type and from the same manufacturer.

C. In the event that a specified product is discontinued by the manufacturer and is no longer available for purchase, replacement product of equal or greater value, performance and function as the discontinued Basis of Design product shall be furnished. The replacement product shall be from the same manufacturer as the Basis of Design product unless written permission has been granted by the Designer. The Contractor is solely responsible for researching and submitting proposed replacement product. The final decision as to whether a Contractor proposed replacement is acceptable lies solely with the Designer.

D. Substitute products shall only be considered provided that the Contractor has strictly adhered to the guidelines set forth under “Substitutions” as defined in this Section.

2.2 BASIS OF DESIGN

A. Some of the Contract Documents are prepared on the basis of specific products that are designated as the “Basis of Design.”

B. The Basis of Design products for the Work of this Division are designated explicitly within the specifications, and in the case of some products, designated by brand and model on the Drawings.

1. Where a product brand and model is expressly identified on the Drawings, this product represents the Basis of Design for that instance of the product in the associated system.

2. If a product brand and model is expressly listed on the Drawing(s) and it differs from the brand and model enumerated within the Specifications, the two are in conflict and the brand and model listed on the Drawing(s) shall take precedence. The Contractor shall bring this conflict to the attention of the Designer.


MSA# 11172.00


C. The combination of Basis of Design products and the interconnection thereof collectively represent a work that includes the feature set and performance intended by the Designer and the Owner. The specifications identify additional manufacturers whose equipment may be used in the system, provided the use of such products achieves the same capabilities and performance as that of the specified combination of the Basis of Design products. Due to the varied and integrated nature of modern communications products, there is no guarantee that any single product manufactured by any one of the listed additional manufacturers will be an exact equivalent to a single Basis of Design product in terms of functionality, capability or performance. Therefore, where the use of substitute product is considered, the product shall be verified by the substituting party to include the capabilities, features and performance as that of the Basis of Design product. Work of the Contract shall include covering the cost of additional products and labor necessary to achieve the same end results as would be achieved by using the specified combination of Basis of Design products, including additional costs for coordination, modifications to the building, pathway modifications, casework and furniture modifications, power modifications, licensing, or anything else that may cause additional expense to the Owner. In addition, costs incurred by the Owner’s design team to accommodate such changes shall be the responsibility of the party making the substitution.

2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. A substitution is the use of any product other than that identified as the “Basis of Design,” the “Standard of Quality,” or an “Additional Approved Product.”

B. Substitutions require pre-bid approval. Only substitutions authorized via addendum shall be considered.

C. Substitutions are considered on a product-by-product and model specific basis.

D. Substitution Submittal Requirements:

1. Substitution requests must be received by the Designer sufficiently in advance of the scheduled bid date to allow time for review and issuance of an Addendum. If the timing of the request does not permit an Addendum, substitution shall not be considered or acceptable.

2. Substitution requests shall consist of the following for each proposed substitution:

a. Substitution Request Letter:

1) On company letterhead, for each specific product substitution request. The letter shall include the following:

i) The specification section and paragraph number and drawing number where the product requirement is identified.

ii) The specific system in which the product is to be used. iii) The reason the Contractor is requesting the substitution. iv) Statement of impact on the system(s) in which the product is used. v) An enumeration declaring each difference between the Basis of Design

product and the proposed substitute, including performance differences, technical specifications difference, feature differences, method of operation differences, warranty differences, dimensional differences, method and means of control differences, compliance differences. Failure to disclose 100% of the differences in this manner may be grounds for a post-bid and/or post–installation rejection of Contractor proposed substitute product.

2) A separate letter shall be furnished for each product substitution request.


MSA# 11172.00


b. Product Datasheets/Brochures:

1) Complete system brochure(s) and/or individual product data sheet(s), as applicable and appropriate for the Basis of Design product(s) the requested substitute is intended to replace.

2) Complete system brochure(s) and/or individual product data sheet(s), as applicable, for the proposed substitute product(s).

3. Failure to furnish the required information is sufficient grounds for rejection of the request for substitution.

4. A demonstration of the proposed substitute equipment and/or system(s) may be required by the Designer prior to consideration of substitute products or system(s). Costs associated with these demonstrations are the responsibility of the entity submitting the request.

5. Substitution Pre-Bid Submittal Exceptions:

a. Additional Approved Manufacturer(s):

1) These specifications may use phrases such as “or equal by,” or “Additional Approved Manufacture(s)” for products. When a product category uses these designations, it is an indication that a product model from one of the listed manufacturer(s) may be provided without the requirement to obtain pre-bid approval for the model selected, provided that the Contractor has adequately researched and has become familiar with the Basis of Design product and intends to supply a model that is equal to or superior than the Basis of Design product.

2) Since it is impractical to enumerate every characteristic of modern electronic products, it is incumbent upon the Contractor to research manufacturer’s publications to obtain the fullest possible understanding of Basis of Design / Standard of Quality products the Contractor proposes to substitute with a product from any Additional Approved Manufacturer considered.

3) Although not mandatory, for the Contractor’s own protection, model specific pre-bid approval is strongly encouraged.

4) The decision as to whether a Contractor selected model from a list of Approved Additional Manufacturer(s) is acceptable remains solely with the Designer, and the Designer’s decision is final.

E. Costs that result from the use of substitute products, including costs for additional equipment, accessories, modules, interface products, cables, software, and programming, as well as costs for any additional labor, materials, and products incurred by other trades or members of the project Design Team or Owner, are the sole responsibility of the Contractor making the substitution. This includes costs that may not be incurred or known until after Contract award or Work execution. Such costs shall be deducted from final sum payable to the Contractor.

F. Post Contract award substitutions may be considered, but only if the proposed substitution includes substantial additional benefit to the Owner. Post award substitutions are considered solely at the discretion and convenience of the Designer. For a post Contract award substitution to be considered, one or more of the following shall apply:

1. The Designer initiates the request for substitution. 2. A basis of design product has become discontinued and is no longer available, and as a result, the

use of a substitute product has become a necessity to meet the Owner’s objectives for the Project. See “Discontinued Products.”

3. The request for substitution is accompanied by a proposal that identifies the benefits to the Owner, including a fair-market Contract price reduction.


MSA# 11172.00


2.4 DISCONTINUED PRODUCTS

A. The availability of products shall be verified prior to submitting pricing for Work of the Contract.

B. In the event that a specified product is discontinued at any time and becomes unavailable for use on the Project, provide a replacement product deemed acceptable to the Designer. Replacement product shall be of equal or greater value, performance and functionality.

C. Replacement product shall be from the basis of design manufacturer, from one of the additional product manufacturers identified for the product within the Section, or from another manufacturer deemed acceptable to the Designer.

D. The cost for the supply and installation of suitable replacement product is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

E. Replacement products are considered substitutions and require Designer review and authorization. See “Substitutions.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORK AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for complete installation of systems required to comply with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ), as indicated within the Contract Documents.

B. Work shall be functional and complete in every detail, including items required to complete the system, regardless of whether each necessary item is fully enumerated in the specs or shown on the Drawings.

C. Special attention shall be given to access to working and controlling parts. Adjustable parts shall be within easy reach. Removable parts shall have space for removal.

D. Contractor and Subcontractors shall be fully knowledgeable of the details of Work to be performed by other trades and take necessary steps to integrate and coordinate Work of this Division with that of other Divisions and other trades.

E. Wherever tables or schedules show quantities, they shall not be interpreted to represent the total contract quantity requirement, but instead a portion of the contract requirement. The Contractor shall be responsible for the higher quantity communicated by the drawings, within the specifications and on the schedules/tables. Seek clarification from the Designer should a discrepancy be found.

F. The Designer and Owner’s Representative may, at their sole discretion, condemn or reject any Work, materials or equipment not in accordance with the Contract Documents or the manufacturer’s specifications or drawings reviewed by the Designer or Owner.

G. Work or equipment that is rejected shall be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner and Designer at the Contractor’s expense. Work or equipment that is rejected shall be so stated in writing by the Owner or Designer.

H. Such decisions that the Owner or Designer may make with respect to questions concerning the quality, fitness of materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be binding upon the parties thereto.


MSA# 11172.00


I. Work shall fully comply with the Contract Documents and manufacturer’s recommended installation guidelines.

J. Work shall be performed with the best practices of the trade for performance, functionality, safety, endurance, and aesthetics.

K. Coordinate ordering and installation of equipment with long lead times or having a major impact on work by other trades so as not to delay the job or impact the schedule.

L. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. Consult the Designer for direction.

M. Set equipment to accurate line and grade, level and align components.

N. Supply scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery of equipment and apparatus furnished into the premises. These items shall be removed from premises when no longer required.

O. Equipment shall not be hidden or covered up prior to inspection by the Owner’s representative. Work that is determined unsatisfactory shall be corrected immediately.

P. Work shall be installed level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to prevailing building lines, except as expressly detailed otherwise or required for proper form, function or Designer intended operation.

Q. Install equipment and materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Bring conflicts between the manufacturer’s written instructions and the Contract Documents to the attention of the Designer for review and direction.

R. Upon completion of installation of equipment and communication circuitry, energize circuitry and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with re-testing.

3.2 TESTING

A. General:

1. Upon complete physical installation of products, align, balance, and adjust equipment to make it usable to the Owner for the intended purpose, and ensure compliance with the Contract Documents.

2. Test each system, and each component thereof, and correct deficiencies prior to scheduling acceptance testing.

3. Replace malfunctioning or damaged products with new product, following immediately with retesting until satisfactory performance and specification compliant conditions are achieved.

B. Operational Testing:

1. Perform operational testing of supplied products individually and collectively to verify conformance with the Contract Documents, to ensure compliance with the product manufacturer’s published specifications, and as additionally necessary for the system to meet the intended purpose.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Perform operational testing of Owner furnished equipment to the extent necessary to verify overall system functionality and specification compliance. Report any compliance problems that are directly the result of Owner Furnished Equipment.

3. Although each system requires additional supplemental testing to confirm compliance, the following testing shall be conducted as they apply to the supplied systems products.

a. Verify each function of provided equipment as applicable to the functionality and intended use of the system.

b. Test each system input and output. c. Test each remote control. d. Test each source device. e. Setup and test portable equipment.

C. Performance Testing:

1. Perform measurements and testing necessary to demonstrate performance compliance.

3.3 TRAINING

A. Training shall be supplied for each section of this Division and for each unique system provided.

B. The Owner shall have the right to use the total allocated training for a period of (365) calendar days following final completion of onsite work, solely at its discretion.

C. Training shall be supplied as expressly identified within individual sections. Where training requirements are not otherwise expressly identified, the Contractor shall furnish a minimum of two (2) hours per unique system, per section. The Contractor shall presume that at least two (2) discrete trips to the project site shall be required per unique system to conduct training.

D. Training dates and times shall be coordinated with the Owner’s designated training representative(s).

E. Training shall cover the following:

1. Normal system use and operation. 2. Procedures and schedules involved in troubleshooting and performing routine preventative

maintenance. 3. Other facets as identified in individual sections.

F. Agenda and relevant training handouts shall be prepared and distributed to attendees at each training session.

G. A sign-in sheet shall be created and used for each training session. The sheet shall identify the following, at a minimum:

1. Specification section reference and system(s) being trained. 2. Date and starting time of the session. 3. Signatures of attendees. 4. Ending time of the session, along with a separate owner signature certifying the ending time. 5. Training outline/agenda.

H. Recording of Sessions:


MSA# 11172.00


1. When a related section requires recording of supplied training sessions, they shall be recorded. 2. Recordings shall be supplied on DVD video format media playable in standard consumer grade

reproduction appliance. Recordings do not need to be professionally edited but shall feature intelligible audio and a clear image of the subject trainer and any supplemental visual content material to the training.

3. Recordings shall be turned over and signed for by an Owner’s training representative at the end of each session. A copy of a signed delivery receipt shall be included as part of the closeout documentation.

4. Contractor shall require each attendee to sign-in at the start of each training session. The sign-in form shall summarize the training conducted, specification section reference and system being trained on, as well as the starting time and duration of training. Following training, a representative of the Owner shall sign the form, acknowledging the same. Contractor shall retain the original copy of these forms and turn over a photo copy of the form to the Owner’s representative as evidence of training. Training conducted without this official record of training shall not be considered as part of the Contractor’s training obligation.

I. In order for a training session to count towards the training obligation, each of the following shall be met:

1. Training occurs after Training Submittal review. 2. Training session outlines/agenda are distributed at each session. 3. Quality Assurance requirements for trainer have been met. 4. Training occurs after the system / section is fully complete and working (usually following final

Acceptance Testing). Training in advance of this requires Designer approval. 5. Contractor fully complies with sign-in sheet requirements for every session. 6. Contractor maintains a master training log.



MSA# 11172.00

QUALITY ASSURANCE FOR COMMUNICATIONS 270002 - 1

SECTION 270002 - QUALITY ASSURANCE FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 01 Specification Sections and Division 27 General Requirements Section apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Quality Assurance requirements for Work of this Division.

B. Related Requirements:

1. This Section identifies the minimum requirements for the Project. Comply with the requirements of the Northern Kentucky University Technology Infrastructure Standard, dated 01/18/2012, or most recent published edition. This document shall be referred to as the “Owner’s Standards Document.”

a. The requirements of the Contract Documents and the Owner’s Standards Document shall be additive. E.g., if the Contract Documents require cables to be labeled, and the Owner’s standards do not indicate labeling, labeling shall be provided as specified in the Contract Documents.

b. Where this Section and the Owner’s Standards Document are in direct conflict, the Owner’s Standards Document shall supersede the requirements of this Section. E.g., if the Contract Documents require cables to be labeled, and the Owner’s Standards Document expressly states do not label cables, the Documents are in direct conflict and the Owner’s Standards Document shall supersede the Contract Documents.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 270501 “Submittals for Communications.”


A. General Qualifications:

1. Business history of the last five (5) contiguous years performing work of similar type, value and scope as that required of the Contract Documents.

2. Capable of demonstrating through valid references and other means that it has successfully completed no less than six (6) projects of similar type, monetary size, and scope of work within the last twenty-four (24) calendar months.

3. A “Factory-authorized” reseller (distributor, dealer, integration partner, value-added reseller, channel partner) for the products furnished for each Section equivalent to 70% of the product value for the Section.


MSA# 11172.00


4. House substantial business operations within a (300)-mile radius of the project site. 5. Employ full-time service staff based within a (50)-mile radius of the project site.

B. Supply any additional information requested that is deemed appropriate by the Designer for validating qualifications.

C. Employ locally licensed electrician(s) for the performance of the Work that is required by the local jurisdiction to be performed by licensed electrician(s).

D. Superintendent/Project Manager Qualifications:

1. Furnish the services of an experienced superintendent/project manager who shall be constantly in charge of the Work, together with a qualified foreman and technical specialists to properly install, connect, adjust, start, operate and test the Work involved.

2. Qualifications are subject to the review and acceptance by the Designer and Owner. Unless the Designer and Owner grant prior permission, the same superintendent/project manager shall be utilized throughout the duration of the Project and shall remain responsible for the complete scope of the Work.

E. Subcontractor Qualifications:

1. If the Contractor, as a singular entity, does not meet 100% of the quality assurance requirements for each specification section, the Contractor shall enlist the services of qualified subcontractors to perform the Work of those specific section(s). This includes, but is not limited to, the supply of the products for the Section and also the supply of the project engineering services, preparation of shop drawings and section submittals, technical installation labor, training, warranty, post-installation support and service.

2. The Contractor shall ensure that each subcontractor supplies the services of a project manager to represent its interests at the same project meetings in which the Contractor participates. This requirement is mandatory and goes towards ensuring that the special needs and timing of subcontract work is represented to the entire project team.

3. The Designer and Owner reserve the right to disqualify the use of any subcontractor that does not meet the quality assurance requirements set forth in these specifications. Should a subcontractor be disqualified, the Contractor shall supply the services of a different subcontractor that complies with the published quality assurance requirements. The Contractor is solely responsible for costs incurred as a result. It is therefore incumbent upon the Contractor to pre-qualify subcontractor choice(s) prior to submitting pricing for work.

4. For the purpose of achieving quality assurance compliance, an equipment vendor that is not performing the technical installation labor associated with work of a Section shall not be considered a subcontractor.

F. Training Qualifications:

1. Personnel conducting training shall be knowledgeable of the product, system and technology on which they train. Personnel shall be factory trained, factory certified and/or otherwise recognized by the Designer as possessing sufficient experience and knowledge in the subject area.

G. Additional Qualifications for Structured Cabling Systems Work:

1. Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) on staff shall be responsible for the Project. The RCDD shall have sufficient experience in this project type as to be able to lend adequate technical support to the field forces during installation, warranty period, and extended warranty periods and maintenance contracts.


MSA# 11172.00


2. The RCDD and lead technician(s) on the Project shall have a thorough understanding of the following, and Work performed shall be compliant with the following:

a. TIA/EIA-568-C standards, including TIA/EIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises, TIA/EIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard and TIA/EIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components Standard.

b. TIA/EIA-569, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

c. TIA/EIA-590, Standard for Physical Location and Protection of Below-Ground Fiber Optic Cable Plant.

d. TIA/EIA-606, The Administrative Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Building.

e. TIA/EIA-607, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.

f. The most recent published edition of the “TELECOMMUNICATIONS DISTRIBUTION METHODS MANUAL” published by the Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI).

3. Installation practices shall be compliant with referenced and applicable standards, regulations, and codes.

4. Shop drawings shall be prepared by, or under the direct supervision of the RCDD. Each drawing shall be reviewed, signed and stamped with the RCDD stamp and signature of the responsible project engineer.

5. Each as-built drawing shall be prepared by, or under the direct supervision of the RCDD. Each drawing shall be reviewed, signed and stamped with the RCDD stamp and signature of the responsible project engineer.

H. Additional Qualifications for Audio and Video Systems Work:

1. AV Project Engineer:

a. InfoComm International CTS-D® Certified, and; b. Manufacturer trained on key products being installed.

2. AV Technician Qualifications:

a. InfoComm International CTS-I® or CTS-D® Certified, and; b. Manufacturer trained on key products being installed.

3. AV Installer Qualifications:

a. InfoComm International CTS-I® Certified, or ESPA.org EST-L2 or EST-L3 Certified.

4. Shop drawings shall be prepared by, or under the direct supervision of a qualified AV Project Engineer. Each shop drawing shall be reviewed, signed and stamped with the CST-D® stamp of the responsible AV Project Engineer.

5. Each as-built drawing shall be reviewed, signed and stamped with the CST-I® stamp of the AV Technician responsible.

6. Installation performed by other than a qualified AV Technician shall be performed by qualified AV Installers. These Installers shall perform their work under the direct supervision of a qualified AV Technician. The ratio of AV Installers to AV Technicians shall not exceed 3 to 1.

7. System adjustments shall be made by a qualified AV Technician, AV Project Engineer, and manufacturer employees.


MSA# 11172.00



PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

3.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Supply documentation that demonstrates the qualification for each requirement articulated in this Section.



MSA# 11172.00

Existing Conditions and Demolition 270004 - 1

SECTION 2070004 - EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Requirements relating to existing conditions, demolition, removal, and reinstallation of existing work installed at the project site.



1.4 EVALUATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Prior to submitting pricing for Work of this Division, perform an inspection of existing conditions. Inspection shall include applicable accessible ceiling cavities, limited access areas, and systems.

1. Should the Contractor take exception to furnishing any demolition or new Work, such exception(s) shall be submitted to the Designer during bidding so that they can be addressed via Addendum.

2. No consideration shall be afforded the Contractor after bid for failing to adequately estimate sufficient allowances for Work that could have been estimated more sufficiently prior to bidding.

3. Existing communications Work is shown to a limited extent on the drawings and is shown for general planning and reference only. It is not the intent of the Contract Documents to accurately show existing conditions. Device and system locations are indicated based on cursory visual observations and/or from portions of Contract Documents prepared for previously installed work (not from "as-builts"). These locations are not guaranteed. The successful Contractor shall have access to any available existing building/system plans and specifications.

B. Unless specifically noted otherwise within the Contract Documents, new devices shall be provided. The existing wiring systems may be utilized only to the extent indicated within the Contract Documents and/or as directed by the Owner's representative in field.

1.5 AFFECT ON ADJACENT OCCUPIED AREAS

A. Locate, identify, and protect communication services, systems and cabling passing through demolition areas and serving other areas outside the demolition limits.


MSA# 11172.00


B. Maintain communications services and systems to areas outside demolition limits. When services or systems must be interrupted, install temporary services for affected areas.

C. Some wiring and/or conduit systems may be rendered inactive by demolition, causing disconnection of downstream outlets. Investigate and document similar conditions for every system prior to demolition. Provide necessary corrective Work, including, but not limited to, wiring and connections, prior to demolition to ensure that downstream devices remain permanently active throughout demolition, new construction and after project completion.

D. Coordinate Work and system shutdowns in advance with the Owner's representative and affected trades so that normal building and staff functions and other construction trades are minimally affected. Any demolition and/or new construction Work that may affect occupied areas, including those which are located outside the immediate area of project Work, shall be performed at special times as directed by the Owner's representative in the field.

E. Existing systems and components shall remain fully operational in occupied spaces during occupied periods.

1.6 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT WORK

A. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust, dirt and debris to adjacent finished areas and/or other system components. During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. Remove protection and barriers after demolition operations are complete.

1.7 PRE-EXISTING CODE VIOLATIONS

A. If any code or safety violations are discovered, they shall be immediately be detailed in writing and brought to the attention of the Owner's representative along with the proposed cost for corrections and impact (if any) on the construction schedule.

1.8 GENERAL DEMOLITION

A. Perform cutting and patching required for demolition in accordance with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B. Coordinate Work with the Owner prior to beginning communications demolition Work. Unless directed otherwise in the field, abandoned systems cables shall be disconnected at both ends and removed back to their respective sources, even if sources are outside of the boundaries of the project area.

C. Provide demolition for communications systems Work throughout the project area(s). Unless specifically noted on the drawings, or determined during a pre-demolition survey, abandoned existing communications work in the project area(s) shall be disconnected and removed in its entirety. Related Work shall comply with the notes identified within the Contract Documents.

D. Provide demolition to clear and remove existing communications Work that is to be abandoned and as required to accommodate new Work of every trade.

E. Remove abandoned, inactive and obsolete wiring, equipment and devices.


MSA# 11172.00


1. Abandoned conduits shall be cleared back to the source(s), including sources that are outside of the boundaries of the project area.

2. Abandoned systems cables shall be disconnected at both ends and removed back to the source(s), including sources that are outside of the boundaries of the project area.

F. Wiring and devices conflicting with construction related Work of any trade shall be removed and/or relocated as necessary and/or as directed by the Owner's representative in the field. Communications disconnections and/or reconnections for equipment to be removed and/or relocated by other trades shall be made by the communications contractor. This applies to existing communications Work whether shown on the drawings or not.

G. Extend wiring, as required, to accommodate new or relocated communications Work.

1.9 DISPOSITION OF REMOVED EQUIPMENT

A. Abandoned materials removed during demolition shall be referred to the Owner's representative for disposal instructions. Materials that the Owner elects to retain shall be neatly stored at the site, as designated by the Owner's representative. Lawfully dispose of materials that the Owner elects not to retain.

B. Devices or equipment designated for salvage, removal and reuse, or for turning over to the Owner shall be disconnected and removed undamaged. Remove related abandoned wiring back to the nearest "upstream" active junction box (field verify). Dedicated wiring shall be removed back to the source. Disconnect wiring and whips from equipment terminal points, and carefully transport and neatly store within a protected on-site storage location as directed in field.

C. The following applies to communications devices and equipment that is to remain or be reused for the Project:

1. Protect during demolition and construction. 2. Clean and service (if service is required) immediately prior to occupancy of the area. 3. If required to accommodate construction related activities, remove and reinstall equipment and

devices that are to remain. 4. Equipment and devices that require temporary removal shall be neatly stored in a protected area

until re-installed. 5. Components to be reused shall be cleaned (inside and out) and reinstalled where indicated on

drawings. Modify and/or extend related existing wiring as required. Transport components turned over to Owner to a designated location on site and neatly store by system type.



MSA# 11172.00

Submittals for Communications 270501 - 1

SECTION 270501 - SUBMITTALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Administrative, content and format requirements for preparation and submission of submittals.

1.3 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. Payment in full or in part may be withheld from the Contractor for failure to comply with submittal requirements articulated in the Contract Documents.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be furnished for each Section that includes one or more of the following elements of work:

1. Supply of one or more products. 2. Installation of one or more products. 3. Integration of one or more products. 4. Programming of one or more products. 5. Creation of one or more deliverable products. 6. Labeling of one or more products. 7. Contractor-based design or engineering of one or more products or systems.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Submittals shall be routed through established Project channels as identified by the Owner’s representative.

B. Coordinate, assemble, title, transmit and track Project submittals.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Label each submittal of each type similarly for consistency and so they appear to have been prepared by the same entity. Like-type submittals (e.g., Product Data) from different Sections shall have the same appearance and organization as those of other Sections.

D. Submittals prepared by subcontractors or vendors shall not be accepted unless prepared in compliance with the Contract Documents.

E. Submittal items listed in this Section represent the common items required to be supplied for the various specification Sections throughout the duration of the Project. Individual Sections will vary and may include additional or lesser requirements.

F. Designer reserves the right to require additional submittals or to waive select submittal requirements on a Section-by-Section basis.

G. The cost for preparation and transportation of submittals is Work of the Contract.

H. Bind physical/hardcopy submittals together. Do not submit loose or paper clipped documents.

I. Supply separate submittals for each Section. Do not combine multiple Sections together into a single submittal, except where expressly directed within the Contract Documents.

J. Where electronic submittals are required or permitted, comply with the requirements for electronic submittals as identified in the Contract Documents.

K. Organize submittals as identified in the Contract Documents.

L. Furnish submittals for different Sections each with its own transmittal form. A single transmittal shall not be used to identify submittals for more than one (1) Section at a time. This allows for tracking and processing efficiency, so that:

1. Each Section may be reviewed simultaneously by different individuals, as appropriate. 2. Individual Sections may be processed and returned more quickly than others when some Sections

require longer review times. 3. Submittals that are returned and marked as “Revise and Resubmit” do not cause submittals for

other Sections to be also be resubmitted due to the fact that they were bound together as a single unit.

M. Use of Electronic Drawings from the Owner’s Design Team:

1. If expressly permitted by the Owner and the terms of the Contract, editable electronic versions of standard-scale plan drawings may be made available for the creation of shop and as-built drawings. However, due to the proprietary nature of internal design systems, editable native-software versions of some drawings, including but not limited to system diagrams and details will not be made available in an editable form. In these cases, electronic versions of the drawings may be made available only in PDF, JPG or similar non-editable electronic form, at the sole discretion of the Designer.

3.2 SUBMITTAL TYPES

A. The following are the common submittal types referenced in this Section:

1. Quality Assurance (QA).


MSA# 11172.00


2. Quality Control (QC). 3. Product Data (PD). 4. Shop Drawing (SD). 5. Samples (SS). 6. Training (TG). 7. Field Observation Response (FO). 8. Pre-Acceptances (PA). 9. Closeout Submittal (CO).

3.3 SEQUENCE

A. Quality Assurance Submittal:

1. Submit Quality Assurance submittal(s) upon request. Deliver within 16 business hours.

B. Product Data Submittal:

1. Submit following contract award or notice of intent to award a contract. Product data shall be submitted and reviewed prior to procurement of materials.

C. Shop Drawing Submittal:

1. Submit for review prior to commencement of fabrication and installation. 2. Submit concurrently with Section-specific Product Data submittals.

D. Samples Submittal:

1. Submit concurrent with, or soon after, product data and shop drawings and prior to installation of Work.

E. Training Submittal:

1. Submit thirty (30) days prior to the first training session.

F. Field Observation Report Submittal:

1. Submit prior to punch list walkthrough.

G. Closeout Submittal:

1. Submit following completion of onsite work but not more than ten (10) business days following successful Acceptance Testing.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify each submittal uniquely.

B. Identify each submittal by specification Section number, submittal type, and submittal iteration.

C. The format for labeling the submittals shall be as follows:


MSA# 11172.00


1. [Section Number] - [Submittal Type Abbreviation] - [Submittal Iteration]. 2. Examples:

a. First Product Data Submittal for section 271513: “271513-PD-00.” b. Revised Product Data Submittal for section 271513: “271513-PD-01.” c. Second Revised Product Data Submittal for 271513: “271513-PD-02.”

3.5 CONTENTS

A. General:

1. Transmittal:

a. Supply a dedicated transmittal for submittals for each Section. b. Itemize the specific submittals included by Section, submittal type, and iteration.

2. Title Sheet:

a. Include a separate title sheet with each submittal, of each type. b. Title sheets for each Section, for each submittal type, shall have the same appearance. c. Title sheets for product data submittals shall be 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches. d. Title sheets for drawings shall be the same size as the associated drawings. e. Create title sheets to have the appearance and information identified on the sample title

sheet published at the end of this Section.

3. Index:

a. Include an index outlining and identifying the contents of the submittal. b. The index for drawing submittals shall be incorporated onto the title sheet of the

corresponding drawing set.

4. Check Lists:

a. Include each checklist published in the Contract Documents that corresponds to the type of submittal being supplied. Applicable check lists may be found at the end of this Section and at the end of individual Sections.

5. Title Blocks:

a. Drawing submittals shall be created on the Contractor’s, manufacturers, or vendor’s own title block. The title blocks of the Owner, Architect, Engineer, Designer or their Consultants shall not be reproduced on any document (electronic or hardcopy) that is prepared or altered by the Contractor.

6. Legend:

a. Drawing submittals shall include a legend of symbology.

B. Quality Assurance:

1. List of subcontractors to be used on the Project along with a description of the role each is shall play on the Project.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Proof of Quality Assurance compliance, as identified within Section 270002 “Quality Assurance for Communications” and in each individual Section.

3. The last six (6) projects that the Contractor (and each proposed subcontractor) has completed that are of similar scope, size, and contract value. References shall include:

a. Owner’s name and current contact information. b. Project address. c. Description of the system(s) and scope of actual work performed. d. Monetary contract value of the Work performed.

4. For Structured Cabling Systems Work:

a. Staff Certifications:

1) RCDD Certification for the staff member responsible for the Project. 2) Résumé, including the last ten (10) projects of the RCDD responsible for the

Project. 3) BICSI Technician’s certificate for each lead Technician on the Project.

5. For Audio and Video Systems Work:

a. Staff Certifications:

1) CTS-D Certifications for Project Engineers responsible for the Project. 2) CTS-D and/or CTS-I Certifications for AV Technicians responsible for the Project. 3) CTS and/or EST-L2 or EST-L3 Certifications for AV Installers for the Project.

6. For Audio and Video Systems Software Development:

a. Staff Qualifications:

1) Lead Programmer Certifications. 2) Lead Programmer Résumé. 3) Support Programmer Certifications 4) Support Programmer Résumé.

7. Financial Disclosure of the Contractor: Prior to contract award, upon request.

C. Product Data Submittals:

1. Bill of Materials (BOM):

a. Separate list for each system:

1) When a Section covers products for use in multiple systems, supply separate BOM for each unique system covered by the Section. Label each with the system name, space name, and room number.

b. Include the following:

1) Make, model, and description of each product. 2) Quantity estimates for each product.


MSA# 11172.00


3) Section paragraph number from which the product requirement is derived. Use drawing and detail references when the requirement is derived from the Drawings.

c. Organize the BOM to follow the order in which products appear within the Section. Products shown on the Drawings but not enumerated within the Specifications shall be placed at the end of the list and include a reference to the Drawing from which the product requirement was derived.

2. Product Datasheets:

a. Separate manufacturer datasheets for each product. b. Datasheets shall be manufacturer originals or first generation printed versions (i.e., from

PDF) of the manufacturer’s official electronic datasheet:

1) Distributor modified, distributor branded, and/or html based “web” datasheets are not acceptable.

2) Datasheets shall include size and technical support data.

c. Where manufacturer’s datasheets depict multiple products, versions and options, indicate via highlighting, underlining, or with bold visible arrows the model(s), version(s) and option(s) being supplied. Exact catalog number(s) shall be indicated.

d. Each datasheet shall be labeled with the Section paragraph reference number. Datasheets shall include the Drawing reference when no specific paragraph reference exists within the Section.

D. Shop Drawings Submittals:

1. General:

a. Drawing descriptions identify the required contents of common drawings required under the Contract.

b. Drawings identified within individual Sections, along with any additional drawings deemed necessary by the Designer, are required.

c. Drawing Scales:

1) Floor plans shall be drawn to scale. 2) Section drawings shall be drawn to scale. 3) Elevation drawings shall be drawn to scale. 4) Details of physical items shall be drawn to scale. 5) Rack layouts and custom furniture drawings shall be drawn to scale. 6) System drawings and schematic drawings shall be drawn 1:1 (no scale).

d. Sizes:

1) Sheet sizes shall match the size of the Contract Drawings sheets, except where otherwise expressly requested or approved in advance by the Designer.

2. Floor Plans:

a. Location of system devices and faceplates. b. Primary and secondary system cabling pathway(s). c. Location of equipment racks. d. Location of equipment-housing furniture.


MSA# 11172.00


e. Location of equipment enclosures. f. Location of major system components. g. Location of equipment that is Work of another Section to which Work interconnects.

3. Reflected Ceiling Plans:

a. Location of ceiling devices, coordinated with devices that are Work of others, and existing devices (where applicable).

4. System Diagrams:

a. Hybrid schematic / block wiring diagram like appearance. b. System products depicted. c. Product inputs, outputs and other ports depicted. d. System cables depicted. e. Product brand, model, description, options, and accessories declared. f. Device.ID assignment for each product. g. Interconnections depicted between system products. h. Interconnections depicted between system products and related system products. i. Declaration of the cable types, including brand, model, description and color. An accurate

cable key is acceptable. j. Cable.ID assignment for each cable. k. Cable color coding schema. l. Termination typicals, keyed to diagram interconnections.

5. Rack Elevations:

a. Absolute position of mounted components. b. Device.ID, brand and model of each product. c. Device.ID, brand and model of each power distribution product. d. Size and type of each filler panel (vent and blank).

6. Custom Assemblies and Products:

a. Manufacturer. b. Materials. c. Finish and color(s). d. Parts list. e. Nomenclature sizes, colors. f. Dimensions. g. Schematic diagram(s), where applicable.

7. Termination Details:

a. Conductor-to-conductor, conductor-to-connector, conductor-to-terminal definitions of each product in the system. If typicals are used, they shall be accurately keyed to the system diagrams.

8. Power Distribution Diagrams:

a. Each power product. b. Interconnectivity between power products. c. Interconnectivity of local power distribution products to supply-side AC power.


MSA# 11172.00


d. Interconnectivity of system equipment to the power distribution system. e. Circuiting and interconnectivity of power sequencer(s) and remote controlled power

distribution systems. f. Power-up and power-down sequence of products connected to the power distribution

system.

9. Mounting Details:

a. Depicting the materials and means of securing installed products. b. Finishes and colors of exposed parts.

10. Labeling Schemas:

a. Organized methodical plan for the unique identification of cables within the system and for identifying cables from other systems.

11. Wall Elevations:

a. Depict the location of products to be mounted on the walls, coordinated with Work of others, along with existing conditions (where applicable).

12. Custom Furniture:

a. Manufacturer. b. Dimensions. c. Materials, finishes and colors. d. Accessory parts. e. Construction details. f. Multiple views:

1) Top, side, front and back, sections. 2) Depicting the space allocation and products that the item is designed to

accommodate.

E. Training Submittals:

1. Proposed schedule. 2. Training agendas for each session. 3. Identification of personnel that will conduct training. 4. Handouts proposed for distribution during training.

F. Field Observation Reports Submittals:

1. Written responses to Field Observation Reports supplied to the Contractor during the course of the Project:

a. The response shall include a copy of the original Field Observation Report. b. The response shall include detail of the corrective action taken, the date the action was

taken and the identity of the individual who took the action.

G. Closeout Submittals:

1. As-Built Drawings:


MSA# 11172.00


a. General:

1) Requirements for Shop Drawings apply to “As-Built” drawings.

b. Required Drawings:

1) Title Sheet. 2) Floor Plans. 3) System Diagrams. 4) Power Distribution Diagrams. 5) Rack Elevations. 6) Furniture Shop Drawings. 7) Communication Room Wall Elevations. 8) Mounting Details. 9) Custom Plate and Panel Assemblies. 10) Patch Panel/Patch Bay Layouts. 11) Labeling Schema. 12) As-Built version of each Project shop drawing.

c. Drawing Formats:

1) Electronic Editable: Editable version using the native application used to create the file (e.g., Revit, AutoCAD, Star-Draw, Visio, VidCAD).

2) Non-Editable: PDF file format. 3) Printed Hardcopy. 4) Sheets shall be the same size and feature consistent title block information in the

lower-right corner.

d. Drawing Organization:

1) Hardcopy drawings shall be bound together into logical sets, bound along the left edge of the sheets.

2) The first page of the set shall include a detailed index and sheet-by-sheet description of each drawing sheet.

2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

a. Manual Format:

1) Hard-cover 3-ring type binder. 2) Front clear plastic cover pocket complete with Project and system Information

insert. 3) Clear plastic spine pocket with Project and system Information insert. 4) Binder sized to suit the contents only, neither oversized nor undersized. 5) Maximum binder thickness: 3 inches.

b. Manual Contents and Organization:

1) General:

i) Separate binder (or binder set) for each system. Provide no more than one system per binder (or binder set).


MSA# 11172.00


ii) Separate CD-ROM (or CD-ROM set) for each system. Provide no more than one system per CD-ROM (or CD-ROM set).

iii) Do not overfill. Binders shall not be filled beyond an easily usable capacity. iv) Insert labeled tabs within binder to identify separate contents of the manual. v) Labeled sub-directories shall be created on the CD-ROM to label and

separate contents for the manual.

2) Project Information Cover:

i) Title of Project. ii) Name and address of Owner, Designer, Architect, Contractor of Record and

Subcontractor. iii) System name and specification references.

3) Index:

i) Contents of the manual.

4) Completion Forms:

i) Photocopy of “Certificate of Substantial Completion” form(s). and/or “Notice of Completion” form(s).

5) Warranty Statement:

i) A warranty statement shall be included for each system. The warranty statement shall reiterate the terms of warranty identified within the Contract Documents, as well as identify how the Owner is to obtain warranty service.

ii) The warranty statement shall clearly identify which products are covered by Manufacturer warranties beyond the Contractor required minimum warranty period. The term of manufacturer warranty shall also be identified (e.g., 2 year parts and labor).

iii) A separate warranty statement shall be supplied for each system. iv) Identify the date that the warranty for the system starts. This date shall be

the date listed on the Certificate of Substantial Completion (if one was issued to the contractor specifically for the system) or the date listed on the Notice of Final Completion.

v) Supply standard out-of-warranty service rates and service contact information.

6) Bill of Materials:

i) List of products supplied. ii) Serial numbers of each product. iii) IP addresses of those products configured to have static IP addresses. iv) MAC addresses of products featuring network communication ports (wired

and/or wireless). v) Network device names for those products configured for DHCP.

7) Product Datasheets (supply only in the electronic version of Operation and Maintenance Manual):

i) Manufacturer datasheets for each product supplied.


MSA# 11172.00


8) Manufacturer Owner / User Manuals:

i) Manufacturer’s Owner’s or User’s manual for each product. ii) Manufacturer’s Installation instructions and other documentation supplied

with the product.

9) Test Reports and Checklists:

i) Test reports, checklists, and other forms generated and completed during the course of the Project.

10) Training Information:

i) Photocopy of training outlines / agendas. ii) Photocopy of training session handouts. iii) Photocopy of training sign-in sheets. iv) Photocopy of signed delivery receipt for each training session recording

(applicable to those Sections/systems requiring recording).

11) As-Built Drawings:

i) The hardcopy manual shall contain reduced scale printed version (11 x 17) of system-specific drawings.

ii) The electronic manual shall contain electronic PDF version of the as-built drawings.

12) Software (electronic manual only):

i) Editable configuration files for system equipment. ii) Software source code use in supplied products. iii) Compiled versions of configuration files and source code. iv) Software required for reviewing and editing supplied files.

3.6 QUANTITY

A. General:

1. The quantity of submittals required is the greater of the following:

a. Quantity identified within Division 01. b. Quantity identified within the individual Section. c. Quantity identified herein.

2. In addition to the Contract required quantity, the Contractor shall also submit any additional quantities required for its own use and records, and for distribution to other trades.

3. The Designer shall retain a copy of each submittal received. Others in the submittal communication chain may also retain copies.

B. Product Data Submittals:

1. Two (2) Hardcopies. 2. One (1) Electronic.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Shop Drawings Submittals:


D. Training Submittals:


E. Field Observation Reports Submittals:


F. Samples Submittals:


G. Pre-Acceptance Submittals:


H. Closeout Submittals:


3.7 REJECTION

A. The following items are representative reasons that submittals may need to be revised and resubmitted:

1. Binding submittals for multiple Sections together. 2. Failing to supply separate transmittal for submittals for each Section. 3. Failing to include a submittal title sheet. 4. Failing to use and accurately complete the published title sheet. 5. Failing to supply and accurately complete the submittal checklists. 6. Failing to supply product data and shop drawings at the same time. 7. Failing to include a detailed BOM with the product data. 8. Failing to supply product data sheets. 9. Failing to supply product data sheets with the correct product and required accessories

enumerated. 10. Failing to supply shop drawings. 11. Failing to supply shop drawings with required information. 12. Failing to supply accurate information. 13. Failing to supply relevant information required by the Specifications. 14. Failing to supply products that are in compliance with the Specifications. 15. Failing to supply the required information in the required format.


MSA# 11172.00


3.8 RE-SUBMITTALS

A. Revise and Resubmit:

1. When a submittal is rejected and flagged as “Revise and Resubmit,” the entire submittal shall be reviewed, revised and resubmitted in totality.

2. Re-submittals shall be checked for compliance with the Contract Documents, inclusive of requirements for submittals. In addition, any comments and deficiencies identified by the reviewer shall be appropriately acted upon.

B. Exceptions Noted:

1. When a submittal is flagged as “Exceptions Noted,” the specific actions identified shall be taken. 2. If the reviewer’s comments include selective rejection of products, the re-submittal shall be

limited to including those items commented upon.

C. Re-submittals shall:

1. Include a copy of the reviewer’s previous comments. 2. Include a written description of the action(s) taken. 3. Be labeled chronologically. 4. Be inclusive of all corrective action identified by the previous reviewer.

3.9 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTALS

A. Electronic submittals shall only be permissible where electronic submittals are expressly required and where express approval for such has been granted.

B. Electronic submittal files shall be compatible for opening and viewing with electronic PDF file readers that fully support and recognize the Adobe PDF Portable Document Format Standard, version 1.5.

C. Major text within the files shall be electronically searchable using the search-for-text features of current generation Adobe PDF reader software. Files shall be prepared in such manner that reviewers will have the option to search for and find words and phrases that appear within the document, electronically. Documents featuring raster-based text and text that is otherwise not searchable shall not be acceptable. This precludes the use of documents that have been electronically scanned and then converted to or embedded within an electronic file.

D. The organization, contents, and labeling of information along with other requirements for submittals apply also to electronic versions of the submittals.

E. Single File Submission:

1. Option 1 – Single File, PDF Format:

a. Single PDF file submittals shall be assembled from a series of individual files that are organized, indexed, bound together as one composite file that is bookmarked to aid the reviewer in navigating the content.

b. The file shall feature a navigational tree of contents, organized by content groups (e.g., Title Page, Index, BOM, Datasheets, Shop Drawings). Content groups shall be organized in the same relative order identified within the Contract Documents.


MSA# 11172.00


c. Within each content group shall be the supporting elements of the group (e.g., product datasheets under the Datasheets group). Each element of the content group shall appear separately as a subordinate element of the group (e.g., separate entry for each product datasheet, separate entry for each shop drawing), and viewable from the navigational contents tree.

d. Under the Datasheets content group, individual product datasheet entries shall be identified by Make/Brand and Model (e.g., Belden – 9451 – Audio Cable). Entries shall be organized in a sorted manner, first by make, then by model.

e. If the resulting size of the composite PDF file exceeds 10 Megabytes, supply the submittal using the Single Zip File method instead, as described in this Section.

f. The file name used to label the submittal shall be the section number followed by the submittal instance number for that Section (e.g., 271513-PD-01.pdf).

1) Where the Designer directs the supply of multiple zip files for a submittal, add additional text to the file name to identify that the file is part of a multi-file set of submittals, as per the following examples:

i) 271513-PD-01 (1 of 3).pdf ii) 271513-PD-01 (2 of 3).pdf iii) 271513-PD-01 (3 of 3).pdf

2. Option 2 – Single File, Zip Format:

a. Single Zip File submittals shall be assembled from a series of individual PDF files and file directories that are contained with a single compressed WinZip compatible “.zip” file.

b. The file shall contain separate top-level directories that are used to group related content (e.g., 00-Title Page, 01-Index, 02-BOM, 03-Datasheets, 04-Shop Drawings), with each directory appearing in the same relative order as that identified in the Contract Documents.

c. Within each content group directory shall be separate PDF-compliant files featuring the information required (e.g., separate datasheet file for each product, separate file for each drawing, separate file for each BOM).

d. Product datasheet files shall be named using a consistent naming convention that enables those files to appear sorted and grouped when the file is opened for navigation, viewing or extraction by the reviewer.

e. Product datasheet files shall be consistently named with the make/brand of the product, followed by model number, followed by any additional information beneficial (e.g., Belden – 9451 – Audio Cable).

f. Consult the Designer for supplement instructions should the WinZip file exceed 50 Megabytes in size.

g. The file name used for the submittal shall be the Section number followed by the submittal instance number for that Section (e.g., 271513-PD-01.zip).

1) Where the Designer directs the supply of multiple zip files for a submittal, add text to the file name that identifies the file is part of a multi-file set as per the following examples:

i) 271513-PD-01 (1 of 3).zip ii) 271513-PD-01 (2 of 3).zip iii) 271513-PD-01 (3 of 3).zip



MSA# 11172.00

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 270502 - 1

SECTION 270502 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Requirements applicable to work of this Division.

1.3 CODE COMPLIANCE

A. Work of this Division shall be performed in accordance with Codes applicable at the Project site(s). The Authority Having Jurisdiction shall have the final say as to whether compliance has been achieved.

B. Wherever the Contractor believes, or the Authority Having Jurisdiction advises, that work of these Contract Documents is in conflict with applicable codes, the Contractor shall immediately advise and seek the direction of the Designer.

1.4 TOOLS

A. Tools shall be used for the purpose for which they are designed.

B. Specialty tools shall be used for assembly, installation, termination, and removal of products as recommended by the product manufacturer.

C. The Designer reserves the right to require removal and replacement of any product installed using incorrect tools.

1.5 EXPLOSIVES

A. Use of explosives at the project site shall not be permitted.

1.6 WELDING

A. Welding at the project site, where necessary, shall be performed only by persons licensed to perform such work at the project site(s). Welding shall require a permit and the approval of the Owner’s Representative. Request for permission to perform onsite welding shall be submitted in writing through designated project channels.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABLE BUNDLING HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Great Lakes. 2. Hellermann Tyton. 3. Hubbell. 4. Leviton. 5. Millepede, Inc. 6. Ortronics. 7. Panduit. 8. Stakall Snap Tie. 9. Velcro.

B. Description: Provide reusable, adjustable cable straps. Nylon cable ties shall not be permitted.

1. Hook and Loop Fastener

a. Provide plenum rated tie in plenum environments. b. Minimum cable strap width shall be 3/4 inch. c. Basis of Design shall be Velcro One-Wrap Qwik Ties.

2. Soft Polyurethane Plastic Cable Management Ties

a. Provide plenum rated tie in plenum environments. b. Sized as necessary for the quantity of cables. c. Manufactured from plastic which stretches rather than deforms or pressures cable sheathing

when over-tightened. d. Manufactured from plastic which is not subject to drying or softening. e. Manufactured without a protruding saddle or fastening point that can indent or pressure

other cables. f. Capable of release. g. Cable tie shall have no sharp edges when cut. h. Basis of Design shall be Millepede Mille-Tie.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of new pathways with parties and the Work that will utilize the pathways, prior to installation.

B. Review pre-existing pathways prior to installation of the Work, and report to the Designer any discrepancies between specified pre-existing pathway conditions and actual existing pathway conditions.

C. Coordinate with other parties to the extent necessary to ensure clean, professional looking and operating systems.


MSA# 11172.00


D. Participate in coordination efforts through the preparation of shop drawings and details prior to fabrication or installation of any products. Coordinate actual clearance requirements of installed products.

E. Begin coordination immediately upon award of contract. Coordinate the Work with other parties and adjust equipment locations accordingly. Participate in the preparation of coordination drawings.

F. It is generally intended that devices and equipment shall be located symmetrical with architectural elements and shall be installed at the heights and locations shown on the drawings. If a height or location is in question, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to immediately seek clarification of the Designer.

G. Evaluate the complete set of Contract Documents and existing conditions to gain an understanding of the peculiarities and limitations of the spaces where the Work is to be performed. The final Work shall be accessible for servicing. Although the locations of equipment and conduit may be shown on the drawings in certain positions, the architectural details and conditions existing on the Project shall guide the Contractor, coordinating the Work with that of others. Provide necessary offsets to provide a neat workmanlike arrangement.

H. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicate the design intent, required sizes, points of termination and, in some cases, suggested routes of raceways. However, it is not intended that the drawings indicate fully coordinated routing and placement or necessary offsets.

I. Refer to each drawing, including enlarged plans, elevations, sections, and details for additional information that may include dimensions and greater resolution and notes that serve to refine the intent and further assist and guide the Contractor.

J. Work in harmony with other parties performing work at the project site so as not to cause any delays in pouring concrete, building masonry walls, etc. Consult each Contract Drawing, including those predominately used by other trades, before installing Work so as to ensure that performance of Work will not interfere with or be adversely affected by Work of others.

K. Attend each regularly scheduled project meeting as well as any special meetings called to coordinate and/or resolve special issues that arise during the course of the Project.

L. Conflicts in equipment and materials shall be corrected prior to installation. Should there be a conflict with drawings of other trades, work with the other trades to correct the conflict while coordinating the Project (prior to installation). If a conflict cannot be resolved, seek the direction of the Owner’s representative. Refer to the drawings used by other trades for details, dimensions and locations of their work and route around their work so as not to conflict. Work installed that creates a conflict shall be removed and readjusted to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Work installed in finished areas shall be concealed. Work installed in unfinished areas may be exposed at the discretion of the Owner's representative and approved in writing.

2. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of communications materials and equipment with the work of other trades for efficient flow of the Work.

3. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with reviewed submittal data, including coordination drawings.


MSA# 11172.00


4. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and architectural/structural components.

5. Install equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

6. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

7. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.

8. Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify exact size and locations of openings required for the installation of the Work.

9. The conductors terminating at each wired outlet shall be left not less than 8 inches long at their outlet fittings to facilitate installation and servicing of devices.

10. If during construction it becomes apparent that certain minor changes in layout would result in a neater appearance and better arrangement, such alterations shall be made. Designer's review shall be obtained before making such changes.

11. Workmanship throughout shall conform to the standards of best practice. Marks, dents or finish scratches shall not be permitted on any exposed materials, fixtures or fittings. Interiors of panels and equipment boxes shall be left clean.

12. Termination types shall correctly match cable and device termination. As an illustration, if “spade lug” type of termination is appropriate, then the spade lug cable entry size should match the cable used. The spade lug shall also have the correct stud size to match the terminal to which it is connected. Terminations shall be completed with tools designed and sized for the specific application and connector.

13. Use caution not to exceed the manufacturer allowed bending radius for cables and not to compromise the integrity of the cables during installation by pulling cable management devices too tightly, damaging cables. Raceway/Cabling bending radii shall be minimum as directed by cable manufacturer. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary to ensure cable does not experience tension beyond manufacturer limits during installation. Compounds used shall be compatible with the cable and pathway products and shall not cause deterioration of either.

14. Neatly dress cables, and provide vertical and horizontal cable management for properly dressing work at racks, control panels and backboards. See drawings for additional information.

15. Low-voltage cables shall be kept as far from electrical cables and equipment as possible. Avoid running low-voltage cables parallel to medium and high-voltage cables. When parallel runs cannot be avoided, keep low-voltage cables at least 24 inches away and cross cables at 90 degrees to minimize the risk of interference.

16. Avoid running low-voltage cables any closer than 24 inches to any ballast type lighting fixture or other high RF energy producing device.

17. Cable shall be installed within approved pathways. Cables not installed within raceway, cable tray or ladder rack shall be supported by discrete cable supports. Support cables at box and faceplate.

18. Neatly route cables parallel and perpendicular to building architectural lines. 19. Neatly comb out multiple cable bundled runs to remove tangling and crossing of cables within the

bundles. 20. Bundle cables within racks, ladder racks, cable trays and in discrete cable supports. Utilize

reusable cable bundling hardware. Utilize plenum-rated hardware in plenum spaces. 21. Cable assemblies shall be run as straight as possible and symmetrical (perpendicular to or parallel

with) with architectural items and at a consistent elevation. Work installed diagonal to building members shall not be permitted.

B. Cable Separation

1. Cables for each system shall be installed separately and isolated from cables from other systems. 2. Cables carrying signals of different types and different nominal operating levels shall be kept

separated to reduce the risk of undesirable interference and cross-talk between cables.


MSA# 11172.00


a. As a general rule, for each 25dBV difference in nominal operating level between cables, provide at least 6 inches of separation. Example 1: Cables with a 75dBV level difference between them shall be separated by 18 inches or greater. Example 2: Cables with a 13dBV difference between them shall be separated by 3 inches or greater.

b. Contractor shall provide additional separation to prevent and to remedy any crosstalk that adversely affects the performance and usability of the system, or that exceeds specific crosstalk performance guidelines defined elsewhere in these specifications.

3. In common areas where cables from multiple systems are run in general proximity to one another, cables from each system shall be labeled to identify the system the cables serve.

C. Cable Splices

1. Splices shall not be permitted in any cable except where expressly specified and/or approved by the Designer.

2. In cases where splices are specified and/or otherwise approved, splices shall be made within UL listed junction or device boxes. Open air connections shall not be permitted.

D. Cable Terminations

1. Where field installed cables connect to manufacturered products via pig-tails or connectorized cable assemblies, terminations shall be made within the product enclosure or within a UL approved box. Exposed and open air splices shall not be permitted.

E. Strain Relief

1. Permanently installed cables shall be properly secured with an approved device. Strain relief shall be applied typically within 6 inches from the point of entry into a product enclosure, junction box, pull box, or device box. When properly applied, the strain relief device shall not damage the cable being secured and shall not permit movement of the cable in any way that may adversely affect the long term integrity of nearby connections.

F. Identification

1. General

a. Identification shall be in English, except as otherwise noted. b. Where identification is applied to surfaces that require a finish, install identification after

the surface finish is applied. c. Labeling products, color, sizes, nomenclature and location of the identification product are

subject to the review of the Designer.

2. Cables

a. Each cable shall be uniquely labeled at each end. b. Labels shall be permanent and feature computer generated type-written text. c. Label text shall be bold-type and clearly readable by a person with average sight, and under

the lighting conditions typical within the area of installation. d. Labels shall be applied approximately 6 cable-inches from the point of termination. e. Cables installed for “Future Use” shall be clearly identified as such at both ends. Such

cables shall be labeled to identify where the opposite end of the cable can be found. f. Each cable installed shall be recorded on the as-built drawings.


MSA# 11172.00


3. Boxes

a. Junction boxes and pull boxes shall be labeled on their interior and on their exterior covers with the identity of the system(s) the box serves along with the function of the box. Interior markings shall be made using permanent marker. Permanent marker may also be used on the cover of boxes installed in concealed areas (above accessible ceilings, for example). Exposed boxes shall be labeled with engraved plastic labels. Labels shall closely match the color of the box.

b. Device boxes, when first installed, shall be identified on its interior as to the system(s) served and the device(s) the box will contain.

4. Equipment Racks, Cabinets, Enclosures

a. Equipment racks and enclosures shall be labeled. b. The nomenclature, color, size, installed location, and type of labels are subject to the

Designer’s review.

5. System Equipment

a. Each individual instance of system equipment shall be labeled. b. Front panel controls of equipment shall be labeled with nomenclature meaningful to the

end user based on the intended use of the equipment in the system. Examples include, but are not limited to:

1) Label router/matrix control panels with system specific input/output names. 2) Label patch panels with meaningful input/output destination names 3) Label mixer input and output controls to identify the signal source and destination.

c. Professionally prepared, installed and readily visible “cheat sheets” may be acceptable under select circumstances with the approval of the Designer.

d. The nomenclature, color, size, installed location, and type of labels are subject to the Designer’s review and approval.

G. High Voltage Cabling (> 70.7 Volts)

1. Cabling that carries voltages higher than 70.7 Volts RMS AC or DC shall be installed and terminated by persons licensed to perform such work.

H. Plates and Panels

1. Box covers and faceplates shall be installed flush against the surface over which it is mounted. There shall be no visible gap between the backside of a plate/panel and the wall, ceiling or floor; there shall be no visible gap between the backside of plate/panel and a surface mount box to which the plate/panel mounts). Advanced craftsmanship and construction techniques shall be employed where necessary to achieve this.

a. The same shall apply to other wall and ceiling mounted products.

I. Device Boxes, Pull-Boxes, Junction Boxes

1. Boxes installed in walls and ceilings shall be installed so that the box does not stand proud (protrude out beyond) of the finished surface. Boxes shall be installed such that when the mounted devices and cover plates are installed, the backside of the cover plate rests flush with the


MSA# 11172.00


finished surface of the wall or ceiling. Advanced craftsmanship and construction techniques shall be employed where necessary to achieve this.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Equipment shall be properly bonded to ground for the safety of personnel and property and as additionally necessary to satisfactory performance of the equipment.

B. Comply with Section 270526 “Grounding and Bonding for Communications.”


A. General

1. Perform cutting as required for the execution of the Work. Unless directed otherwise in field, provide related patching and painting to match surrounding methods, materials and colors. Any damage caused during the progress of Work shall be remediated. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching and materials as required to:

a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. b. Remove and replace defective Work. c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. e. Install equipment and materials within existing structures.

2. Upon written instructions from the Owner's representative, uncover and restore Work to provide for observation of concealed Work by Owner's representative or by inspection by the authority having jurisdiction.


4. Patch surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and using experienced Installers. Refer to Division 01 for definition of experienced "Installer" or determine qualifications as directed in field by the Owner's representative.

5. Patching through fire rated walls and enclosures shall not diminish the rating of that wall or enclosure. Materials used for patching shall be installed to meet or exceed the smoke and fire rating of the respective surface being patched.

6. Neatly cut and drill openings in walls and floors where openings are required for installation of the Work. Secure the approval of the Owner's Representative before cutting and drilling in existing facilities. Neatly patch any openings created.

7. Cutting and patching shall be held to a minimum by arranging with other parties for sleeves and openings before construction is started.

8. Provide factory-assembled watertight wall and floor seals, of types and sizes required; suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.

9. Pipe sleeves shall be fabricated from Schedule 40 rigid, heavy wall, full weight galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. Use sleeves which are two standard sizes larger than conduit passing through respective sleeve.

10. Provide sleeve seals for piping that penetrates foundation walls below grade, or through exterior walls or roofs. Caulk between sleeve and pipe with non-toxic, UL-classified caulking material to


MSA# 11172.00


ensure watertight seal. Elsewhere provide mechanical type seals, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

11. Install standard Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves two sizes larger than pipes passing through floors, bearing walls, fire walls and masonry construction. Furnish and set forms required in masonry walls or foundation to accommodate pipes.

B. Grout

1. Provide non-shrink, nonmetallic grout, pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, and non-gaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications.


1. Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application.





6. Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

7. Colors for exposed seals shall be as selected by the Owner's representative from manufacturer's standard colors.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Penetrations created in support of any work of this Division shall be firestopped in accordance with locally applicable codes as acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction.



MSA# 11172.00

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS 270526 - 1

SECTION 270526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Grounding and Bonding System for Communications, including:

a. Copper conductors. b. Busbars. c. Grounding/bonding termination devices. d. Mounting, connection and supporting hardware.





1.3 REFERENCES

A. Definitions:

1. ACEG: Alternating Current Equipment Ground. 2. BC: Bonding Conductor. 3. BCT: Bonding Conductor For Telecommunications. 4. EF: Entrance Facility. 5. GE: Grounding Equalizer. 6. GEC: Grounding Electrode Conductor. 7. TBB: Telecommunications Bonding Backbone. 8. TBBC: Telecommunications Bonding Backbone Conductor.


MSA# 11172.00


9. TBBIBC: Telecommunications Bonding Backbone Interconnecting Bonding Conductor. 10. TEBC: Telecommunications Equipment Backbone Conductor. 11. TGB: Telecommunications Grounding Busbar. 12. TMBG: Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar.

B. Reference standards:

1. NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code” (NEC). 2. UL 467, “Grounding and Bonding Equipment.” 3. NFPA National Electric Code Article 250, “Grounding.” 4. TIA/EIA-607, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications. 5. The most recent published edition of the “Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual

(TDMM)” published by the Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Comply with Section 270501 “Submittals for Communications.”

B. Action Submittals:

1. Product Data:

a. Bill of Materials. b. Product Datasheets.

2. Shop Drawings:

a. Interconnectivity diagram, representing the total and exact system as it is planned to be installed.

C. Closeout Submittals:

1. System Test Results. 2. Product Datasheets, one for each product. 3. As-built interconnectivity diagram.


A. Comply with requirements of Section 270002 “Quality Assurance for Communications.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The system shall provide standards and code compliant bonding of products to ground for the safety of equipment, personnel and property and for the stable and reliable operation of connected equipment.


MSA# 11172.00


B. The system shall be compliant with the requirements of the NEC, BICSI and other referenced organizations.

C. The system shall be configured to ensure proper operation of equipment. When well configured, the system shall not result in flowing ground currents that adversely affect the performance of the connected systems using the system.

D. The system shall derive the main ground connection from the Electrical Grounding Electrode System as defined by the NEC, the same electrode system used to establish the main/common ground for the building electrical system.

E. The system shall connect to Electrical Grounding Electrode System at a single point.

F. The system shall include:

1. Main ground busbar installed within the telecommunications entrance facility. 2. Grounding busbars within the communications rooms. 3. Low-impedance conductivity of ladder rack to the nearest grounding busbar. 4. Low-impedance conductivity of cable tray to one or more grounding busbars. 5. Bonding of equipment racks/cabinets to the nearest grounding busbar. 6. Bonding of individual pieces of equipment to the system.

G. The system shall feature additional requirements as indicated on the Drawings.

2.2 BUSBARS


1. Chatsworth. 2. Erico Electrical Products. 3. Storm Copper Components.

B. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB):

1. Electro-tin plated 1/4-inch thick copper bar. 2. Insulated stand-offs. 3. (19) pairs of 5/16-inch holes and (3) pairs of 7/16-inch holes. 4. 4 inches high x 15-1/2 inches wide. 5. Basis of Design: Erico Electrical Products TMGB-A16L19PT.

C. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB):

1. Electro-tin plated 1/4-inch thick copper bar. 2. Insulated stand-offs. 3. (8) pairs of 5/16-inch holes and (3) pairs of 7/16-inch holes. 4. 2 inches high x 15.5 inches wide. 5. Basis of Design: Erico Electrical Products TGB-A16L08PT.

2.3 TERMINATIONS AND HARDWARE



MSA# 11172.00


1. Burndy. 2. Erico Electrical Products. 3. Hubbell. 4. Panduit. 5. Thomas and Betts.

B. Conductor Terminations – Compression Lugs:

1. Two-hole lugs long barrel type, with window. 2. Shall meet J-STD-607-A requirements for network systems ground. 3. Tin-plated copper. 4. Inspection window to assure conductor insertion. 5. NEMA hole sizes and spacing. 6. Coded on barrel for correct die selection. 7. Basis of Design: Panduit LCC series.

C. Conductor Taps:

1. “H” style conductor taps. 2. Slotted design. 3. Matching clear covers to meet UL 94V-0 flame retardancy. 4. UL and CSA rated up to 600V. 5. Basis of Design: Panduit HTWC Series.

D. Paint Piercing Grounding Washer Kit:

1. Color coded Green. 2. Penetrates painted surfaces to provide electrical connection. 3. Shall be supplied with antioxidant compound. 4. Basis of Design: Panduit RGW Series.

E. Thread Forming Bonding Screws:

1. Color: Black. 2. Penetrates painted surfaces to provide electrical connection. 3. Shall have “Phillips” head. 4. Basis of Design: Panduit RGTBS Series.

2.4 BONDING CONDUCTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work, include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. American Insulated Wire Corp. 2. Brintec Corporation. 3. Cablec. 4. Carol Cable Co., Inc. 5. General Cable. 6. Senator Wire and Cable Co. 7. Southwire Company.

B. Unless larger sizes are specified, size conductors in accordance with the NEC.


MSA# 11172.00


C. The BC shall be a minimum # 4 AWG.

D. The TEBC shall be a minimum # 6 AWG.

E. The TBBC shall be a minimum # 6 AWG.

F. The TBBIBC shall be minimum # 8 AWG.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Ground electrical systems and equipment as required by code, utility, local ordinances, and requirements herein.

B. Work shall be installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturer’s recommended installation practices.

C. Bonding conductors shall be continuous and routed in a direct path to the point of termination.

D. Grounding busbars shall be isolated from the structure support by a 2-inch minimum separation using manufacturer’s recommended insulating stand-offs and hardware.

E. Clean grounding busbars before terminating conductors.

F. Installation details:

1. Install copper busbar on the plywood backboard. 2. Install #4 AWG (minimum) copper grounding conductor from main building grounding electrode

system at service entrance to ground bus at the Entrance Facility. 3. Install #6 AWG (minimum) copper grounding conductor(s) from the ER ground bus to each "TR"

ground bus.

a. Where required by code, conductors shall be installed in continuous EMT conduit. b. Install grounding bushings on conduit and bond, using minimum #12 AWG wire, at both

ends. Paint conduit fittings, junction boxes and covers "GREEN."

4. Install #8 AWG (minimum) bonding jumper (12 inches maximum) with appropriate lugs at each cable tray joint or install manufactured braided copper grounding jumper equal to B-Line #CAM-GJ, T&B #BD12, OZ/Gedney type "FB" or Mono-Systems.

5. Install #8 AWG (minimum) grounding conductor with appropriate lugs from side of cable tray down to ground busbar. Drill # tap side of cable tray (for appropriate size bolt, 1/4-inch x 20 minimum), ensuring that bolt does not extend into wire management part of tray.

G. Bonding:

1. General:

a. Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.


MSA# 11172.00


b. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

c. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.

1) Utilize bonding screws and paint piercing grounding washer kits to attach painted surfaces.

d. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

e. Utilize H-Tap compression fittings with clear insulating covers to tap cables.

2. Exothermic welded connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells. Install at connections to ground rods. Comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

3. Tightening: Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals in accordance with the manufacturer’s published tightening methods and practices. Where manufacturer’s requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with UL 486A and UL 486.

4. Compression-type connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground conductor.

5. Moisture protection: Where insulated ground conductors are connected to ground rods, insulate the entire area of the connection and seal against moisture penetration of the insulation and cable.

H. Connections:

1. Bond the TMGB to the service equipment (power) ground, typically located in the electrical entrance facility, using the most direct route possible to minimize conductor length.

2. Bond TGBs to the TMGB using the specified conductor. 3. Whenever two or more TBBs are used in a multi-story building, bond them together on the top

floor and at every third floor, at a minimum, with a TBBIBC. 4. Bond the following to the TMGB when present:

a. Telecommunications panel board: Alternating Current Equipment Ground Bus (ACEG), if equipped, or its enclosure.

b. Building structural steel, if exposed (steel rebars of reinforced concrete are not required to be bonded).

c. Metallic equipment racks. d. Cable shields. e. Metal raceways and cable trays for telecommunications cabling extending from the same

room or space where the TMGB is located. f. Floor tile ground tab, if provided. g. Others, as identified in the Contract Documents.

5. Bond the following to the TGB when present:

a. Telecommunications panel board: Alternating Current Equipment Ground Bus (ACEG), if equipped, or its enclosure.

b. Building structural steel, if exposed (steel rebar of reinforced concrete are not required to be bonded).

c. TGBs within the same space, if provided. d. TBBs terminated on the same floor to other TGBs. e. Metallic equipment racks.


MSA# 11172.00


f. Cable shields. g. Metal raceways and cable trays for telecommunications cabling extending from the same

room or space where the TMGB is located. h. Floor tile ground tab, if provided. i. Others, as identified in the Contract Documents.

6. Terminate BC and TBB conductors with two-hole compression lugs. 7. Terminate TEBC conductors with two-hole compression lugs.

3.2 LABELING

A. Comply with Section 270553 “Identification for Communications.”

B. Label each component of the Grounding and Bonding System.

C. Uniquely label TGB and TMGB. Clearly record and key this information on the as-built drawings.

D. Affix an permanent warning message at each TGB and TMGB that reads as follows:

IF ANY CONNECTOR OR CABLE IS LOOSE OR NEEDS TO BE REMOVED

PLEASE CALL THE BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS MANAGER



GROUNDING AND BONDNG FOR COMMUNICATIONS TEST REPORT

(Form: F-270526-1)

Project Name:____________________________

Crew Members:___________________________

Test Date:______________________________

________________________________________

Tester Used:_____________________________

Current (High\Low)__________________________

Serial Number:___________________________

Filter (On\Off)_____________________________

Frequency

(Hz)____________________________ TGB Identification:____________________________ Reference Test Resistance:______________________Ω

Ground Reference System Continuity Test Data TGB TGB with

Panelboard Ground TGB with Panelboard and

Building Steel Ground Reference Test

(Difference) Reference Test

(Difference) Reference Test

(Difference) Ω

Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω

Provide a completed version of this Form for each TGB included in the project.


MSA# 11172.00

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 270528 - 1

SECTION 270528 – PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pathway systems for conveyance of low-voltage Communication and Security Systems cable. 2. Pathway products include, but are not limited to:

a. Conduit, fittings, supports and accessories. b. Surface raceway, fittings, supports and accessories. c. Wireway, fittings, supports and accessories. d. Discrete cable supports, supports and accessories. e. Cable tray, fittings, supports and accessories. f. Wall, floor, ceiling and roof penetrations. g. Junction, pull, device and floor boxes. h. Blank covers for junction and pull boxes. i. Blank cover for cast boxes.


1. See Division 26 Sections for pathway products used for NEC Class-A electrical work. 2. Section 270526 “Grounding and Bonding for Communications.” 3. Section 270550 “Firestopping for Communications.” 4. Section 271123 “Cable Management and Ladder Rack” for additional pathway products used

within communications rooms. 5. Section 271543 “Faceplates and Connectors” for standard device-opening faceplates. 6. This Section identifies the minimum requirements for the Project. Comply with the requirements

of the Northern Kentucky University Technology Infrastructure Standard, dated 01/18/2012, or most recent published edition. This document shall be referred to as the “Owner’s Standards Document.”




MSA# 11172.00


1.3 REFERENCES

A. Abbreviations:

1. ETL: Electrical Testing Laboratory. An NRTL. 2. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association. 3. NEC: National Electric Code. 4. NECA: National Electrical Contractors Association 5. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association. 6. UL: Underwriter’s Laboratory.

B. Definitions:

1. Cable Tray: A unit or assembly of units or sections and associated fittings forming a rigid structural system that is used to securely fasten and support cables. The cable tray features two sides, a bottom, and an open top that enables cables to be placed into the tray rather than pulled through.

2. Conduit: A tubular shaped enclosed pathway component designed for the conveyance of cables. 3. Hybrid Pathway System: A pathway system that is built from a varied mixture of boxes, raceway,

cable tray, and discrete cable supports. Fundamentally a pathway system that is not a totally-closed pathway system. A hybrid pathway system supports cables in the horizontal at increments not exceeding 60 inches.

4. Pathway: A collection of products that when used together achieve a complete means for the conveyance of cable(s) from one location to another. A pathway system protects and supports cables to various degrees depending upon the application and products used. The pathway system most frequently terminates into an enclosure, boxes or other apparatus where cables are terminated and associated devices are mounted.

5. Primary Pathway: A cabling pathway typically located in a corridor, public area, or dedicated vertical cable chase and used to enclose and/or support large quantities of compatible-signal cables from one or more systems to the general vicinity of where cables are terminated. Cables carried by a primary pathway transfer to secondary pathways.

6. Raceway: An enclosed pathway component used for the routing of cables. The raceway envelops the cables that pass through it to protect them from physical damage, and at times from heat, humidity, corrosion and water intrusion. A raceway may feature a continuous outer shell, or in select cases (such as surface raceway) may feature a removable outer shell that facilitates installation and removal of cables. Raceway frequently terminates directly into boxes or enclosures used for the purpose of mounting devices and termination of the cables.

7. Secondary Pathways: Pathways typically branching from a primary pathway and routing to a space(s) where a cable is terminated. A secondary pathway typically accommodates sixteen (16) cables or less. A secondary pathway carries cables from a single system that together can be run in tight parallel proximity to one another without any negative impact on adjacent cables or cause distortion or induce consequential interference on the signals they carry.

8. Wireway: An enclosed pathway component used for the routing of cables. A form of raceway. A wireway typically features a hinged or other type of removable cover along its length to enable cables to be installed, repositioned or removed. Wireway is not used for mounting and termination of devices or for the splicing of cables. Wireway is frequently used where relatively large quantities of cable are involved.

9. Totally Enclosed Pathway System: A pathway system that is built from a mixture of boxes and raceway that when assembled are closed on all sides. Fundamentally it is a pathway system where the cables within the system are not visible and not accessible except when a component of the system, or a device mounted to it is removed. A totally enclosed pathway system supports cables run horizontally and continuously.


MSA# 11172.00


10. Rod Stiffener: An assembly frequently constructed of U-channel metal or steel tubing that is placed around an overhead vertical threaded rod support and then tightened in order to make the vertical support rigid and reduce lateral movement of the supported item.

11. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory: A nationally recognized institution that performs safety testing of products against a rigid of safety standards.

C. Standards:

1. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm and Signally Code. 2. NEC: 2011, or the must current Edition. 3. TIA/EIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Coordinate and conduct face-to-face meetings at the Project site with each contractor, sub-contractor, and vendor supplying one or more products as work of this Division. Include the Owner in these meetings if the Owner is supplying or installing any product that will utilize the pathway system.

B. Review the pathway requirements for each system in detail to ensure that the pathways, as they are to be installed, will fully satisfy the needs of each system, each device and cabling, including cable separation requirements.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Coordination Certifications:

1. Coordination Certification – Letter of Coordination Certification from each entity installing cable on the Project that certifies the pathway system being installed:

a. Includes adequate cross-sectional area to accommodate cables that are to be installed; b. Allows for adequate separation from probable sources of ingress and egress interference,

including other cables and cables that may share the same pathway segment; c. Follows a physical path that ensures cables shall not exceed maximum installed length

limitations.

2. Product Datasheets for the following:

a. Raceway. b. Cable tray. c. Innerduct. d. Spillways/waterfalls. e. Floor boxes. f. Device boxes. g. Cable spillways. h. Discrete cable supports.

3. Shop Drawings:


MSA# 11172.00


a. Coordinated floor plan drawings depicting the size(s), locations, and dimensions of the following:

1) Primary pathways. 2) Conduit sleeves (e.g., thru-the-wall, thru-the-floor, and thru-the-bulkhead). 3) Roof penetrations. 4) Conduits: Trade-size 2 inches and larger. 5) Raceway: Featuring a cross-sectional area of ≥ 4 square inches. 6) Cable tray elevations. 7) Vertical and horizontal working clearances around tray and ladder rack.

b. Cross-sectional drawings: of spaces depicting the coordinated placement of primary pathways jointly with HVAC ductwork, fire-suppression, plumbing piping and major electrical work. Drawings shall identify elevation and clearances that will be maintained around pathway components. Preparation of these drawings shall require collaboration with corresponding trades.

1) Common cross-sectional pathway shop drawings include:

i) Corridor ceiling cavities. ii) Mechanical rooms through which pathways must pass. iii) Communications rooms. iv) Ducted raised floors. v) Areas of high physical congestion.

c. Conduit Interconnect Diagrams: for each totally-enclosed pathway system.


1. Accurate up-to-date as-built versions of shop drawings.



B. Supplied components shall be safety tested and listed by one or more United States NRTL. Presently recognized laboratories include: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and Electrical Testing Labs (ETL).

C. Installation personnel shall be manufacturer trained on the anchoring system being utilized.

1.7 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Contract Division of Work and issuance of separate contracts notwithstanding, the entity(s) performing work of this Section shall have the responsibility to provide complete, working and code compliant pathway systems for the systems specified in this Division and for the additional systems so specified in the Contract Documents. Such systems shall be constructed in compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Provide complete, working and code compliant pathway systems for Division 27 Communications Systems and as otherwise identified in the Contract Documents. Note that the Drawings may not fully detail the required complete pathway system and components.


MSA# 11172.00


C. No consideration shall be given for failing to review and understand the unique pathway requirements of those systems for which the pathways systems of this Section shall support.

D. Should Work of this Section be performed by a party that is different from the party responsible for providing components (e.g., cabling) that utilize the pathway systems, the pathway provider shall:

1. Review specifications of this Division and the related Drawings to gain a complete understanding of the specific systems that will utilize the pathways.

2. Coordinate with the parties providing cable and other products that will utilize the pathways to ascertain a complete understanding of the pathway needs of each system, including cable separation requirements.

E. Coordinate with each party performing Work of Division 27 and 28.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General:

1. Each communications pathway system shall consist of products to support, protect, enclose, manage and secure the cables that are part of the communication system they serve.

2. Pathway systems shall be supplied and installed to meet the unique requirements of individual communications systems.

3. Separate pathway systems shall be provided for individual communication systems. Individual communication systems shall have unique and dedicated conveyances. Cables from individual communication systems shall be run in separate conveyances (e.g., data system cables shall be run in separate conveyances from sound system cables).

4. Separate pathway conveyances shall be provided for cables that carry incompatible signal types (e.g., analog microphone level and speaker level cables shall be run in separate conveyances).

5. Pathway systems shall include penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, roofs, bulkheads and other physical barriers that are necessary to route cable between adjacent spaces.

6. Pathway penetrations shall be prepped, installed, sealed and fire-blocked in a code-compliant manner.

7. Pathways shall be assembled from components that are listed by a recognized safety testing laboratory.

8. The cable fill capacity of each pathway segment shall meet or exceed the capacity necessary to accommodate cables initially installed. Additional capacity shall be provided as identified in the Contract Documents. The sizes and quantities of conveyances shown on the Drawings shall be interpreted as minimums. Larger sizes, or additional quantities, shall be provided as further identified herein.

9. Pathway systems shall be provided with sufficient support to carry the weight of the system, plus a full capacity of cables, with a safety factor of ≥ 5. In addition, each individual above-the-floor vertical hanging support shall feature an installed static weight support capacity of not less than 200 lbs. (e.g., hanging all-thread, multi-anchor mounting flange and support cable).

10. Pathway systems shall include matching cover plates over junction and pull boxes.

B. Pathway Systems for Horizontal Copper, Coaxial and Fiber Cabling:

1. Hybrid pathway system. 2. Minimum permissible conduit size: 1-1/4 inches.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Pathway Systems for Speech Privacy / Sound Masking Systems:

1. Hybrid pathway system. 2. Minimum permissible conduit size: 3/4-inch.

D. Pathway Systems for Audio and Video Systems:

1. Hybrid pathway system. 2. Minimum permissible conduit size: 3/4-inch.

A. Pathway Systems for Video Surveillance Systems:

1. Hybrid pathway system. 2. Minimum permissible conduit size: 1-inch.

B. Pathway Systems for Access Control Systems:

1. Total enclosed conduit system. 2. Minimum permissible conduit size: 3/4-inch.

C. Pathway Systems for other Division 27 and 28 Systems:

1. Totally enclosed raceway system. 2. Minimum permissible conduit size: 3/4-inch.

2.2 RACEWAY

A. Conduit:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Hubbell-Raco (Raco). b. Allied Tube & Conduit / Atkore (Allied). c. Republic Conduit (Republic). d. CalConduit (CalConduit).

2. Rigid Steel Conduit (RMC):

a. NEC Type RMC recognized. b. Threaded rigid steel conduit shall be manufactured from mild steel, zinc galvanized both

inside and outside including threads. c. Constructed in accordance with ANSI C80.1, Federal Specification WW-C-581.

3. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC):

a. NEC Type IMC recognized. b. Threaded intermediate metallic conduit shall be manufactured from mild steel, zinc

galvanized both inside and outside including threads. c. Constructed in accordance with ANSI C80.6, Federal Specification WW-C-581.

4. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT):


MSA# 11172.00


a. NEC Type EMT recognized. b. Electric metallic tubing shall be manufactured from mild steel, zinc galvanized both inside

and outside. c. Constructed in accordance with ANSI C80.2, Federal Specification WW-C-563.

5. Flexible metallic conduit (FMC):

a. NEC Type FMC recognized. b. Spirally wound double sized zinc galvanized steel. c. Unjacketed. d. Integral ground conductor. e. Color: Natural zinc.

6. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC):

a. NEC Type LFMC recognized. b. Spirally wound double sized zinc galvanized steel. c. Overall liquid-tight outer jacket. d. Integral ground conductor. e. Color: Gray.

7. Polyvinylchloride (PVC-A, PVC-B):

a. Constructed of Type C300 virgin polyvinylchloride. b. Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 rated to 90°C. c. Constructed in accordance with NEMA TC2 and Federal Specifications W-C-1094A.

B. Wireway:


a. Hubbell-Raco. b. Allied Electrical. c. Hoffman. d. Cooper. e. Square-D.

2. Product Requirements:

a. 6 inches or smaller: 16 gauge steel, minimum. b. Larger than 6 inches: 14 gauge steel, minimum. c. Finish: Epoxy coated. d. Color: Gray. e. Covers: Hinged on one side, secured on the other side with screws. f. Knockouts: Field installed to suit the application. g. No manufacturer-installed knockouts or knockouts that are not used. h. Provided with manufacturer accessories including: tees, connectors, elbow, crosses,

partitions, and telescoping sections.


MSA# 11172.00


2.3 CABLE TRAY

A. Type WB – Wall:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one (1) of the following:

a. Copper/B-Line FLEXTRAY™ Series. b. Legrand/Cablofil – Wiremesh CF Series. c. Snake Tray – 501 Series Wall Snake Tray®.


a. Designed for wall mounting using tray manufacturer’s wall mounting accessories. b. Basket-style, fully ventilated tray design. c. UL or ETL listed. d. Depth: Available in various usable depths ranging from 2 to 6 inches. e. Width: Available in various usable widths from 2 to 6 inches. f. Standard Segment Length: ≥ 3 meters. g. Tiers: Available in single and double tier configurations. Double tier version assembled

from multiple single-tier models and tray manufacturer accessories.

B. Type CB – Ceiling Center Hung:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one (1) of the following:

a. Cooper/B-Line – FLEXTRAY™ Series. b. Legrand/Cablofil – Wiremesh CF-Series. c. Snake Tray – 201 Series Double Snake Tray®.


a. Center hung ceiling-mount design using tray manufacturer’s ceiling mount accessories. b. Basket-style, fully ventilated tray design. c. UL or ETL listed. d. Depth: Available in various usable depths ranging from 2 to 6 inches. e. Width: Available in various usable widths from 4 to 32 inches. f. Tiers: Available in single and double tier configurations. Double tier version assembled

from multiple single-tier models and tray manufacturer accessories. g. Cable protecting sleeves around tray supports emanating from within the tray. h. Standard Segment Length: ≥ 3 meters. i. Designed to enable the establishment of full-width and half-width double-tier stacks of tray

where additional capacity is needed and where discrete parallel pathways are required for cables from different systems.

2.4 DISCRETE CABLE SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into work include:

1. Erico CableCat™ Series. 2. Panduit J-Pro™ Series. 3. Cooper/B-Line BCH Series.


MSA# 11172.00


B. Product Requirements:

1. UL 2043 Listed and NEC compliant for use in plenum air returns. 2. J-Hook style design. 3. No sharp edges that could come in contact with supported cables during or after installation. 4. Linear bearing surface for cable:

a. For use with backbone cables: ≥ 1-3/4 inches. b. For use in primary pathways: ≥ 1-3/4 inches. c. For use in secondary pathway: ≥ 1-3/8 inches. d. For use with individual cables < .400 inch diameter: ≥ 7/8 inch.

2.5 FITTINGS


1. Hubbell-Raco (Raco). 2. Allied Tube & Conduit / Atkore (Allied). 3. Republic Conduit (Republic). 4. CalConduit (CalConduit).

B. Rigid Steel or Intermediate Metallic Conduit:

1. Threaded to NEMA standards for conduit. 2. Integral non-conductive plastic throat liner to minimize/eliminate risk of cable abrasion during

installation. 3. Zinc galvanized steel. 4. Conductive.

C. Electric Metallic Tubing:

1. Compression type. 2. Integral non-conductive plastic throat liner to minimize/eliminate risk of cable abrasion during

installation. 3. Attachment: 100-percent concentric compression. 4. Zinc galvanized steel. 5. Conductive.

D. Flexible Metallic Conduit:

1. Fittings shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer as the raceway(s) it connects. 2. Integral non-conductive plastic throat liners to minimize/eliminate risk of cable abrasion during

installation.

E. Electric Nonmetallic Conduit:

1. Fittings shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer as the raceway it connects. 2. Fitting color shall match the color of the raceway.

F. Conduit Sealing Bushings:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Factory-fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies. 2. Suitable for sealing around conduit or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. 3. Constructed of steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal

pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.

G. Insulating Bushings:

1. Designed to protect cables from damage caused by sharp edges on the exposed end(s) of conduit and associated fittings, fully insulating the exposed end.

2. Rated for use in the environment where the product is installed. 3. Sized to match the conduit or conduit fitting to which it is applied. 4. Soft radius non-conductive front edge to prevent damage to cables passing through the bushing. 5. Sized to hold firmly to the conduit or fitting to which it attaches with sufficient strength that the

bushing cannot and will not come free during the installation of cable. 6. Non-conductive version:

a. Threaded version: Provide threaded version for use on the threaded end of conduits or fittings.

b. Press-on version: Provide press-on version for use on non-threaded end of conduits and conduit fittings.

c. Internal diameter of one end equal to or slightly less than the internal diameter of the conduit or fitting to which it attaches. The opposite end sized to match the conduit or fitting to which it is applied.

d. Designed for installation before any cable is installed.

7. Conductive version:

a. Conductive metal frame. b. Integral grounding lug. c. Separate non-conductive insulator to protect cable. d. Designed for installation before any cable is installed.

2.6 BOXES

A. Standard Wall and Ceiling Device Boxes:

1. General:

a. Stamped steel, code-compliant gauge, zinc galvanized. b. Available in various depths from 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 inches deep, minimum. c. Corrosion protection suitable for the atmosphere in which they are installed. d. Non-modular sheet-steel construction. e. Conduit knockouts of the size, quantity and locations required. f. Threaded device-mounting screw holes. g. Rated for installation in the space where the box is installed. h. Equip boxes with code compliant accessory Class-1 and Class-2 service partitions when

boxes are used in multi-service applications.

2. Boxes in Masonry or Tile Walls:

a. “Masonry” style box construction. b. Available in standard gang sizes from 1 to 10.


MSA# 11172.00


c. Available in various depths from 2-1/2 inches to 3-1/2 inches. d. Conduit knockouts to suit the application.

3. Boxes used within interior framed walls (e.g., gypsum board walls):

a. 1 to 2 Gang Sizes, 2-1/2 inches usable box depth:

1) 4 inches square or 4-11/16 inches square box, 2-1/8 inches deep. 2) 4 inches square or 4-11/16 inches square gang-size adapter.

b. 1 to 2 Gang Sizes, 3-1/2 inches usable box depth:

1) 4 inches square or 4-11/16 inches square box, 2-1/8 inches deep. 2) 1 inch box extender. 3) 4 inches square or 4-11/16 inches square gang-size adapter.

c. 3 to 10 Gang Sizes:

1) “Masonry” style box construction. 2) Available in various usable depths from 2-1/2 inches to 3-1/2 inches. 3) Conduit knockouts to suit the application.

B. Exterior Surface Mount Outlet Style Boxes:


2. Adalet / Scott Fetzer Company (Adalet). 3. Appleton Electric (Appleton). 4. Characteristics:

a. Hinged cover, sized to accommodate the devices being mounted to the box. b. Cast aluminum construction. c. Available in standard gang sizes from 1 to 3. d. Threaded conduit hubs.

C. Surface Raceway Boxes:

1. See Raceway – Surface Mount.

D. Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes:


a. Hubbell-Raco (Raco). b. Allied Tube & Conduit / Atkore (Allied). c. Republic Conduit (Republic). d. CalConduit (CalConduit). e. Hoffman.

2. Characteristics:

a. Screw-cover type enclosure.


MSA# 11172.00


b. Covers fabricated of the same material and with the same finish as the box itself. c. Boxes installed flush in wall shall be provided with oversize cover plates painted to match

the surrounding building surface. d. Boxes shall be NEMA rated for the atmospheric condition in which the box is installed. e. Boxes in exterior or moist locations shall meet NEMA 3R (at minimum).

E. Specialty Wall/Ceiling Boxes:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the Basis of Design product listed, or Designer approved comparable product from one of the following manufacturers:

a. FSR, Inc. b. Legrand/Wiremold. c. Hubbell Inc.

2. Type WB:

a. Recessed activation type wall box designed to allow connectorized cables to be plugged into internally mounted connectorized device plates while the cable connector is hidden behind a cover plate.

b. Material: 14-gauge zinc coated steel box. c. Nominal rough opening size required for the back box: 14.25 inches x 7.10 inches. d. Designed for multi-service. e. Designed for use in new-work and old-work framed construction. f. Separate internal compartments for both a 1-gang AC power devices and low-voltage

connectors. g. Accommodates (3) NEMA standard-size gang boxes for use with AC power outlets and

other low-voltage devices and associated faceplates. Accessory boxes to be provided. h. Accommodates both pre-manufactured and custom manufactured plates for mounting low-

voltage connectors. i. Field configurable to allow both AC power and low-voltage connections to exist on the

same or opposite sides of the box. j. Designed, in part, to serve the connection needs of wall mounted video flat panel

applications. k. UL-listed AC power compartment. l. Provided with brackets for installing the assembly between adjacent studs. m. Standard Covers:

1) Nominal size: 14.75 inches x 7.5 inches. 2) Stamped steel construction. 3) Cable passage slot in cover to allow cables to exit while hiding connectors beyond. 4) Finish: baked on enamel. 5) Colors: White, Black and custom paintable in the field. 6) Provide with Architect/Designer choice of standard cover.

n. Basis of Design: FSR PWB-250-[xxx]. o. Owner product standard – no substitutions without pre-bid approval via written addendum.

F. Floor Boxes:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the Basis of Design product listed, or Designer approved comparable product from one of the following manufacturers:

a. Legrand/Wiremold.


MSA# 11172.00


b. FSR, Inc. c. Hubbell Inc.

2. Type FG:

a. Circular, poke-thru design. b. Multi-service, recessed activation. c. Integral AC power receptacles. d. Accommodations for voice/data and other horizontal cable connectivity. e. Accommodate for audio-video systems connectivity. f. Architect’s choice of manufacturer’s standard cover to match floor covering material and

aesthetics. g. Basis of Design: Wiremold Evolution 8AT-Series. h. No substitution without pre-bid approval via written addendum.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Pull Strings:

1. Construction: nylon. 2. Designed and rated by the manufacturer for use as a pull-rope.

B. Fiber Optic Innerduct:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the Basis of Design product listed, or Designer approved comparable product from:

a. Arnco. b. Endot. c. Opti-Com. d. Pyramid.

2. NEMA TC 5, UL listed, corrugated, specifically designed for optical fiber cable pathways.

a. Color: Orange. b. 1 inch minimum inside diameter. c. 600 pounds minimum pulling strength. d. Factory installed pull rope. e. UL Listed and NEC approved for the environment in which it is installed. f. Basis of Design:

1) Riser Rated Environments: Carlon DF4X1C-[xxxx]. 2) Plenum Rated Environments: Carlon CF4X1C-[xxxx].

C. Cable Waterfalls (Spillways) – for Conduit:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufactures offering products that may be incorporated into Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Bejed, Inc. b. LincTek, Inc. c. Cooper/B-Line.


MSA# 11172.00


d. Chatsworth. e. Cable Management Corp.


a. Available in 2 inches and 4 inches diameter for direct attachment to conduit stubs and sleeves.

b. Integral clamp for securing to EMT conduit. c. Maintains proper bending radii for cabling entering the conduit served. d. Self-fastening tie down system. e. UL Listed and NEC approved for the environment in which it is installed.

D. Cable Waterfalls (Spillways) – Cable Tray:

1. See “Cable Tray.”

E. Supports:

1. General:

a. Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be manufacturer protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic.

b. Products used outdoors shall be hot-dip galvanized.

2. Material Types:

a. Raceway Supports:

1) Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps.

b. Fasteners:

1) Types, materials, and construction features as follows:

i) Expansion anchors:

(A) Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.

ii) Toggle bolts:

(A) All-steel springhead type.

iii) Powder-driven threaded studs anchors:

(A) Heat-treated steel, designed specifically for the intended service.

iv) Solid concrete anchors:

(A) Drop-in zinc plated steel tubular expansion shield with solid, cone-shaped expander plug.


MSA# 11172.00


c. Cable supports for vertical conduit:

1) Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits.

2) Provide with plugs with the number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit each individual application.

3) Body construction: Malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

d. Threaded Rod Stock (All-Thread Rod):

1) Available in 1/4 inch, 3/8 inch, 1/2 inch, and 5/8 inch sizes.

e. Slotted Metal Angle and U-channel Systems:

1) 16-gauge steel U-shaped channel; 2) Available in a variety of sizes including: 1-5/8 inches square, 1-1/4 inches square

and 13/16 inch square. 3) Available with pre-punched and un-punched versions. 4) Available with holes on top or sides of channel. 5) Available with a wide-variety of fittings for field construction of structural support

assemblies.

F. Bushing, Knockout Closures and Locknuts:

1. Provide corrosion-resistant box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes, to suit respective installation requirements and applications.

G. Pipe Curb Assemblies:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufactures offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to:

a. The Pate Company, PCC-series.


a. Designed to seal around pipes penetrating through conventional or metal roofs. b. Prevents the ingress of water into the building under all weather conditions. c. Models available to accommodate all standard sizes or pipe from 1/2 inch to 10 inches

O.D. d. Stainless steel pipe fasteners. e. Provide with manufacturer recommended accessories and options necessary to seal and

prevent water infiltration.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Review and coordinate the size requirements of pathways with the suppliers and installers of cabling and devices. Pathway segments shall accommodate the quantity and type of cables that will be installed.


MSA# 11172.00


Upsize pathway segments from any default and minimum size(s) identified so as to accommodate the cables that will be installed.

B. Review the specific routes and composite length of planned pathway routes with parties responsible for supplying or installing cables as distance limitations will apply differently for different cables and applications.

C. Coordinate the location and routing of pathways with work of this Division, the work of other trades, the work of the Owner, and existing site conditions (where applicable) to ensure adequate headroom, post installation access to and working clearances around the pathways. Review and verify HVAC, Fire Suppression, Electrical Power, Lighting and other Drawings for design coordination. Provide routes accordingly.

D. Proactively participate with other trades in the creation of coordination drawings that depict primary and major secondary pathways. Emphasis shall be placed on ensuring that pathways are accessible for initial cable installation and readily accessible for reuse in accommodating future cable moves, additions and changes.

E. Coordinate the colors and types of surface raceway with the color of surface raceway provided as work of both Division 26 and Division 28. Colors of raceways shall match, except where expressly reviewed and approved by the Architect/Designer.

F. Ensure that pathways, as installed, are adequately sized for the cables to be installed.

3.2 PATHWAY SIZING

A. Raceways shall be sized so that they are the larger of the following:

1. Minimum size indicated within the Contract Documents. 2. In accordance with the National Electric Code. 3. As recommended by the product manufacturer.

B. Discrete cable supports shall be sized so that they are the larger of the following:

1. Minimum size indicated within the Contract Documents. 2. In accordance with the National Electric Code. 3. As recommended by the product manufacturer.

C. Surface raceway shall be sized so that it is the larger of the following:

1. Minimum size indicated within the Contract Documents. 2. In accordance with the National Electric Code. 3. As recommended by the product manufacturer. 4. Special Requirements:

a. When surface raceway is requested and approved for use as a substitute for certain conduit pathways, the surface raceway substitute shall feature an equivalent usable cross-sectional cable installation area equivalent to or greater than the conduit it replaces.

D. Cable Trays shall be sized so that they are the larger of the following:

1. Minimum size indicated within the Contract Documents.


MSA# 11172.00


2. In accordance with the National Electric Code. 3. As recommended by the cable tray manufacturer. 4. Sized so that it will not be loaded beyond 40% of its rated capacity, regardless of a code or

manufacturer rated capacities greater than this.

3.3 RACEWAY USAGE

A. Rigid Steel (GRC) Conduit:

1. Above grade, outside the building envelope, in exposed areas. 2. Above grade, inside the building envelope, within high moisture areas. 3. As a transitional component of a below grade conduit path where the conduit needs to pass

through a poured-in-place concrete slab. 4. As a sleeve through poured-in-place concrete slabs. 5. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings.

B. Intermediate Metallic Tubing (IMC) Conduit:

1. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings.

C. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT) Conduit:

1. Within the building envelope concealed within walls and ceilings. 2. Above grade, inside the building envelope, where no other type of raceway is identified to be

used. 3. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings.

D. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC):

1. Inside the building envelope as a component of a secondary pathway system where flexibility is necessary for constructability to meet specified objectives and where length of the segment does not exceed 6 feet.

2. Inside the building envelope as the transitional segment of a raceway system and interconnection to permanently-cabled systems-furniture is necessary and where the length of the FMC segment does not exceed 12 feet.


E. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC):

1. Above grade, outside the building envelope, between junction (or pull) boxes and connected devices (e.g., cameras) and where cables to/from the devices would otherwise be visually exposed or exposed to the elements.

2. Above grade, outside the building envelope, between junction (or pull) boxes and connected devices requiring regular movement where cables to/from the device would otherwise be visually exposed or exposed to the elements.

3. Above grade, inside the building envelope, between junction (or pull) boxes and connected devices (e.g., cameras) and where cables to/from the connected devices would otherwise be exposed to water or sustained periods of high moisture.

4. Above grade, outside the building envelope, between junction (or pull) boxes and connected devices requiring regular movement where cables to/from the device would otherwise be exposed to water or sustained periods of high moisture.



MSA# 11172.00


F. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Conduit:

1. Below grade, where conductive conduit is not otherwise required. 2. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings.

G. Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing:


H. Non-metallic:

1. Non-metallic raceway shall be used only where specifically indicated to be used in the Contract Documents.

2. Non-metallic raceway shall only be used specifically approved for use by the Designer.

I. Surface Raceway:

1. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings. 2. In finished areas where concealment of conduit within walls, floors and ceilings is not achievable

and where its usage is approved in advance by the Designer.

J. Conduit Sleeves:

1. In accessible but concealed ceiling cavities, wherever a cable needs to pass through a wall, floor, ceiling, bulkhead (or similar building obstruction) to get from one space to another.

2. In unfinished areas, high to the ceiling, where a cable not installed in raceway, needs to pass through a wall, floor, ceiling, bulkhead (or similar building obstruction) to get from one space to another.

3. Wherever one or more conduits must pass through a poured-in-place formed concrete structure.

K. Wireway:


L. Communications Poles:


3.4 CABLE TRAY USAGE

A. Cable tray shall be used on the Project, as defined below:

1. Where a hybrid pathway system is identified to be provided, above accessible ceilings within corridors, where the tray serves as a primary pathway for the system served.

2. Where a hybrid pathway systems is identified to be provided, above accessible ceilings where the tray serves as a secondary pathway and sixteen (16) or more cables need to traverse a horizontal cable distance of 50 feet or more from a primary pathway to reach their final destination.

3. Where a hybrid pathway system is identified to be provided, within unfinished spaces without suspended ceilings, where the tray can be installed above an elevation of 8 feet 6 inches, and where the exposed installation of tray is approved by the Designer in advance.



MSA# 11172.00


B. Cable tray shall not be used where conduit or another form of raceway is expressly required.

3.5 DISCRETE CABLE SUPPORT USAGE

A. Discrete cable supports shall be used to support cable that is not installed within raceway, cable tray or ladder rack.

B. Discrete cable supports shall be supported from the building structure, in a manner that is code compliant.

C. Discrete cable supports shall be anchored using accessories and hardware that is manufactured or recommended by the support manufacturer.

D. Discrete cable supports shall be spaced at horizontal increments not exceeding 60 inches on center. Additional supports shall be installed to limit cable sag to less than 9 vertical inches.

3.6 BOX USAGE

A. Boxes:

1. Boxes shall be used at device and equipment locations. Raceway shall terminate into an approved box, except where indicated.

2. Standard wall and ceiling boxes shall be used in walls and ceilings except where specialty boxes are indicated.

3. Boxes designed expressly for use within floors shall be used within floors. The type of box used shall be appropriate for the floor construction.

4. The size and type of boxes used shall accommodate the quantity and type of cable, raceway and devices the box must accommodate.

5. Junction boxes and pull boxes shall be sized to comply with the NEC, but not less than the sizes indicated in the Contract Documents.

6. Custom size and special order boxes shall be provided where custom sizes and special order boxes are required to meet the project requirements.

3.7 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install in accordance with local codes. Adhere to clearance and fire protection regulations. 2. Install above-grade pathways parallel to and perpendicular to building elements. 3. Install pathways plumb and level except where changes in elevation are specifically necessary for

constructability. 4. Document the exact routing of concealed pathways on as-built drawings.

B. Bonding and Grounding:

1. Conductive components of the pathway systems shall be bonded to ground in accordance with the NFPA and the NEC.

2. Additional grounding and bonding shall be provided as set forth in the Contract Documents.

C. Rustproof Fasteners and Hardware:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Install pathway components and associated mounted devices with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers when installed on the exterior of the building, when installed within unconditioned building spaces, and when the pathway serves exterior devices or devices in areas prone to sustained humidity levels in excess of 60-percent.

D. Cable Tray:

1. Install tray so that segments of the tray system remain fully re-usable. 2. Install tray only in locations where the tray is accessible and the cable conveyance area of the tray

is accessible. 3. Where tray is installed above lay-in ceilings, ensure there is ready access to the cable storage area

through the ceiling grid. 4. Install tray in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation recommendations, using the fittings

and accessories manufactured by and expressly recommended by the manufacturer. 5. Utilize pre-manufactured fittings where changes in direction and elevation occur. 6. Install tray so that mounting height(s) will be sufficient to clear light fixtures, piping, and

equipment and so that it is readily accessible. 7. Ensure that components of the tray system are free of sharp edges, burrs, or projections that could

damage cable. 8. Install protective caps on the exposed ends of cable tray rungs. 9. Install waterfall fittings at each location where cable(s) exit the tray downwards. 10. Do not install cable tray high to the structure or above equipment, pipes, or ductwork where the

tray may become inaccessible after installation or project completion. 11. Discontinuity of Cable Tray:

a. Where cable tray cannot be installed contiguous, because the pathway must pass through an otherwise inaccessible building space, install conduit sleeves of equivalent usable cross-sectional area through the inaccessible building space. The minimum number of sleeves shall not be less than one (1) 4 inch conduit for every 3 inches of cable tray width.

b. Where cable tray cannot be installed contiguous, because of obstacles that simply cannot be coordinated out of the way, furnish and install conduit sleeves or a discrete cable support system to traverse the obstacles. This intermediate pathway segment shall contain the same or greater usable cross-sectional area as the cable tray.

12. Working Clearances for Cable Tray:

a. 7 inches above the ceiling line of accessible ceilings to the bottom of the single or multi-tier cable tray to allow for removal and reinstallation of ceiling tiles.

b. Vertical clearance between tray and objects above:

1) 6 inches vertical clearance above the top of trays less than or equal to 12 inches wide.

2) 12 inches vertical clearance above the top of trays 12 inches to 24 inches wide.

c. Vertical clearance between tray and objects below:

1) With the exception of suspended ceiling grid there shall be no objects located below the cable tray that could impede access to the cable tray.

2) Vertical clearance is required above cable tray.

d. Horizontal clearance minimums between tray and objects installed beside the tray:

1) 12 inches of clearance left and right of tray that is less than or equal to 12 inches wide.


MSA# 11172.00


2) 18 inches of clearance left and right of trays 12 inches to 18 inches wide. 3) 24 inches of clearance left and right of trays greater than 18 inches wide. 4) Wall mounted tray requires clearance on one side of the tray. 5) Suspended tray requires clearance on both sides of the tray.

13. Supports for Cable Tray:

a. Support cable trays from building structure. b. Install supports for suspended cable trays at increments not more than 60 inches on center

and additionally at each splice, tee, elbow, bend, intersection, and transition. c. Suspended tray shall be installed with lateral bracing to prevent side-to-side movement of

the tray. d. Support rod sizing:

1) Tray 12 inches or less in width shall utilize 1/2 inch all-thread-rod, minimum. 2) Tray greater than 12 inches in width shall utilize 5/8 inch all-thread-rod, minimum.

e. Support rod lengths over 6 feet shall be equipped with a rod stiffener. f. Under-floor cable tray systems shall be installed using such means so that no lateral loads

are applied to the risers of the raised floor system. Where cantilever type tray or tray mounting adapters are used, provide accessory supports designed to ensure that tray loads are carried vertically to the floor.

14. Multi-Tier Cable Tray:

a. Multiple-tier cable tray shall be provided in lieu of single tier cable tray where space constraints and working clearance requirements limit the use of wider single tier cable tray solution.

E. Conduit:

1. Install conduit in a concealed manner except where approved by the Designer in advance. 2. Install conduit terminations into boxes and enclosures using fittings featuring locknuts and

insulating throat liners. 3. Install insulating bushings on the exposed ends of conduit stubs and sleeves. 4. Install insulating bushings on the exposed threaded portion of conduits and conduit fittings that

terminate conduit to a box or equipment enclosure. 5. Support conduits by using pipe straps or trapeze hangers. Space supports not more than 8 feet on

center. Secure supports by means of toggle bolts, inserts or expansion bolts. 6. Space wall brackets supporting conduits not more than 4 feet 6 inches on center. Secure supports

by means of toggle bolts, inserts or expansion bolts. 7. Support raceway components directly from structural building systems, not from ceiling

suspensions systems. Provide supplemental supports for junction or pull boxes. 8. Conceal conduit raceways under floors, in walls, above ceilings and in furred spaces within

finished building areas. 9. Support single conduits 1-1/2 inches and larger by means of rod and cast ring hangers. Support

multiple runs in similar manner or use a common trapeze hanger system. 10. Provide two-hole sheet metal pipe straps for surface mounted conduit supports on walls up to a

height of 8 feet above the finished floor. 11. Pinch type hangers similar to minerallac shall only be used at heights greater than 8 feet. 12. Protect conduits during construction with temporary plugs or caps. Securely cap conduits until

pull string, or cable is installed. 13. Do not install conduit horizontally in concrete slabs on grade.


MSA# 11172.00


14. Provide expansion fittings where raceway crosses the building expansion joints. (O.X. Type AX, EX, EXDS, TX, EXE, or approved equal).

15. Conduit Routing:

a. If specific routing information appears on the Drawings, route and maintain conduits as shown. Should interference or a conflict arise, consult the Designer before proceeding with the Work.

b. If specific routing information does not appear on the Drawings, Determine the best route for the conduit in accordance with code and other project guidelines.

16. Conduit bends:

a. Bends shall be made so that the conduit will not be flattened or kinked and so that the internal diameter of the conduit is not reduced.

b. The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any bend shall not be less than indicated by the National Electrical Code and TIA/EIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

c. In no case shall any conduit be bent or shall any fabricated elbow be applied to a conduit that will impose less than the minimum allowable bending radius specified by the manufacturer of cable that will be installed within the conduit.

d. When it is necessary to make field bends, use tools manufactured for conduit bending.

1) Heating of metallic conduit to facilitate bending is not permitted.

e. Constructing an outside entrance to a building from buried conduit to penetrate above the ceiling line will allow an exception for a 4 inches LB fitting at one end to allow placement of the conduit flat to the building outside wall.

17. Do not cut, burn, or drill any structural member to pass through or mount any pathway product without first obtaining approval in writing from the building architect and structural engineer.

18. Install above-ceiling conduits a minimum of 7 inches above ceiling tiles so as to permit ceiling tile removal.

19. Install conduits at least 6 inches away from insulated pipes, steam lines or any other hot pipes which they pass. Where the lines are not insulated, the clearances shall be increased until the temperature of the conduit, with no live conductors enclosed, does not rise above the ambient temperature of the installation area.

20. Install flashing and counter flashing or pitch pockets for waterproofing of raceways, outlets and fittings that must penetrate the roof.

21. Install oversized sleeves in forms for new concrete walls, floor slabs, and partitions to allow for the passage of raceways.

22. Waterproof sleeved raceways installed below grade and in areas prone to high moisture and condensation.

F. Surface Raceway:

1. Coordinate installation with casework prior to the installation of raceway, and prior to the installation of casework.

2. Install in a manner that minimizes detrimental effects on room aesthetics. Coordinate to make vertical drops near corners, transitioning to horizontal runs to new device location(s). Coordinate and review with the Architect/Designer prior to installation.

3. Install raceway, accessories and device boxes plumb and level. 4. Anchor raceways to walls with the anchors designed for the wall construction encountered. 5. Secure raceway at intervals of not more than 2 feet, and not less than 6 inches from the ends of

each raceway.


MSA# 11172.00


6. Install raceway per the manufacturer’s written recommendations, including necessary entrance, ending and bend fittings.

7. Furnish and install the manufacturer’s recommended fittings and accessories. 8. Where surface raceway is provided for a secondary pathway from device to the ceiling space,

extend the surface raceway into the ceiling space not less than 4 inches.

G. Surface Raceway Color Matching:

1. Surface raceway shall be supplied in manufacturer standard or manufacturer custom colors to exactly match the color of surface raceway provided as Work of Division 26 and 28.

2. Custom paint surface raceways of different colors so that raceway installed within the same space are the same color.

3. Seek the review and approval of surface raceway colors from the Architect.

H. Pull Boxes:

1. Install each pull box indicated on the Drawings. 2. Install additional pull boxes within the building envelope:

a. Every 180 degrees of raceway bend. b. Every 100 feet of raceway. c. As additionally required by Code.

3. Install additional pull boxes outside the building envelope:

a. Every 500 running feet of below-grade raceway. b. Every 180 degrees of raceway bend. c. Every 100 feet of above-grade raceway. d. As additionally required by Code.

4. Install pull boxes in areas that will be accessible after installation. Accessible areas include spaces above removable tile ceilings and behind access doors that are installed expressly for this purpose. Do not install pull-boxes in locations that will not be accessible after construction is complete and is not accessible after permanently installed furniture or fixtures are installed.

5. Size boxes in accordance with the NEC. Use larger boxes where so specified. 6. Support boxes rigidly. 7. Land conduits on the boxes such that conduits enter and exit across from each other on opposite

sides of the box so as to facilitate straight line pulling of cable through the box. 8. Do not use pull boxes in lieu of conduit bends, except as necessary by design or to meet

constructability constraints. 9. When directional transition of the cables is necessary through a box, land conduits on the box so

that they permit the largest possible bending radius for those cables that will pass through the box.

I. Pull Stings:

1. Install a usable pull string in every pathway prior to the installation of cables. The string shall be installed after pathway installation and prior to such time as the cable installer desires to install cable within the pathway. The string shall be used as an aid to the installation of cables.

2. Install a replacement pull string in each pathway as part of the cable installation process to facilitate installation of additional cable(s). Tie the pull-string off and tag for “Future Use.”

J. Innerduct:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Install innerduct within and along pathways that will be used to accommodate fiber optic cables.

a. Plenum rated innerduct shall be used in pathways that are not 100-percent conduit. b. Exception: Innerduct is not required in those pathways that will contain exclusively

armored-type fiber optic cables.

K. Spillways:

1. Install cable spillways where cable(s) will exit a conduit sleeve, cable tray, or wireway and where they would otherwise be unsupported for more than 6 inches.

L. Telecommunication Poles:

1. Mount straight and anchor to building structure above the ceiling line. 2. Provide mounting hardware, entrance end fitting, and ceiling trim plate.

M. Discrete Cable Supports:

1. Install supports in areas that will be readily accessible after installation (e.g., above accessible suspended ceilings; up within the building structure in unfinished areas).

2. Do not install supports in any location that is not readily accessible and cannot be reached by the hand of an individual standing flat footed on the ground, a ladder or scaffolding. Do not install in areas where an individual has to strain to reach or where a pole will be required to access.

3. Install separate discrete cable support pathways for cables from each system. Where the allowed capacity of an individual support will be exceeded, install multiple parallel pathways.

4. Install separate discrete cable support pathways for cables from the same system that carry signals that could negatively interfere with one another. Array supports vertically using an appropriate spacing not less than 6 inches for every 6 dB of nominal voltage differential between the cables.

5. Attach supports directly to vertical building surfaces, or from overhead structural members using threaded rod and other approved attachment methods. Support of cables by use of suspended ceiling wires shall not be permitted.

6. Install supports plumb and square. 7. Install horizontal runs of cables supports level. Change elevation only where necessary for

coordination with other trades and pathways of other systems. 8. Mount the bottom of supports approximately 12 inches above the top of suspended ceilings. 9. Install cable supports at intervals not exceeding 5 cable feet. 10. Install supports so that they will not interfere with the removal or installation of ceiling tiles.

N. Device Boxes:

1. New-work and old-work device boxes shall be installed flush with or slightly recessed below the finished surface. Do not recess boxes more than is permitted by code, nor more than .078 inches (2mm). Old-work boxes require advanced craftsmanship and construction techniques to achieve specification compliance for communications Work.

2. The installed elevation of boxes shall generally be as indicated on the drawings. Elevations shall be adjusted in the field to ensure a clean appearance resulting from coordination of the new box elevations to match the existing box elevations. Where the specified box elevations and existing condition box elevations differ by more than 4 inches, seek the direction of the Designer prior to installation.

3. Device boxes and associated cover plates shall not span different types of wall finishes either vertically or horizontally. Horizontal and vertical position of boxes shall be adjusted at time of installation to ensure that this condition does not exist after installation.

4. Boxes in masonry shall be installed so that the specified over plates will cover the mortar joints and cut openings completely.


MSA# 11172.00


5. Device boxes shall be installed so that they are securely and rigidly attached to structure. Gypsum board and similar non-structural board shall not be used for box support.

6. Devices boxes shall not rely on raceway as a means of support. Boxes shall be fully supported by surrounding building structure.

7. Device boxes shall be installed plumb and level to within the following limits:

a. Maximum one-tenth (1/10) of one degree from plumb and from level, and; b. Maximum difference from level of .078 inch (2mm) at one end of the box relative to the

other end of the box, and; c. Maximum difference from plumb of .078 inch (2mm) at the top of the box relative to the

bottom of the box.

8. Boxes shall be shimmed as necessary to insure level and plumb installation. 9. Install gaskets on boxes installed outside and in wet or damp locations (e.g., tunnels, crawlspaces,

pits). 10. Device boxes shall be protected from plaster, drywall mud, mortar, and other construction debris. 11. Floor boxes shall be installed flush and true with the finished floor, or otherwise in accordance

with the manufacturer’s instructions. 12. Boxes shall be cleaned of debris after installation. 13. Boxes shall be cleaned of debris thoroughly prior to installation of cover plates; 14. Install blank cover plates on each unused device box.

O. Sleeves and Penetrations:

1. Sleeves through poured-in-place concrete surfaces shall be set in place prior to the concrete pour and protected from concrete ingress.

2. Sleeves through floors shall be installed to prevent the passage of water between the sleeve and the floor.

3. Install cable-protecting insulating bushings on the each end of each sleeve. 4. Extend through-the-wall sleeves a minimum of 2 inches beyond the wall surface. Extend the

sleeve a greater distance where necessary to permit proper installation of cable-protecting bushings and any associated cable waterfalls.

5. Extend through-the-floor sleeves to a consistent elevation of 4 inches to 6 inches above finished floors, except where otherwise noted on the Drawings.

6. Fill the voids between sleeve and building surface with approved fire stop material sufficient to maintain the fire-rating of the building surface.

P. Conduit Stubs:

1. Install cable-protecting insulating bushings on each conduit stub.

Q. Supports:

1. Fabricated Support Devices:

a. Conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations for selection and installation of supports. b. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to

support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

c. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers. d. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners

shall be used in lieu of hangers for 1-1/2 inches and smaller raceways above suspended ceilings only.


MSA# 11172.00


e. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use 1/4 inch diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing.

f. Support exposed and concealed raceway within 1 foot of box and access fittings. In horizontal runs, support at the box and access fittings shall be omitted where box or access fittings are independently supported and raceway terminals are not made with chase nipples or threadless box connectors.

g. In vertical runs, arrange supports so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on the ends of the raceway.

2. Miscellaneous supports:

a. Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, pull boxes, junction boxes, and other devices.

b. Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved type of fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.

3. Fastening:

a. Fasten pathway products and its supporting hardware securely to the building structure in accordance with the following:

1) Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel. Threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts shall be used instead of expansion bolts and machine or wood screws. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws.

2) When installing fasteners in concrete or CMU structures, do not cut reinforcing bars.

3) Ensure that the load applied to any fasteners does not exceed 25-percent of the proof test load. Use vibration-and shock-resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs.

b. Raceway supports: Hanger spacing shall be as required for adequate support of the raceway, but in no case shall there be less than one hanger per 5 feet of raceway length.

R. Pathway Evacuation:

1. Prior to the installation of cable:

a. Clean and vacuum boxes, raceway, cable tray, and discrete cable supports. b. Remove solids or other hindrances that could impede its full utilization or that could

damage cable during or after installation. c. Remove liquids. Blow out until raceway is dry, sufficiently that the installed cables will

not be subjected to contact with them.

2. Where existing raceways are reused, remove liquid from the raceway.

S. Water Proofing:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Protect raceways from moisture infiltration in areas where moisture penetration is probable (e.g., outdoors, natatoriums, wash bays).

2. Provide watertight fittings where one or more cables exit the pathway in areas where moisture penetration is probable.

3. Seal below-grade conduit joints to prevent moisture infiltration. 4. Seal joints of conduits in high-moisture areas to prevent moisture infiltration. 5. Pressure or vacuum test below-grade conduits before and after concealing the conduits to ensure

resistance to moisture ingress.

T. Repair and Patching:

1. Holes and other penetrations into building surfaces or structure that are created to facilitate pathway installation but that are not ultimately used shall be filled, repaired, and restored to their original strength, appearance and integrity.

2. Damage to building or property that occurs during the course of pathway installation shall be repaired and restored to its original condition prior to damage.

U. Cover Plates

1. Provide cover plates over the openings of junction boxes, pull boxes and cast boxes.

3.8 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with Section 270550 “Firestopping for Communications.”



MSA# 11172.00

FIRESTOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS 270550 - 1

SECTION 270550 – FIRESTOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Materials, methods and requirements for firestopping of pathways and cabling.

1. Section includes, but is not limited to:

a. Penetrations through fire-resistance/-rated floor and roof construction including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items.

b. Penetrations through fire-resistance/-rated walls and partitions including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items.

c. Penetrations through smoke barriers and construction enclosing compartmentalized areas involving both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.

d. Sealant joints in fire-resistance/-rated construction. e. Firestopping compounds.


1. Section 078413 “Penetration Firestopping.” 2. This Section identifies the minimum requirements for the Project. Comply with the requirements




1.3 REFERENCES

A. Definitions:

1. AHJ: Authorities Having Jurisdiction.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Firestopping: A material or combination of materials used to retain the integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flames, smoke, and/or hot gasses through penetrations in fire-rated wall and floor assemblies.



B. Work shall be performed by entities and individuals fluent in the applicable codes at the Project site.

C. Individuals performing firestopping installation shall be trained and certified by the manufacturer whose products are used.

D. Where the local jurisdiction requires additional training, licensing, permits and certifications to perform firestopping, the entity and individuals performing the work shall comply with such requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The firestopping system shall resist the spread of fire and the passage of smoke and other gasses in accordance with applicable codes, as directed by the AHJ, and in accordance with additional requirements indicated in the Contract Documents.

B. Firestopping shall be installed around each penetration through a building surface from one logical building space to another.

C. Firestopping shall be installed within the interior cavity of conduit sleeves, raceway, cable tray and other cable conveyances where the interior volume of the conveyance is open and exposed in one space while the opposite end of the conveyance is open and exposed within another.

D. Firestopping may be factory installed in a re-usable sleeve assembly or may be removable/ re-usable material(s) inserted into a sleeve assembly to provide protection.

E. Firestopping shall be installed where preparations for, or installation of, communications and security equipment cause the fire or smoke rating of a building component or assembly to be reduced as a result of some action taken.

F. Firestopping requirements/locations are not indicated on the Drawings. Review the Contract Documents to determine the fire/smoke rated walls and floors and rating requirements. Provide required firestopping Work associated with penetrations created to facilitate or as a result of Work of this Division and Division 28.

1. At a minimum, provide firestopping to equal or exceed the rating of the wall or floor.

G. System Performance requirements:

1. Provide re-usable firestopping system(s) in backbone and horizontal pathways. 2. F-rated through-penetration firestop systems:


MSA# 11172.00


a. Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-rating indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the construction penetrated.

3. T-rated through-penetration firestop systems:

a. Provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings, in addition to F-ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814 where indicated and where systems protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in occupied floor areas. T-rated assemblies are required where the following conditions exist:

1) Firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities. 2) Firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. 3) Firestop systems protect penetrations located in construction containing doors

required to have a temperature-rise rating. 4) Firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4-inch (100 mm) diameter

nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. (100 sq. cm) in overall cross-sectional area.

4. Fire-resistive joint sealants:

a. Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings as determined per ASTM E 119, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs.

5. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide system and products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions.

a. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) or more in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting the floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.

b. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

6. For firestopping exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread values of less than 25 and smoke-developed values of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84.

H. Trade Organization Standards Compliance:

1. The firestopping system shall be installed in compliance with TIA/EIA-569, Annex A, “Firestopping” and BICSI TDMM, “Firestopping Systems” Article.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS


1. 3M Fire Protection Products. 2. BioFireshield 3. Hilti Corporation. 4. Isolatek International. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. RectorSeal Corporation.


MSA# 11172.00


7. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI). 8. Tremco Fire Protection Products. 9. Unique Fire Stop Products (UFSP). 10. Unifrax Corporation.

2.3 GENERAL

A. Provide firestopping components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Provide components for each firestopping system required to install fill materials and to comply with “System Performance Requirements” Article above. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Firestopping materials shall be asbestos-free and shall not contain flammable solvents. Accessories include but are not limited to the following:

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following:

a. Semi-refractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation. b. Ceramic fiber. c. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent leakage of

fill materials in liquid state. d. Fire-rated form board. e. Joint fillers for joint sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves.

C. Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified that comply with system performance and other requirements.

2.4 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one or more of the following types:

1. Ceramic-fiber and mastic coating: Ceramic fibers in bulk form formulated for use with mastic coating and ceramic fiber manufacturer’s mastic coating.

2. Ceramic-fiber sealant: Single-component formulation of ceramic fibers and inorganic binders. 3. Endothermic, latex compound sealant: Single-component, endothermic, latex formulation. 4. Intumescent, latex sealant: Single-component, intumescent latex formulation. 5. Intumescent putty: Non-hardening, dielectric, water-resistant putty containing no solvents,

inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. 6. Intumescent wrap strips: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one side. 7. Pillows/bags: Reusable, heat-expanding pillows/bags composed of glass-fiber cloth cases filled

with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives. 8. Intumescent collars.


MSA# 11172.00


2.5 FIRE-RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one or more of the following types:

1. Elastomeric sealant standard: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants for base polymer indicated that complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for type, grade, class, and uses; and requirements specified in this Section applicable to fire-resistive joint sealants.

2. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant:

a. Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, exposure-related Use NT, and joint-substrate related Uses M, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.

b. Provide sealant with the capability to withstand the following percentage changes in joint width existing at time of installation, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated:

1) 50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 100 percent movement.

2) 100 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression for a total of 150 percent movement.

3. Single-component, neutral-curing, silicone sealant: 4. Single-component, nonsag, urethane sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses NT, M, A,

and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.

2.6 FIRE STOPPING FOR OTHER WALL AND FLOOR OPENINGS

A. Provide Fire Stop Sealant, UL Classified for 3 hour fire and cold side temperature ratings, non-sagging, permanently flexible, non-toxic, non-shrinking, water/air/smoke-tight and easily re-penetrated.

1. Basis of Design: Nelson #AA491 series.

B. Apply sealant primer to substrates as recommended by manufacturer. Protect adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers

C. Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by the sealant manufacturer.

2.7 SLEEVES THROUGH FLOORS AND WALLS

A. Penetrations through floors or walls shall be equipped with a UL listed device for the purpose of penetrating the construction.

1. Concrete, block, brick, and gypsum drywall construction providing a fire rating of greater than one hour for walls and floors shall require a UL rated sleeve assembly installed per the manufacturer’s requirements allowing the penetration(s) to not degrade the designed fire rating of the wall or floor.


MSA# 11172.00


a. Basis of Design: Unique Fire Stop Products (USFP). Utilize USFP’s Threaded Penetrator system for fire-rated penetrations.

2. Other penetrations and gypsum drywall constructed walls with a fire rating of one hour or less shall require a UL rated sleeve assembly installed to manufacturer’s requirements allowing the penetration(s) to not degrade the designed fire rating of the wall or floor.

a. Basis of Design: Unique Fire Stop Products (UFSP). Utilize UFSP’s Smooth Penetrator system for fire-rated penetrations.

3. Penetrations found to be improperly sleeved after the installation of cabling shall be sleeved and firestopped to restore the proper aesthetics and required fire rating to the obstruction.

a. Basis of Design: Unique Fire Stop Products (UFSP). Utilize UFSP’s split-sleeve system for fire rated penetrations.

2.8 COMBUSTIBLES IN PLENUM SPACES

A. Passive combustibles installed within plenum spaces that are not UL listed for installation within plenum spaces shall be encased within high-temperature plenum insulation, the purpose of which is to prevent flame propagation and smoke development in the plenum areas. Passive combustibles include such items as non-plenum cables, pipe, low-voltage connector housings.

1. Plenum insulation shall be UL listed for the application. 2. Basis of Design: UniFrax FyreWrap 0.5.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Environmental conditions:

1. Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside the limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilation:

1. Ventilate firestopping compounds per manufacturers’ instructions by natural means or, when this is inadequate, forced air circulation.

3.2 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Do not cover up firestopping installations that will become concealed behind other construction until the Architect/Engineer/Consultant has examined the installation.


MSA# 11172.00



A. Deliver firestopping products to the Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturer labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency’s classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

1. Coordinate the delivery date of firestopping materials with the scheduled date of installation to minimize the amount of storage time required at the Project site.

2. Store with a copy of the manufacturer MSDS sheet.

a. Submit a copy of each sheet to the site manager or Owner’s project manager upon delivery to the site.

B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants or other causes.

C. Damaged or expired materials shall be removed from the site and shall not be used in the Work.

3.4 FIRE TEST RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS

A. Provide firestopping that complies with the following requirements and those specified in the “System Performance Requirements” Article in this Section.

B. Firestopping tests are to be performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is an agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Through-penetration firestop systems shall be those tested per ASTM E 814 under conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01 inch of water (2.5 Pa) is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch (20 mm) below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

1. Through-penetration firestop system products shall bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their “Fire Resistance Directory,” by Warnock Hersey, or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency.

D. Fire-resistive joint sealant systems shall be those tested for fire-response characteristics per ASTM E 119 under conditions where the positive furnace pressure differential is at least 0.01 inch of water (2.5 Pa) as measured 0.78 inch (20 mm) from the face exposed to furnace fire. Provide systems complying with the following requirements:

1. Fire-resistance rating of joint sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations listed by UL in the “Fire Resistance Directory” or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency.

2. Joint sealants, including backing materials, shall bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency.

E. Where no UL test firestop application exists, manufacturer’s engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation.


MSA# 11172.00


F. It is the sole responsibility of the firestopping provider to install tested and approved systems that comply with applicable codes, standards and/or agencies and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.5 SINGLE-SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY

A. Obtain through-penetration firestop systems for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer.

B. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, “Polarized Light Microscopy.”

3.6 COORDINATING WORK

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that designated through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements.

3.7 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions with installer present for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.8 PREPARATION

A. Surface cleaning:

1. Clean out openings and joints immediately before installation of firestopping to comply with firestopping manufacturer’s published guidelines and recommendations and the following requirements:

a. Remove foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping.

b. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

c. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Masking tape:

1. Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contact with the following:

a. Adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work. b. Surfaces that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or

cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials.

2. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping seal with substrates.


MSA# 11172.00


3.9 GENERAL FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL APPLICATION

A. Clean affected surfaces and joints immediately before applying fire stopping to comply with the manufacturer recommendations.

B. Comply with fire stop material manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

C. Install fire stop materials, including forming, packing, and other accessory materials, to fill openings around services penetrating floors and walls, to provide fire-stops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency.

D. Seal between sleeves and pipes with rock wool and sealant around sleeves with sealing compound. Material must meet applicable fire ratings required.

E. Where a smoke and/or fire-resistance classification is indicated on the Architectural or other Drawings, provide the following as applicable.

1. Fire stop pillows, putty and/or sealant with minimum UL classification for 3 hour fire and cold side temperature ratings for penetrations.

2. Access door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in the UL "Building Materials Directory" for rating required; Provide UL Label on each fire-rated access door.

3. Wall and floor opening firestopping for open cable tray or J-hook pathways. 4. Wall and floor opening firestopping for Work likely to require ongoing moves, adds and changes. 5. Work shall comply with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.

a. Seal holes to ensure flame/gas/smoke resistant seal. b. Do not permit UL firestop systems to hamper the performance of fire dampers in ductwork.

3.10 INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS

A. General:

1. Comply with the “System Performance Requirements” Article in this Section and the through-penetration firestop manufacturer’s printed installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating

items.


MSA# 11172.00


3.11 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Comply with the “System Performance Requirements” Article in this Section, with ASTM C 1193, and with the sealant manufacturer’s printed installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated.

B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at the position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required.

C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width at optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed.

D. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or as required to produce fire-resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to the joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or that are not approved by the sealant manufacturer.


A. Do not proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until examinations are completed.

B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestopping at no additional expense to the Owner so that Work complies with requirements.

3.13 CLEANING

A. Remove excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as Work progresses. Use methods and cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and products in which openings and joints occur. Return surfaces to the original condition.

B. During and after the curing period, protect firestopping from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage or at time of Substantial Completion.

1. If damage or deterioration occurs, remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately, and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified requirements.



MSA# 11172.00

IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS 270553 - 1

SECTION 270553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Labeling of Communications Cabling. 2. Labeling of Communications Equipment. 3. Labeling of Communications Rooms. 4. Communications Key Plan Drawings.





1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Definitions:

1. Device.ID: The unique identifier given to a specific instance of a product, module and assembly. Device.IDs are unique to the system in which they are used.

2. Lamacoid: A general term used to describe a 2-ply or 3-ply plastic material used in the creation of semi-rigid labels, markers, and signs. Nomenclature is typically applied through mechanical or laser engraving and the removal of one or more foreground layers to expose a contrasting colored material below. Lamacoid as used within these specifications refers not to brand or manufacturer but to a class of material designed for this purpose and available from a wide variety of manufacturers.


MSA# 11172.00


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General:



1. Product datasheets. 2. Labeling schemas. 3. Product Samples:

a. Two (2) of each label type to be furnished, for each labeling application:

1) Each label shall feature nomenclature applied using the exact font planned to be used.

2) Nomenclature shall be applied to the labels using the exact device that will be used to imprint the labels.

b. Two (2) each of the following cable samples, fully labeled in the manner in which they will be labeled. Each cable shall be 24 inches in length. Each cable shall be identified with the Communications system to which it belongs.

1) Horizontal Copper Cable (Voice). 2) Horizontal Copper Cable (Data). 3) Horizontal Coaxial Cable (RF). 4) Each other type of specified horizontal cable. 5) Backbone Cable (Voice). 6) Backbone Cable (Data). 7) Backbone Cable (RF). 8) Audio-Video System Cable. 9) Cables used for each other communications system.

c. Two (2) labels of the size and type used to identify equipment racks:

1) Labels shall feature representative nomenclature compliant with the schema used on the project.

4. Communications Plan Key Drawings:

a. Two complete set of full-size drawings representing the Key Plan Drawings that will be posted within the Communications Rooms.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. The identification system shall be a coordinated system of permanently affixed labels of specified types that are used to uniquely identify each instance of a product and the space in which it is located. The following items shall be identified:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Rooms containing communications products. 2. Individual active and passive equipment assemblies. 3. Equipment racks. 4. Equipment enclosures/cabinets. 5. Patch Panels. 6. Patch Bays. 7. Faceplates. 8. Individual connection jacks, receptacles and terminals. 9. Cables. 10. Backboards. 11. Device boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, floor boxes, wall boxes, ceiling boxes and other boxes

used for passage, splicing, or termination of cables. 12. Equipment power cord plugs. 13. Telecommunications cabling cross-connects, including 66-blocks and 110-blocks.

B. The labeling schema used for horizontal and backbone structured cabling systems shall be TIA/EIA-606-A compliant.

C. The system shall include Key Plan drawings mounted within Communications Rooms that identify the location and labeling of Communication devices that are served out of that Communications Room. The drawings shall include identifiers that uniquely associate each field device with specific termination products used within the Communications Room.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS


1. Brother. 2. Casio. 3. Hubbell. 4. Panduit. 5. Hellerman/Tyton. 6. Thomas and Betts.

2.3 PERFORMANCE

A. Labels shall be designed to remain permanently affixed under typical environmental conditions for the life of the product identified.

B. Nomenclature shall be permanent and non-fading under typical environmental conditions.

C. Adhesive labels shall remain attached to the affixed product in continuous conditions of 90% relative humidity and temperatures of 100 degrees Fahrenheit (38 degrees Celsius).

2.4 CABLE LABELS

A. Type A:

1. Self-laminating type.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Adhesive backed. 3. Opaque solid-color background area, color for nomenclature: White. 4. Clear self-laminating wrap-around cover for protection of nomenclature. 5. Available in a variety of heights and widths to suit the cable being labeled. 6. Printing area of the label available in a wide variety of sizes to accommodate the specific

nomenclature to be applied. 7. Overall label width: Minimum 1 inch (25 mm); Maximum 2 inches (50 mm). 8. Opaque printing area length: Minimum 1/2 inch (12 mm); Maximum 1-1/4 times the cable

circumference. 9. Self-laminating wrap length: 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 times the cable circumference. 10. Bold computer-generated and commercial printer applied high-contrast project and system specific

nomenclature.

2.5 DEVICE LABELS

A. Type A – Lamacoid 2-Ply:

1. Lamacoid type 2-ply plastic material. 2. Self-adhesive backing for adhesion to labeled item. 3. Available in a wide variety of sizes to suite the application. 4. Available with a wide-variety of background colors. 5. Available with a variety of different nomenclature colors.

B. Type B – Tape Type:

1. Tape-type construction. 2. Material: Polyester. 3. Working temperature range: -40 to 248 degrees Fahrenheit (-40 to 120 degrees Celsius) 4. Opaque solid-color background over which nomenclature is applied. 5. Self-adhesive backing for adhesion to labeled item. 6. Designed for thermal-transfer based machine imprinting of nomenclature. 7. Available in a wide-variety of manufacturer sizes. 8. Available with a wide-variety of background colors. 9. Available with a variety of different nomenclature colors.

C. Type C – Etched/Imprinted Type:

1. Material: Metal. 2. Semi-rigid construction. 3. Self-adhesive backing for adhesion to labeled item.

2.6 ROOM LABELS

A. Type A – Lamacoid 2-Ply:

1. Lamacoid type 2-ply plastic material. 2. Self-adhesive backing for adhesion to labeled item. 3. Available in a wide variety of sizes to suite the application. 4. Available with a wide-variety of background colors. 5. Available with a variety of different nomenclature colors.


MSA# 11172.00


2.7 KEY PLAN DRAWINGS

1. Professionally produced using Computer Aided Design software or suitable equal graphics design software.

2. Scaled representation of facility floor plans. 3. Architectural elements represented to scale. Scale clearly appearing and legible on drawing. 4. Paper size: Arch-C or Arch-D size paper. Size commensurate with the amount of detail to be

shown. Other sizes require Designer approval. 5. Media: >=20lb bond paper substrate. 6. Media Color: White. 7. Nomenclature:

a. Floor plan layout: Light gray / faded black. b. Unique legible color for devices from each system.

8. Protective Overlay:

a. 1/8” Clear Plastic. b. Size: 2 inches (50 mm) wider and 2 inches (50 mm) taller than the key drawings it protects. c. Pre-drilled with mounting screw clearance holes:

1) Mounting holes shall be placed 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the overlay edge and 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the drawing the overlay protects.

2) Mounting holes shall exist in each corner of the overlay. 3) Mounting holes shall exist along the vertical and horizontal edges, uniformly spaced

no more than 18 inches (457 mm) on center.

9. Supply separate drawings for each system, for each Communications Room. 10. Each key drawing featuring the same general quality and appearance. Colors, font type and

properties consistent and giving the appearance they are prepared by the same professional organization.

2.8 CABLE LABEL HEATSHRINK

A. Should any condition arise in which cable labels are used that are neither self-laminating nor permanent, then properly sized clear heat-shrink shall be applied over the label to make it permanent.

2.9 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE (UWT)

1. Material: Linear low density polyethylene. 2. Width: 6 inches (150 mm). 3. Thickness: 100 microns manufactured to ENATS 12-23 specification. 4. Lead free pigments with virgin grade film. 5. Soil tolerance: pH 2.5 to pH 11.0 inclusive. 6. Dual lines of continuous text.

a. Line 1 Text: “Caution” repeated infinitum b. Line 2 Text: Custom labeled to identify what is below (e.g., “Telephone Conduit Below” or

“Cable TV Cable Below”).


MSA# 11172.00


7. Tape Color: Use tape with major color in accordance with the American Public Works Association Uniform Utility Color Code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Label each instance of each product. 2. Label each connector of each product. 3. Install labels so that they are legible after installation. 4. Install labels so they are parallel to the dominant visual lines of the product identified. 5. Install labels of the appropriate size for the application. 6. Maintain consistency in label sizes that are used for labeling similar applications. 7. Install secondary labels on the rear of products that are mounted within racks, within equipment

enclosures/cabinets, within furniture or casework, and in any application where the rear of the product is accessed for termination, installation, service, operation or adjustment.

B. Communication Rooms:

1. Label communications rooms with a label featuring the technical room identification of the communications room (e.g., ER-L1).

2. Install a single label outside each room. 3. Coordinate the exact mounting surface and location with the Architect or Owner. 4. Use Lamacoid type labels.

C. Communications Backboards/Panel Boards (TBB):

1. Label each full-size and each partial sheet of backboard material (e.g., plywood) within a communications room.

2. Label each backboard in numerical order using a unique identifier beginning at one and up to the number of boards present in the space. (e.g., TBB.01-ER-L1 to TBB.12-ER-L1).

3. Label boards in a clockwise fashion beginning with the interior surface of the room immediately adjacent to the frame of the primary entry door into the space.

4. Locate the labels horizontally centered and top-aligned with each backboard. 5. Use Lamacoid type labels.

D. Equipment Racks:

1. Label each equipment rack with a unique identifier. 2. Accurately record the nomenclature on the project as-built documentation. 3. Affix a primary label to the front of the rack. 4. Affix a secondary label to the rear of the rack. 5. Locate labels on the upper-most part of the rack, typically the frame, in an area that is clearly

visible if doors are installed and closed. 6. Label each equipment rack to match the designation indicated on the floor plans (e.g., ER-L1.01 to

ER-L1.03). 7. Use Lamacoid type labels.

E. Equipment Cabinets/Enclosures (e.g., NEMA Enclosures):


MSA# 11172.00


1. Label each equipment cabinet/enclosure with a unique identifier. 2. Accurately record the nomenclature on the project as-built documentation. 3. Affix a primary label on the dominant front-most outer surface. 4. Affix a secondary label on the dominant interior surface if the product is equipped with a

removable cover or door. 5. Use Lamacoid label for the primary label. 6. Use Tape-type labels for the secondary label.

F. Cables

1. General:

a. Uniquely identify each cable so that no two cables serving a single system utilize the same identifier.

b. Cables that terminate within different architectural spaces shall include both the source and destination space identifiers on the label in addition to a unique identifier.

c. Install a primary label near the end of cable. d. Install a secondary label (with identical nomenclature as the primary label) near the ends of

the cable at such point that the label is viewable and readable when the cable is in its final dressed position.

e. Utilize specified labeling schemas. Substitute schema may be considered if submitted to, reviewed and returned by the Designer without exceptions.

2. Horizontal Cables:

a. Label in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. b. Horizontal labeling schema:

1) [Communication Room Identifier]-[Outlet Room Number]-[Patch Panel][Patch Panel Port Number]

3. Backbone Cables:

a. Label in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. b. Cabling labeling schema:

1) Service designation and number: CB = Copper Backbone, FB = Fiber Backbone, VB = Video Backbone (e.g., CB.01, FB.01, FB.02, VB.01)

2) Interconnected Communication Room designations (e.g., ER-01–TR-02) 3) Composite Examples:

i) Example: CB.01–ER-01–T-02 ii) Example: CB.01–ER-01–TR-02

4. Patch Cables:

a. Label with a unique identifier at each end.

5. Multi-Cable Assemblies and Tethers:

a. Label the overall assembly, sleeve, or jacket (as applicable) at both ends. b. Label each individual cable member at both ends.


MSA# 11172.00


c. If the cable assembly features connectors on the end of any cable member, affix labels also on the connector. Use user-friendly nomenclature to identify the use of the connector and the port to which it mates.

G. Faceplates and Outlets

1. Faceplates – General:

a. Label each faceplate. b. Label each faceplate with its unique Device.ID. c. Nomenclature shall feature an identifier that is unique to the system(s) served by

connections on the plate.

2. Faceplates – with Horizontal Cables:

a. Label modular outlet frame(s) with a label identifying origination and destination rooms of the horizontal cable(s) present at the faceplate.

3. Outlets – General:

a. Label each outlet.

4. Outlets – Horizontal Cables:

a. Identify the specific patch panel and port to which the opposite end of the cable is connected.

H. Cross-Connect Blocks

1. 110-Style:

a. Label the front of the block directly above or below (as indicated by the manufacturer) each position in the block.

b. Label connections in numerical order and corresponding to the communications faceplate outlet schema (horizontal cabling) or the opposite end labeling schema (backbone cabling), dependent upon use.

c. Label the upper left corner of each block designating the service of that particular block.

2. 66-Style:

a. Label the front of the block directly above or below (as indicated by the manufacturer) each position in the block.

b. Label connections in numerical order and corresponding to the communications faceplate outlet schema (horizontal cabling) or the opposite end labeling schema (backbone cabling), dependent upon use.

c. Label the upper left corner of each block designating the service of that particular block.

I. Patch Panel

1. Chassis – General:

a. Label each panel chassis with its unique Device.ID.


MSA# 11172.00


b. Affix chassis labels aligned with the left or right edge of the product. Locate consistently across each chassis in the project.

2. Chassis – for Horizontal Cabling:

a. In lieu of or in addition to the Device.ID uniquely label the chassis for each panel within each Communication Room in accordance with the following schema:

1) [Letter] or [Letter][Letter] where letters A-Z or dual letter assemblies AA-ZZ are valid.

3. Individual Connectors – for Horizontal Cabling:

a. Label each connector on each panel in order from Left to Right and Top to Bottom 1 to [x], where [x] is the number of connector spaces on the panel

b. In addition, the connector label nomenclature shall clearly identify the room number in which the opposite end of the cable is terminated.

J. Patch Bays (e.g., Audio, Video)

1. Label each patch bay with its unique Device.ID. 2. Label each connector on the patch bay. 3. Where the patch bay features an integral labeling strip, label the connectors using the strip

following the techniques recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Where the drawings depict additional means of labeling, provide additional labels with designer

reviewed nomenclature.

K. Circuit Boards, Modules, Components and Terminals

1. Label circuit boards and system modules housed within equipment cabinets/enclosures. 2. Affix labels directly to the component (where space is available) or immediately adjacent to the

location of the component (e.g, beside the terminal strip, on top of a circuit board). 3. Use self-adhesive labels. 4. Use unique nomenclature for each component. 5. Requirement applies to labeling components within a pre-manufactured UL rated assembly which

the installer does not need to open in order to make terminations.

L. Terminal Blocks

1. Label each terminal block. 2. Label every conductor of every terminal block. 3. Label logical groups, pairs, or segments of the terminal block as to the purpose they serve.

M. Key Plan Drawings

1. Install Key Plan drawings within each Communication Room. 2. Create and install separate drawings for each system. Some systems may be combined onto a

single drawing, as identified below:

a. Voice and data. b. Security Systems (e.g., Video Surveillance, Access Control, Intrusion Detection).

3. Affix key drawings where they will be readily accessible and legible.


MSA# 11172.00


a. Drawings shall be mounted so that the top edge of the drawing(s) is at 72 inches (1828 mm) above finished floor. If this height is not achievable, the Contractor shall make recommendation to and seek the direction of the Designer.

N. Below Grade Pathways

1. Below-Grade Conduit Markers:

a. Install underground warning tape 6 inches (152 mm) below grade directly above conduit ducts.

b. Install underground warning tape warning tape 6 inches (152 mm) below grade directly above direct buried conduits.

c. Install underground warning tape on top of the surface over which concrete is poured (e.g., driveways, sidewalks, slabs) and directly above ducts or buried conduits.

d. Select a tape featuring a warning message that most accurately describes the pathway usage below.

O. Direct-Buried Cables

1. Below-Grade Cable Markers:

a. Install underground warning tape 6 inches (152 mm) below grade directly above direct buried cables.

b. Select a tape featuring a warning message that most accurately describes the cable(s) below.

3.2 CABLE LABEL PROTECTION

A. If at any time during the course of the project a condition arises for which cable labels are used that are neither self-laminating nor permanent, then such labels shall be protected with properly sized clear heat-shrink to protect the label and to make it permanent.

3.3 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Accurately record the labels used for identifying items within the project as-built documentation.



MSA# 11172.00


A1 A2

D9 D10

ER-01.153ER.01-153

A3 A4

D11 D12

ER-01.153ER.01-153

WPA.02

Device Label[Jack Panel ID] [Port Number]@ Above each connector

Device Label[Communications Room.ID] – [Room Number Housing this Plate]@ Bottom of Module

FACEPLATE LABEL[DEVICE.ID]Nomenclature unique to the dominate system served by connections on the faceplate

Figure A

HORIZONTAL CABLE

CABLE LABEL[COMMUNICATIONS ROOM.ID]-

[DEVICE ROOM]-[JACK PANEL][JACK NUMBER]

ER.01-153-B4

4" Nominal

Figure B


MSA# 11172.00


WPA.02

ADEVICE.ID LABEL[DEVICE.ID]Unique to the system

CHASSIS LABEL[A-Z] or [AA-ZZ]Unique to the Communication Room

PATCH PANEL/JACK PANEL

AWPA.02

NEED TO UPDATE TO

SHOW

CONNECTORS

AS WELL

Figure C


MSA# 11172.00

VERIFICATION TESTING OF STRUCTURED CABLING 270810 - 1

SECTION 270810 – VERIFICATION TESTING OF STRUCTURED CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Procedures and field-test instruments required for performance testing of the following cabling systems installed:

a. Backbone cabling: copper and fiber optic. b. Horizontal cabling: copper and fiber optic. c. Inter-building cabling: copper and fiber optic.


1. Section 270501 “Submittals for Communications.” 2. This Section identifies the minimum requirements for the Project. Comply with the requirements




1.3 REFERENCES

A. Definitions:

1. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. 2. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or

cross-connection. 3. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. 4. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. 5. LAN: Local area network.


MSA# 11172.00


6. Margin: Designates the difference between the measured value and the corresponding test limit value. For passing links, ‘worst case margin’ identifies the smallest margin over the entire frequency range; the point at which the measured performance is “closest” to the test limit.

7. NVP: Nominal Velocity of Propagation expresses the speed of the electrical signals along the cabling link in relation to the speed of light in a vacuum. Insulation characteristics and twist rate of the wire pair influence NVP in minor ways. Typically, an ‘average’ value for NVP is published for four wire-pairs in a cable.

8. OLTS: Optical loss test set. 9. OTDR: Optical time domain reflectometer. 10. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. 11. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

B. Reference Standards:

1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises. 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components

Standard. 4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. 5. ANSI Z136.2, ANS For Safe Use Of Optical Fiber Communication Systems Utilizing Laser Diode

And LED Sources. 6. ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-50B, Light Launch Conditions For Long-Length Graded-Index Optical Fiber

Spectral Attenuation Measurements. 7. ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-59A, Measurement of Fiber Point Discontinuities Using an OTDR. 8. ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-60A, Measurement of Fiber or Cable Length Using an OTDR. 9. ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-61A, Measurement of Fiber or Cable Attenuation Using an OTDR. 10. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Singlemode Fiber Cable

Plant. 11. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable

Plant. 12. TIA/EIA TSB-140, Additional Guidelines for Field-Testing Length, Loss and Polarity of Optical

Fiber Cabling Systems. 13. The most recent published edition of the “TELECOMMUNICATIONS DISTRIBUTION

METHODS MANUAL” published by the Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI).

1.4 COORDINATION

A. The Owner or the Owner’s representative shall be invited to witness and review field testing and procedures. The representative shall be notified of the start date of the testing phase a minimum of five (5) business days before testing commences.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Comply with requirement of Section 270501 “Submittals for Communications.”

B. Informational Submittal:

1. Product Data:


MSA# 11172.00


a. Bill of Materials (BOM):

1) Make, Model, Serial Number. 2) Description of the test instrument. 3) Tests for which the instrument will be used.

b. Product Datasheets: For each test instrument to be used. c. Product Calibration Certificate for each test instrument: Certificate shall document the date

of calibration and the name of the calibration organization.

C. Closeout Submittal:

1. UTP Cable Test Result Documentation:

a. Make, model, serial number and date of last calibration of each piece of test equipment used.

b. Summary Test Reports: Paper copy of the summary test results shall be provided that lists the links that have been tested with the summary information as set forth in Part 3.

c. Detailed Test Reports: Detailed test results data to be provided in the electronic database for each tested link must contain the information as set forth in Part 3.

1) The database for the completed job as stored and delivered on CD-ROM or DVD including the software tools required to view, inspect, and print any selection of test reports.

2. Fiber Optic Test Result Documentation


b. Summary Test Reports: Paper copy of the summary test results shall be provided that lists the links that have been tested with the test summary information as set forth in Part 3.

c. Detailed Test Reports: Detailed test results data to be provided in the electronic database for each tested fiber link must contain the information as set forth in Part 3.


3. Coaxial Cabling Test Result Documentation


b. Summary Test Reports: Paper copy of the summary test results shall be provided that lists links that have been tested with the summary information as set forth in Part 3.

c. Detailed Test Reports: Detailed test results data to be provided in the electronic database for each tested link must contain the information as set forth in Part 3.



MSA# 11172.00



A. Comply with requirement of Section 270002 “Quality Assurance for Communications.”

B. Testing shall be supervised by an individual certified by BICSI as an RCDD.

C. Individuals performing tests shall have attended and have successfully completed an appropriate training program and have obtained a certificate as proof thereof. Appropriate training programs include but are not limited to installation certification programs furnished by BICSI or the ACP (Association of Cabling Professionals).

D. BICSI and ACP certifications shall be kept current for the duration of the project.

E. Test equipment shall perform in accordance with the manufacturer’s published specifications and shall have been calibrated by either the manufacturer or a recognized independent test equipment calibration organization within the 365 day period prior to its use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available test equipment manufacturers that may be used for testing include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Agilent 2. Datacom Technologies / Datacom Textron 3. Fluke Corporation. 4. MicroTest. 5. Sencore 6. Tekronics 7. WaveTek 8. WireScope

B. UTP Cable Test Equipment:

1. Category 5e, 6 and 6a (Augmented Category 6) Compliance: Coordinate with the drawings and related sections for project requirements.

a. The test equipment (tester) shall comply with the accuracy requirements for level IIe field testers as defined in ANSI/TIA-1152. The tester, including the appropriate interface adapter, must meet the specified accuracy requirements. The accuracy requirements for the permanent link test configuration (baseline accuracy plus adapter contribution) are specified in Table 2 of ANSI/TIA-1152.

b. The test plug shall fall within the values specified in ANSI/TIA-568-C Annex C for NEXT, FEXT and Return Loss.

c. The tester shall be within the calibration period recommended by the vendor in order to achieve the vendor-specified measurement accuracy.

d. The tester interface adapters must be of high quality and the cable shall not show any twisting or kinking resulting from coiling and storing of the tester interface adapters. In order to deliver optimum accuracy, preference is given to a permanent link interface adapter for the tester that can be calibrated to extend the reference plane of the Return Loss


MSA# 11172.00


measurement to the permanent link interface. The contractor shall provide proof that the interface has been calibrated within the period recommended by the vendor. To ensure that normal handling on the job does not cause measurable Return Loss change, the adapter cord cable shall not be of twisted-pair construction.

e. The Pass or Fail condition for the link-under-test is determined by the results of the required individual tests (detailed in Section 4.2.2 of ANSI/TIA-1152). Any Fail or Fail* result yields a Fail for the link-under-test. In order to achieve an overall Pass condition, the results for each individual test parameter must Pass or Pass*.

f. A Pass or Fail result for each parameter is determined by comparing the measured values with the specified test limits for that parameter. The test result of a parameter shall be marked with an asterisk (*) when the result is closer to the test limit than the accuracy of the field tester. The field tester manufacturer must provide documentation as an aid to interpret results marked with asterisks.

C. Fiber Optic Cable Test Equipment

1. The test equipment shall be within the calibration period recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Fiber optic test jumpers and adapters shall be of high quality and shall not show excessive wear. 3. Optical Loss Test Set (OLTS)

a. An OLTS is comprised of two components: an optical light source and an optical power meter. After making a reference measurement, the source and meter are located at opposite ends of the fiber under test. A source and meter may be contained within the same package to enable bi-directional testing without swapping end test equipment.

b. Multimode optical fiber light source

1) Dual LED light sources with central wavelengths of 850nm (±30nm) and 1300nm (±20nm).

2) Output power of -20dB minimum. 3) The light source shall meet the launch requirements of ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-50B,

Method A. This launch condition can be achieved either within the field test equipment or by use of an external mandrel wrap (as described in clause E.7 of ANSI/TIA-568-C.0) with a Category 1 light source.

c. Singlemode optical fiber light source

1) Dual laser light sources with central wavelengths of 1310nm (±20nm) and 1550nm (±20nm).

2) Output power of –10dB minimum.

d. Power Meter

1) 850 nm, 1300/1310 nm, and 1550 nm wavelength test capability. 2) Power measurement uncertainty of ± 0.25 dB. 3) Store reference power measurement. 4) Save at least 100 results in internal memory. 5) PC interface (serial or USB).

4. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)

a. Internal non-volatile memory and removable memory device with at least 16MB capacity for results storage.

b. Serial and USB ports to transfer data to a PC.


MSA# 11172.00


c. Multimode OTDR

1) Wavelengths of 850nm (± 20nm) and 1300nm (± 20nm). 2) Event deadzones of 3.7 m maximum at 850 nm and 1300 nm. 3) Attenuation deadzones of 10m maximum at 850nm and 13m maximum at 1300nm. 4) Distance range at least 2,000m. 5) Dynamic range at least 10dB at 850nm and 1300nm.

d. Singlemode OTDR

1) Wavelengths of 1310 nm (± 20 nm) and 1550 nm (± 20 nm). 2) Event dead zones of 3.5 m maximum at 1310 nm and 1550 nm. 3) Attenuation dead zones of 10 m maximum at 1310 nm and 12 m maximum at 1550

nm. 4) Distance range not less than 10,000 m. 5) Dynamic range at least 10 dB at 1310 nm and 1550 nm

5. Fiber Microscope

a. Magnification of 200X or 400X for endface inspection b. Optional requirements

1) Video camera systems are preferred. 2) Camera probe tips that permit inspection through adapters are preferred. 3) It is preferable to use test equipment capable of saving and reporting the endface

image.

6. Integrated OLTS, OTDR and fiber microscope

a. Test equipment that combines into one instrument an OLTS, an OTDR and a fiber microscope may be used.

D. Coaxial Cable Test Equipment

1. Capacitance Meter

a. Range: 1 nanofarad to 9,999 microfarads b. Accuracy: +/- 1.5% or better

2. DCR Ohms Meter

a. Range: .01 ohms to 40 megaohms b. Resolution: >= .1 ohm c. Accuracy: .+/- .4% or better

3. Cable Loss Meter

a. RF Signal Generation

1) Range: 1-2000 megahertz 2) Resolution: 1 megahertz or better 3) Output level capability: 1dBmV to >=20dBmV


MSA# 11172.00


b. Spectrum Analysis

1) Range: 1-2000 megahertz 2) Resolution: 1 megahertz or better

c. Loss Measurement Resolution

1) .1dBmV or better

d. Data Storage & Recall

1) Capable of storing test results from >= 100 individual cables. 2) Serial and USB ports to transfer data to a PC.

4. Copper Time-Domain Reflectometer (TDR)

a. Adjustable Pulse Width Settings b. Programmable nominal velocity of propagation (NVOP) to match cable under test. c. NVOP Range: .30 to .99, in .01 increments d. Measurement Accuracy: 1% or better e. Measurement Range: >=30,000-feet @ 64% NVOP

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Outlets, cables, patch panels and associated components shall be fully assembled and labeled prior to field-testing. Any testing performed on incomplete systems shall be redone on completion of the work.

B. Perform testing on each cabling link (connector to connector), including UTP, fiber optic (multi-mode and single-mode) and coaxial cabling.

C. Testing shall not include any active devices or passive devices within the link other than cable, connectors, and splices.

1. Link attenuation does not include such devices as optical bypass switches, couplers, repeaters, or optical amplifiers.

D. In addition to the tests identified in this document, contractor shall notify the Owner or Owner’s representative of any additional tests that are deemed necessary to guarantee a fully functional system. These tests shall be implemented with additional measurement results recorded at no additional costs.

3.2 UTP CABLE TESTING

A. General

1. Field test UTP cabling upon completion of the installation. 2. Every cabling link in the installation shall be tested in accordance with the field test specifications

defined in ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 “Commercial Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard.”


MSA# 11172.00


3. The installed twisted-pair horizontal links shall be tested from the MDF/IDF (ER/TR) in the telecommunications room to the telecommunication wall outlet in the work area against the “Permanent Link” performance specification.

4. One hundred percent of the installed cabling links must be tested and must pass the requirements of the standards mentioned above and as further detailed in Part 3. Any failing link must be diagnosed and corrected. The corrective action shall be followed with a new test to prove that the corrected link meets the performance requirements. The final and passing result of the tests for links shall be provided in the test results documentation (below).

5. Field-test instruments shall have the latest software and firmware installed. 6. Link test results from the Test Equipment shall be recorded in the test instrument upon completion

of each test for subsequent uploading to a PC in which the administrative documentation (reports) may be generated.

7. Testing shall be performed on each cabling segment (panel to panel, panel to connector or connector to connector).

8. Testing of the cabling shall be performed using high-quality test cords of the same Category and manufacturer as the cabling under test.

B. Performance Test Parameters – Category 5e, Category 6 and Category 6a (Augmented Category 6)

1. The field test specifications are defined in ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 “Commercial Balanced Twisted- Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard.”

2. The test of each link shall contain the following parameters as detailed below.

a. Category 5e: In order to pass the test, measurements at each frequency in the range from 1 MHz through 100 MHz must meet or exceed the limit value determined in the above- mentioned standard.

b. Category 6: In order to pass the test, measurements at each frequency in the range from 1 MHz through 250 MHz must meet or exceed the limit value determined in the above- mentioned standard.

c. Category 6a (Augmented Category 6): In order to pass the test, measurements at each frequency in the range from 1 MHz through 500 MHz must meet or exceed the limit value determined in the above-mentioned standard.

3. Wire Map

a. Wire Map shall report Pass if the wiring of each wire-pair from end to end is determined to be correct. The Wire Map results shall include the continuity of the shield connection if present.

4. Length

a. The field tester shall be capable of measuring length of pairs of a basic link or channel based on the propagation delay measurement and the average value for NVP. The physical length of the link shall be calculated using the pair with the shortest electrical delay. This length figure shall be reported and shall be used for making the Pass/Fail decision. The Pass/Fail criteria are based on the maximum length allowed for the Permanent Link configuration (90 meters – 295 feet) plus 10% to allow for the variation and uncertainty of NVP.

5. Insertion Loss (Attenuation)

a. Insertion Loss is a measure of signal loss in the permanent link or channel. The term “Attenuation” has been used to designate “Insertion Loss.” Insertion Loss shall be tested from 1 MHz through the frequency range identified above for the category-rating


MSA# 11172.00


requirements, in maximum step size of 1 MHz. Measure insertion loss at the same frequency intervals as NEXT Loss in order to provide a more accurate calculation of the Attenuation-to-Crosstalk ratio (ACR) parameter.

b. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the worst wire pair (1 of 4 possible). The test results for the worst wire pair must show the highest attenuation value measured (worst case), the frequency at which this worst case value occurs, and the test limit value at this frequency.

6. NEXT Loss

a. Pair-to-pair near-end crosstalk loss (abbreviated as NEXT Loss) shall be tested for each wire pair combination from each end of the link (a total of 12 pair combinations). This parameter is to be measured from 1 through the frequency range identified above for the category-rating requirements. NEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire pair at the end from which the disturbance signal is transmitted (near-end) on the disturbing pair. The maximum step size for NEXT Loss measurements shall not exceed the maximum step size defined in the Standard as shown in Table 1.

b. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst case NEXT margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value of NEXT (worst case). NEXT is to be measured from each end of the link- under-test. These wire pair combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.

c. Table 1 – Maximum frequency step size as defined in ANSI/TIA-1152

Frequency Range (MHz) Maximum Step size (MHz)

1 – 31.25 0.15

31.26 – 100 0.25

100 – 250 0.50

250 – 500 1.00

7. PS NEXT Loss

a. Power Sum NEXT Loss shall be evaluated and reported for each wire pair from both ends of the link under-test (a total of eight results). PS NEXT Loss captures the combined near- end crosstalk effect (statistical) on a wire pair when other pairs actively transmit signals. Like NEXT this test parameter must be evaluated from 1 through the frequency range identified above for the category-rating requirements, and the step size may not exceed the maximum step size defined in the Standard as shown in Table 1.

b. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PS NEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.

8. ACR-F Loss, pair-to-pair

a. Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-end is calculated from the pair-to-pair FEXT Loss. It shall be measured for each wire-pair combination from both ends of the link under-test. FEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire pair at the opposite end (far-end) from which the transmitter emits the disturbing signal on the disturbing pair. FEXT is measured


MSA# 11172.00


to compute ACR-F Loss that must be evaluated and reported in the test results. ACR-F measures the relative strength of the far-end crosstalk disturbance relative to the attenuated signal that arrives at the end of the link. This test yields 24 wire pair combinations. ACR-F is to be measured from 1 through the frequency range identified above for the category- rating requirements, and the maximum step size for FEXT Loss measurements shall not exceed the maximum step size defined in the Standard as shown in Table 1.

b. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value for ACR-F. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.

9. PS ACR-F Loss

a. Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-end is a calculated parameter that combines the effect of the FEXT disturbance from three wire pairs on the fourth one. This test yields eight wire-pair combinations. Each wire-pair is evaluated from 1 through the frequency range identified above for the category-rating requirements, in frequency increments that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the Standard as shown in Table 1.

b. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst pair combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.

10. Return Loss

a. Return Loss (RL) measures the total energy reflected on each wire pair. Return Loss is to be measured from both ends of the link-under-test for each wire pair. This parameter is also to be measured from 1 through the frequency range identified above for the category-rating requirements, in frequency increments that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the Standard as shown in Table 1.

b. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for Return Loss. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.

11. Propagation Delay

a. Propagation delay is the time required for the signal to travel from one of the link to the other. This measurement is to be performed for each of the four wire pairs.

b. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair with the worst-case propagation delay. The report shall include the propagation delay value measured as well as the test limit value.

12. Delay Skew [as defined in ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 “Commercial Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard”; Section 6.2.19]

a. This parameter shows the difference in propagation delay between the four wire pairs. The pair with the shortest propagation delay is the reference pair with a delay skew value of zero.

b. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair with the worst-case propagation delay (the longest propagation delay). The report shall include the delay skew value measured as well as the test limit value.


MSA# 11172.00


13. Category 6a (Augmented Category 6): In addition to testing the “In-link” performance parameters identified above, Alien crosstalk testing or “Between-link” testing shall be carried out in accordance with Section 4.7 of ANSI/TIA-1152. Alien crosstalk testing includes the PS ANEXT and PS AACR-F (Power sum alien attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio from the far end) performance parameters. The standards refer to the link-under-test for Alien Crosstalk as the disturbed link.

a. PS ANEXT

1) Pair-to-pair Alien NEXT (ANEXT) contributions is measured by applying the stimulus signal at the near end to one wire pair of a disturbing link and measuring the coupled signal at the near end of a wire pair in a disturbed link. This process is repeated for every wire pair in a disturbing link. The PS ANEXT for each wire pair in a disturbed link is obtained by the power sum addition the pair-to-pair ANEXT results to that wire pair from wire pairs in disturbing links. Links that are bundles with the disturbed link need to be included as disturbing links. In addition, links that are terminated in adjacent positions in a patch panel or interconnect panel should also be included as disturbing links in this test.

2) Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PS ANEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.

b. PS AACR-F

1) The pair-to-pair Alien Far End crosstalk (AFEXT) contributions is measured by applying the signal at the near end to one wire pair of a disturbing channel or permanent link and measuring the coupled signal at the far end of a wire pair in a disturbed channel or permanent link. This process is repeated for every wire pair in a disturbing link and for links in close proximity. A normalization, which is dependent on the relative length of disturbing and disturbed link, is applied to each pair-to-pair alien FEXT measurement. Then the PS Alien Attenuation-to-Crosstalk Ratio from the Far end (PS AACR-F) for each wire pair in a disturbed channel or permanent link is obtained by the power sum addition of normalized pair-to-pair far end alien crosstalk results to that wire pair from wire pairs in disturbing links in close proximity.

2) Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PS AACR-F. If the link or channel connects two patch panels (data center), these wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from both ends. Each reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.

C. UTP Cable Test Result Documentation

1. The test results/measurements shall be transferred into a database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of these test records. A guarantee must be made that the measurement results are transferred unaltered, i.e., “as saved in the tester” at the end of each test and that these results cannot be modified at a later time.

2. The database for the completed job shall be stored and delivered on CD-ROM or DVD including the software tools required to view, inspect, and print any selection of test reports.

3. A paper copy of the test results shall be provided that lists the links that have been tested with the following summary information:


MSA# 11172.00


a. The identification of the link in accordance with the naming convention defined in the overall system documentation.

b. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test including the NEXT Headroom (overall worst case) number.

c. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester.

4. General Information to be provided in the electronic data base with the test results information for each link:

a. The identification of the customer site as specified by the end-user. b. The identification of the link in accordance with the naming convention defined in the

overall system documentation. c. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test. d. The name of the standard selected to execute the stored test results. e. The cable type and the value of NVP used for length calculations. f. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester. g. The brand name, model and serial number of the tester. h. The identification of the tester interface. i. The revision of the tester software and the revision of the test standards database in the

tester. j. The test results information must contain information on each of the required test

parameters that are listed and detailed above.

5. In-Link (In-Channel) Test Results Data. The detailed test results data to be provided in the electronic database must contain the following information:

a. For each of the frequency-dependent test parameters, the value measured at every frequency during the test is stored. The database program must be able to process the stored results to display and print a color graph of the measured parameters. Software must also provide a summary numeric format in which some critical information is provided numerically as defined by the summary results (minimum numeric test results documentation) as outlined above for each of the test parameters.

1) Length: Identify the wire-pair with the shortest electrical length, the value of the length rounded to the nearest 0.1 m and the test limit value.

2) Propagation delay: Identify the pair with the shortest propagation delay, the value measured in nanoseconds (ns) and the test limit value.

3) Delay Skew: Identify the pair with the largest value for delay skew, the value calculated in nanoseconds (ns) and the test limit value.

4) Insertion Loss (Attenuation): Minimum test results documentation as identified above for the worst pair.

5) Return Loss: Minimum test results documentation as identified above for the worst pair as measured from each end of the link.

6) NEXT, ACR-F: Minimum test results documentation as identified above for the worst pair combination as measured from each end of the link.

7) PS NEXT and PS ACR-F: Minimum test results documentation as identified above for the worst pair as measured from each end of the link.

6. Between-Link (Between-Channel) Test Results Data

a. For Category 6a (Augmented Category 6) cabling, a test report shall be provided for each disturbed link included in the Alien Crosstalk sample test. This test report must contain:


MSA# 11172.00


1) PS ANEXT results at each frequency (See Table 1) for each wire pair in a victim link as well as the PS ANEXT results for the average of these four wire pairs. The worst case margin and the worst values shall be provided for each wire pair and the average of the four wire pairs. PS ANEXT shall be measured and tested from the end of the link or channel where cables are terminated at a distribution panel. In case the cabling runs from panel to panel (data center) where the worst case PS ANEXT margin is less than 2 dB, the PS ANEXT test results for each disturbed link shall be collected and saved from both ends (both panels) of the disturbed link.

2) PS AACR-F results at each frequency tested (See Table 1) for each wire pair in a disturbed link as well as the PS AACR-F results for the average of the four wire pairs. The worst case margin and the worst values shall be provided for each wire pair and the average of the four wire pairs. PS AACR-F only needs to be measured and tested from one end of the link or channel.

3.3 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE TESTING

A. General

1. Testing Tiers requirements are as described below, unless indicated otherwise or otherwise required by the Owner.

a. Fiber optic Intra-Building Links shall be tested as Tier 2.

2. Every fiber optic cabling link in the installation shall be tested in accordance with the field test specifications defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises.

3. One hundred percent of the installed cabling links must be tested and must pass the requirements as specified within this document. Any failing link must be diagnosed and corrected. The corrective action shall be followed with a new test to prove that the corrected link meets the performance requirements. The final and passing result of the tests for links shall be provided in the test results documentation (below).

4. The Pass or Fail condition for the link-under-test is determined by the results of the required individual tests.

5. A Pass or Fail result for each parameter is determined by comparing the measured values with the specified test limits for that parameter.

6. Tests shall be documented, including OLTS dual wavelength attenuation measurements for multimode and singlemode links and channels and OTDR traces and event tables for multimode and singlemode links and channels.

7. Tests performed on optical fiber cabling that use a laser or LED in a test set shall be carried out with safety precautions in accordance with ANSI Z136.2.

8. Field-test instruments shall have the latest software and firmware installed. 9. Link and channel test results from the OLTS and OTDR shall be recorded in the test instrument

upon completion of each test for subsequent uploading to a PC in which the administrative documentation (reports) may be generated.

10. Fiber end faces shall be inspected at 200X or 400X magnification. 200X magnification is suitable for inspecting multimode and singlemode fibers. 400X magnification may be used for detailed examination of singlemode fibers. Scratched, pitted or dirty connectors shall be diagnosed and corrected.

a. Endface images shall be recorded in the memory of the test instrument for subsequent uploading to a PC and reporting.

11. Testing shall be performed on each cabling segment (connector to connector).


MSA# 11172.00


12. Testing shall be performed on each cabling channel (equipment to equipment) that is planned for use per the owner’s instructions.

13. Testing of the cabling shall be performed using high-quality test cords of the same fiber type as the cabling under test. The test cords for OLTS testing shall be between 1 m and 5 m in length. The test cords for OTDR testing shall be approximately 100 m for the launch cable and at least 25 m for the receive cable.

B. Performance Test Parameters

1. Three tiers of certification are available that vary in thoroughness of infrastructure analysis.

a. Tier 1: optical loss testing b. Tier 2: optical loss and OTDR testing c. Tier 3: optical loss and OTDR testing and magnified endface inspection

2. Optical loss testing (Tiers 1, 2 and 3)

a. Backbone link:

1) Multimode backbone links shall be tested at 850 nm and 1300 nm in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14A, Method B, One Reference Jumper or the equivalent method.

2) Singlemode backbone links shall be tested at 1310 nm and 1550 nm in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7, Method A.1, One Reference Jumper or the equivalent method.

3) Link attenuation does not include any active devices or passive devices other than cable, connectors, and splices, i.e. link attenuation does not include such devices as optical bypass switches, couplers, repeaters, or optical amplifiers.

4) Use the One Reference Jumper Method specified by ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A, Method B and ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7, Method A.1 or the equivalent method. Follow the procedures established by these standards or application notes to accurately conduct performance testing.

3. OTDR Testing (Tiers 2 and 3).

a. Fiber links shall be tested at the appropriate operating wavelengths for anomalies and to ensure uniformity of cable attenuation and connector insertion loss..

1) Multimode: 850nm and 1300nm 2) Singlemode: 1310nm and 1550nm

b. Each fiber link and channel shall be tested in both directions. c. A launch cable shall be installed between the OTDR and the first link connection. d. A receive cable shall be installed after the last link connection.

4. Magnified Endface Inspection (Tier 3)

a. Fibers shall be inspected at 200X or 400X magnification. 200X magnification is suitable for inspecting multimode and singlemode fibers. 400X magnification may be used for detailed examination of singlemode fibers.

b. Scratched, pitted or dirty connectors shall be diagnosed and corrected. c. The endface images shall be saved and included in the test documentation package.


MSA# 11172.00


5. Length Measurement

a. The length of each fiber shall be recorded. b. It is preferable that the optical length be measured using an OLTS or OTDR.

6. Polarity Testing

a. Paired duplex fibers in multi-fiber cables shall be tested to verify polarity in accordance with Clause E.5.3 of ANSI/TIA-568-C.0. The polarity of the paired duplex fibers shall be verified using an OLTS.

C. Fiber Optic Cable Test Result Documentation

1. The OLTS and OTDR test result information for each link shall be recorded in the memory of the field tester upon completion of the test.

2. The test result records saved by the tester shall be transferred into a database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of these test records. A guarantee shall be made that these results are transferred to the PC unaltered (i.e., as saved in the tester at the end of each test). The popular ‘csv’ format (comma separated value format) does not provide adequate protection and shall not be acceptable unless specified by the end user.

3. The database for the completed job shall be stored and delivered on CD-ROM. This CD-ROM shall include the software tools required to view, inspect, and print any selection of test reports.

4. Circuit IDs reported by the test instrument shall match the specified label ID. 5. Summary Test Reports: A copy of the test results shall be provided listing links that have been

tested, including the following summary information.

a. The identification of the link in accordance with the naming convention defined in the overall system documentation.

b. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test c. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester.

6. General Information to be provided in the electronic data base containing the test result information for each link:

a. The identification of the customer site as identified by the end-user. b. The operator responsible for testing. c. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test. d. The name of the standard selected to execute the stored test results. e. The value of the NVP of the cable installed (used for length calculations). f. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester. g. The brand name, model and serial number of the tester. h. The tester software version and the revision of the test standards database in the tester.

7. Detailed Test Reports: Detailed test results data to be provided in the electronic database for each tested optical fiber must contain the following information.

a. The identification of the link/fiber in accordance with the naming convention defined in the overall system documentation.

b. Tier 1:

1) The insertion loss (attenuation) measured at each wavelength, the test limit calculated for the corresponding wavelength and the margin (difference between the measured attenuation and the test limit value).


MSA# 11172.00


2) The link length shall be reported for each optical fiber for which the test limit was calculated based on the formulas above.

c. Tier 2:

1) Tier 1 test results. 2) The overall OTDR loss (attenuation) and length. 3) The OTDR event loss at each wavelength and event location. 4) The OTDR trace at each wavelength.

d. Tier 3:

1) Tier 1 and 2 test results. 2) A picture of the magnified connector endface. 3) The pass status based upon visual inspection.

3.4 COAXIAL CABLE TESTING

A. Test every cable individually. The following tests shall be conducted and the results recorded and submitted:

1. Visual Inspections

a. Conduct a visual inspection of the center conductor at each end of each cable using good eyes and a magnifying glass. Verify that the center conductor does not have any visible nicks.

2. Mechanical retention of connectors

a. Verify F-Connectors each can withstand at least 35 pounds of direct pulling force for 2- seconds.

b. Verify hard-line connectors shall be verified to withstand at least 100 pounds of direct pulling force for 2-seconds.

c. Verify that other connector types used withstand 90% of their manufacturer rated retention strength for 2-seconds.

3. Cable measurements

a. Length of cable. Determine length through the use of physical cable markings and through the use of a TDR calibrated for the cable under test.

b. DC Loop Resistance: Short the center conductor and shield at the station outlet end of the cable using a premade thread on 0-ohm shunt. Measure and record the loop resistance of the cable at the opposite end of the cable.

c. DC Resistance to Ground. Measure and record the DCR between each cable conductor (center and shield) and the nearest telecommunications grounding bus bar. This measurement shall occur after the telecommunications grounding system has been tested.

d. Attenuation by Frequency: Sweep the cable from 1 MHz to 1 GHz and record the attenuation results. Quantify the results in table-form in at least the following frequencies: 1, 5, 10, 50 megahertz, and 100 to 1000 megahertz in 50 megahertz increments.

e. Cable capacitance. With no load connected at one end of the cable connect a capacitance meter to the opposite end. Measure and record the total center- conductor- to-shield capacitance.


MSA# 11172.00


B. Conduct, coordinate and supply cable test data to parties supplying or installing products that will connect to and use the coaxial cabling. Timing is critical as these parties may need to perform calculations based on test values prior to procurement and installation of certain products.

3.5 ACCEPTANCE OF TEST RESULTS

A. A representative of the end-user may at their discretion select a random sample of five percent of the installed links. The representative (or his authorized delegate) shall test these randomly selected links, and the results shall be stored in accordance with this Section. The results obtained shall be compared to the data provided by the installation contractor. If more than two percent of the sample results differ in terms of the pass/fail determination, the installation contractor under supervision of the end-user representative shall repeat 100 percent testing at no cost to the Owner.

B. Installed cabling links and channels shall be field-tested and pass the test requirements and analysis as described in this Section. Any link or channel that fails these requirements shall be diagnosed and corrected. Any corrective action shall be documented and followed with a new test to prove that the corrected link or channel meets performance requirements. The final and passing result of the tests for links and channels shall be provided in the test results documentation in accordance with this Section.

C. Acceptance of the test results shall be given in writing after the project is fully completed and tested in accordance with Contract Documents and to the satisfaction of the Owner.



MSA# 11172.00

WALL LININGS FOR COMMUNICATION ROOMS 271110 - 1

SECTION 271110 – WALL LININGS FOR COMMUNICATION ROOMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wall linings and related materials used within Communication Rooms.


1. Section 270553 “Identification for Communications.” 2. This Section identifies the minimum requirements for the Project. Comply with the requirements




1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Communications Backboard – Finished plywood surface (wall lining) installed over a finished wall and used for the purpose of wall attachment/mounting of a wide-variety of communications and electronic security products.

B. Telecommunications Backboard (TBB) – See Communications Backboard.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Wall lining shall be installed around the entire perimeter of each communication room, except where otherwise detailed on the drawings.


MSA# 11172.00


B. Wall lining materials shall be installed behind wall-mounted communications and security products, except as otherwise approved in advance by the Designer.

C. Wall linings shall provide a solid reusable and fire-retardant surface for mounting of active and passive electronic products.

D. Linings shall be attached to and supported by a wall structure in such manner as to be capable of fully supporting the load of products attached to it.

E. Linings shall be applied over the standard painted drywall, brick and/or block wall materials as may be present within the space.

F. Linings shall be installed in addition to and shall not take the place of standard wall-finish materials.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to:

1. Georgia-Pacific. 2. Weyerhaeuser. 3. Sherwin-Williams. 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Benjamin Moore. 6. Hy-Tech Thermal Solutions. 7. Hilti Corporation. 8. Red Head.

2.3 WALL LININGS

A. Plywood:

1. AC-grade plywood. 2. 4-feet wide x 8-feet tall x 3/4-inch thick.

2.4 FINISHES:

A. Paint:

1. Color: White. 2. Self-priming design. 3. 30-Year manufacturer warranty. 4. ASTM E-84/UL 723 Class A-B fire-retardant.

2.5 HARDWARE:

A. Anchoring Hardware:

1. Material: Steel.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Finish: Rust preventative permanent outer coating. 3. Lag-type hex-head bolts for attachment to wood framed walls. 4. Lag-type hex-head bolts with expandable metal anchors for attachment to CMU construction. 5. Machine-thread hex-head bolts and expandable machine threaded concrete anchors for attachment

to concrete walls. 6. Molly bolt or similar type all-metal machine threaded permanent anchor assembly for anchoring to

metal stud framing. 7. Steel washers between bolt head and wall lining.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Wall Linings:

1. Install plywood directly over and against the finished wall surfaces, without use of standoffs, and without leaving a gap between the plywood and wall.

2. Line the entire interior surface of each communication room, starting each wall with a full-size sheet at the left edge of each wall and progressing to the right, unless otherwise detailed on the drawings.

3. Utilize full standard-size sheets. Where the sheets need to be cut down to fit within the available mounting space, cut a single sheet down to fit the opening. Do not use multiple partial-size sheets where a full-size sheet, or where a single sheet cut down from a full-size sheet shall suffice.

4. Mount sheet with the highest grade side (e.g., A-side) outward facing into the space. 5. Attach sheets securely to the walls using horizontally arrayed columns of (at least) three bolts (top,

middle, and bottom). Spacing of bolt columns shall be such as to secure the backboard directly to wall studs or other structural wall members. Each full-size sheet shall be supported by not less than three (3) columns of bolts. Horizontal spacing between bolts used for a single sheet shall not exceed 24 inches. The minimum number of bolts per sheet shall not be less than one (1) bolt for every 2.66sq/ft of plywood surface area, but not less than four (4) bolts.

6. Set mounting hardware flush and smooth with the finished surface of the plywood. 7. Install plywood plumb and level. 8. Install the bottom of edge of the plywood beginning at 1/2 inch above the baseboard or 6 inches

above the finished floor (whichever is lower). 9. Where plywood must mount over devices such as AC switches, outlets, fire-alarm devices and the

like, the backboard shall be cut to permit the entire device to be revealed plus an additional margin of 1/4 inch on each side of the device. Openings shall be plumb and level.

B. Painting:

1. Paint the front and rear surfaces of the wall linings using fire-retardant paint. 2. Paint the edges of lining, including edges of the lining that abut other segments of the lining or

another surface. 3. Paint the edges of the lining that result from cutouts around obstacles. 4. Paint the hardware used to secure the lining to the wall. Use the same color used to paint the

lining. 5. Apply minimum of two coats of fire-retardant paint. Apply additional coats as recommended by

the paint manufacturer to achieve specified fire-retardant rating.

C. Labeling:

1. Comply with Section 270553 “Identification for Communications.”


MSA# 11172.00


2. Label each plywood backboard. 3. Install temporary labels on the backboards within 24-hours after installation. Install in the same

location where the final labels shall be installed. Temporary labels allow for more effective coordination reference throughout the Project.

4. Remove temporary labels and install finish labels prior to acceptance.



MSA# 11172.00

CABINETS, RACKS, FRAMES AND ENCLOSURES 271116 - 1

SECTION 271116 - CABINETS, RACKS, FRAMES AND ENCLOSURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment racks of various types and related accessories.


1. Section 271126 “Rack Mounted Power Protection and Power Strips” for internal power products used within racks.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Definitions:

1. Where the term “equipment rack” or “rack” is used, in either the singular or plural form, it refers generically to products that are designed for and normally used to house and/or mount 19-inch, 23-inch and 25-inch EIA standard rack mounted equipment. Racks come in multiple forms, sizes, finishes and styles that include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cabinet. b. Open frame/relay. c. In-wall. d. Wall mounted. e. Cabinet swinging. f. Portable. g. Roll around. h. ATA. i. Specialty.

2. Where brackets are used around numbers or letters (e.g., [nn] and [xx]), they represent alphanumeric variables. These variables typically represent that portion of a model or product number that must be established when ordering product based upon the size, color, accessories and other information specified.

3. VMS: Vertical Mounting Space. 4. RU: Rack Unit. 1.75 inches vertical.


MSA# 11172.00


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Bill of Materials:

a. Bill of materials (BOM) shall be organized (i.e., sub-grouped) by Device.ID. The core product shall be listed first, followed by a listing of the associated options and accessories that make up the entire rack assembly.

b. Each Device.ID shall be on its own sheet/page. (e.g., if there are eight (8) racks being supplied, there shall be eight (8) pages).

c. At the top of each BOM list, identify the following:

1) Rack Device.ID. 2) Rack type. 3) Name and number of the space where the rack is located. 4) Name of the systems the rack supports.

d. Enumerate the quantity, brand, model and description of the rack and each option and accessory being furnished with the rack (e.g., sides, casters and fans).

2. Product Datasheets.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Enlarged plans of the spaces housing equipment racks.

a. Plans shall call out the Device.ID of the rack.

D. Closeout Submittals:

1. Product data. 2. As-built drawings: Enlarged plan depicting the as-installed locations of the racks.


A. Coordinate the time and delivery location of product to the Project site or other pre-assembly site to meet the needs of parties utilizing the equipment rack products being supplied.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Products furnished of each Type shall be manufactured by a single manufacturer, bear the same brand name, be the same finish color and texture, and be from the same product model series, except where otherwise indicated.

B. Accessories furnished for equipment racks shall be as manufactured from the same manufacturer as the rack served, except where otherwise indicated.

C. Black shall be the default color for racks. Furnish alternate colors where specified.

D. Racks that are located adjacent to one another shall be matching size, color, fit and finish except where otherwise indicated.

E. Rack sizes. Unless another size of rack is identified in a schedule or indicated on the Drawings, provide the largest RU rack size option available of the Type specified, if another RU size is not defined as the default size.

F. Additional rack accessories:

1. Refer to the Drawings for additional requirements for rack assemblies. 2. Furnish additional manufacturer recommended accessories for installation of products specified.

G. Rack Side Panels:

1. Where equipment racks utilize accessory side panels, and where such racks are detailed on the Drawings to be ganged together, only one set of side panels is required per model group that is installed adjacent.

2.2 SUBSTITUTION LIMITATIONS

A. Approved qualifying manufacturer status notwithstanding, substitute equipment racks may not differ in exterior physical dimensions as compared to the specified equipment racks by more than ± 3/4 inch in any dimension, without pre-bid model-specific review and approval. Substitute racks with dimensions that differ greater than this shall not be considered after award of the Contract.

2.3 EQUIPMENT RACKS

A. Cabinet Types, Floor:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide the basis of design product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers:

a. Middle Atlantic Products. b. Chatsworth Products. c. Hoffman. d. Lowell Manufacturing.


MSA# 11172.00


e. Atlas Sound. f. Great Lakes Case & Cabinet

2. Type C2:

a. Free-standing vertical multi-bay, gangable design. b. Construction: Steel, fully welded. 14-gauge top and bottom, 16-gauge vertical structure. c. Finish: Durable powder coat. d. UL Listed. e. Depth: 36.00 inches. f. Width: 22.00 inches, without side panels. g. Width: 23.31 inches, with side panels. h. Height: 76.13 inches to 83.13 inches, RU dependent. i. Rack mounting width: 19-inch EIA horizontal rack rail spacing. j. Moveable front and rear rack rails, EIA vertical mounting-hole spacing. k. Drilled and tapped #10-32 rack mounting rails. l. Removable side panels (SPN-[xx]-36). m. Removable top kit for fan (MW-10FT). n. Front door: Plexiglas, vented, removable, and locking (PVFD-[xx]). o. Rear door: Steel, solid, removable, and locking. p. Top fan (FAN-10). q. Leveling feet. r. Basis of Design:

1) 44 RU (77 inch VMS): Middle Atlantic model MRK-4436, plus accessories. 2) 40 RU (70 inch VMS): Middle Atlantic model MRK-4036, plus accessories.

3. Type C5:

a. Free-standing vertical multi-bay, gangable design. b. Construction: Steel, fully welded. 14-gauge top and bottom, 16-gauge vertical structure. c. Finish: Durable powder coat. d. UL Listed. e. Depth: 48.00 inches. f. Width: 23.94 inches, without side panels. g. Width: 25.25 inches, with side panels. h. Height: 79.81 to 85.06 inches, RU dependent. i. Available in the following standard vertical RU sizes: 42, 45. j. Optimized for use on 24-inch raised floor systems. k. Rack mounting width: 19-inch EIA horizontal rack rail spacing. l. Moveable front and rear rack rails, EIA vertical mounting-hole spacing. m. Cage-nut style rack rails, with full complement of cage nuts. n. Z-Rail adapters for accommodating many server-slide kits. o. Removable 2-piece split, solid and locking side panels. p. Top panel configured with three (3) 6-inch fans, providing 660 cfm. q. Enclosure temperature monitor located on front of rack (TEMP-DEC). r. Front door: 70% Vented, removable, and locking. s. Rear door: Vented, Split (x2), removable, and locking (MW-CLVRD-[xx]). t. Seven (7) 4-inch gland grommets on top of cabinet for cable entry. u. Basis of Design:

1) 45 RU (78.75 inch VMS): Middle Atlantic model WMRK-4548, plus accessories.


MSA# 11172.00


2) 42 RU (73.50 inch VMS): Middle Atlantic model WMRK-4248, plus accessories.

B. Open Frame Types:

1. Type R6:

a. Free standing, 4-post, open frame relay rack. b. Welded steel construction. c. Independent adjustable front and rear mounting rails. d. Rack mounting width: 19-inch EIA horizontal rack rail spacing. e. Matching accessory support base. f. 45RU (78.75 inch VMS). g. Cage-nut style rack rails, with full complement of cage nuts. h. Basis of Design shall be Panduit R4PCN, plus accessories, including vertical wire

management:

1) 83.90-inch high x 12-inch wide x 16.4-inch deep, with door: Panduit PRV12 with PRD12 (dual-hinged metal door).

i. Additional approved manufacturer and product shall be Ortronics, plus accessories, including vertical wire management (12” minimum width).

2.4 RACK ACCESSORIES

A. Filler Panels:

1. General:

a. Panel mix: Provide mixture of vent and blank-type filler panels as required to ensure satisfactory air-flow and heat dissipation.

b. Sizes: Provide filler panels in sizes not exceeding two (2) RU, except where shown on the Drawings.

c. Quantity: Provide filler panels to occupy all unused mounting spaces of the front rack rail of racks.

2. Vent-Type:

a. Construction: 16 Gauge steel. b. Finish: Flat black powder coat. c. Ventilation: Vertical vent slots. d. Flanged upper and lower horizontal edges for rigidity. e. Size: Available sizes from one (1) to two (2) RU. f. Basis of Design: Middle Atlantic EVT-[x] Series.

3. Blank-Type:

a. Construction: 16 Gauge steel. b. Finish: Flat black powder coat. c. Ventilation: None, solid face. d. Flanged upper and lower edges for rigidity. e. Sizes: Available sizes from one (1) to six (6) RU.


MSA# 11172.00


f. Basis of Design: Middle Atlantic SB-[x] Series.

B. Rack Mounting Screws:

1. Truss-type screw head. 2. Black finish. 3. Matching size and color nylon protective washer. 4. For Racks with #10-32 threaded rack rails.

a. #10-32 thread. b. Basis of Design: Middle-Atlantic model HP.

1) Quantity: Three (3) Phillips-drive screw/per RU/per rack.

c. Basis of Design: Middle-Atlantic model HSK.

1) Quantity: One (1) Square-post security drive/per RU/per rack.

5. For Racks with #12-24 threaded rack rails.

a. Basis of Design: Middle Atlantic model HP-24. b. Quantity: Four (4) Phillips-drive screw/per RU/per rack.

6. For Racks with 6MM cage-nut rack rails.

a. Basis of Design: Middle-Atlantic model HP-6MM. b. Quantity: Four (4) Phillips-drive screw/per RU/per rack.

C. Rack Work Light:

1. Magnetic base for repositionable attachment to interior and exterior. 2. Lamp: Compact fluorescent lamp, ≥ 1200 Lumens. 3. 120VAC Input voltage. 4. Articulating arm. 5. Aluminum lamp-shield/reflector. 6. Basis of Design: Middle Atlantic Products model WL-60, with CFL lamp. 7. Quantity: (1) one per equipment rack; additional units where indicated.

D. Thermostatic Fan Control:

1. UL Listed. 2. 120VAC Input voltage. 3. Temperature probe with 48 to 60 inches of cable. 4. Fan Receptacles: Four (4) separate AC fan receptacles. 5. Regulates the speed of up to four rack ventilation fans based upon temperature range. 6. Minimum of four (4) temperature/fan speed ranges:

a. Fan off: < 80 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Fan low: 80 to 90 degrees Fahrenheit. c. Fan medium: 90 to 100 degrees Fahrenheit. d. Fan high: ≥ 100 degrees Fahrenheit.


MSA# 11172.00


7. Quantity: One (1) per enclosed equipment rack; additional units where indicated.

E. Grounding Busbar:

1. Solid bare copper. 2. Cross sectional area: 0.375 square inches minimum (typically 0.25 inches thick by 1.5 inches

wide). 3. Length: Equivalent to the vertical RU of the rack served. 4. Drilled and tapped #10 holes for ground cable connections. 5. Screws: Supplied with #10 copper machine-threaded screws, one (1) per RU. 6. Quantity: One (1) per equipment rack; additional units where indicated.

F. Lacing Strips:

1. Horizontally Mounted:

a. Designed for mounting to rear rack rails. b. Solid or perforated bar construction, designed for dressing and supporting wires that route

horizontally between sides of rack and from sides of racks to mounted equipment. c. Available in various shapes and sizes to accommodate a wide variety of cable types, bundle

sizes, and rack equipment configurations. d. Basis of Design: Middle Atlantic LBP-[xxxxx]. Provide specific models to suit the

application. Coordinate with equipment installers. e. Quantity: Minimum one (1) per each six (6) RU of vertical rack capacity.

2. Vertically Mounted:

a. Available in various lengths to match the number of RUs of the rack served. b. Perforated strip designed to accommodate types of wire ties, including hook-and-loop type. c. Basis of Design: Middle Atlantic model LACE-[xx]-OP, sized to match rack RU. d. Quantity: Two (2) per rack, additional units where indicated.

2.5 CABLE MANAGEMENT

A. Horizontal Cable Lacing Bars – for rear of racks:

1. Steel construction. 2. Baked-on enamel finish. 3. Basis of Design: Middle Atlantic LBR-SB-[x] Series:

a. Coordinate model(s) to be provided with system provider. b. Furnish LBR-1A when the provided rack is designated for future use.

4. Quantity: Provide a minimum of one (1) lacing bar for each 5.25 inches of vertical rack-mounting space for each provided rack. Provide additional units as necessary.

B. Vertical Cable Lacing Bars – for rear of racks:

1. Steel construction. 2. Baked on enamel finish. 3. 2 inches wide.


MSA# 11172.00


4. Perforated design for mounting to rails within equipment racks and for securing cable tie wraps. 5. Basis of Design: Middle Atlantic LACE-[x] Series.

a. Coordinate specific models to be provided with system provider. b. Furnish LACE-[xx]P, sized to suit, when the provided rack is designated for future use.

6. Quantity: Provide minimum four (4) lacing bar for each equipment rack provided.

C. Wire Management Panels:

1. Type A:

a. Rack mountable design. b. Front mounted horizontal and vertical metal slotted rings. c. Cable management panels shall be of this type unless specifically noted otherwise on the

Drawings. d. Plastic wire hold clips on the front. e. Basis of Design:

1) 1 RU (1.75 inches): Middle Atlantic HCM-1DR with vertical cable management rings (D-RING) on each side.

2) 2 RU (3.50 inches): Middle Atlantic HCM-2DR with vertical cable management rings (D-RING) on each side.

f. Additional approved manufacturers: Hubbell, Leviton, Ortronics/Legrand, Panduit.

2. Type B:

a. Rack mountable design. b. Front mounted horizontal and vertical metal slotted rings. c. Plastic wire hold clips on the front. d. Basis of Design:

1) 1 RU (1.75 inches): Middle Atlantic HCM-1DR. 2) 2 RU (3.50 inches): Middle Atlantic HCM-2DR.

e. Additional approved manufacturers: Hubbell, Leviton, Ortronics/Legrand, Panduit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORIDINATION

A. Coordinate with each party providing product that will be housed within the racks. Review rack configurations to ensure they complement the systems being provided.

B. Coordinate the delivery and installation to meet the workflow and schedules of parties reliant upon the product for their portion of the Work.

3.2 INSTALLATION


MSA# 11172.00


A. Equipment Racks:

1. General:

a. Secure fixed-position, non-portable racks using removable threaded fasteners to prevent from moving or tipping.

b. Secure racks to the floor allowing a 36-inch minimum clearance between the rear of the rack and the nearest obstruction. See the Drawings for additional or more stringent requirements.

c. Install doors, side panels and other accessories. d. Install bushings or grommets at cable entry and exit points to protect cables. Clean, prep

and paint visible conduits using oil-based paint that matches the color of the rack. e. Comply with rack manufacturers’ printed instructions and guidelines for rack installation. f. Install insulated throat bushings to protect cables entering rack and other cable

penetrations.

B. Rack Accessories:

1. Grounding Bus Bar:

a. Install grounding bus bars in the rear of racks. b. Coordinate location with equipment being housed within the rack.

2. Filler Panels:

a. Install filler panels within each equipment rack. b. The size, location and ratio of blank–to-vent filler panels shall be as required to assure

proper ventilation of equipment. c. Mount the filler panels using approved mounting hardware, ensuring that unused spaces

within the equipment rack are covered.

3. Rack Lights:

a. Mount lights in the rear of equipment racks. Locate where it will most effectively benefit installation and service personnel.

b. Where non-magnetic racks are supplied, provide additional hardware to enable attachment of light in a position to benefit installation and service personnel.

4. Rack Drawers:

a. Furnish and install rack drawers as indicated on the Drawings.

5. Ventilation Products:

a. Furnish and install ventilation products as specified and indicated on the Drawings. Test operation of ventilation products and adjust as necessary.

6. Cable Management Products:

a. Install horizontal and vertical cable lacing bars in locations to optimize support and grouping of cables within the equipment racks.

b. Mount bars using hardware recommended by the product manufacturer. Mount securely.


MSA# 11172.00


3.3 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. Comply with 270526 “Grounding and Bonding for Communications.”

B. Install a grounding busbar in each equipment rack and ground equipment rack.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION


B. Label each rack.



MSA# 11172.00

CABLE MANAGEMENT AND LADDER RACK 271123 - 1

SECTION 271123 – CABLE MANAGEMENT AND LADDER RACK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cable management and ladder rack pathways within communications room(s), including but not limited to:

a. Products used to support, organize, and dress cables on walls and supported from ceilings.





1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General:



1. Product Data:

a. Bill of Material. b. Product Datasheets for the following:

1) Horizontal ladder rack.


MSA# 11172.00


2) Vertical ladder rack. 3) Fittings. 4) Stand-offs. 5) Spillways/waterfalls. 6) D-rings. 7) Finger duct.

2. Shop Drawings:

a. Communications Room reflected plan(s) depicting the following:

1) Size and locations of ladder rack. 2) Size and locations of other cable management products. 3) Backboards. 4) Coordinated location of racks/cabinets, furniture, HVAC ducts and equipment,

lights and other products that shall occupy space including products identified to be supplied by Owner and provided as work of other Sections.

5) Pathway and cable entry and exit points.

b. Communications Room wall elevation drawings depicting the following:

1) Sizes and locations of ladder rack. 2) Sizes and locations of other cable management products. 3) Backboards. 4) Size and location of products that occupy wall space, including products identified

to be supplied by Owner and provided as work of other Sections. 5) Pathway and cable entry and exit points.

C. Informational Submittals:

1. Coordination Certification – Letter of Coordination Certification from each entity installing cable on the Project that certifies the pathway system being installed:

a. Includes adequate cross-sectional area to accommodate cables that are to be installed; b. Allows for adequate separation from probable sources of ingress and egress interference,

including other cables and cables that may share the same pathway segment; c. Follows a physical path that ensures cables shall not exceed maximum installed length

limitations.

D. Closeout Submittal:

1. Product Data. 2. As-Built Drawings:

a. Enlarged floor plans. b. Enlarged reflected plans. c. Wall elevations.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. The cable management and ladder rack pathway system shall accommodate the support and orderly routing of cabling within communication rooms.

1. Communications systems served include but are not limited to:

a. Voice/telephone systems. b. Network/data/information systems. c. RF broadband video distribution systems. d. Intercom and central sound systems. e. Paging and sound masking systems. f. Audio and video systems. g. Teleconferencing systems.

2. Security systems served include but are not limited to:

a. Video surveillance and CCTV. b. Access control. c. Intrusion detection.

B. The system shall consist of horizontal ladder rack used for support of cables that need to traverse horizontally overhead within the room.

C. The system shall consist of vertical ladder rack for support and dressing of cables that must traverse vertically between cable entry/exit points near the floor and entry/exit points near the ceiling of the room or ladder rack.

D. The system shall consist of products to organize, dress and support cables that traverse the walls.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Ladder Rack:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:

a. Chatsworth. b. Cooper/B-Line. c. Hoffman. d. Middle Atlantic.

2. Horizontally mounted:

a. 1-1/2 inch by 3/8 inch ASTM A513 compliant tubular steel construction. b. Color: Black. c. Available in various widths from 12 to 24 inches wide. d. Available in factory lengths of 10 feet (nominal) and longer. e. Rung spacing shall be 9 to 12 inches on center.


MSA# 11172.00


f. Minimum linear cable bearing surface of 1-1/2 inches per linear foot of run. g. Basis of Design: Chatsworth 10250-712.

3. Vertically mounted:

a. 1-1/2 inch by 3/8 inch ASTM A513 compliant tubular steel construction. b. White in color. (Matching white backboard). c. Available in various widths from 12 to 24 inches wide. d. Available in factory lengths of 10-feet (nominal) and longer. e. Rung spacing shall be 9 to 12 inches on center. f. Minimum linear cable bearing surface of 1-1/2 inches per linear foot of run. g. Basis of Design: Chatsworth 10250-212.

4. Spillways, Waterfalls, Cable Drop-outs:

a. Basis of Design: Chatsworth 12100-[xxx].

B. D-Rings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into work include, but are not limited to:

a. Panduit. b. Middle Atlantic Products. c. Hubbell. d. Great Lakes. e. Erico/Caddy.

2. D-Shaped wall-mount loop designed for cable management. 3. Continuous loop for pull-through cable installation, or open slot alternate insertion of cables. 4. Size: Available in a variety of pre-manufactured sizes. 5. Mounting holes for secure attachment with screws. 6. Material: Rigid nylon, zinc covered steel.

C. Finger Duct:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into work include, but are not limited to:

a. Panduit. b. Middle Atlantic Products. c. Hubbell.

2. Manufacturer designed for horizontal and vertical cable management on walls and other vertical surfaces.

3. Hinged or removable cover for accessing cables within. 4. Repetitive pattern of stiff flexible fingers and gaps that allow cables to enter the duct through the

sides. 5. Size: Available in a variety of pre-manufactured sizes. 6. Size: Available in a variety of colors, including blue, white, gray. 7. Basis of Design: Panduit Panduct® family.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Review and coordinate the final size requirements of cable management and ladder rack with the supplier and installer of the cabling. Each shall be sufficiently sized for the cables that are to be installed.

B. Coordinate the locations and products being installed as work of this Section with each party supplying work within the same space. Coordinate to ensure adequate headroom, capacities, working clearances and accessibility of the installed products.

3.2 LADDER RACK UTILIZATION

A. Horizontal Ladder Rack shall be provided as follows:

1. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings. 2. Within each ER, TR, IDF, and MDF, as follows:

a. 12 inch (minimum) horizontal ladder rack around the entire perimeter of the room. b. 12 inch (minimum) horizontal ladder rack directly above and parallel to floor mounted

equipment racks below. This ladder rack shall intersect with and join to the perimeter ladder rack.

c. Target height for ladder rack is 96 inches above the finished floor (AFF), but not less than 12 inches below finished ceiling and not less than 86 inches above the finished floor. The installed height shall not interfere with doors, windows and other equipment within the room.

B. Vertical Ladder Rack shall be provided as defined below:

1. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings. 2. Within each ER, TR, IDF, and MDF, as follows:

a. 12 inch (minimum) vertical ladder rack on the wall at floor and ceiling cable penetrations. Ladder rack shall extend from the penetration to the perimeter ladder rack.

C. Sizing:

1. Ladder rack sizes shall be the larger of the following:

a. Size indicated on the Drawings. b. 12 inches wide. c. National electric code. d. Ladder rack manufacturer recommendations. e. Sufficient that cable fill does not exceed 40% of its rated capacity, regardless of

manufacturer rated capacity greater than this.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Ladder Rack:


MSA# 11172.00


1. General:

a. Install as a complete system in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

b. Install with sufficient support to carry the weight of the ladder rack system, fully loaded with cables, with a minimum safety factor of 5. In addition, each individual vertical support point above the floor shall be selected and installed to achieve a capacity to support not less than 200 lbs. of vertical load.

c. Furnish and install using manufacturer recommended hardware and accessories including, but not limited to: splice extension clamps; horizontal tee splice kits; corner support kits; adjustable vertical bend kits; adjustable vertical splice kits; runway support kits designed for ceiling support from all-thread rod; runway drop-out at equipment racks; and runway end caps.

d. Provide protective caps on the exposed ends of rungs and rails. e. Paint accessories and fittings to maintain the aesthetic integrity of the installation using

paint recommended and approved by the manufacturer. f. Install the system free of sharp edges, burrs or projections that could harm cables or

humans. g. Install using such accessories, means and methods that ensure electrical continuity of the

entire system. h. Install runs using the maximum standard-length segments of ladder rack currently available

from the manufacturer. Lesser length segments shall not be used except where a full size standard-length segment of ladder rack is not of sufficient length for the run (e.g., do not use two 5-foot pieces end-to-end for a 10-foot span where a single standard 10-foot length is available from the manufacturer). Do not piece together segments to make longer runs unless necessary.

2. Horizontally Mounted:

a. Horizontal runs of ladder rack that terminate at a wall shall be attached to the wall using manufacturer accessories for this purpose.

b. Horizontal runs of ladder rack that terminate at a crossing segment of ladder rack shall be attached to the crossing segment using manufacturer accessories for this purpose.

c. Rails of ladder rack that run parallel to and abut the wall shall be attached to the wall. d. Provide side posts at increments of 2 feet on center on both sides of the ladder rack lengths

as an aid to contain cables. e. Ceiling supports attached to structure shall be used to carry the weight of the ladder rack

system. f. Provide support for the ladder rack at increments not less than 4 feet 6 inches on center and

additionally at splices tees, elbows, bends, intersections, and transitions.

1) Support with threaded rod and U-channel supports systems

i) 12 inches width: 1/2 inch ATR; 24 inches width: 5/8 inch ATR.

2) Rod lengths over 6 feet shall require a “Rod Stiffener” installation.

i) A section of U-Channel stock is placed around the rod and stiffener clamp assemblies used to clamp to rod.

(A) Place clamps a minimum of 6 inches from the top and bottom of the rod and every 18 inches in between.


MSA# 11172.00


g. Install smooth metal tubes over threaded support rods to protect cables from potentially sharp threaded edges of the support rod.

h. Install waterfall fittings at each location where a cable exits the ladder rack downward.

3. Vertically Mounted:

a. Install ladder rack rails flush and flat against the backboard with rungs facing outwards. Mount using wall mounting clamps designed for this purpose.

b. Rest and secure one end of the ladder rack on the floor. c. Extend and attach the upper limit of the ladder rack to the intersecting horizontal ladder

rack. d. Provide support for the ladder rack at increments of 3 feet (or less) on center along the

entire length. e. Trim out rectangular slot of appropriate size in ceilings, where applicable, to enable cable

passage to above ceiling pathways.

B. Spillways, Waterfalls, Cable Drop-outs:

1. Securely mount to ladder rack rails. 2. Provide sizes that ensure compliance with the manufacturer minimum bend radius specifications

of the cables entering or exiting the ladder rack.

C. D-Rings:

1. Securely mount to communications room wall linings or other approved mounting surface. 2. Space rings at intervals of 12 inches along the path of the cables served. 3. Provide rings of sufficient size and quantity that no ring is utilized more than 40% of the rated

capacity. 4. Provide multiple sets of rings to form separate pathways for cables that require physical

separation. 5. Provide D-Rings for routing and management of cables on communication room walls, except

where another type is identified for use on the Drawings.

D. Finger Duct:

1. Securely mount to communications room wall linings or other approved mounting surface. 2. Mount duct runs plumb and level. 3. Provide duct of sufficient capacity that no more than 40% of the rated capacity. 4. Provide multiple ducts to form separate pathways for cables that require physical separation.

3.4 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. Comply with Section 270526 “Grounding and Bonding for Communications.”



MSA# 11172.00

RACK MOUNTED POWER PROTECTION AND POWER STRIPS 271126 - 1

SECTION 271126 – RACK MOUNTED POWER PROTECTION AND POWER STRIPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Power distribution systems, for communications [and security] equipment. Includes those products used within or to supply power to equipment racks, casework, furniture, enclosures, and on communication backboards.

2. Uninterruptible power supplies. 3. Power protection and conditioning products.





1.3 DEFINITION:

A. The terms “Power Strip” and “Receptacle Strip” are used interchangeably, without distinction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Bill of Materials. 2. Product Datasheets.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Power Distribution Diagram(s):

a. Depict the specific power products and the AC power distribution configuration for each rack:

1) Identify the Device.ID for each rack. 2) Include a rack layout depicting the location of power products within the rack. 3) Depict UPSs, PDUs, sequencers, receptacle strips, remote power modules, modular

power strips and other distribution products. 4) Identify the plug & receptacle types for each product. 5) Identify the products served by each power product. 6) Identify the interconnectivity between sequencers and the products the sequencer

controls. 7) Identify the power up and power down sequence.. 8) In sequenced systems, identify which products are powered continuously.

D. Closeout Submittal:

1. Product Data:

a. Bill of Materials. b. Product Datasheets.

2. As-Built Drawings:

a. Power Distribution Block Diagram(s).


A. Products shall be listed by a nationally recognized safety testing agency.


A. Products of this Section shall be provided in timely manner to coordinate with work of other Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General:

1. Equipment racks, furniture and enclosures that house communications [and security] equipment shall be equipped with a functional local AC power distribution system for delivery of power from the building power system to the product(s) it houses.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Each distribution system shall be sufficient to support the powered products. 3. Each distribution system shall feature sufficient connectivity to accommodate each powered

product and plus an additional 20% spare receptacle count usable for future use. Each designated “spare” outlet shall be accessible and usable without the removal or movement of existing cables, plugs or other product. This spare capacity shall apply to each rack and furniture unit.

4. Selected distribution systems shall feature one or more locally installed uninterruptible power supplies for maintaining power to connected equipment in the event there is a loss of incoming building power.

5. Communication backboards, countertops/work-surfaces and other locations where insufficient building power receptacles are present shall be equipped with local power distribution equipment with sufficient outputs to serve the locally installed equipment.

2.2 HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED RECEPTACLE STRIPS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one (1) of the following manufacturers:

1. Middle Atlantic Products. 2. Hammond Manufacturing. 3. Great Lakes Case & Cabinet. 4. Hoffman.

B. Type HA:

1. 15 Amp non-isolated ground version. 2. 19-inch EIA Rack Mountable. 3. Height: 1-3/4 inches. 4. Six (6) rear-mounted NEMA 5-15R receptacles. 5. Receptacles rotated 90 degrees (i.e., perpendicular) to length of receptacle strip. 6. No front panel receptacles. 7. 6-foot AC power cord with NEMA 5-15P Plug. 8. Front Panel AC power switch. 9. Integral 15 Amp Circuit Breaker. 10. Basis of Design: Hammond Manufacturing 1583H6A1BKRA.

C. Type HB:

1. 20 Amp - Non-Isolated Ground Version. 2. 19-inch EIA rack mountable. 3. Height: 1-3/4 inches. 4. Six (6) rear-mounted NEMA 5-20R receptacles. 5. No front panel receptacles. 6. 6-foot power cord with NEMA 5-20P plug. 7. Front panel master AC power switch. 8. Integral 20 Amp Circuit Breaker. 9. Basis of Design: Hammond Manufacturing 1589H6F1BKRR.

2.3 VERTICALLY MOUNTED RECEPTACLE STRIPS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one (1) of the following manufacturers:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Middle Atlantic Products. 2. Great Lakes Case & Cabinet. 3. Hoffman.

B. Type VA:

1. 15 Amp capacity. 2. 120VAC input. 3. NEMA 5-15R receptacles (14 – 24 outlets). 4. 45 to 72 inches lengths. 5. 9-foot power cord with NEMA 5-15P plug. 6. Manufacturer accessory mounting brackets. 7. Basis of Design: Middle Atlantic PD-1415C-NS with PB-5A brackets.

C. Type VB:

1. 20A Amp capacity. 2. 120VAC input. 3. NEMA 5-20R receptacles (14 - 24 outlets). 4. 49 to 72 inches lengths. 5. 9-foot power cord with NEMA 5-20P plug. 6. Manufacturer accessory mounting brackets. 7. Basis of Design: Middle Atlantic PD-1220C-NS and PB-5A brackets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Coordinate mounting location of power products with each party providing products to be powered.

B. Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS):

1. Connect UPS units to un-switched AC building power. 2. Rack mount power supply(s) and the accessory batteries that are designed for rack mounting.

C. Vertical Receptacle Strips:

1. In racks, mount vertical receptacle strips in the rear of the rack in an accessible location that does not interfere with the mounting of the equipment served.

2. When UPS products are present, derive power for the strips from the output receptacle(s) of the UPS.

3. Mount receptacle strips securely. 4. Mount strips using the accessories and hardware recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Horizontal Receptacle Strips:

1. In racks, mount horizontal strips to the equipment mounting rails using machine threaded fasteners.


MSA# 11172.00


2. In rear-of-rack applications, mount receptacle strip in accessible location but out of the way in such manner as not to restrict access to the receptacles and to equipment mounted to the front rails of the rack.

3.2 LABELING




MSA# 11172.00

COPPER BACKBONE CABLING 271313 - 1

SECTION 271313– COPPER BACKBONE CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Multi-pair (greater than four-pair) twisted pair cable (TIA/EIA Category rated). 2. Cable termination connecting hardware and cross-connects.


1. Section 270810 “Verification Testing of Structured Cabling” for testing and documentation requirements.

2. Section 271513 “Copper Horizontal Cabling” for four-pair Category-rated twisted pair cabling and patch panel termination hardware, including channel rated performance and applications warranty.

3. Section 271600 “Connecting Cords, Devices, Adapters” for patch cords and cross-connect cabling, including channel rated performance and applications warranty.



b. Where this Section and the Owner’s Standards Document are in direct conflict, the Owner’s Standards Document shall supersede the requirements of this Section.] E.g., if the Contract Documents require cables to be labeled, and the Owner’s Standards Document expressly states do not label cables, the Documents are in direct conflict and the Owner’s Standards Document shall supersede the Contract Documents.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Definitions:


cross-connection. 3. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. 4. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. 5. LAN: Local area network.


MSA# 11172.00


6. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. 7. Twisted-Pair: Two individually insulated copper wires physically twisted together to form a

balanced pair. 8. Twisted-Pair Cable: A multi-conductor cable comprising two or more copper conductors twisted

in a manner designed to cancel electrical interference. Also called balanced twisted-pair cable. 9. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 10. WAN: Wide area network.


1. TIA/EIA-568-C, including TIA/EIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises; TIA/EIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard; TIA/EIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components Standard; and TIA/EIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.

2. TIA/EIA-569, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. 3. TIA/EIA-606, The Administrative Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of

Commercial Building. 4. TIA/EIA-607, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for


(TDMM)” published by the Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI). 6. The most recent published edition of the “Information Transport Systems Installation Methods

Manual (ITSIMM)” published by the Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI).

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Review and coordinate the sizes, quantity, routing and spacing of pathways to ensure they will adequately support the Work of this Section.

1. Confirm that cables to be installed shall not exceed maximum fill capacities of raceways and shall meet the minimum requirements of Local, State and Federal laws and requirements.

2. Confirm that cables to be installed within the pathways will not exceed the maximum standards-based distance limitations.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of communications cabling with Owner’s telecommunications, WAN and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Comply with requirements of Section 270501 “Submittals for Communications.”

B. Informational Submittals:

1. Quality Assurance: For Structured Cabling Systems Work.

C. Action Submittals:

1. Submittal Checklists. 2. Product Data:


MSA# 11172.00


a. Bill of Materials (BOM). b. Product Datasheets.

3. Shop Drawings:

a. Floor Plans. b. Rack Elevations. c. Wall Elevations. d. Labeling Schema.


1. Product Datasheets. 2. As-Built Drawings:


3. Field Quality Control / Test Results. 4. Cable and connectivity manufacturers’ certification of quality and performance. 5. Executed warranty documentation: Site specific, supplied from the manufacturer(s). 6. Provide additional closeout documentation as required in Division 01 and Division 27 “General

Requirements for Communications.”



B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate marking of applicable testing agency.

C. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Store materials in conditions endorsed by the product manufacturer.

B. Test cables upon receipt at the Project site.

1. Test each pair of twisted pair cable for open and short circuits prior to installation.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.


MSA# 11172.00


B. Do not deliver or install product(s) in conditions that jeopardize the performance or manufacturer life expectancy and service life of the product.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Additional requirements: Cabling and connectivity products manufacturers, including patch cords, shall have in place an agreement recognizing each other for execution of the warranty as specified. Performance and applications warranties shall be channel rated, including patch cords.

B. The cable manufacturer and the connectivity products manufacturer shall have a partnership agreement established in order to provide the required warranty.

C. Required warranty: The TIA/EIA-568-C compliant cable system shall include a minimum 25 year extended product warranty and performance/applications assurance program.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER BACKBONE CABLING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The copper backbone cabling system shall be a system of interconnections between communications rooms, main terminal spaces and entrance facilities as part of a complete communications cabling system infrastructure. The cabling system consists of cables, intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connection.

B. Provide TIA/EIA-568-C compliant multi-pair twisted pair backbone cabling system.

C. Provide total connectivity for complete and permanent installed communications links.

D. Backbone cabling cross-connects shall be located within communications rooms, entrance facilities and other locations as designated.

E. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be installed as part of backbone cabling.

2.2 CABLING


1. General Cable Technologies Corporation (General Cable). 2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company (Berk-Tek).

B. General:

1. General Performance: Comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-C when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

2. Twisted pair cable is required to have the appropriate Category classification as defined by TIA/EIA-568-C. Compliance with these electrical characteristics shall be third party verified by the manufacturer.

3. System cables shall be code compliant and UL/NEC rated for the location, manner, and environmental conditions in which the cables are installed.


MSA# 11172.00


a. Cables that are not installed in a totally enclosed pathway system shall be UL plenum rated.

4. Cables used for below grade applications, and cables used in pathways that may reasonably end up with standing water within them, shall be manufacturer rated for continuous contact with water without performance degradation or compromise in warranty.

5. Cables used for direct burial applications shall be manufacturer rated for direct burial applications.

C. Description: 100-ohm, multi-pair UTP as indicated on the Drawings, formed into 25-pair binder groups covered with a thermoplastic jacket.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C, Category 3.

a. Cable shall have two individual insulated 24 AWG solid copper conductors formed into a twisted pair.

b. Cable must be constructed of one or more 25-pair bundles of individually insulated Unshielded Twisted Pairs (UTP).

c. Cables shall range from 25 pair to 300 pair in 25 pair increments. d. Basis of Design shall be General Cable 2131505.

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. b. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666.

2.3 CABLE HARDWARE


1. Panduit Corp. (Panduit). 2. Ortronics; a subsidiary of Legrand (Ortronics).

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same Category or higher.

2. Provide one single manufacturer for twisted pair termination hardware used together in a permanent link or whenever a Category certification is required.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 5e.

1. 110-style Wiring Block:

a. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C, Category 5e. b. Industry normal footprint available in 100-pair blocks. c. Labeling areas on front and available label kits. d. 110-stye IDC termination system requiring 110C-x connecting clips. e. Optional jumper troughs available and designed to mount with base footprint. f. Available without legs for mounting on rack/cabinet mounted panels or on tower systems.


MSA# 11172.00


g. Basis of Design shall be Panduit P110BW100-X with legs and Panduit P110B100-X without legs.

2. 110-style Connecting Clips (110C-4 and 110C-5):

a. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C, Category 5e. b. 110-stye IDC termination system. c. 110C-4 Clips (4-pair) used for termination of 4-pair cables or a combination of 4-pair and

multi-pair cables. d. 110C-5 Clips (5-pair) used for termination of multi-pair cables. e. Basis of Design shall be Panduit P110CB4-XY (4-pair) and P110CB5-XY (5-pair).

3. 110-style Jumper Trough with Legs:

a. Used for wire management around 110 style termination bases. b. Basis of Design shall be Panduit P110JTW-X with legs and Panduit P110JT-X without

legs.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. System components shall be tested and listed by one or more United States NRTL. Presently recognized laboratories include: Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Refer to the Drawings for types and quantities of backbone cables.

B. Review and coordinate cabling pathways prior to pathway and cabling installation.

1. Coordinate to resolve deviations, defects or other problems with pathways prior to installation. Allow adequate time for corrections so as to avoid delays to the Project completion date.

2. Provide additional or supplemental TIA/EIA-569 compliant pathways and cable support where required. Provide additional sleeves through walls/floors/ceilings, as necessary to route cables within buildings.

C. Comply with NECA 1.

D. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C, including TIA/EIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises; TIA/EIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard; TIA/EIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components Standard; and TIA/EIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.

E. Monitor cable pull tensions, and comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Chapter “Pulling Cable.”

F. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Chapter “Cable Termination Practices.”

G. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 270528 “Pathways for Communications.”


MSA# 11172.00


1. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

2. Do not exceed the required fill capacity of raceways.

H. Provide the appropriate cable rated for the environmental conditions in which the cable is to be installed.

3.2 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by the communications service providers.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

A. Install cables within approved pathways. Install cables that are not otherwise required to be installed within raceway in such manner as to conceal them from view. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls and floors.

B. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

C. Do not splice cable between terminations or junction points. Cable runs shall be continuous. Wiring shall be free from grounds, shorts, opens and reversals.

D. Maintain complete protection of cabling. Cabling shall not be left hanging or coiled where it potentially obstructs the Work of other trades.

E. Cable routing shall follow building structure lines (parallel and perpendicular).

F. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

G. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

H. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in communications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend cable not in raceway, a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1524 mm) apart. Bridle rings are not permitted.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with conduits, pipes, ducts or other similar or potentially damaging items.

I. Provide conduit sleeves for penetrations.

1. Provide conduit sleeves for cables where cables pass through walls, floors and ceilings. 2. Patch and firestop around sleeves. 3. Firestop the interior of the sleeves after cable installation. 4. Provide the appropriate bushings on each end. Split bushings shall not be used. 5. Provide waterproof sealant for penetrations in humidity controlled areas.


MSA# 11172.00


J. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed Under Raised Floors:

1. Install plenum-rated cable only. 2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas. 3. Coil cable 6 feet (1800 mm) long not less than 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter below each feed

point.

K. Comply with requirements in Section 270502 “Basic Materials and Methods for Communications.”

1. Bundle cables within racks, ladder racks, cable trays and in discrete cable supports. Utilize reusable cable bundling hardware. Utilize plenum-rated hardware in plenum spaces.

L. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (610 mm).

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm).

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (76 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).

M. Separate cabling by service and type (i.e., voice, data, control, coaxial, fiber) prior to terminating.

1. Terminate cabling on specified termination hardware in alpha-numerical order. 2. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. 3. Neatly dress and securely attach cabling to the backboard and/or cabinet/rack. 4. Provide adequate cable lengths to reach any location on the backboard or within the cabinet/rack. 5. Bundle and support cables of this System separately from the cables of other systems. 6. Maintain separation between cables carrying different signal types and different signal levels.


MSA# 11172.00


a. Where cables from different systems or cables with different signal types are expressly permitted by the Designer to share a common pathway, each of these cable groups shall be kept segregated to the maximum degree physically possible. Cables from different systems shall not be mixed or intertwined.

N. Provide a minimum service loop of 5 feet at each end and 10 feet at each junction point, unless noted otherwise.

O. Maintain (do not violate) the minimum bend radius specified by the manufacturer of the cable.

P. At final termination, excess cable and the service loop shall be supported and stored neatly in the cable tray or ladder rack within the communications rooms.

1. Proper strain relief shall be applied to cables after installation to lessen the risk of physical damage and to provide proper aesthetic value.

Q. Cabling within Enclosures:

1. Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. 2. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturers’ limitations on

bending radii. 3. Provide and use lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent

bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

R. Cable Termination:

1. Terminate every conductor; no cable shall contain unterminated elements unless otherwise indicated. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects and patch panels.

2. Utilize standard positive identification color coding for multi-conductor cables. 3. Provide 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.

a. Do not untwist twisted pair cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 270550 “Firestopping for Communications.”

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 270526 “Grounding and Bonding for Communications” for grounding conductors and connectors.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Label cables and other components in compliance with Section 270553 “Identification for Communications” for labeling requirements.

B. Label each end of the cable.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Identify system components and cabling in compliance with TIA/EIA-606-A.


A. Comply with Section 270810 “Verification Testing of Structured Cabling.”

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Twisted pair cabling shall be factory tested according to TIA/EIA-568-C. 2. Visually inspect twisted pair jacket materials for NRTL certification marking. Inspect cabling

terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-C.

3. Visually confirm Category rated marking of cabling and termination hardware, including connecting blocks and patch panels.

4. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords and labeling of components.

5. Test twisted pair copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults and polarity between conductors.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-C. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in “Test Instruments (Normative)” Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in “Measurement Accuracy (Informative)” Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

C. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for twisted pair systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.

D. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report for the cables as well as a detailed report for each cable tested.

E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate they do not comply with specified requirements. Retest cabling and provide documentation.

F. End-to-end cabling shall be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare and submit test and inspection reports.

H. The Owner reserves the right to have a representative present during testing procedures. Verification testing of copper and fiber may be performed at or near Project completion by the Consultant for quality assurance.

I. Upon verification testing, if the Consultant finds the test results do not match the Contractor’s results, the Consultant or a third party may at the Owner’s request retest the cabling and submit those results to the Owner and deduct the verification testing costs from the Contractor’s Contract amount.



MSA# 11172.00

FIBER OPTIC BACKBONE CABLING 271323 - 1

SECTION 271323 – FIBER OPTIC BACKBONE CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fiber optic cable. 2. Cable termination connecting hardware, patch panels and cross-connects.



2. Section 271600 “Connecting Cords, Devices, Adapters” for patch cords, including channel rated performance and applications warranty.




1.3 REFERENCES

A. Definitions:


cross-connection. 3. Dielectric: Material that is nonmetallic and nonconductive and used to insulate a conductor. 4. LAN: Local area network. 5. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. 6. WAN: Wide area network.


MSA# 11172.00









1.4 COORDINATION

A. Review and coordinate the sizes, quantity, routing and spacing of pathways to ensure they will adequately support the work of this Section.


B. Coordinate layout and installation of communications cabling with Owner’s telecommunications, WAN and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General:





1. Submittal Checklist. 2. Product Data:


3. Shop Drawings:



MSA# 11172.00





3. Field Quality Control / Test Results. 4. Cable and connectivity manufacturers’ certification of quality and performance. 5. Executed warranty documentation: Site specific, supplied from the manufacturer(s). 6. Provide additional closeout documentation as required in Division 01 and Division 27 “General








B. Test cables upon receipt at the Project site, prior to installation:

1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical fiber flashlight or optical loss test set.

2. Test optical fiber cable while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectomoeter to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices and connector, including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in the maintenance data.





MSA# 11172.00


1.9 WARRANTY



C. Required warranty: The TIA/EIA-568-C compliant cable system shall include a minimum 25 year extended product warranty and performance/applications assurance program.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIBER OPTIC BACKBONE CABLING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The backbone cabling system shall be a system of interconnections between communications rooms, main terminal spaces and entrance facilities as part of a complete communications cabling system infrastructure. The cabling system consists of cables, cross-connects, terminations, and patch cords used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connection.

B. Provide TIA/EIA-568-C compliant fiber optic backbone cabling system.


D. Backbone cabling cross-connects shall be located within communications rooms, entrance facilities and other locations as designated.

2.2 FIBER OPTIC CABLE


1. General Cable Technologies Corporation (General Cable). 2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company (Berk-Tek). 3. Panduit Corp. (Panduit). 4. Corning Incorporated (Corning).

B. General:







MSA# 11172.00


5. Where multimode and singlemode fiber optic cables share the same start point, the same end point and the same pathway, hybrid cables may be used to combine the multimode and singlemode fiber optic strands under a common jacket.

C. Description: Multimode, 62.5/125-micrometer, tight buffer, armored optical fiber cable.

1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with EIA-455-41 and EIA-455-25 for crush resistance and impact resistance. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-492AAAA for detailed specifications. 4. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C for performance specifications. 5. Meet or exceed ISO/IEC 11801 OM1 Grade 3 optical characteristics:

a. Dual window of 850 nm and 1300 nm. b. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 200 MHz/km at 850 nm; 500 MHz/km at 1300 nm. c. Guaranteed Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) Distance: 500 m at 850 nm; 1000 m at 1300 nm. d. Guaranteed 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) Distance: 33 m at 850 nm; 300 m at 1300 nm. e. Maximum attenuation: 3.5 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm.

6. Basis of Design shall be General Cable CLxxx1PNU-ILPA.

a. Strand counts as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Description: Singlemode, tight buffer, armored optical fiber cable.

1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with EIA-455-41 and EIA-455-25 for crush resistance and impact resistance. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C for performance specifications. 4. Meet or exceed ISO/IEC 11801 Singlemode optical characteristics:

a. Dual window of 1310 nm and 1550 nm. b. Guaranteed Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) Distance: 5,000 m at 1310 nm. c. Guaranteed 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) Distance: 5,000 m at 1310 nm; 30,000 m at 1550

nm. d. Maximum attenuation: 0.70 dB/km at 1310 nm; 0.70 dB/km at 1550 nm.

5. Basis of Design shall be General Cable APxxx1PNU-ILPA.

a. Strand counts as indicated on the Drawings.

E. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444, UL 1651 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

1. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with UL 910. 2. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR or OFNP, complying with UL 1666. 3. Plenum Rated, Conductive: Type OFCP or OFNP, complying with UL 910. 4. Riser Rated, Conductive: Type OFCR or OFNR, OFCP or OFNP, complying with UL 1666.

F. Jacket:

1. Utilize industry standard color coding for multimode and singlemode fiber optic cable jacket colors.

2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit and group color shall be according to TIA/EIA-568-C.


MSA# 11172.00


3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches (1000 mm).

2.3 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TERMINATIONS AND HARDWARE


1. Panduit Corp. (Panduit). 2. Ortronics; a subsidiary of Legrand (Ortronics). 3. Corning Incorporated (Corning).

B. Rack Mounted Fiber Optic Panel Enclosure: Modular enclosures housing multiple adapter plates, splice trays or MTP modules:

1. TIA/EIA-568-C compliant. 2. Steel: black powder coated finish. 3. Front metal door or smoked polycarbonate door, removable. 4. Rear metal cover/door, removable. 5. Rear tray capacity for splice trays. 6. Slack management spools included. 7. Accepts standard fiber optic adapter plates. 8. EIA standard 19 inches rack rails. 9. Available in 1RU (1.75 inches), 2RU (3.50 inches), 3RU (5.25 inches) or 4RU (7.00 inches) sizes. 10. Basis of Design shall be Panduit, size as indicated.

a. 1RU: Capacity for up to (3) adapter plates – Panduit FRME1U. b. 2RU: Capacity for up to (6) adapter plates – Panduit FRME2U. c. 3RU: Capacity for up to (9) adapter plates – Panduit FRME3. d. 4RU: Capacity for up to (12) adapter plates – Panduit FRME4.

C. Fiber Optic Adapter Plates: Modular adapter plates for multiple fibers and connector types fitting within rack mounted and wall mounted fiber optic panel enclosures:

1. Multimode:

a. Individual couplers installed. b. Mounts within fiber optic panel enclosures. c. Six (6) duplex SC adapters accommodating twelve (12) fibers. d. Provide adapter plate with couplers to match specified fiber performance.

1) Provide phosphor bronze sleeves for multimode applications. 2) Provide ceramic sleeves for 50/125-micrometer laser optimized applications. 3) Utilize industry standard color coding.

e. Coordinate with fiber optic panel enclosure. f. Basis of Design shall be Panduit FAP6WEIDSC.

2. Singlemode:

a. Individual couplers installed. b. Mounts within fiber optic panel enclosures. c. Duplex SC adapters with ceramic sleeves.


MSA# 11172.00


d. Color code SM couplers blue; utilize industry standard color coding. e. Coordinate with fiber optic panel enclosure. f. Basis of Design shall be Panduit.

1) (3) Duplex SC: Panduit FAP3WBUDSCZ (6 fibers). 2) (6) Duplex SC: Panduit FAP6WBUDSCZ (12 fibers).

D. Discrete Cable Connectors: Connectors for terminating fiber optic cable strands:

1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA/EIA-604-2, TIA/EIA-604-3-A and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C

2. SC Connector, Multimode:

a. Each connector shall use a U/V or adhesive/epoxy to firmly adhere the glass strand to the connector.

b. The connector ferrule shall be ceramic. c. The connector shall provide 0.10 dB typical insertion loss or less. d. Provide duplex SC clip, as required. e. Provide connector to match specified fiber performance; utilize industry standard color

coding. f. Basis of Design shall be Panduit FSCMBL.

3. SC Connector, Singlemode:

a. Each connector shall use a U/V or adhesive/epoxy to firmly adhere the glass strand to the connector.

b. The connector ferrule shall be ceramic. c. The connector shall provide 0.15 dB typical insertion loss or less. d. Provide duplex SC clip, as required. e. Utilize industry standard color coding. f. Basis of Design shall be Panduit FSCSBUY.

E. Fiber Optic Break-Out (Fan-Out) Kit:

1. Shall be used for fiber optic cable terminations. 2. Shall include buffer tubing and heat shrink tubing for each strand to have 18 inches length from

break-out. 3. Basis of Design shall be Panduit F06CB (6 fibers) and Panduit (F012CB (12 fibers).



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Refer to the Drawings for types and quantities of backbone cables.


MSA# 11172.00






D. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C., including TIA/EIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises; TIA/EIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard; TIA/EIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components Standard; and TIA/EIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.






H. Provide the appropriate cable rated for the environmental conditions in which the cable is to be installed.

I. Indoor fiber optic cable shall be of interlocking armored construction.

1. Any fiber optic cable not of interlocking armored construction shall be installed in a properly rated (plenum) inner-duct as specified in Section 27 05 28 “Pathways for Communications.”

3.2 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by the communications service providers.


A. Install cables within approved pathways. Install cables that are not otherwise required to be installed within raceway in such manner as to conceal them from view. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls and floors.

B. Fiber optic cable shall be installed in a protective barrier (innerduct) with the appropriate rating for the environmental conditions.

1. Exception: Fiber optic cabling with plenum rated interlocking armor jacket shall not require innerduct.


MSA# 11172.00


C. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

D. Do not splice cable between terminations or junction points. Cable runs shall be continuous. Wiring shall be free from grounds, shorts, opens and reversals.

E. Maintain complete protection of cabling. Cabling shall not be left hanging or coiled where it potentially obstructs the Work of other trades.

F. Cable routing shall follow building structure lines (parallel and perpendicular).

G. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

H. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

I. Open-Cable Installation:


2. Suspend cable not in a raceway, a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1524 mm) apart. Bridle rings are not permitted.


J. Provide conduit sleeves for penetrations.


K. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed Under Raised Floors:

1. Install plenum-rated cable only. 2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas. 3. Coil cable 6 feet (1800 mm) long not less than 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter below each feed

point.

L. Comply with requirements in Section 270502 “Basic Materials and Methods for Communications.”


M. Separate cabling by service and type (i.e., voice, data, control, coaxial, fiber) prior to terminating.

1. Terminate cabling on specified termination hardware in alpha-numerical order. 2. Neatly dress and securely attach cabling to the backboard and/or cabinet/rack. 3. Provide adequate cable lengths to reach any location on the backboard or within the cabinet/rack. 4. Bundle and support cables of this System separately from the cables of other systems.


MSA# 11172.00


5. Where cables from different systems or cables with different signal types are expressly permitted by the Designer to share a common pathway, each of these cable groups shall be kept segregated to the maximum degree physically possible. Cables from different systems shall not be mixed or intertwined.

N. Provide a minimum service loop of 5 feet at each end and 10 feet at each junction point, unless noted otherwise.

O. Maintain (do not violate) the minimum bend radius specified by the manufacturer of the cable.

P. At final termination, excess cable and the service loop shall be supported and stored neatly in the cable tray or ladder rack within the communications rooms.


Q. Cabling within Enclosures:




R. Cable Termination:


2. Fiber optic cables shall utilize factory manufactured break-out kits to protect fiber strands within fiber optic enclosures.

a. Provide buffer tubing on fiber strands from the connector to the cable break-out (minimum 6 inches pigtails), and secure to the cable jacket for fiber optic cables that do not have a cladding.

3. Utilize standard positive identification color coding for multi-strand cables.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with Section 270550 “Firestopping for Communications”

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Comply with Section 270526 “Grounding and Bonding for Communications” for grounding conductors and connectors.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION



MSA# 11172.00







1. Visually inspect optical fiber cabling jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. 2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch

cords and labeling of components. 3. Optical fiber cable tests:

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-C. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

C. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report for the cables as well as a detailed report for each cable tested.

D. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate they do not comply with specified requirements. Retest cabling and provide documentation.

E. End-to-end cabling shall be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare and submit test and inspection reports.

G. The Owner reserves the right to have a representative present during testing procedures. Verification testing of copper and fiber may be performed at or near Project completion by the Consultant for quality assurance.

H. Upon verification testing, if the Consultant finds the test results do not match the Contractor’s results, the Consultant or a third party may at the Owner’s request retest the cabling and submit those results to the Owner and deduct the verification testing costs from the Contractor’s Contract amount.



MSA# 11172.00

Copper Horizontal Cabling 271513 – 1

SECTION 271513 – COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Four-pair twisted pair cable (TIA/EIA Category rated). 2. Cable termination connecting hardware and patch panels. 3. Telecommunications outlet connectors.



2. [Section 271313 “Copper Backbone Cabling” for multi-pair (greater than four-pair) twisted pair cabling and termination hardware (e.g., connecting blocks), including channel rated performance and applications warranty.]

3. Section 271543 “Faceplates and Connectors” for faceplates and modular jack frames to accept modular jack inserts.

4. Section 271600 “Connecting Cords, Devices, Adapters” for patch cords and cross-connect cabling, including channel rated performance and applications warranty.




1.3 REFERENCES

A. Definitions:

1. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending to the communications outlet/connector.

3. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.

4. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. 5. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. 6. LAN: Local area network. 7. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several

telecommunications outlet/connectors. 8. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet

cable terminates. 9. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. 10. Twisted-Pair: Two individually insulated copper wires physically twisted together to form a

balanced pair. 11. Twisted-Pair Cable: A multi-conductor cable comprising two or more copper conductors twisted

in a manner designed to cancel electrical interference. Also called balanced twisted-pair cable. 12. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 13. WAN: Wide area network.








1.4 COORDINATION

A. Review and coordinate the sizes, quantity, routing and spacing of pathways to ensure they will adequately support the work of this Section.

1. Confirm that cables to be installed will not exceed maximum fill capacities of raceways and shall meet the minimum requirements of Local, State and Federal laws and requirements.

2. Confirm that cables to be installed within the pathways will not exceed the maximum standards-based distance limitations (90 meters (295 feet)) for horizontal cabling.

B. Coordinate communications outlet/connector locations with the location of power receptacles at each work area. Coordinate so that power receptacles are immediately adjacent.

C. Coordinate layout and installation of communications cabling with telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.


MSA# 11172.00


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General:







3. Shop Drawings:





3. Cable and connectivity manufacturers’ certification of quality and performance. 4. Executed warranty documentation: Site specific, supplied from the manufacturer(s). 5. Provide additional closeout documentation as required in Division 01 and Division 27 “General







MSA# 11172.00




B. Test cables upon receipt at the Project site.

1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits prior to installation.




1.9 WARRANTY



C. Required warranty: The TIA/EIA-568-C Category 6a (Augmented Category 6) compliant cable system shall include a minimum 25 year extended product warranty and performance/applications assurance program up to 500 MHz systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Horizontal cabling and connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the communications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications room or enclosure. The cabling and associated connecting hardware are called a "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols.

B. Provide TIA/EIA-568-C compliant 4-pair twisted pair horizontal cabling system.

1. Provide Category 6a (Augmented Category 6) compliant horizontal cabling system.


D. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross-connect and the communications outlet/connector.

E. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed as part of the horizontal cabling.


MSA# 11172.00


F. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet (90m) between the termination point within a communications room and the station outlet, including cable service loops.

G. The maximum allowable total channel distance is 328 feet (100m) between equipment in the communications room and station equipment, including cable service loops, patch cables and station attachment cables.

H. The copper horizontal cabling system shall include provisions for voice/telephone, data/network, video surveillance, audio-visual, access control, control data and intrusion detection systems.

1. Cables shall be color-coded by system. Reference the Drawings for requirements, and coordinate with the Owner for final verification.

2.2 CABLING


1. General Cable Technologies Corporation (General Cable). 2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company (Berk-Tek). 3. Panduit Corp. (Panduit).

B. General:


2. Twisted pair cable is required to have the appropriate Category classification as defined by TIA/EIA-568-C. Compliance with these electrical characteristics shall be third party verified by the manufacturer.





C. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP with a thermoplastic jacket.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C, Category 6a (Augmented Category 6).

a. Cable shall have two individual insulated 23 AWG solid copper conductors formed into a twisted pair.

b. Cable must be constructed of one 4-pair bundle of individually insulated Unshielded Twisted Pairs (UTP).

c. Basis of Design shall be General Cable GenSPEED 10,000 Category 6a 7131819.

4. Cabling shall be color coded by system.


MSA# 11172.00


a. Color(s): As scheduled in the Contract Documents.

5. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. b. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666.

2.3 CABLE HARDWARE




1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down. 2. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. 3. Provide one single manufacturer for twisted pair termination hardware used together in a

permanent link and whenever a Category certification is required.

C. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Number of Jacks per Field: One (1) for each four-pair UTP cable required, plus 25 percent spare. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C, Category 6a (Augmented Category 6).

a. UL listed. b. Black steel with PCB connection between interfaces. c. Labeling areas on front and rear. d. Mountable in EIA standard 19” rack/cabinet rails. e. 24-ports in 1.75 inches of rack space (1 RU); 48-ports in 3.5 inches of rack space (2RU). f. RJ45 (8P8C) jack interface on front and 110-style IDC connections on rear. g. Tested and verified to meet TIA component, permanent link and channel requirements. h. Type as indicated on the Drawings. i. Flat patch panel, Basis of Design:

1) 24-port (1 RU): Panduit DP246X88TGY. 2) 48-port (2 RU): Panduit DP486X88TGY.

j. Angled patch panel, Basis of Design:

1) 24-port (1 RU): Panduit DPA246X88TGY. 2) 48-port (2 RU): Panduit DPA486X88TGY.

2.4 CONNECTOR JACKS, JACK ASSEMBLIES AND SURFACE MOUNT HOUSING


1. Panduit Corp. (Panduit).


MSA# 11172.00


2. Ortronics; a subsidiary of Legrand (Ortronics).


1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C. 2. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. 3. Provide one single manufacturer for twisted pair termination hardware used together in a

permanent link and whenever a Category certification is required.

C. Connector Jacks:

1. 100-ohm, balanced, twisted pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular color-coded receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals, component rated.

a. Category 6a (Augmented Category 6) Modular Jack: Basis of Design shall be Panduit CJ6X88TGxx

2. Connector jacks and jack assemblies shall be color coded by system.

a. Color(s): As scheduled in the Contract Documents.

D. Surface Mount Housing

1. Available in various configurations that shall accommodate an individual modular connector. 2. Termination and housing shall be UL/NEC rated for the location, manner, and environmental

conditions in which the cables are installed (plenum and non-plenum). 3. Application is limited to Wireless Access Point (WAP) cabling terminations, unless noted

otherwise.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Refer to the Drawings for types and quantities of horizontal cables.






MSA# 11172.00


D. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C, including TIA/EIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises; TIA/EIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard; TIA/EIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components Standard; and TIA/EIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.






H. Install faceplates and inserts furnished under Section 271543 “Faceplates and Connectors” and/or Section 271544 “Custom Faceplates, Panels and Connectors."

I. Provide the appropriate cable rated for the environmental conditions in which the cable is to be installed.


A. Prior to procurement and installation of the horizontal cabling system, coordinate and verify pathways provided and indicated on the Contract Documents. Coordinate and verify to ensure that horizontal cables will not exceed the maximum standards-based distance limitations (90 meters (295 feet)) for horizontal cabling. Any discrepancy shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Designer for direction.

1. If proactive steps are not taken prior to procurement or installation of the horizontal cabling system, the Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with providing the horizontal cabling system within industry-standard distance limitation parameters, including any additional required cabling, pathways, rough-in, equipment, communications rooms or enclosures, power and/or cooling requirements.

B. Install cables within approved pathways. Install cables that are not otherwise required to be installed within raceway in such manner as to conceal them from view. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls and floors.

C. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

D. Do not splice cable between terminations or junction points. Cable runs shall be continuous. Wiring shall be free from grounds, shorts, opens and reversals.

E. Maintain complete protection of cabling. Cabling shall not be left hanging or coiled where it potentially obstructs the Work of other trades.

F. Cable routing shall follow building structure lines (parallel and perpendicular).



MSA# 11172.00


H. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

I. Open-Cable Installation:


2. Suspend cable not in a raceway, a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1524 mm) apart. Bridle rings are not permitted.


J. Provide conduit sleeves for penetrations.


K. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed Under Raised Floors:

1. Install plenum rated cable only. 2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas. 3. Coil cable 6 feet (1800 mm) long not less than 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter below each feed

point.



M. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569 recommendations for separating unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (610 mm).

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm).

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:


MSA# 11172.00


a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (76 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).

N. Separate cabling by service and type (i.e., voice, data, control, coaxial, fiber) prior to terminating.



O. Within communications rooms, provide a minimum service loop of 10 feet (3 m), and spool the service loop in the ladder rack. At the outlet/connector, provide a minimum service loop of 2 feet (0.6096 m), and spool and store within a discrete cable support (J-hook) above the accessible ceiling at the outlet/connector location.

P. Maintain (do not violate) the minimum bend radius specified by the manufacturer of the cable.

Q. At final termination, excess cable and the service loop shall be supported and stored neatly in the cable tray or ladder rack within the communications room and above the ceiling line at an accessible point at the station end.


R. Cabling within Enclosures:




S. Cable Termination:


2. Utilize standard positive identification color coding for multi-conductor cables. 3. Provide 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.


MSA# 11172.00


a. Do not untwist twisted pair cables more than 1/4 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.

4. Cables from the same room/space shall be terminated adjacent on termination hardware. Cables from outlets/connectors shall be terminated in alpha-numeric, sequential order.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with Section 270550 “Firestopping for Communications.”

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Comply with Section 270526 “Grounding and Bonding for Communications” for grounding conductors and connectors.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION


B. Label each end of each cable.





1. Twisted pair cabling shall be factory tested according to TIA/EIA-568-C. 2. Visually inspect twisted pair jacket materials for NRTL certification marking. Inspect cabling

terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-C.

3. Visually confirm Category 6a (Augmented Category 6) marking of cables, outlets, cover plates, outlets/connectors, patch panels and other termination hardware.

4. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords and labeling of components.

5. Test twisted pair copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults and polarity between conductors.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-C. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in “Test Instruments (Normative)” Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in “Measurement Accuracy (Informative)” Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

6. UTP Performance Tests:


MSA# 11172.00


a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-C:

1) Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3) Insertion loss (Attenuation). 4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. 5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT)/Attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio, far-end

(ACRF). 7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT)/Power sum attenuation-to-

crosstalk ratio, far-end (PSACRF). 8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew. 11) Power sum alien attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio, far-end (PSAACRF). 12) Power sum alien near-end crosstalk (PSANEXT).

C. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for twisted pair systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.

D. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report for the cables as well as a detailed report for each cable tested.

E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate they do not comply with specified requirements. Retest cabling and provide documentation.

F. End-to-end cabling shall be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare and submit test and inspection reports.

H. The Owner reserves the right to have a representative present during testing procedures. Verification testing of copper and fiber may be performed at or near Project completion by the Consultant for quality assurance.

I. Upon verification testing, if the Consultant finds the test results do not match the Contractor’s results, the Consultant or a third party may at the Owner’s request retest the cabling and submit those results to the Owner and deduct the verification testing costs from the Contractor’s Contract amount.



MSA# 11172.00

COAXIAL HORIZONTAL CABLING 271533 - 1

SECTION 271533 – COMMUNICATIONS COAXIAL HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Horizontal coaxial cabling system for used for RF Broadband Video Distribution 2. System includes but is not limited to:

a. Horizontal cabling b. Cable end connectors c. Station-end Cables.


1. Section 270810 “Verification Testing of Structured Cabling.” 2. Section 271333 “Coaxial Backbone Cabling.” 3. This Section identifies the minimum requirements for the Project. Comply with the requirements




1.3 COORDINATION

A. Review and coordinate the sizes, quantity, routing and spacing of pathways to ensure they shall adequately support the Work of this Section.



MSA# 11172.00


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General:



1. Product Data:

a. Bill of Materials (BOM). b. Product datasheets.

2. Shop Drawings:

a. System labeling schedules and schema.

3. Samples:

a. Two (2) 24 inches long fully connectorized and labeled samples of each cable and connector model combination required on the Project.

b. Samples shall be reviewed and comments provided prior to installation.

4. Pre-Acceptance:

a. Assertion of Work Completion form.


1. Cable test results.










MSA# 11172.00



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COAXIAL HORIZONTAL CABLING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The Coaxial Horizontal Cabling System shall be a system of permanently installed coaxial cable used in the distribution of radio frequency signals containing modulated audio, video, voice and/or data information.

B. The system shall complement and work in concert with RF Broadband Video Distribution/MATV/CATV/SMATV electronics to distribute usable signals to the passives to the work area/station/RF/TV outlets and equipment designated in the Contract Documents.

C. The system shall pass common signals such as modulated NTSC, ATSC, QAM and DOCSIS compliant data signals as well as FM and HD digital radio programming signals.

D. The system shall be FCC compliant with regard to egress leakage from the system.

E. The system shall pass signals in both forward and reverse directions.

F. Cabling Topology – Distributed Star:

1. The cabling system shall follow a distributed star topology, substantially similar to standardized Horizontal Copper Systems used for voice and data networks. Using this topology, a single dedicated cable shall be routed from each station (drop) outlet to a Communications Room (i.e., ER, TR, IDF, MDF) where it shall be terminated and landed on RF distribution passives and/or patch panels (as identified in the Contract Documents).

2. Cabling shall substantially follow the same primary and secondary pathway routes as other horizontal cabling that serve the same space(s) but with adequate space between the cables.

3. Cabling shall be routed to the Communications Room located on the same level and in the same building nearest station outlet, except where otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS


1. Amphenol. 2. Belden / CDT (Belden). 3. Commscope, Inc. (Commscope). 4. General Cable (General). 5. West Penn / CDT (West Penn). 6. Thomas & Betts Co. 7. Stirling / Ideal (Stirling). 8. Gilbert / Corning (Gilbert).


MSA# 11172.00


2.3 CABLES

A. General:

1. Cables shall be code complaint and contain the appropriate imprinted UL/NEC listing markings for the manner and location of installation.


2. Cables shall be designed for the transport of RF signals. 3. Cables shall feature 75 ohm impedance. 4. Cables shall feature 100 percent shielding. 5. Cables shall feature no discontinuity between DC and 1000 MHz (1 GHz). 6. Cables used for below grade applications, and cables used in pathways that may reasonably end up

with standing water within them, shall be manufacturer rated for continuous contact with water without performance degradation or compromise in warranty.

7. Cables used for direct burial applications, where permitted, shall be manufacturer rated for direct burial applications.

B. RG-6 Grade:

1. RG-6/U Type. 2. 75-Ohm Impedance. 3. Quad-shielded design consisting of four alternating shield layers.

a. Two layers of aluminum braiding. b. Two layers of 100% BiFoil aluminum wrap.

4. 18-AWG solid bare-copper center conductor. 5. Gas-injected polyethylene center conductor dielectric. 6. Temperature rating: 75 degrees Celsius. 7. DCR: <= 6.5 ohms per 1000 feet. 8. Nominal Attenuation (per 100 feet):

a. 0.45 dB @ 5 MHz. b. 1.60 dB @ 55 MHz. c. 2.00 dB @ 100 MHz. d. 4.50 dB @ 400 MHz. e. 6.00 dB @ 700 MHz. f. 8.00 dB @ 1000 MHz.

C. RG-11 Grade:

1. RG-11/U Type. 2. 75-Ohm Impedance. 3. Quad-shielded design consisting of four alternating shield layers.

a. Two layers of aluminum braiding. b. Two layers of 100% BiFoil aluminum wrap.

4. 14-AWG solid bare-copper center conductor. 5. Gas-injected polyethylene center conductor dielectric. 6. Temperature rating: 125 degrees Celsius.


MSA# 11172.00


7. DCR: 2.6 ohms per 1000 feet. 8. Nominal Attenuation (per 100 feet):

a. 0.25 dB @ 5 MHz. b. 1.00 dB @ 55 MHz. c. 1.50 dB @ 100 MHz. d. 3.30 dB @ 400 MHz. e. 4.50 dB @ 700 MHz. f. 5.50 dB @ 1000 MHz

2.4 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATORS

A. General:

1. Connectors shall be designed and manufacturer recommended for the specific cable to which the connector is applied.

2. Wet environment rated versions of cable connectors shall be supplied when the connector will reside outdoors or in other high moisture environments. Such connectors shall be equipped with water-tight O-ring seals to prevent moisture ingress.

B. For RG-6 Grade Cables

1. F-Type male connector. 2. Designed for use with RG-6 grade cables 3. Brass construction with nickel plated, cadmium or natural finish 4. Designed for application using a non-crimping, 360° concentric compression process. 5. Cable retention strength: >=40lbs. 6. Manufacturer rated for both indoor and outdoor environments.

C. For RG-59 Grade Cables

1. F-Type male connector 2. Designed for use with RG-59 grade cables 3. Brass construction with nickel plated, cadmium or natural finish 4. Designed for application using a non-crimping, 360° concentric compression process. 5. Cable retention strength: >=40lbs. 6. Manufacturer rated for both indoor and outdoor environments.

D. RG-11 Grade Cables

1. F-Type male connector 2. Designed for use with RG-11 grade cables 3. Integral tin-plated center-post conductor 4. Brass construction with nickel plated, cadmium or natural finish 5. Designed for application using a non-crimping, 360° concentric compression process. 6. Cable retention strength: >40lbs. 7. Manufacturer rated for indoor and outdoor environments


MSA# 11172.00


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Review and coordinate cabling pathways prior to pathway and cabling installation.

B. Coordinate work of this Section with the Work of each related section.

C. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 270528 “Pathways for Communications.”



D. RG-59 grade cables shall be used:

1. For station cables <6 feet in length. 2. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings.

E. RG-6 grade cables shall be used:

1. For horizontal distribution where length of cable does not exceed 90 meters. 2. For station cables 6 feet to 25 feet in length. 3. As patch cord used with patch cables. 4. Where specifically indicated on the drawings.

F. RG-11 grade cable shall be used:

1. For horizontal distribution where length of cable exceeds 90 meters. 2. Where specifically indicated on the drawings.


A. Install cables within specified pathways. Install cables that are not otherwise required to be installed within raceway in such manner as to conceal them from view. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls and floors.

B. Maintain complete protection of cabling. Cabling shall not be left hanging or coiled where it potentially obstructs the Work of other trades.

C. Route cable following building structural lines (parallel and perpendicular).

D. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between terminations or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

E. Cables shall not be spliced. Cable runs shall be continuous. Wiring shall be free from grounds, shorts, opens and reversals.


MSA# 11172.00


F. Terminate every conductor. Install connector on each end of each cable. Make terminations at locations indicated in the Contract Documents.


H. Separate cabling by service and type (i.e., voice, data, control, coaxial) prior to terminating.



I. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

J. Open-Cable Installation:


2. Suspend coaxial cable not in a wireway or pathway, a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1524 mm) apart. Bridle rings are not permitted.


K. Provide conduit sleeves for penetrations.




M. Separation from Sources of Interference

1. Route cables at least 2 feet away from fluorescent light fixtures and other electrical devices and cables that are potential sources of EMI and RFI interference that could negatively impact the usability of the cables installed under this section.

2. Provide a minimum separation of 48 inches (1200 mm) from electrical motors and transformers.


MSA# 11172.00


N. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.

O. Cabling on Backboards and in Equipment Racks: Neatly dress, support, and attach all cabling. Install cables using horizontal and vertical cable management products.

P. Install cables of the appropriate length and with sufficient service loops and offset bends to facilitate installation, removal and service of RF passives, electronics and connectors. Sufficient cable length shall be installed to permit replacement or re-termination of the connectors without need for extension.

1. Terminate each end of every cable using connectors specifically designed for the cables being terminated.

2. Prep cable for termination using tools manufactured expressly manufactured for this purpose. Use only the models of tools recommended by the cable and connector manufacturers.

3. Do not nick the center conductor of cables. Re-terminate all cables where a nick has occurred. 4. Connectors shall be applied to cables in a manufacturer approved manner so as to achieve the

connector-to-cable mechanical retention strength indicated by the manufacturer but not less than 40lbs.

Q. At final termination, excess cable and the service loop shall be supported and stored neatly in the cable tray or ladder rack within the communications rooms.


R. Land station-end of cable on connectorized faceplate.

S. Station Cables: Provide custom length station cables fabricated from approved products for use at all station (drop) outlets. Coordinate custom length requirements to suit the needs of connected equipment.

1. Where connected equipment is not included in the contract, coordinate the length of station cables to be furnished with the Designer. Average length shall not exceed 12-feet.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 270550 “Firestopping for Communications”

B. Comply with Section 078413 “Penetration Firestopping.”

C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, “Firestopping” and BICSI TDMM, “Firestopping Systems” Article.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 270526 “Grounding and Bonding for Communications” for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, “Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection” Chapter, and comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.


MSA# 11172.00


3.5 IDENTIFICATION




3.6 IDENTIFICATION


B. Label each patch point on each patch panel.


A. Comply with requirements of Section 270810 “Verification Testing of Structured Cabling.”



SECTION 271533 - COAXIAL HORIZONTAL CABLING SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST

(Form: 271533 - Sub-0)

Each line below featuring text shall be supplied with an answer. NO YES


MSA# 11172.00

FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS 271543 - 1

SECTION 271543 – FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Faceplates and associated device connectors for Communications and Security for wall, floor and ceiling device openings (e.g., device boxes, box eliminators), including multi-service and single service plates.


1. Section 262726 “Wiring Devices” for electrical power and lighting faceplates. 2. Section 271513 “Copper Horizontal Cabling” for connector jacks. 3. This Section identifies the minimum requirements for the Project. Comply with the requirements




1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals:

1. Product Data:

a. Product Data Sheet: For each type of product. b. Finish/Color Schedule: Identifying finish and color of each type of product for the Project,

coordinated with finish and color of faceplates specified in other specification Sections related to the Project, including Division 26 Electrical and Division 28 Security.

2. Samples:


MSA# 11172.00


a. One (1) of each faceplate size and type to be furnished. b. One (1) of each connector type to be furnished. c. Samples of faceplate color options. d. Samples of modular mounting frame color options.

B. Closeout Submittals:

1. Product Data Sheet: For each type of product actually supplied. 2. Finish/Color Schedule: Identifying the finish and color of each type of product by location on the

Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers Names: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices (Cooper). 2. Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc. (Leviton). 3. Lutron Electronics, Inc. (Lutron). 4. Hubbell Incorporated (Hubbell). 5. Ortronics/Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Ortronics). 6. Panduit (Panduit).

B. Source Limitations:

1. Obtain faceplates from a single source manufacturer.

a. Multiple manufacturer sources may be used only when specialty/custom faceplates are required and both the standard and specialty plates are not available from a single manufacturer source.

b. Being listed as an approved manufacturer notwithstanding, the size, shape, finish and color of faceplates furnished as work of this Section shall exactly match the appearance of faceplates furnished as work of other specification Sections of the Contract Documents. A consistent and professional appearance shall result.

2. Obtain modular wiring device mounting frames from the same manufacturer as the modular connectors housed within the modular device mounting frame.

a. Multiple sources shall be considered only when identified in the drawing details and when there is no single source manufacturer that supplies the full complement of compatible components required for the Project.

2.2 FACEPLATES

A. Standard Electrical Gang-Box Size Faceplates:

1. Designed for mounting over standard electrical gang-box size openings.


MSA# 11172.00


2. Available in manufacturer standard sizes ranging from 1 to 6 gangs, in 1-gang increments, to suit the size and configurations required by the Contract Documents.

3. Available from the manufacturer in standard size versions. 4. Mounting holes for securing the faceplate to the device mounting box and/or the mounted device. 5. Manufacturer supplied metal mounting screws featuring screw heads matching the color of the

faceplate. Screws shall be custom painted when matching standard color screws are not available. 6. Available with both Designer style (e.g., Decora®) and standard duplex style openings for

accommodating mounted devices. 7. Color(s) as scheduled in the Contract Documents.

B. Furniture Faceplate:

1. Compatible with furniture manufacturer. 2. Color coordinated with furniture system and adjacent electrical devices. 3. Provides mounting for minimum of 4-port standard modular jacks. 4. Designed to snap into furniture knock-out. 5. Provide with color-matched blank connector inserts that occupy unused openings of the faceplate.

C. Wall Phone Faceplate:

1. Designed for mounting over NEMA standard 1-gang electrical opening. 2. Stainless steel plate construction. 3. Dual mounting posts in standard positions to accommodate standard wall telephone with recess for

modular jack/connector. 4. Available with the following connector options:

a. Compatible with 8P8C RJ45 modular jacks/connectors. b. USOC 6-Pin RJ25 connector, set flush in faceplate.

D. Floor Box Faceplate:

1. Compatible with floor box. 2. Openings for Designer Style devices. 3. Color coordinated with electrical faceplates and custom faceplates mounted within the same box. 4. Provide with color-matched blank inserts to occupy all unused openings of the faceplate.

E. Voice and Data Faceplate:

1. Designed for mounting over NEMA standard 1-gang electrical opening. 2. Sloped vertical faceplate accepting two, four or six voice, data or RF modules. 3. Includes label/label covers for easy port identification. 4. Basis of Design shall be Panduit, available in the following configurations:

a. 2-port: Panduit CFPSL2IWY. b. 4-port: Panduit CFPSL4IWY. c. 6-port: Panduit CFPSL6IWY.

5. Additional approved manufacturer shall be Ortronics/Legrand.

2.3 MODULAR WIRING DEVICE MOUNTING FRAMES

A. Designer Style (e.g. Decora®):


MSA# 11172.00


1. Available in various configurations that shall accommodate 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 individual modular connectors. Provide 4-port modular frame unless indicated otherwise.

2. Available in a variety of manufacturer standard colors, including color(s) that exactly match the corresponding faceplate used on the Project.

3. Provide with color-matched blank connector inserts that occupy unused openings of the frame. 4. Provide color(s) as scheduled in the Contract Documents.

B. Duplex Style:

1. NEMA 106 compatible. 2. Available in various configurations that shall accommodate 1, 2 and 4 individual modular

connectors. Provide 4-port modular frame unless indicated otherwise. 3. Available in a variety of manufacturer standard colors, including color(s) that exactly match the

corresponding faceplate. 4. Provide with color-matched blank connector inserts that occupy unused openings of the frame. 5. Provide color(s) as scheduled in the Contract Documents.

2.4 RF BROADBAND VIDEO CONNECTOR (CATV, SMATV, AND MATV)

A. F-Type RF Bulkhead:

1. F-type female connectors on each end. 2. Integral 75 ohm terminating resister that terminates the circuit when cable is removed from either

end of bulkhead. 3. Frequency rated to 2GHz and beyond. 4. Designed for mounting within standard F-connector opening of a device plate or modular F-type

connector module. 5. Integral fixed hex nut on one side, and threaded hex nut on the other for tightening. 6. Sized to match the cable connectors to be attached.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examination and Coordination:

1. If colors of product are not specifically identified in the Contract Documents, coordinate color selection with the Designer/Architect prior to procurement of product.

2. Examine pathways before installation. Provide written report to the Architect identifying any issues with pathway rough-in that will prevent faceplates from being installed plumb, level and square to the major building lines, or flush with the building finished surface.

3. Examine faceplates for damage, blemishes and defects prior to installation. 4. Provide sizes of faceplates to match the rough-in/box opening(s). 5. Provide faceplates featuring the finish and color to match other faceplates installed in the

surrounding visible areas, except where otherwise expressly scheduled, detailed or noted. 6. Provide faceplates with device openings to match the device served.

B. Installation:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Provide faceplates over pathway boxes, box eliminators and individual device openings of multi-opening boxes (e.g., floor boxes), including those designated for future use.

2. Provide blank faceplates over openings that do not otherwise feature a device required by the Contract Documents.

3. Install faceplates flush with the finished surface over which the plate mounts. 4. Secure faceplates using screws and other mounting hardware specifically recommended by the

faceplate manufacturer and the manufacturer of the device served. 5. Install faceplates so the plate is plumb, level and square. 6. Provide and tighten mounting screws.

3.2 LABELING

A. Label faceplates and connectors.

B. Comply with Section 270553 “Identification for Communications.”



MSA# 11172.00

COMMUNICATIONS CORDS, DEVICES AND ADAPTERS 271600 - 1

SECTION 271600 – COMMUNICATIONS CORDS, DEVICES AND ADAPTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cable Assemblies, Devices, and Adapters for Communications.


1. Section 270810 “Verification Testing of Structured Cabling.” 2. This Section identifies the minimum requirements for the Project. Comply with the requirements




1.3 REFERENCES

A. Definitions:

1. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. 2. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from

building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways. 3. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or

cross-connection. 4. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. 5. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. 6. LAN: Local area network. 7. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet

cable terminates. 8. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.


MSA# 11172.00


9. Twisted-Pair: Two individually insulated copper wires physically twisted together to form a balanced pair.

10. Twisted-Pair Cable: A multi-conductor cable comprising two or more copper conductors twisted in a manner designed to cancel electrical interference. Also called balanced twisted-pair cable.

11. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 12. WAN: Wide area network.








1.4 COORDINATION

A. Review and coordinate the quantity, lengths, colors and rating of patch cords with the Project requirements and the Owner prior to procurement and installation.

1. Confirm that cables to be installed will not exceed the maximum standards-based distance limitations for total channel distance: 328 feet (100m) between equipment in the communications room and station equipment, including cable service loops, patch cables and station attachment cables.

B. Coordinate layout and installation with telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General





3. Shop Drawings:


MSA# 11172.00


a. Labeling Schema utilized for cable assemblies. b. Cable color code utilized for patching.

4. Samples:

a. Two (2) 36-inch long labeled samples of each cable type required on the Project.



a. Labeling Schema utilized for cable assemblies. b. Cable color code utilized for patching.

3. Cable and connectivity manufacturers’ certification of quality and performance. 4. Executed warranty documentation: Site specific; supplied from the manufacturer(s). 5. Provide additional closeout documentation as required in Division 01 and Division 27 “General







1.8 WARRANTY

A. Cabling and connectivity products manufacturers, including patch cords, shall have in place an agreement recognizing each other for complete execution of the warranty as specified. Performance and applications warranties shall be channel rated, including patch cables.

1. Comply with warranty requirements of related Sections. The cable manufacturer and the connectivity products manufacturer shall have a partnership agreement established in order to provide the required warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Provide TIA/EIA-568-C compliant 4-pair UTP horizontal cabling system, including patch cables.

a. Provide cable assemblies and devices with electrical properties to match the designed infrastructure and specified in related Sections.

2. The maximum allowable total channel distance is 328 feet (100m) between equipment in the communications room and station equipment, including patch cables and station attachment cables.

3. Provide total connectivity for complete and permanent installed communications links. 4. Work shall comply with the Contract Documents and the manufacturers’ printed recommended

installation practices. 5. The Copper Horizontal Cabling System, including patch cords, shall include provisions for

voice/telephone, data/network, video surveillance, audio-visual, access control, control data and intrusion detection systems. Cables shall be color-coded by system.

6. System cables shall be UL/NEC rated for the location, manner, and environmental conditions in which the cables are installed.

7. Provide one single manufacturer for twisted-pair termination hardware and patch cable assemblies used together in a permanent link and whenever a Category Certification is required.

B. Provide the following cable assemblies (cords), devices, and adapters:

1. Patch Cables:

a. Length as required for the Equipment Room/Telecommunications Room end. Coordinate. b. Confirm required cable color coding. c. Labeled with the same unique identifier at both ends of the assembly. d. Provide a quantity of one (1) for each horizontal cable installed.

1) Includes provisions for voice/telephone, data/network, video surveillance, audio-visual, access control, control data and intrusion detection systems.

2. Workstation and Device Cables:

a. Length as required for workstation locations. Coordinate. b. Confirm required cable color coding. c. Labeled with same unique identifier at both ends of the assembly. d. Provide a quantity of one (1) for each horizontal cable installed.

1) Includes provisions for voice/telephone, data/network, video surveillance, audio-visual, access control, control data and intrusion detection systems.

e. System cables shall be UL/NEC rated for the location, manner, and environmental conditions in which the cables are installed. Plenum rated patch cables shall be provided for above-ceiling applications.

2.2 UTP PATCH CABLE ASSEMBLIES




MSA# 11172.00


A. Category 6a Copper Patch Cables:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C, Category 6a. 2. Independently tested and verified. 3. UTP Cable Assemblies. 4. Tested and verified to meet TIA component, permanent link and channel requirements. 5. Confirm cable lengths with the Owner. 6. Confirm cable color coding with the Owner. 7. Basis of Design shall be Panduit UTP6Ax with labels added.

2.3 FIBER OPTIC PATCH CABLE ASSEMBLIES



B. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables.

1. Coordinate with the Owner for termination types to match equipment. 2. Coordinate with the Owner and installed equipment locations for lengths required. 3. Provide patch cords to match specified optical fiber performance. 4. Provide quantities of patch cables required for switch-to-switch requirements. 5. Basis of Design shall be Panduit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C, including TIA/EIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises; TIA/EIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard; TIA/EIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components Standard; and TIA/EIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.


A. Maintain complete protection of cabling. Cabling shall not be left hanging or coiled where it potentially obstructs the Work of other trades.

B. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

C. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.


MSA# 11172.00


3.3 IDENTIFICATION


B. Label each end of each cable, as described within this Section.

C. Apply all labels straight and legible.



MSA# 11172.00

MASKING SYSTEMS 275119 - 1

SECTION 275119 – MASKING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Complete and working speech privacy (a.k.a. “Masking System”) system including electronic noise generators, amplifiers, wiring, loudspeakers, controls and other components necessary to generate, amplify, distribute and reproduce digitally synthesized and stabilized sound masking signals.

B. Related Requirements

1. Section 271513 “Copper Horizontal Cabling” for cabling to use for data interconnections. 2. Section 270528 “Pathways for Communications” for pathways required to support system cabling.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Bill of Materials. 2. Product Datasheets.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. System Diagram. 2. Coordinated Backboard Elevation for Communications room in which system components are

installed. 3. Unique and typical wiring details for all system components.

D. DSP Configuration Files:

1. Editable electronic configuration files and settings for system equipment.

E. Training Plan:

1. Schedule. 2. Agenda for each session.


MSA# 11172.00


F. Closeout Documents

1. System Diagrams, as-built. 2. System floor plans depicting exact locations of system components, including but not limited to:

a. Speakers b. Electronic components c. Cable routing d. Zone assignments

3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 4. System performance verification documentation. See “Tests and Adjustments.” 5. Settings of system components, printed and editable electronic.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Definitions:

1. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. 2. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. 3. Masking System: Another term for “Speech Privacy System.” 4. Speech Privacy System: An audio system that continuously reproduces spectrally shaped noise

for the purpose of masking some speech. The system works by elevating background noise within the coverage area to the point where the intelligibility of ingress speech is reduced.

5. Test and Calibration Conditions: Spaces completely furnished but unoccupied, lights and HVAC systems on, HVAC system testing and balancing completed, ceiling components in place. Additional testing to be provided after space is occupied to adjust for variations in use.

6. Covered spaces: Spaces above which masking speakers are installed. 7. Pink Noise: Random noise signal with equal energy in each octave.

B. Standards:

1. ANSI S1.4: American National Standard Specification for Sound Level Meters 2. ANSI S1.6: American National Standard Specification for Preferred Frequencies and Band

Numbers Acoustical Measurements. 3. ANSI S1.11: American National Standard Specification for Octave-Band and Fractional-Octave-

Band Analog and Digital Filters 4. ASTM E 1130-02: Standard Test Method for Objective Measurement of Speech Privacy in Open

Offices Using Articulation Index. 5. ASTM E1573-02: Standard Test Method for Evaluating Masking Sound in Open Offices Using A-

Weighted and One-Third Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels. 6. ASTM E 1374-93: Standard Guide for Open Office Acoustics and Applicable ASTM Standards. 7. ASTM E1041-85: Standard Guide for Measurement of Masking Sound in Open Offices.



B. System products manufacturer shall have been in the full-time business of manufacturing sound masking products for at least the last 10-consecutive years.


MSA# 11172.00


1.6 WARRANTY

A. System products shall be warranted by the manufacturer for period of (10) Years.

B. See 270001 General Requirements for Communications for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. The system shall be a fully integrated multi-zone speech privacy (masking) system.

B. The system shall be constructed of commercial grade products suitable for and configured in such manner as to be suitable for continuous-duty operation.

C. At the heart of the system shall be digital signal processor(s) that generate masking noise signals programmed to achieve the other functionality described in the Contract Documents.

D. The system shall utilize speakers that are installed in, above and below ceilings and achieves effective coverage within the designated areas. Speakers shall be logically grouped into literal zones, with each literal zone representing an area that is either acoustically unique and requires masking noise, spectrally shaped for the specific area, construction and environmental conditions. Speakers installed in and above plenum ceilings shall be UL Listed or use in return air plenums.

E. Speakers shall be installed in sufficient quantities and in such locations as to achieve coverage for the purposes identified for the area.

F. The system shall reproducing masking noise in each and every zone of the system. The exact zone(s) featuring masking noise shall be field configurable and programmable.

G. The system shall feature:

1. Random noise generators that do not repeat the noise pattern greater that once per 25 hours. 2. Independent equalization of masking noise reproduced in each masking zone. 3. Independent control over masking noise level within masking zone. 4. Dedicated 1/3 octave band equalization for each masking zone. Minimum of 30 bands. 5. Global mute input used for interconnection to and muting by the fire-alarm system. 6. Category 5e cable with RJ-45 connectors for communications. 7. Category 5e grade cable with RJ12 connections for audio. 8. Power cable ≥14 AWG, sufficiently sized for proper operation. 9. Main power supplies installed within designate Communications Rooms.

H. The system shall:

1. Be tied interfaced with and controllable from the local area network. 2. Be tunable via the network, using a supplied hand-held remote control. 3. Meet ANSI 709.1 / ISO / IEC standards for open platform. 4. Be controllable, and programmable via standard current generation internet/intranet Web Browser

applications.


MSA# 11172.00


I. The system shall not permit end-user adjustments except through the use of a computer-based software application or programmable user interface.

J. The system equipment and installation techniques used shall permit the system to remain powered on and operational 24 hours per day, 365 days per year.

K. The system shall restore to normal operation following a loss of power, without human interaction.

L. Speakers shall be damped to avoid undesirable resonance.

2.2 PERFORMANCE

A. Maximum Level: The system shall be capable of reproducing continuous sound levels of ≥65dBA, as measured at 6-feet above the floor throughout all coverage areas.

B. Level Adjustment Range: Levels in each zone shall be adjustable from ≤36dBA up to the maximum rated level specified.

C. Masking Contour: Shape of an NC-40 noise contour, +/- 2 dB on ISO 1/1-octave centers between 125 Hz to 8 kHz.

D. Masking Coverage Uniformity, per zone: +/- 1/2 dBA.

E. Temporal Uniformity: One minute time-averaged sound pressure level of any octave band of masking sound from 250 to 8000 Hz remains constant in any space to within a standard deviation of 2 dB when measured over a 30-minute period.

F. Sound Quality: No audible hum or noise, other than masking noise, from this system in masked spaces should be detected.

2.3 MANUFACTURER

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide system products from the following manufacturers:

1. Lencore Acoustics Corp.

a. 1 Crossways Park Drive W b. Woodbury, NY 11797 c. PH: 516-682-9292 d. FX: 516-682-4785 e. Website: www.lencore.com f. Email: [email protected]

2.4 EQUIPMENT

A. Speakers:

1. Type MA:

a. Downward firing.

http://www.lencore.com/


MSA# 11172.00


b. Designed for chain suspension. c. Custom painted (color selected by Architect). d. Enclosure: aluminum or electroplated steel, cylindrical housing. e. Overall Diameter: 6 in. f. Overall Depth/Height: 6 in. g. Power Rating: 10 Watts RMS h. Frequency Response: 50-12,000 Hz i. Pressure Sensitivity: SPL - at 1 Watt/m - 90 dB j. Impedance: 32 Ohms k. Magnet Weight: 10 oz. (283.5 grams) l. Cable connection: RJ12.

2. Type MB:

a. Flush Mount design for in-ceiling use. b. Downward (direct) firing. c. Overall Diameter: 6 in. d. Overall Depth/Height: 6 in. e. Grille: White 6 in. perforated metal grille. f. Decorative white trim ring. g. Enclosure: aluminum or electroplated steel, cylindrical housing. h. Power Rating: 10 Watts RMS i. Resonance: 80Hz j. Frequency Response: 50-12,000 Hz. k. Pressure Sensitivity: SPL - at 1 Watt/m - 90 dB. l. Impedance: 32 Ohms. m. Magnet Weight: 10 oz n. Cable connection: RJ12.

3. Type MC:

a. Flush Mount design for in-ceiling use. b. Downward (direct) firing. c. Overall Diameter: 6 in. d. Overall Depth/Height: 4 in. e. Grille: White 6 in. perforated metal grille. f. Decorative white trim ring. g. Enclosure: aluminum or electroplated steel, cylindrical housing. h. Power Rating: 10 Watts RMS i. Resonance: 80Hz j. Frequency Response: 50-12,000 Hz. k. Pressure Sensitivity: SPL - at 1 Watt/m - 90 dB. l. Impedance: 32 Ohms. m. Magnet Weight: 10 oz n. Cable connection: RJ12.

4. Type MD:

a. Flush Mount design for high-density in-ceiling use. b. Downward (direct) firing. c. Grille: White 3.5 in. perforated metal grille. d. Decorative white trim ring. e. Enclosure: aluminum or electroplated steel, cylindrical housing. f. Overall Diameter: 4.5 in.


MSA# 11172.00


g. Power Rating: 3 Watts RMS. h. Resonance: 250 Hz +/- 20 Hz. i. Frequency Response: 250-12,000 Hz. j. Impedance: 32 Ohms. k. Cable connection: RJ12.

5. Type ME:

a. Upward firing. b. Designed for chain suspension. c. Enclosure: aluminum or electroplated steel, cylindrical housing. d. Overall Diameter: 6 in. e. Overall Depth/Height: 6 in. f. Power Rating: 10 Watts RMS g. Frequency Response: 50-12,000 Hz h. Pressure Sensitivity: SPL - at 1 Watt/m - 90 dB i. Impedance: 32 Ohms j. Magnet Weight: 10 oz. (283.5 grams) k. Cable connection: RJ12.

B. Digital Signal Processor

1. Integral Sound Generator:

a. Discrete internal non-coherent random pink noise generators for each zone. b. Noise repetition pattern: ≥ 25 hours. c. Octave-band adjustments from 20 Hz to 20 kHz. d. Parametric equalization filters for the 20 Hz to 20 kHz spectrum. e. Noise contour adjustments. f. Spectrum adjustment - Meets acoustical preferred curve.

2. Integral Power Amplifier

a. 4 discrete zone outputs. b. Separate amplifier channel for each zone. c. 4-Ohm low-impedance support.

3. Outputs

a. Each output individually adjustable b. Modular phone/LAN type connections. c. 1/3-band equalizer (25 Hz – 20 KHz). d. Parametric EQ (20 Hz – 20 KHz). e. Contour control f. Separate EQ control for zones for sound masking. g. Master level control.

4. General

a. Control Input. b. Non-volatile battery backed up memory. 1-year memory support. c. UL Listed for installation within plenum air-handling spaces. d. Designed with built-in support for future activation of zone paging and background music

distribution.


MSA# 11172.00


e. Integral IR receiver to enable localized wireless remote control. f. Input Voltage: 48vdc. Remotely powered.

C. Network Interface

1. Integral web-server for programming, remote control and system management. 2. LON Echelon output for communication with system DSP

D. Cable:

1. UL Listed. Plenum rated. 2. Power Cable: Minimum 14-gauge, stranded conductors, non-shielded. 3. Communications Cable: CAT-5e. Uniquely color coded to distinguish from voice/data service

cables. 4. Audio Cable: Cat-5e. Uniquely color coded to distinguish from voice/data service cables and

masking communications cables.

E. Power Supply:

1. Output:

a. DC Voltage: 48v. b. Rated Current: 3.2A. c. Current Range: 0~3.2A. d. Rated Power: 153.6 w. e. Output Voltage adj. range: 45.6~52.8v. f. Line Regulation: ±0.5%. g. Load regulation: ±0.5%. h. Setup, rise time: 600ms, 30ms at full load. i. Hold up time (typ.): 20ms at full load.

2. Input:

a. Voltage Range: 85~264VAC 120~370VDC. b. Frequency Range: 47~63Hz. c. Power Factor (typ.): pf>0.93/230vac pf>0.98/115vac at full load. d. AC Current (typ.): 2.5a @115vac 1.2a@ 230vac. e. Inrush Current (typ.): cold start 40a @ 230vac.

3. Safety: & EMC:

a. Safety Standards: UL60950-1, TUV EN60950-1 and S-Mark J60950 approved. b. Harmonic Current: Compliance to EN61000-3-2,-3. c. EMS Immunity: Compliance to EN61000-4-2,3,4,5,6,8,11; ENV50204, EN55024, light

industry level, criteria A.

4. Environment:

a. Working humidity: 20 ~ 90% RH non-condensing b. Working Temp: -10 ~ +60 (Refer to output load de-rating curve) c. Storage Temp., Humidity: -20 ~ +85 , 10 ~ 95% RH d. Temp. Coefficient: 0.05%/ (0 ~ 50°C) e. Vibration: 10 ~ 500Hz, 2G 10min./1cycle, 60min. each along X, Y, Z axes


MSA# 11172.00


5. Others:

a. MTBF: 191.2K hrs min. MIL-HDBK-217F (25°C) b. Dimension: 7 27/32” x 3 29/32” x 1 15/16”

6. Protection:

a. Overload: 105 ~ 150% rated output power b. Protection type: Constant current limiting, recovers automatically after fault condition is

removed. c. Over Voltage: 52.8 ~ 64.8V d. Over Temperature: 95°C±5°C (TSW1: Detect on Heat sink of Power Transistor). e. Protection type: Shut down o/p voltage, recovers automatically after temperature goes

down.

7. FUNCTION:

a. Remote Control(Option): CN1:4 ~ 10VDC Power ON, <0 ~ 0.8VDC b. Power Off

F. Remote Central Volume and Contour Control:

1. Generation and integration of multiple random sound masking sources and by using E-sound™ technology for best sound and effective sound masking. Each channel outputs with three levels of global and independent control.

a. Contour control – At the source using infra-red technology for each independent channel, quad-pod and global control or via a centralized control.

b. Parametric equalization control for one to thousands of speakers. c. 1/3 Band Octave controls – (Same as Parametric controls for groups) d. Volume control for entire spaces to channels to individual speakers.

2. Integration of separate paging and music channels.

a. Each channel can be digitally controlled for zone management and changed on the fly without any change in wiring. No need to go back into the ceiling to change settings.

G. Programmable Audio-Level Control Unit:

1. Standard applications include scheduling, data logging, alarm detection & dispatch, meter reading, analog functions, and type translation. The scheduling application permits events and exceptions to be initiated based on time and date schedules configured by the user. An astronomical position calculator permits scheduling to be done based on the calculated position of the sun. The data logging application collects network activity for use by trending, reporting, and analysis applications. New DIME support enables data log upload to a Web services application to occur through a firewall. The alarming application provides a means to identify, annunciate, and log alarm conditions. The meter reading application supervises impulse meters and provides suitable conversion values for energy, gas, and water metering. Automatic Sound Power Level Changes:

a. Two system channel changes, four times per day, and capable of different time settings for each day of the week:

1) Programmable attenuation range: -24 to +24 dB (48 dB)


MSA# 11172.00


2) Slide control attenuation range: -24 to +24 dB 3) Minutes per dB change: User programmable 4) Acclimation attenuation range: -24 to +24 dB 5) Acclimate days per dB change: 1 to 5 days 6) Programmable events: 24 events per day for each zone

2. Program Memory: Nonvolatile for one year, minimum, without power. When re-energized after a power outage, control starts at zero level and automatically advances system sound level at same rate used for programmed level changes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Review and coordinate pathway requirements with Section 270528 “Pathways for Communications.”

B. Coordinate Work of this Section with the Work of other Sections, Work of other trades, and the work of the Owner.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Comply with manufacturer installation instructions.

B. Speakers

a. Where downward firing speakers are located within suspended ceilings, install using tile-bridge supports so that the weight of the speaker and any related accessory is not carried by the ceiling tiles. Confirm with the ceiling system manufacturer and installers that the ceiling system is structurally sufficient to handle the weight of the installed speaker components. Install supplemental supports as appropriate.

b. Install a safety cable between building structure and speaker and conceal safety cables from view. Keep safety cable length to the minimum length necessary to maintain safety.

c. Where upward firing speakers are installed above the ceiling in the air below structure, support speaker assemblies using chain directly from structure.

d. Install suspended speakers in such manner as to ensure that air movement in the vicinity does not cause visible speaker movement.

C. Cable

1. Install cabling within approved pathways. Refer to Section 270528 “Pathways for Communications.

2. Neatly dress and support cable. Route cable parallel and perpendicular to major building lines. 3. Route system cables continuous and without splices, except where technically necessary to meet

the expressed intent of the Designer. 4. Where speaker cable splices are necessary to achieve the design intent, splice cables within

approved and accessible junction boxes, and speaker enclosures only. Exposed splices are not permitted.


MSA# 11172.00


5. Install cable strain relief clamps at the point of cable entrance and exit from speaker backboxes, junction boxes and similar enclosures where the cable is not fully enclosed within conduit. Pulling a cable shall not place any stress upon the cable interconnections.

6. Where intermediate terminations are a requirement of the implementation of the design, terminations shall be made within approved pathway enclosures. Call cables, devices and terminations shall be labeled and identified on the as-built drawings.

D. System Electronics:

1. Install above-ceiling electronics in locations that are accessible for service. 2. Install other electronics in locations designated.

E. Structural Mounting and Support:

1. Support products in a safe manner, using structural elements of the building. 2. Install products with a minimum safety margin of at least 5.

F. DSP Configuration:

1. Create configuration file(s) for programmable equipment in order to achieve the operation and performance defined in the Contract Documents.

G. Impedance and Level Matching:

1. Match the levels between system components in a manner consistent with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Where impedance matching of signal paths is material to manufacture recommendations and proper system performance, match the impedance accordingly.

H. Grounding:

1. Implement a code compliant safety grounding system that ensures the safety and performance of the system, operators and facility.

3.3 INDENTIFICATION


B. Each system product shall be uniquely identified at the site and on the as-built drawings.

3.4 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Speakers:

1. Verify each speaker is operational. 2. Measure and record the impedance of each speaker circuit using an AC impedance meter.

Conduct measurements at the following frequencies: 100 Hz, 500 Hz and 2000 Hz. Measure the impedance at the amplifier end of the circuit but with the circuit disconnected from the amplifier and while volume controls in the circuit are set to zero attenuation.

3. Confirm that the measured impedance is equivalent to the calculated impedance. Remediate discrepancies.


MSA# 11172.00


4. Confirm that the measured impedance falls within the operating limits of the amplifier channel that drives the circuit.

5. If any speaker is replaced or relocated, or if any speaker circuit is reconfigured, repeat measurements.

B. Coverage:

1. Adjust speaker locations and speaker power settings to achieve uniform sound coverage.

C. Background Noise Measurements:

1. Measure background noise data at (4) different locations within each coverage area. Record measurement locations on the as-built drawings and key to the measurement results.

2. Take the measurements with the HVAC system operating and while other typical steady-state noise producing sources are active.

3. Using qualified test instruments, measure and record the following at each of the locations identified above:

a. NC Noise Levels, 1-minute average. b. Sound Pressure Level, 1-Minute average, A-Weighted, slow response. c. ISO 1/1 octave band RTA measurements between 31.5 Hz and 16 kHz, un-weighted, slow

response, 1-minute average. d. ISO 1/3 octave band RTA measurements 31.5 Hz and to 16 kHz, un-weighted, slow

response, 1-minute average.

D. Masking Noise Adjustments:

1. Noise Measurement Instrumentation

a. Perform measurements of system performance with instrumentation compliant with ANSI S.4.

2. Perform final masking noise adjustments:

a. After system equipment has been installed. b. Following verification that system equipment is working properly. c. After ceiling tiles, acoustical sound screens, movable furniture, carpet, and other items are

in their typical locations, and spaces are ready for personnel to occupy the space for its intended purpose.

d. After system furniture, casework, and file cabinets are in their final locations. e. In new construction, prior to Owner personnel occupying the spaces served by the system,

while the intended occupants are not present. f. In existing construction and occupied spaces, when Owner personnel are not present,

during off-business hours. g. When noise generating systems are in place and operable (including the HVAC system). h. When construction personnel are not present and/or producing noise that adversely affects

the ability to make accurate measurements and adjustments. i. On weekends and in the evenings, as necessary.

3. Adjustment Procedure:

A. Raise the masking noise level in each zone to a level that is a minimum of 60dBA, and at least 10dB above ambient level, but not greater than the capacity of the amplifiers and


MSA# 11172.00


speakers serving the zone. Walk the coverage areas while listening for rattles, buzzes and other audible defects. Remediate audible defects prior to further system adjustment.

b. With the masking noise audible, and with the equalization filters active and in-circuit and set flat, increase the overall gain of the system to achieve a temporary level that is a minimum of 10dB above ambient, or 60dBA whichever is higher.

c. Adjust the masking equalizer filters serving each area to achieve a frequency response that follows the NC-40 frequency contour, relative to 500Hz.

1/3 Octave Band

Relative Level in dB-SPL

200 +2.5 250 +3 315 +2 400 +1 500 0 630 –1 800 –2

1000 –3 1250 –4 1600 –5 2000 –6

d. After the contour has been set, reduce the overall level of the masking noise until a level of:

1) 40dB is reached in the 1/3 octave band centered at 500 Hz, approximately 50dBA overall, within Open Offices.

2) 36dB is reached in the 1/3 octave band centered at 500 Hz, approximately 46dBA overall, within enclosed offices and conferring spaces.

e. Each area of the facility shall be checked to verify the uniformity of response.

1) Within the (8) 1/3-Octave bands from 400 Hz to 2 kHz, the response of the background masking sound shall not deviate more than 4dB in any one band. The total level deviation in the (8) 1/3-Octave bands shall not exceed 16dB at any location.

f. Record the settings of equipment on the as-built documentation. Setting shall include gain and filter values of the electronics and attenuators as well as power settings of speakers.

g. Record the average 1/3 octave spectral shape and overall dBA level for each zone on the as-built drawings.

E. Speaker Adjustments:

1. Physically reposition speakers and adjust power settings to achieve the specified coverage and coverage uniformity.

F. Restoration of Operation Following a Power Failure:

1. Configure the system so that the system operation gracefully restores normal masking levels following a power outage. Following a power outage, restore masking levels to a point 20dB below normal level for that time of day and then gradually increment the masking level up to its target level over 1-hour duration. Increase masking levels at increments of no more than 1 dB per step.


MSA# 11172.00


G. Phased Masking Implementation:

1. Where Owner personnel already occupy the areas to be served with masking noise, the level of noise shall be increased (phased in) to the space at a rate of not more than 1dB per day.

2. The initial starting level shall be at least 20dBA below the final intended operating level. 3. Phase implementation shall occur over at least a period of 20 business days. 4. Increases in level shall be during times when personnel are not present.

3.5 FOLLOW-UP ADJUSTMENTS

A. During 12-months following substantial completion and initial acceptance of the system. At the request of the Owner:

1. Return to the site and perform further spectral, and system level adjustments to suit actual occupied conditions. Include at least (1) return visit, sufficient to make changes in each zone of the system, during off-occupancy hours, at no additional cost.

2. Return to the site and provide follow-up demonstration on how the Owner may make level adjustments to their zones. Include at (1) return visit for this purpose, during normal business hours.

3.6 TRAINING

A. Provide training covering the operation of the system.

B. Identify the location of major equipment and user controls.

C. Identify the paging zones, background music zones and masking zones and types of adjustments available.

D. Identify the types and location of speakers.

E. Train on the operation of the system using the various user-adjustable controls included in the system.

F. Cover the behavior of the system under normal operating conditions, following a power failure and as part of the initial implementation.


Northern Kentucky Student Success Center – Selective Renovation

Bid Package #2

MSA# 11172.00

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SAFETY AND SECURITY 280001 - 1

SECTION 280001 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and

Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.


A. All Requirements of Division 27 Section 27 00 01 – General Requirements for Communications shall

apply to this Division, just as though published in this Section.



MSA# 11172.00

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR SAFETY AND SECURITY 280502 - 1

SECTION 280502 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Requirements applicable to work of this Division.

1.3 CODE COMPLIANCE

A. Work of this Division shall be performed in accordance with Codes applicable at the Project site(s). The Authority Having Jurisdiction shall have the final say as to whether compliance has been achieved.

B. Wherever the Contractor believes, or the Authority Having Jurisdiction advises, that work of these Contract Documents is in conflict with applicable codes, the Contractor shall immediately advise and seek the direction of the Designer.

1.4 TOOLS

A. Tools shall be used for the purpose for which they are designed.

B. Specialty tools shall be used for assembly, installation, termination, and removal of products as recommended by the product manufacturer.

C. The Designer reserves the right to require removal and replacement of any product installed using incorrect tools.

1.5 EXPLOSIVES

A. Use of explosives at the project site shall not be permitted.

1.6 WELDING

A. Welding at the project site, where necessary, shall be performed only by persons licensed to perform such work at the project site(s). Welding shall require a permit and the approval of the Owner’s Representative. Request for permission to perform onsite welding shall be submitted in writing through designated project channels.


MSA# 11172.00


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABLE BUNDLING HARDWARE


1. Great Lakes. 2. Hellermann Tyton. 3. Hubbell. 4. Leviton. 5. Millepede, Inc. 6. Ortronics. 7. Panduit. 8. Stakall Snap Tie. 9. Velcro.

B. Description: Provide reusable, adjustable cable straps. Nylon cable ties shall not be permitted.

1. Hook and Loop Fastener

a. Provide plenum rated tie in plenum environments. b. Minimum cable strap width shall be 3/4 inch. c. Basis of Design shall be Velcro One-Wrap Qwik Ties.

2. Soft Polyurethane Plastic Cable Management Ties

a. Provide plenum rated tie in plenum environments. b. Sized as necessary for the quantity of cables. c. Manufactured from plastic which stretches rather than deforms or pressures cable sheathing

when over-tightened. d. Manufactured from plastic which is not subject to drying or softening. e. Manufactured without a protruding saddle or fastening point that can indent or pressure

other cables. f. Capable of release. g. Cable tie shall have no sharp edges when cut. h. Basis of Design shall be Millepede Mille-Tie.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of new pathways with parties and the Work that will utilize the pathways, prior to installation.

B. Review pre-existing pathways prior to installation of the Work, and report to the Designer any discrepancies between specified pre-existing pathway conditions and actual existing pathway conditions.

C. Coordinate with other parties to the extent necessary to ensure clean, professional looking and operating systems.


MSA# 11172.00


D. Participate in coordination efforts through the preparation of shop drawings and details prior to fabrication or installation of any products. Coordinate actual clearance requirements of installed products.

E. Begin coordination immediately upon award of contract. Coordinate the Work with other parties and adjust equipment locations accordingly. Participate in the preparation of coordination drawings.

F. It is generally intended that devices and equipment shall be located symmetrical with architectural elements and shall be installed at the heights and locations shown on the drawings. If a height or location is in question, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to immediately seek clarification of the Designer.

G. Evaluate the complete set of Contract Documents and existing conditions to gain an understanding of the peculiarities and limitations of the spaces where the Work is to be performed. The final Work shall be accessible for servicing. Although the locations of equipment and conduit may be shown on the drawings in certain positions, the architectural details and conditions existing on the Project shall guide the Contractor, coordinating the Work with that of others. Provide necessary offsets to provide a neat workmanlike arrangement.

H. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicate the design intent, required sizes, points of termination and, in some cases, suggested routes of raceways. However, it is not intended that the drawings indicate fully coordinated routing and placement or necessary offsets.

I. Refer to each drawing, including enlarged plans, elevations, sections, and details for additional information that may include dimensions and greater resolution and notes that serve to refine the intent and further assist and guide the Contractor.

J. Work in harmony with other parties performing work at the project site so as not to cause any delays in pouring concrete, building masonry walls, etc. Consult each Contract Drawing, including those predominately used by other trades, before installing Work so as to ensure that performance of Work will not interfere with or be adversely affected by Work of others.

K. Attend each regularly scheduled project meeting as well as any special meetings called to coordinate and/or resolve special issues that arise during the course of the Project.

L. Conflicts in equipment and materials shall be corrected prior to installation. Should there be a conflict with drawings of other trades, work with the other trades to correct the conflict while coordinating the Project (prior to installation). If a conflict cannot be resolved, seek the direction of the Owner’s representative. Refer to the drawings used by other trades for details, dimensions and locations of their work and route around their work so as not to conflict. Work installed that creates a conflict shall be removed and readjusted to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Work installed in finished areas shall be concealed. Work installed in unfinished areas may be exposed at the discretion of the Owner's representative and approved in writing.

2. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of materials and equipment with the work of other trades for efficient flow of the Work.

3. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with reviewed submittal data, including coordination drawings.


MSA# 11172.00


4. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and architectural/structural components.

5. Install equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

6. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

7. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.

8. Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify exact size and locations of openings required for the installation of the Work.

9. The conductors terminating at each wired outlet shall be left not less than 8 inches long at their outlet fittings to facilitate installation and servicing of devices.

10. If during construction it becomes apparent that certain minor changes in layout would result in a neater appearance and better arrangement, such alterations shall be made. Designer's review shall be obtained before making such changes.

11. Workmanship throughout shall conform to the standards of best practice. Marks, dents or finish scratches shall not be permitted on any exposed materials, fixtures or fittings. Interiors of panels and equipment boxes shall be left clean.

12. Termination types shall correctly match cable and device termination. As an illustration, if “spade lug” type of termination is appropriate, then the spade lug cable entry size should match the cable used. The spade lug shall also have the correct stud size to match the terminal to which it is connected. Terminations shall be completed with tools designed and sized for the specific application and connector.

13. Use caution not to exceed the manufacturer allowed bending radius for cables and not to compromise the integrity of the cables during installation by pulling cable management devices too tightly, damaging cables. Raceway/Cabling bending radii shall be minimum as directed by cable manufacturer. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary to ensure cable does not experience tension beyond manufacturer limits during installation. Compounds used shall be compatible with the cable and pathway products and shall not cause deterioration of either.

14. Neatly dress cables, and provide vertical and horizontal cable management for properly dressing work at racks, control panels and backboards. See drawings for additional information.

15. Low-voltage cables shall be kept as far from electrical cables and equipment as possible. Avoid running low-voltage cables parallel to medium and high-voltage cables. When parallel runs cannot be avoided, keep low-voltage cables at least 24 inches away and cross cables at 90 degrees to minimize the risk of interference.

16. Avoid running low-voltage cables any closer than 24 inches to any ballast type lighting fixture or other high RF energy producing device.

17. Cable shall be installed within approved pathways. Cables not installed within raceway, cable tray or ladder rack shall be supported by discrete cable supports. Support cables at box and faceplate.

18. Neatly route cables parallel and perpendicular to building architectural lines. 19. Neatly comb out multiple cable bundled runs to remove tangling and crossing of cables within the

bundles. 20. Bundle cables within racks, ladder racks, cable trays and in discrete cable supports. Utilize

reusable cable bundling hardware. Utilize plenum-rated hardware in plenum spaces. 21. Cable assemblies shall be run as straight as possible and symmetrical (perpendicular to or parallel

with) with architectural items and at a consistent elevation. Work installed diagonal to building members shall not be permitted.

B. Cable Separation

1. Cables for each system shall be installed separately and isolated from cables from other systems. 2. Cables carrying signals of different types and different nominal operating levels shall be kept

separated to reduce the risk of undesirable interference and cross-talk between cables.


MSA# 11172.00


a. As a general rule, for each 25dBV difference in nominal operating level between cables, provide at least 6 inches of separation. Example 1: Cables with a 75dBV level difference between them shall be separated by 18 inches or greater. Example 2: Cables with a 13dBV difference between them shall be separated by 3 inches or greater.

b. Contractor shall provide additional separation to prevent and to remedy any crosstalk that adversely affects the performance and usability of the system, or that exceeds specific crosstalk performance guidelines defined elsewhere in these specifications.

3. In common areas where cables from multiple systems are run in general proximity to one another, cables from each system shall be labeled to identify the system the cables serve.

C. Cable Splices

1. Splices shall not be permitted in any cable except where expressly specified and/or approved by the Designer.

2. In cases where splices are specified and/or otherwise approved, splices shall be made within UL listed junction or device boxes. Open air connections shall not be permitted.

D. Cable Terminations

1. Where field installed cables connect to manufacturered products via pig-tails or connectorized cable assemblies, terminations shall be made within the product enclosure or within a UL approved box. Exposed and open air splices shall not be permitted.

E. Strain Relief

1. Permanently installed cables shall be properly secured with an approved device. Strain relief shall be applied typically within 6 inches from the point of entry into a product enclosure, junction box, pull box, or device box. When properly applied, the strain relief device shall not damage the cable being secured and shall not permit movement of the cable in any way that may adversely affect the long term integrity of nearby connections.

F. Identification

1. General

a. Identification shall be in English, except as otherwise noted. b. Where identification is applied to surfaces that require a finish, install identification after

the surface finish is applied. c. Labeling products, color, sizes, nomenclature and location of the identification product are

subject to the review of the Designer.

2. Cables

a. Each cable shall be uniquely labeled at each end. b. Labels shall be permanent and feature computer generated type-written text. c. Label text shall be bold-type and clearly readable by a person with average sight, and under

the lighting conditions typical within the area of installation. d. Labels shall be applied approximately 6 cable-inches from the point of termination. e. Cables installed for “Future Use” shall be clearly identified as such at both ends. Such

cables shall be labeled to identify where the opposite end of the cable can be found. f. Each cable installed shall be recorded on the as-built drawings.


MSA# 11172.00


3. Boxes

a. Junction boxes and pull boxes shall be labeled on their interior and on their exterior covers with the identity of the system(s) the box serves along with the function of the box. Interior markings shall be made using permanent marker. Permanent marker may also be used on the cover of boxes installed in concealed areas (above accessible ceilings, for example). Exposed boxes shall be labeled with engraved plastic labels. Labels shall closely match the color of the box.

b. Device boxes, when first installed, shall be identified on its interior as to the system(s) served and the device(s) the box will contain.

4. Equipment Racks, Cabinets, Enclosures

a. Equipment racks and enclosures shall be labeled. b. The nomenclature, color, size, installed location, and type of labels are subject to the

Designer’s review.

5. System Equipment

a. Each individual instance of system equipment shall be labeled. b. Front panel controls of equipment shall be labeled with nomenclature meaningful to the

end user based on the intended use of the equipment in the system. Examples include, but are not limited to:

1) Label router/matrix control panels with system specific input/output names. 2) Label patch panels with meaningful input/output destination names 3) Label mixer input and output controls to identify the signal source and destination.

c. Professionally prepared, installed and readily visible “cheat sheets” may be acceptable under select circumstances with the approval of the Designer.

d. The nomenclature, color, size, installed location, and type of labels are subject to the Designer’s review and approval.

G. High Voltage Cabling (> 70.7 Volts)

1. Cabling that carries voltages higher than 70.7 Volts RMS AC or DC shall be installed and terminated by persons licensed to perform such work.

H. Plates and Panels

1. Box covers and faceplates shall be installed flush against the surface over which it is mounted. There shall be no visible gap between the backside of a plate/panel and the wall, ceiling or floor; there shall be no visible gap between the backside of plate/panel and a surface mount box to which the plate/panel mounts). Advanced craftsmanship and construction techniques shall be employed where necessary to achieve this.

a. The same shall apply to other wall and ceiling mounted products.

I. Device Boxes, Pull-Boxes, Junction Boxes

1. Boxes installed in walls and ceilings shall be installed so that the box does not stand proud (protrude out beyond) of the finished surface. Boxes shall be installed such that when the mounted devices and cover plates are installed, the backside of the cover plate rests flush with the


MSA# 11172.00


finished surface of the wall or ceiling. Advanced craftsmanship and construction techniques shall be employed where necessary to achieve this.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Equipment shall be properly bonded to ground for the safety of personnel and property and as additionally necessary to satisfactory performance of the equipment.

B. Comply with Section 270526 “Grounding and Bonding for Communications.”


A. General

1. Perform cutting as required for the execution of the Work. Unless directed otherwise in field, provide related patching and painting to match surrounding methods, materials and colors. Any damage caused during the progress of Work shall be remediated. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching and materials as required to:

a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. b. Remove and replace defective Work. c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. e. Install equipment and materials within existing structures.

2. Upon written instructions from the Owner's representative, uncover and restore Work to provide for observation of concealed Work by Owner's representative or by inspection by the authority having jurisdiction.


4. Patch surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and using experienced Installers. Refer to Division 01 for definition of experienced "Installer" or determine qualifications as directed in field by the Owner's representative.

5. Patching through fire rated walls and enclosures shall not diminish the rating of that wall or enclosure. Materials used for patching shall be installed to meet or exceed the smoke and fire rating of the respective surface being patched.

6. Neatly cut and drill openings in walls and floors where openings are required for installation of the Work. Secure the approval of the Owner's Representative before cutting and drilling in existing facilities. Neatly patch any openings created.

7. Cutting and patching shall be held to a minimum by arranging with other parties for sleeves and openings before construction is started.

8. Provide factory-assembled watertight wall and floor seals, of types and sizes required; suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.

9. Pipe sleeves shall be fabricated from Schedule 40 rigid, heavy wall, full weight galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. Use sleeves which are two standard sizes larger than conduit passing through respective sleeve.

10. Provide sleeve seals for piping that penetrates foundation walls below grade, or through exterior walls or roofs. Caulk between sleeve and pipe with non-toxic, UL-classified caulking material to


MSA# 11172.00


ensure watertight seal. Elsewhere provide mechanical type seals, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

11. Install standard Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves two sizes larger than pipes passing through floors, bearing walls, fire walls and masonry construction. Furnish and set forms required in masonry walls or foundation to accommodate pipes.

B. Grout

1. Provide non-shrink, nonmetallic grout, pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, and non-gaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications.


1. Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application.





6. Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

7. Colors for exposed seals shall be as selected by the Owner's representative from manufacturer's standard colors.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Penetrations created in support of any work of this Division shall be firestopped in accordance with locally applicable codes as acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction.



MSA# 11172.00

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS 282300 - 1

SECTION 282300 – VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cabling for video surveillance cameras.

B. Related Requirements

1. Section 270528 “Pathways for Communications” for pathway products to support work of this Section.

2. Section 271513 “Copper Horizontal Cabling” for data cable and connectivity to be used at the camera locations.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data

1. Datasheets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABLE:

1. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufactures offering products that may be incorporated into Work include, but are not limited to:

a. Belden Wire. b. West Penn Wire. c. CommScope Cable. d. General Cable.

2. RG-6U Video

a. RG-6U grade cable. b. 18-AWG solid copper center conductor; c. Tinned copper or bare copper braided shield. d. <.75dB loss per 100’ @ 10MHz e. UL Listed. f. Plenum rated jacket.


MSA# 11172.00


3. Camera Power Cable

a. Two-conductor assembly with overall jacket. b. 16AWG stranded bare copper conductors. c. UL Listed. d. Plenum rated jacket.

4. Data Cable

a. See Section: 271513 “Copper Horizontal Cabling.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Refer to drawings for device locations and quantity.

B. Provide, cable, terminations, jacks, labeling, hardware, etc. as required for complete working systems.

C. Use caution not to exceed the allowed bending radius for respective cables and not to compromise the integrity of the cables during installation by pulling tie-wraps too tightly, damaging cables, etc. Raceway/Cabling bending radii shall be minimum as directed by cable manufacturer. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound must not deteriorate conductor or insulation.

D. Neatly dress all cable work.

E. Work shall be installed in a manner which results in maintaining a minimum distance of 24 inches from feeder/branch circuit raceways and from any ballasted lighting fixture.

3.2 COORDINATION

A. Thoroughly review rough-in to be provided in support of the Work of this Section with the pathway provider prior to installation of pathway.

B. Coordinate installation of the Work of this Section with the Work of Section 271513, as both share common pathways at various points only the cable route.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Cables at Camera Locations:

1. Provide BNC-type male connectors on both ends of the RG-6 Cable. Provide connectors that achieve a minimum 40lb force of cable-connector retention before electrical or mechanical separation.

2. At the camera locations, provide 12” of serviceable, usable cable at the box. 3. Provide and terminate camera power cables on Euro style captive screw terminal blocks.

B. Cables in Room <ER-L1>:


MSA# 11172.00


1. Provide and terminate video coax on wall-mounted rack mounted BNC-BNC feed-through patch panel within Communications Room. Refer to drawing for location.

2. Provide and terminate camera power cables on Euro style captive screw terminal blocks. Identify each power circuit to each camera.

C. Install cabling within approved pathways. Refer to Section 270528 “Pathways for Communications.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 270553 “Identification for Communications” for identification of all products provided as Work of this Section.

3.5 TESTING

A. Sweep test each cable, after installation and termination, to confirm compliance with manufacturer specifications. Cable not meeting manufacture specification shall be removed and replaced.

B. Test each cable for shorts between conductors and shorts to ground. Shorts of any type are unacceptable and shall be remediated.



MSA# 11172.00

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION 283113 - 1

SECTION 283113 – FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: All materials, labor and services to provide fully operational modifications to and extensions of existing facility fire alarm system(s).

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Provide submittals for equipment, materials and systems specified in this section. Include cuts, descriptive information, technical data, wiring diagrams, system battery calculations, plan-view layouts, legend, point-to-point wiring, etc. Identify all information that is specific to this project.

B. The fire alarm system supplier shall provide to the electrical contractor a complete set of floor plan drawings showing conduit sizes and number of conductors required to all components plus detailed wiring connections required at each type of device.

C. It shall be the responsibility of the Fire Alarm System Manufacturer to furnish submittals to the authority having jurisdiction for approval. This action shall be taken during the shop drawing procedure. The system must be approved by this authority and a copy submitted to the Engineer with the shop drawing submittal. All fire alarm system working drawings shall be provided by manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE ALARM EXTENSION

A. General Requirements

1. Provide materials and labor as required to result in a fully operational extension and modification to the existing fire alarm system. The existing fire alarm system is an EST. All components shall match.

2. Where indicated on drawings, remove existing fire alarm devices in affected areas and protect during demolition and construction phases. Clean and reinstall these existing devices as indicated on drawings. Relocate devices as indicated on drawings and extend conduit and wiring as required. Modify and/or extend related existing wiring in conduit as required.


MSA# 11172.00


3. Fire alarm system devices (smoke detectors, pull stations, A/V alarm indicating devices, etc.) shall be of the same manufacturer as, compatible with, and UL Listed and labeled for use on, the existing building fire alarm system.

4. Provide auxiliary contacts if required for special applications. All strobe alarms shall be ADA compliant, minimum 75cd per ADA unless specifically indicated on drawings with lower candela rating.

5. All new wiring shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's requirements and in conduit installed in 3/4" minimum EMT conduit.

6. The installation shall include a complete system test of the equipment by the local representative of the system installed. This test shall be performed in the presence of representatives of the Owner, Engineer, and local fire department.

7. Provide all required modifications (cards, power supplies, hardware, firmware, software, etc.) to the existing Fire Alarm system as required to render the entire extension fully operable.

8. Provide all required 20A/120VAC power as required to energize all new fire alarm related components. This requirement applies whether or not such power work is shown on the drawings. Branch circuits serving fire alarm related equipment shall be dedicated to fire alarm related equipment only.

9. All new 120VAC power for fire alarm related equipment shall be connected to emergency/life safety panels.

10. Smoke detector locations shall not exceed the rated coverage of the detector and, in general, shall be no more than 15 feet from a wall or 30 feet apart. Smoke detectors shall not be installed within 3 feet from a supply air diffuser. Provide contact bases for all applications where auxiliary contacts are required. Smoke detectors for elevator applications shall be a hard wired device with auxiliary contacts and monitor module(s).

11. Heat detectors shall be both rate of rise and fixed temperature with 140 degree F. alarm threshold. 12. The audio/visual and visual-only alarm indicating devices shall be red ADA-compliant units (with

minimum 75 candela ADA-compliant strobes) wall mounted at 6'8" to bottom of outlet box as shown on plans. Strobe units shall be synchronized wherever required by any authority having jurisdiction, including ADAAG. Additionally, where required by local authority, the strobes must meet ANSI S3.41 temporal code.

13. The waterflow switches, tamper switches and pressure switches shall be provided by the sprinkler contractor. The electrical contractor shall wire and provide the related monitor modules as required.

14. Provide isolation modules as required to isolate wire to wire shorts on a data loop to limit the number of other modules or detectors that are incapacitated by the short circuit fault and/or grounds. Isolation modules shall be part of the smoke detector base. The isolation modules shall permit the entire system to operate independently of the area disconnected by the isolation module due to wiring faults.

15. Provide monitor modules as required to interface "non-intelligent" devices into the system as shown on the drawings (i.e. Sprinkler Flow Switches, Tamper Switches, Pressure Switches, Kitchen Hoods,Elevator applications, etc.).

16. Provide control modules for all auxiliary devices including door closures and all supervised control functions such as air handler shutdowns.

B. Duct Smoke Detectors

1. The intelligent addressable duct mounted smoke detectors shall be photoelectric smoke detector unit.

2. Provide sampling tube per NFPA, test station and all other required accessories. 3. Duct smoke detectors are typically shown schematically at the respective air handling unit on the

plans, but shall actually be installed maximizing the distances between ductwork offsets, and installed ahead of the first branch duct take-off. Coordinate with HVAC Contractor and fire alarm manufacturer’s representative in field. The duct smoke detectors shall be intelligent addressable photoelectric.


MSA# 11172.00


4. Detectors shall operate at air velocities of 300 to 4000 feet per minute. 5. Coordinate placement of duct detectors with the HVAC contractor. 6. The shut-down of the air handler shall be via control module, unless specifically forbidden by the

AHJ, in which case provide auxiliary contact as required to shut down equipment and wire into the stop circuit of the associated air handler starter.

7. Install all duct smoke detectors in the return air duct/plenum of the respective air handling equipment, or in multiple locations of the return duct branches if necessary to meet the minimum straight distances that are required by manufacturer of smoke duct detectors. Refer to HVAC ductwork drawings, and to HVAC installer’s coordination drawings, for configurations when determining actual locations and quantities of duct smoke detectors. Where more than one detector is already indicated associated with a particular piece of air handling equipment, there are special reasons for the additional detectors (i.e. split returns, return risers serving multiple floors, etc.); coordinate all locations for same with the HVAC installer.

8. In cases where multiple HVAC units serve a common space, provide interlocking functionality so that activation of any one duct smoke detector (or spot smoke detector where applicable) provides shutdown functions for all HVAC units that collectively serve the affected space.

9. Provide remote test station (with status/alarm/trouble indicating LED’s), on the ceiling or wall beneath the duct detector as indicated on drawings or as determined in field. Provide engraved (or approved equivalent method) plate at each remote station to read: “#### Duct Smoke Detector”, where #### is the equipment identification used on drawings.

10. Provide all required power and control wiring so that upon detection of smoke, the following sequence of operations occurs where applicable.

a. An alarm signal is sent to the fire alarm control panel and to the monitoring central station.

b. A/V alarm annunciates at the remote test station. c. The HVAC unit shuts down (including applicable dampers). d. Associated smoke dampers close (wired to automatically re-open on duct detector

reset).

11. Install duct smoke detectors in the return air duct/plenum of the respective air handling equipment. Where more than one detector is indicated associated with a particular piece of air handling equipment, there are special reasons for the additional detectors (i.e. split returns, return risers serving multiple floors, etc.); coordinate all locations for same with the HVAC contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REFER TO “PRODUCTS” SUB-SECTION(S) ABOVE

3.2 PERFORMANCE

A. The following table shows the schematic sequence of operations for the Fire Alarm System.


MSA# 11172.00


FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SCHEMATIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

All event alarm/trouble signals shall activate A/V annunciation at the FACU and at remote annunciator(s) and transmit to History Log.

Initiation Device Event

Notify FACU and

FARA

Activate A/V

Alarm Devices

Notify Central Station

Shut Down Assoc. Equip.

Shut Down Elev.

Activate Phase ½ Fireman Service

Activate Exh. Hood Fire Alarm Sequence

Activate Smoke

Control/ Evac.Seq.

Notes

Manual Pull Station Alarm X X X

Trouble X X

Ceiling Smoke Detector Ceiling Heat Detector

Alarm X X X

Trouble X X

Sprinkler Flow Switch Alarm X X X X 4

Trouble X X

Sprinkler Tamper Switch Suprvs. X X

Trouble X X

Duct Smoke Detectors Alarm X X X X

Trouble X X

Smoke Detectors Associated with Other Mechanical Equipment

Alarm X X X X

Trouble X X


University Center Renovation Student Success...

Documents

Transcript of University Center Renovation Student Success...